PROGRAMMING MANUAL for MAZATROL MATRIX (For INTEGREX IV) MAZATROL Program MANUAL No.: H740PA0031E Serial No.: Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. Product images are for illustration purposes only and may not be exact representations of the products. Mazak reserves the right to change product images and specifications at any time without notice. Mazatrol Fusion 640 Publication # C640RA1010E CAUTION This Manual is published to assist experienced personnel on the operation, maintenance and/or programming of Mazak machine tools. All Mazak machine tools are engineered with a number of safety devices to protect personnel and equipment from injury or damage. Operators should not, however, rely. Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Manuals Instruction Manual and User Guide for Mazak Mazatrol Matrix. We have 6 Mazak Mazatrol Matrix manuals for free PDF download. PROGRAMMING MANUAL for MAZATROL MATRIX (For INTEGREX IV) MAZATROL Program MANUAL No.: H740PA0031E Serial No.: Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. Torch video downloader free download.
![]()
Return to Library
PROGRAMMING MANUAL for MAZATROL MATRIX For INTEGREX IV Programming EIA/ISO MANUAL No. : H740PB0030E Serial No. : Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. IMPORTANT NOTICE 1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible. 2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety. If such modifications are required, please contact the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. 3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all such items are in place. 4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. 5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use. 6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name. Issued by Manual Publication Section, Yamazaki Mazak Corporation, Japan 01. 2006 Return to Library Notes: Return to Library Return to Library SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Preface Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine. Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply. Rule 1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working states may take place at the user site. During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below. 2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones, not all of âwhat the user cannot performâ or âwhat the user must not performâ can be fully covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand. It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as âexecutableâ are âinexecutableâ functions. 3. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as follows: : Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life. DANGER : Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human life or body. WARNING : Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious machine damage. CAUTION HGENPA0040E S-1 Return to Library SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Basics ! After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the operating panel until an initial display has been made. WARNING ! Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors, unexpected operation of the machine will result. ! Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block, and other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path check, solid check, and other functions, if provided. ! Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable feed rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used, those of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ from the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or rotational speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the machine. ! Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction function is executed without its thorough understanding. ! Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified without a thorough understanding. Remarks on the cutting conditions recommended by the NC ! Before using the following cutting conditions: WARNING - Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions Determination Function - Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function - Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation Function Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken â especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup. ! Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining. Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death. S-2 Return to Library SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Programming WARNING ! Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate in unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the event of contact with the tool. ! During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds. ! Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently from the way it did before. ! If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs. ! If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of the machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.) ! The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.) ! If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.) ! The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter the tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier function will not work correctly. ! The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the machines of INTEGREX e-Series and the other turning machines. Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended machine operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands before using this system. Sample program Machines of INTEGREX e-Series Turning machines S1000M3 â1 The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min . The turning spindle rotates at 1000 minâ1. S1000M203 The turning spindle rotates at 1000 minâ1. The milling spindle rotates at 1000 minâ1. S-3 Return to Library SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ! For the machines of INTEGREX e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate command) of the EIA program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through 180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected positions may incite collisions. To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code command (G50.1, G51.1). ! After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path check function, the solid check function, and other functions, and confirm that the program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven machining program to change in operational status. If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status, interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation. For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move from that position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be present on this path. For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program. CAUTION ! If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path. S-4 Return to Library SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Operations WARNING ! Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system variables #3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that makes the corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give thorough notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the system variables before starting the above operations. ! If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures being taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur. ! Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value. ! After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for the active program. ! During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement. CAUTION ! For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area. As a result, serious machine damage will result. ! Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently, axial movement will become faster than that expected. S-5 Return to Library OPERATIONAL WARRANTY FOR THE NC UNIT OPERATIONAL WARRANTY FOR THE NC UNIT The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit. Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed below. 1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software products (including user-created ones) 2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems 3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer equipment Operating Environment 1. Ambient temperature During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (0° to 122°F) 2. Relative humidity During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing) Note: As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to deteriorate quickly. S-6 E Return to Library CONTENTS Page 1 INTRODUCTION ......................................... 1-1 2 UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT .......................... 2-1 3 4 5 2-1 Units of Program Data Input ........................................2-1 2-2 Units of Data Setting..............................................2-1 2-3 Ten-Fold Program Data...........................................2-1 DATA FORMATS......................................... 3-1 3-1 Tape Codes ....................................................3-1 3-2 Program Formats ................................................3-5 3-3 Tape Data Storage Format.........................................3-6 3-4 Optional Block Skip ..............................................3-6 3-5 Program Number, Sequence Number and Block Number : O, N ............3-7 3-6 Parity-H/V ......................................................3-8 3-7 List of G-Codes ................................................3-10 BUFFER REGISTERS..................................... 4-1 4-1 Input Buffer.....................................................4-1 4-2 Preread Buffer ..................................................4-2 POSITION PROGRAMMING................................ 5-1 5-1 Dimensional Data Input Method .....................................5-1 5-1-1 Absolute/Incremental data input (Series T) .............................. 5-1 5-1-2 Absolute/Incremental data input: G90/G91 (Series M) ...................... 5-2 C-1 Return to Library 6 5-2 Inch/Metric Selection: G20/G21.....................................5-4 5-3 Decimal Point Input ..............................................5-5 5-4 Polar Coordinate Input ON/OFF: G122/G123 [Series M: G16/G15] ..........5-8 5-5 X-axis Radial Command ON/OFF: G122.1/G123.1 (Series T) ..............5-9 5-6 Selection between Diameter and Radius Data Input: G10.9 (Series M) ......5-10 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS.............................. 6-1 6-1 Positioning (Rapid Feed) Command: G00.............................6-1 6-2 One-Way Positioning: G60 .........................................6-4 6-3 Linear Interpolation Command: G01..................................6-5 6-4 Circular Interpolation Commands: G02, G03...........................6-7 6-5 Radius Designated Circular Interpolation Commands: G02, G03 ..........6-10 6-6 Spiral Interpolation: G2.1, G3.1 (Option) .............................6-12 6-7 Plane Selection Commands: G17, G18, G19 ..........................6-20 6-7-1 Outline ......................................................... 6-20 6-7-2 Plane selection methods............................................ 6-20 6-8 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ON/OFF: G12.1/G13.1 ...................6-21 6-9 Virtual-Axis Interpolation: G07.....................................6-25 6-10 Spline Interpolation: G06.1 (Option) .................................6-26 6-11 NURBS Interpolation: G06.2 (Option)................................6-37 6-12 Cylindrical Interpolation Command: G07.1 ............................6-44 6-13 Threading .....................................................6-47 6-13-1 Constant lead threading: G32 [Series M: G33] ........................... 6-47 C-2 Return to Library 6-13-2 Inch threading: G32 [Series M: G33] .................................. 6-50 6-13-3 Continuous threading.............................................. 6-51 6-13-4 Variable lead threading: G34 ........................................ 6-52 6-13-5 Threading with C-axis interpolation: G01.1.............................. 6-53 6-13-6 Automatic correction of threading start position (for overriding in a threading cycle) .......................................................... 6-55 6-14 Helical Interpolation: G17, G18, G19 and G02, G03 ....................6-57 7 FEED FUNCTIONS ....................................... 7-1 7-1 Rapid Traverse Rates.............................................7-1 7-2 Cutting Feed Rates...............................................7-1 7-3 Asynchronous/Synchronous Feed: G98/G99 [Series M: G94/G95]..........7-1 7-4 Selecting a Feed Rate and Effects on Each Control Axis..................7-3 7-5 Threading Leads.................................................7-6 7-6 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration.................................7-7 7-7 Speed Clamp...................................................7-7 7-8 Exact-Stop Check Command: G09...................................7-8 7-9 Exact-Stop Check Mode Command: G61.............................7-11 7-10 Automatic Corner Override Command: G62...........................7-11 7-11 Cutting Mode Command: G64.....................................7-16 7-12 Geometry Compensation/Accuracy Coefficient: G61.1/,K ................7-16 7-12-1 Geometry compensation function: G61.1 ............................... 7-16 7-12-2 Accuracy coefficient (,K) ............................................ 7-17 8 DWELL FUNCTIONS ...................................... 8-1 C-3 Return to Library 9 8-1 Dwell Command in Time: (G98) G04 [Series M: (G94) G04]...............8-1 8-2 Dwell Command in Number of Revolutions: (G99) G04 [Series M: (G95) G04]..........................................................8-2 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS ............................. 9-1 9-1 Miscellaneous Functions (M3-Digit)..................................9-1 9-2 No. 2 Miscellaneous Functions (A8/B8/C8-Digit)........................9-2 10 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS ................................... 10-1 10-1 Spindle Function (S5-Digit Analog)..................................10-1 10-2 Constant Peripheral Speed Control ON/OFF: G96/G97 ..................10-1 10-3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting: G50 [Series M: G92] ....................10-3 11 TOOL FUNCTIONS ...................................... 11-1 11-1 Tool Function [for ATC systems] ...................................11-1 11-2 Tool Function [4-Digit T-Code for Turret-Indexing Systems] (Series T)......11-1 11-3 Tool Function [6-Digit T-Code for Turret-Indexing Systems] (Series T)......11-2 11-4 Tool Function [8-digit T-code]......................................11-2 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T)................. 12-1 12-1 Tool Offset....................................................12-1 12-2 Tool Position Offset .............................................12-3 12-3 Nose R/Tool Radius Compensation: G40, G41, G42 ....................12-5 12-3-1 Outline ......................................................... 12-5 12-3-2 Tool nose point and compensation directions ........................... 12-7 12-3-3 Operations of nose R/tool radius compensation.......................... 12-8 12-3-4 Other operations during nose R/tool radius compensation................. 12-15 C-4 Return to Library 12-3-5 Commands G41/G42 and I, J, K designation ........................... 12-22 12-3-6 Interruptions during nose R/tool radius compensation .................... 12-27 12-3-7 General precautions on nose R/tool radius compensation ................. 12-29 12-3-8 Interference check ............................................... 12-30 12-4 Programmed Data Setting: G10 ...................................12-35 12-5 Tool Offsetting Based on MAZATROL Tool Data ......................12-44 12-5-1 Selection parameters............................................. 12-44 12-5-2 Tool diameter offsetting ........................................... 12-45 12-5-3 Tool data update (during automatic operation).......................... 12-46 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M)................ 13-1 13-1 Tool Offset....................................................13-1 13-2 Tool Length Offset/Cancellation: G43, G44, or T-code/G49...............13-7 13-3 Tool Position Offset: G45 to G48..................................13-15 13-4 Tool Diameter Offset Function: G40, G41, G42 .......................13-21 13-4-1 Overview....................................................... 13-21 13-4-2 Tool diameter offsetting ........................................... 13-21 13-4-3 Tool diameter offsetting operation using other commands ................. 13-30 13-4-4 Corner movement ................................................ 13-37 13-4-5 Interruptions during tool diameter offsetting ............................ 13-37 13-4-6 Nose-R compensation ............................................ 13-39 13-4-7 General precautions on tool diameter offsetting ......................... 13-40 13-4-8 Offset number updating during the offset mode ......................... 13-41 13-4-9 Excessive cutting due to tool diameter offsetting........................ 13-43 13-4-10 Interference check ............................................... 13-45 C-5 Return to Library 13-5 Three-Dimensional Tool Diameter Offsetting (Option)..................13-52 13-5-1 Function description.............................................. 13-52 13-5-2 Programming methods ............................................ 13-53 13-5-3 Correlationships to other functions ................................... 13-57 13-5-4 Miscellaneous notes on three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting .......... 13-57 13-6 Programmed Data Setting: G10 ...................................13-58 13-7 Tool Offsetting Based on MAZATROL Tool Data ......................13-67 13-7-1 Selection parameters............................................. 13-67 13-7-2 Tool length offsetting ............................................. 13-68 13-7-3 Tool diameter offsetting ........................................... 13-70 13-7-4 Tool data update (during automatic operation).......................... 13-71 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS ......................... 14-1 14-1 Fixed Cycles for Turning..........................................14-1 14-1-1 Longitudinal turning cycle: G90 [Series M: G290] ........................ 14-2 14-1-2 Threading cycle: G92 [Series M: G292]................................ 14-4 14-1-3 Transverse turning cycle: G94 [Series M: G294] ......................... 14-6 14-2 Compound Fixed Cycles .........................................14-8 14-2-1 Longitudinal roughing cycle : G71 [Series M: G271] ...................... 14-9 14-2-2 Transverse roughing cycle: G72 [Series M: G272] ....................... 14-14 14-2-3 Contour-parallel roughing cycle: G73 [Series M: G273] ................... 14-16 14-2-4 Finishing cycle: G70 [Series M: G270] ................................ 14-20 14-2-5 Longitudinal cut-off cycle: G74 [Series M: G274] ........................ 14-21 14-2-6 Transverse cut-off cycle: G75 [Series M: G275] ......................... 14-24 14-2-7 Compound threading cycle: G76 [Series M: G276] ...................... 14-27 C-6 Return to Library 14-2-8 Checkpoints for compound fixed cycles: G70 to G76 [Series M: G270 to G276] ......................................................... 14-34 14-3 Hole Machining Fixed Cycles: G80 to G89 [Series M: G80, G283 to G289].......................................................14-37 14-3-1 Outline ........................................................ 14-37 14-3-2 Face/Outside deep hole drilling cycle: G83/G87 [Series M: G283/G287]...... 14-40 14-3-3 Face/Outside tapping cycle: G84/G88 [Series M: G284/G288] ............. 14-41 14-3-4 Face/Outside boring cycle: G85/G89 [Series M: G285/G289] .............. 14-42 14-3-5 Face/Outside synchronous tapping cycle: G84.2/G88.2 [Series M: G284.2/G288.2] ................................................. 14-42 14-3-6 Hole machining fixed cycle cancel: G80 ............................... 14-44 14-3-7 Checkpoints for using hole machining fixed cycles ...................... 14-44 14-3-8 Sample programs with fixed cycles for hole machining ................... 14-46 14-4 Hole Machining Pattern Cycles: G234.1/G235/G236/G237.1 [Series M: G34.1/G35/G36/G37.1] .........................................14-47 14-4-1 Overview....................................................... 14-47 14-4-2 Holes on a circle: G234.1 [Series M: G34.1] ........................... 14-48 14-4-3 Holes on a line: G235 [Series M: G35] ................................ 14-49 14-4-4 Holes on an arc: G236 [Series M: G36]............................... 14-50 14-4-5 Holes on a grid: G237.1 [Series M: G37.1]............................. 14-51 14-5 Fixed Cycles (Series M) .........................................14-53 14-5-1 Outline ........................................................ 14-53 14-5-2 Fixed-cycle machining data format ................................... 14-54 14-5-3 G71.1 [Chamfering cutter CW] (Series M) ............................. 14-57 14-5-4 G72.1 [Chamfering cutter CCW] (Series M) ............................ 14-58 14-5-5 G73 [High-speed deep-hole drilling] (Series M)......................... 14-59 C-7 Return to Library 14-5-6 G74 [Reverse tapping] (Series M) ................................... 14-60 14-5-7 G75 [Boring] (Series M) ........................................... 14-61 14-5-8 G76 [Boring] (Series M) ........................................... 14-62 14-5-9 G77 [Back spot facing] (Series M) ................................... 14-63 14-5-10 G78 [Boring] (Series M) ........................................... 14-64 14-5-11 G79 [Boring] (Series M) ........................................... 14-65 14-5-12 G81 [Spot drilling] (Series M)....................................... 14-65 14-5-13 G82 [Drilling] (Series M) ........................................... 14-66 14-5-14 G83 [Deep-hole drilling] (Series M) .................................. 14-67 14-5-15 G84 [Tapping] (Series M) .......................................... 14-68 14-5-16 G85 [Reaming] (Series M) ......................................... 14-69 14-5-17 G86 [Boring] (Series M) ........................................... 14-69 14-5-18 G87 [Back boring] (Series M) ....................................... 14-70 14-5-19 G88 [Boring] (Series M) ........................................... 14-71 14-5-20 G89 [Boring] (Series M) ........................................... 14-71 14-5-21 Synchronous tapping [Option] (Series M).............................. 14-72 14-6 Initial Point and R-Point Level Return: G98 and G99 (Series M)..........14-76 14-7 Scaling ON/OFF: G51/G50 (Series M) ..............................14-77 14-8 Mirror Image ON/OFF: G51.1/G50.1 (Series M).......................14-90 14-9 Subprogram Control: M98, M99 ...................................14-91 14-10 End Processing: M02, M30, M998, M999...........................14-100 14-11 Chamfering and Corner Rounding at Right Angle Corner ..............14-102 14-12 Chamfering and Corner Rounding at Arbitrary Angle Corner Function.....14-105 14-12-1 Chamfering at arbitrary angle corner: , C_ ............................ 14-105 C-8 Return to Library 14-12-2 Rounding at arbitrary angle corner: , R_.............................. 14-106 14-13 Linear Angle Commands .......................................14-107 14-14 Macro Call Function: G65, G66, G66.1, G67........................14-108 14-14-1 User macros ................................................... 14-108 14-14-2 Macro call instructions ........................................... 14-109 14-14-3 Variables...................................................... 14-118 14-14-4 Types of variables............................................... 14-120 14-14-5 Arithmetic operation commands .................................... 14-141 14-14-6 Control commands.............................................. 14-145 14-14-7 External output commands (Output via RS-232C)...................... 14-149 14-14-8 External output command (Output onto the hard disk) ................... 14-151 14-14-9 Precautions.................................................... 14-153 14-14-10 Specific examples of programming using user macros ................. 14-155 14-15 Geometric Commads (Option)...................................14-159 15 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS............... 15-1 15-1 Coordinate System Setting Function: G50 [Series M: G92]...............15-1 15-2 MAZATROL Coordinate System Cancellation: G52.5 (Series T) ...........15-5 15-3 Selection of MAZATROL Coordinate System: G53.5 (Series T) ...........15-7 15-4 Selection of Workpiece Coordinate System: G54 to G59 .................15-9 15-5 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ................................15-10 15-6 Change of Workpiece Coordinate System by Program Command.........15-10 15-7 Selection of Machine Coordinate System: G53 .......................15-11 15-8 Selection of Local Coordinate System: G52 ..........................15-12 C-9 Return to Library 15-9 Automatic Return to Reference Point (Zero Point): G28, G29............15-13 15-10 Return to Second Reference Point (Zero Point): G30 ..................15-15 15-11 Return to Reference Point Check Command: G27.....................15-17 15-12 Programmed Coordinate Conversion ON/OFF: G68.5/G69.5 [Series M: G68/G69]....................................................15-18 15-13 Workpiece Coordinate System Rotation (Series M) ....................15-22 16 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS.................... 16-1 16-1 Skip Function: G31 ..............................................16-1 16-1-1 Function description............................................... 16-1 16-1-2 Amount of coasting ................................................ 16-3 16-1-3 Skip coordinate reading error ........................................ 16-4 17 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS................................ 17-1 17-1 Stored Stroke Limit ON/OFF: G22/G23 ..............................17-1 18 TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION ....................... 18-1 18-1 Two-Process Control by One Program: G109 .........................18-1 18-2 Specifying/Cancelling Cross Machining Control Axis: G110/G111 ..........18-2 18-3 M, S, T, B Output Function to Counterpart: G112 ......................18-7 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS ...................... 19-1 19-1 Programming for Compound Machining ..............................19-1 19-2 Waiting Command: M950 to M997, P1 to P99999999...................19-2 19-3 Balanced Cutting ...............................................19-4 19-4 Milling with the Lower Turret.......................................19-6 C-10 Return to Library 19-5 Compound Machining Patterns ....................................19-8 20 POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION)........... 20-1 20-1 Polygonal Machining ON/OFF: G51.2/G50.2 ..........................20-1 20-2 Selection/Cancellation of Hob Milling Mode: G114.3/G113 ...............20-3 21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130)............................... 21-1 22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) ......... 22-1 23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M)......................................... 23-1 24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M)................................. 24-1 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY .............................. 25-1 25-1 Procedures for Constructing an EIA/ISO Program ......................25-1 25-2 Editing Function of EIA/ISO PROGRAM Display.......................25-2 25-2-1 General ......................................................... 25-2 25-2-2 Operation procedure............................................... 25-2 25-3 Macro-Instruction Input...........................................25-8 25-4 Division of Display (Split Screen)...................................25-9 25-5 Editing Programs Stored in External Memory Areas ...................25-12 C-11 Return to Library - NOTE - C-12 E Return to Library INTRODUCTION 1 1 INTRODUCTION EIA/ISO programs executed by the CNC unit include two modes: One is based on the G-code series T (designed for turning machines), and the other is based on the G-code series M (designed for machining centers). Depending on the types of machines, the G-code series T and M are used as follows: G-code series T for the INTEGREX-IV machines, and G-code series M for the INTEGREX-e machines. This manual gives descriptions in general with respect to the G-code series T designed for turning machines. 1-1 Return to Library 1 INTRODUCTION - NOTE - 1-2 E Return to Library UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT 2 2-1 2 UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT Units of Program Data Input The movements on coordinate axes are to be commanded in the MDI mode or machining program. The movement data are expressed in millimeters, inches or degrees. 2-2 Units of Data Setting Various data commonly used for control axes, such as offsetting data, must be set for the machine to perform an operation as desired. The units of data setting and those of program data input are listed below. Linear axis Rotational axis Metric system Inch system Units of program data input 0.0001 mm 0.00001 in. 0.0001 deg Units of data setting 0.0001 mm 0.00001 in. 0.0001 deg Note 1: Inch/metric selection can be freely made using either bit 4 of parameter F91 (â0â for metric, â1â for inches; validated through power-off and -on) or G-code commands (G20, G21). Selection using the G-code commands is valid only for program data input. Variables and offsetting data (such as tool offsetting data) should therefore be set beforehand using the appropriate unit (inch or metric) for the particular machining requirements. Note 2: Metric data and inch data cannot be used at the same time. 2-3 Ten-Fold Program Data Using a predetermined parameter, machining program data can be processed as set in units of one micron. There may be cases that a machining program which has been set in units of one micron is to be used with a numerical control unit based on 0.1 micron increments. In such cases, use of this parameter allows the machine to perform the required machining operations without rewriting the program. Use bit 0 of user parameter F91 for this purpose. All types of coordinate data (axis movement data) not provided with the decimal point will be multiplied by a factor of 10. This does not apply, indeed, to preset tool-offsetting data designated with addresses H and D. Moving distance when program commands are executed Control axis Program command NC (A) for which the program was prepared Bit 0 of F91 = 0 Bit 0 of F91 = 1 Program applicability (A) â (B) MAZATROL (B) Linear axis X1 (Y1 / Z1) 1 micron 0.1 micron 1 micron Applicable Rotational axis B1 0.001° 0.0001° 0.001° Applicable 2-1 Return to Library 2 UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT - NOTE - 2-2 E Return to Library DATA FORMATS 3 3-1 3 DATA FORMATS Tape Codes This numerical control unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to as the NC unit) uses command information that consists of letters of the alphabet (A, B, C .. Z), numerics (0, 1, 2 .. 9), and signs (+, â, /, and so on). These alphanumerics and signs are referred to collectively as characters. On paper tape, these characters are represented as a combination of a maximum of eight punched holes. Such a representation is referred to as a code. The NC unit uses either the EIA codes (RS-244-A) or the ISO codes (R-840). Note 1: Codes not included in the tape codes shown in Fig. 3-1 will result in an error when they are read. Note 2: Of all codes specified as the ISO codes but not specified as the EIA codes, only the following codes can be designated using the data I/O (Tape) parameters TAP9 to TAP14: [ Bracket Open ] Bracket Close # Sharp â Asterisk = Equal sign : Colon However, you cannot designate codes that overlap existing ones or that result in parity error. Note 3: EIA/ISO code identification is made automatically according to the first EOB/LF code appearing after the NC unit has been reset. (EOB: End Of Block, LF: Line Feed) 1. Significant information area (LABEL SKIP function) During tape-based automatic operation, data storage into the memory, or data searching, the NC unit will ignore the entire information up to the first EOB code (;) in the tape when the unit is turned on or reset. That is, significant information in a tape refers to the information contained in the interval from the time a character or numeric code appears, following the first EOB code (;) after the NC unit has been reset, until a reset command is given. 2. Control Out, Control In The entire information in the area from Control Out â(â to Control In â)â will be ignored in regard to machine control, while they will surely be displayed on the data display unit. Thus, this area can be used to contain information, such as the name and number of the command tape, that is not directly related to control. During tape storage, however, the information in this area will also be stored. The NC unit will enter the Control In status when power is turned on. 3-1 Return to Library 3 DATA FORMATS Example of EIA Code Control Out Control In N CE ECN O U P ROGR AM U NO . 1 0 1 O L I B BOL Name of tape is printed out D ND N N D N DNNCE ECN O U 1 1 E 1 1 U ERRRUORR / U 1 1 E 1 1 U 2 EUU O L L L L L L L L L L I B BO L Name of tape is punched in captital letters. Example of ISO Code MEP003 Control In Control Out EC S E O G 0 0 X â 8 5 0 0 0 Yâ 6 4 0 0 0 ( C U T T E R RE T U R N ) O BR P B Operator information is printed out. The information at this portion is ignored and nothing is executed. 3. MEP004 EOR code (%) In general, the EOR (End Of Record) code is punched at both ends of a tape and has the following functions: - To stop rewinding (only when a rewinding device is provided) - To start rewinding during tape data search (only when a rewinding device is provided) - To terminate the storage of tape data. 3-2 Return to Library DATA FORMATS 4. 3 Tape creation method for tape operation (Only when a rewinding device is used) % 10 cm 2m ; !!!!!!!!! ; !!!!!!!!! First block ; !!!!!!!!! ; Last block 10 cm % 2m TEP005 The two meters of dummy at both ends and the EOR (%) at the head are not required when a rewinding device is not used. 3-3 Return to Library 3 DATA FORMATS EIA/ISO identification is made automatically by detecting whether EOB or LF initially appears after the NC unit has been reset. ISO code (R-840) Feed holes EIA code (RS-244-A) Feed holes 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Channel number 8 7 6 5 4 Channel number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z + â . , / % LF (Line Feed) or NL ( (Control Out) ) (Control In) : # ? = [ ] BS (Back Space) HT (Horizontal Tab) SP (Space) & CR (Carriage Return) $ ' (Apostrophe) ; < > ? @ ' DEL (Delete) NULL DEL (Delete) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z + â . , / EOR (End of Record) EOB (End of Block) or CR CO (2+4+5) CI (2+4+7) Definable in parameters BS (Back Space) TAB SP (Space) & DEL (Delete) AS (All Space=Feed)* AM (All Mark=EOB+DEL)* * 3 2 1 The codes asterisked above are not EIA codes, but may be used for the convenienceâs sake. [1] [2] LF or NL acts as EOB and % acts as EOR. MEP006 Fig. 3-1 Tape codes 3-4 Return to Library DATA FORMATS 3 Codes in section [1] will only be stored as tape data when they are present in a comment section, and ignored elsewhere in the significant information area. Codes in section [2] are non-operative and will always be ignored (but undergo the parity-V check). A dotted area indicates that the EIA Standard provides no corresponding codes. 3-2 Program Formats A format predetermined for assigning control information to the NC unit is referred to as a program format. The program format used for our NC unit is word address format. 1. Words and addresses A word is a set of characters arranged as shown below, and information is processed in words. Word Numeral Alphabet (address) Word configuration The alphabetic character at the beginning of a word is referred to as an address, which defines the meaning of its succeeding numeric information. Table 3-1 Type and format of words Item Metric command Inch command Program No. O8 Sequence No. N5 G3 or G21 Preparatory function Moving axis 0.0001 mm (deg.), 0.00001 in. X+54 Auxiliary axis 0.0001 mm (deg.), 0.00001 in. I+54 Dwell Input unit Y+54 J+54 Z+54 α+54 X+45 K+54 0.001 mm (rev), 0.0001 in. I+45 X54 P8 Y+45 J+45 Z+45 K+45 U54 Feed 0.0001 mm (deg.)/min, 0.00001 in./min F54 (per minute) F33 (per revolution) F45 (per minute) F24 (per revolution) Fixed cycle 0.0001 mm (deg.), 0.00001 in. R+54 R+45 Q54 P8 L4 T1 or T2 Tool offset Miscellaneous function M3 à 4 Spindle function S5 T4 or T6 Tool function No. 2 miscellaneous function B8, A8 or C8 Subprogram P4 Variables number Q5 #5 3-5 L4 Q45 P8 L4 α+45 Return to Library 3 DATA FORMATS 2. 1. Code O8 here indicates that program number can be set as an unsigned integer of eight digits following O, and for X+54, â+â indicates that the value can be signed (negative) and the two-digit number (54) indicates that the decimal point can be used and that five digits before and four after the decimal point are effective (5 + 4 = 9 digits are effective for a designation without decimal point). 2. The alpha sign (α) denotes additional axis address. +44 will be used when α is specified for rotational axis. 3. The number of digits in the words is checked by the maximum number of digits in the addresses. 4. When data with decimal point is used for address for which decimal input is not available, decimal figures will be ignored. 5. If the number of integral digits exceeds the specified format, an alarm will result. 6. If the number of decimal digits exceed the specified format, the excess will be rounded. Blocks A block, unit of instruction, contains a number of words which constitute information necessary for the NC machine to perform an operation. The end of each block must be indicated by an EOB (End Of Block) code. 3. Programs A number of blocks form one program. 4. Program end M02, M30, M99, M998, M999 or % is used as program end code. 3-3 Tape Data Storage Format As with tape operation, tape data to be stored into the memory can be either of ISO or EIA code. The first EOB code read in after resetting is used by the NC unit for automatic identification of the code system ISO or EIA. The area of tape data to be stored into the memeory is, if the NC unit has been reset, from the character immediately succeeding the first EOB code the EOR code, and in all other cases, from the current tape position to the EOR code. Usually, therefore, start tape data storage operation after resetting the NC unit. 3-4 Optional Block Skip 1. Function and purpose Optional block skip is a function that selectively ignores that specific block within a machining program which begins with the slash code â/â. Any block beginning with â/â will be ignored if the [BLOCK SKIP] menu function is set to ON, or will be executed if the menu function is set to OFF. For example, if all blocks are to be executed for a type of parts but specific blocks are not to be executed for another type, then different parts can be machined using one and the same program that contains the â/â code at the beginning of the specific blocks. 3-6 Return to Library DATA FORMATS 2. 3-5 3 Operating notes 1. Blocks that have already been read into the pre-read buffer cannot be skipped. 2. This function is valid even during sequence number search. 3. During tape data storage (input) or output, all blocks, including those having a â/â code, are in- or outputted, irrespective of the status of the [BLOCK SKIP] menu function. Program Number, Sequence Number and Block Number : O, N Program numbers, sequence numbers, and block numbers are used to monitor the execution status of a machining program or to call a machining program or a specific process within a machining program. Program numbers are assigned to command blocks as required. A program number must be set using the letter O (address) and a numeric of a maximum of eight digits that follow O. Sequence numbers identify command blocks forming a machining program. A sequence number must be set using the letter N (address) and a numeric of a maximum of five digits that follow N. Block numbers are counted automatically within the NC unit, and reset to 0 each time a program number or a sequence number is read. These numbers will be counted up by one if the block to be read does not have an assigned program number or sequence number. All blocks of a machining program, therefore, can be uniquely defined by combining program number, sequence number, and block number as shown in the table below. NC MONITOR display NC input machining program Program No. Sequence No. Block No. O1234 (DEMO. PROG); 1234 0 0 N100 G00 X120. Z100.; 1234 100 0 G98 S1000; 1234 100 1 N102 G71 P210 Q220 I0.2 K0.2 D0.5 F600; 1234 102 0 N200 G98 S1200 F300; 1234 200 0 N210 G01 X0 Z95.; 1234 210 0 G01 X20.; 1234 210 1 G03 X50. Z80. K-15.; 1234 210 2 G01 Z55.; 1234 210 3 G02 X80. Z40. I15.; 1234 210 4 G01 X100.; 1234 210 5 G01 Z30.; 1234 210 6 G02 Z10. K-15.; 1234 210 7 N220 G01 Z0; 1234 220 0 N230 G00 X120. Z150.; 1234 230 0 N240 M02; 1234 240 0 % 1234 240 0 3-7 Return to Library 3 3-6 DATA FORMATS Parity-H/V One method of checking if the tape is correctly created is by parity checks. Parity checks are performed to check a tape for errors in punched codes, that is, for punching errors. There are two types of parity checks: parity-H and parity-V. 1. Parity-H check Parity-H checks are intended to check the quantity of punched holes which form one character, and performed during tape operation, tape loading, and sequence-number searching. A parity-H error occurs in the following cases: - ISO Codes If a code with an odd number of punched holes is present in the significant information area. - EIA Codes If a code with an even number of punched holes is present in the significant information area or if non-punched holes (sprockets only) are present after a significant code in one block. Example 1: Parity-H error (for EIA codes) This character leads to a Parity-H error. One block This non-punched character will result in a Parity-H error. These non-punched characters will not result in a Parity-H error. MEP007 If a parity-H error occurs, the tape will stop at the position next to the error code. 3-8 Return to Library DATA FORMATS 2. 3 Parity-V check Parity-V checks will be performed during tape operation, tape loading, or sequence-number searching, if parity-V check item on the PARAMETER display is set to ON. Parity-V during memory operation, however, will not be checked. A parity-V error occurs in the following case: If an odd number of codes are present in the significant information area from the first significant code in the vertical direction to the EOB code (;), that is, if an odd number of characters are present in one block. In the event of a parity-V error, the tape stops at a code next to the EOB (;). Example 2: An example of parity-V error 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 This block leads to a Parity-V error. MEP009 Note 1: During a parity-V check, some types of code are not counted as characters. See Fig. 3-1, âTape codesâ for further details. Note 2: Space codes in the area from the first EOB code to the first address code or slash code â/â are not subjected to counting for parity-V check. 3-9 Return to Library 3 3-7 DATA FORMATS List of G-Codes G functions are described in the list below. G-code series Function Group T M Positioning â G00 â G00 01 Linear interpolation â G01 â G01 01 Threading with C-axis interpolation G01.1 G01.1 01 Circular interpolation (CW) G02 G02 01 Circular interpolation (CCW) G03 G03 01 Spiral interpolation (CW) G02.1 G02.1 01 Spiral interpolation (CCW) G03.1 G03.1 01 Dwell G04 G04 00 High-speed machining mode G05 G05 00 Fine spline interpolation G06.1 G06.1 01 NURBS interpolation G06.2 G06.2 01 Virtual-axis interpolation G07 G07 00 Cylindrical interpolation G07.1 G07.1 00 Exact-stop check G09 G09 00 Data setting mode ON G10 G10 00 Command address OFF G10.1 G10.1 00 Data setting mode OFF G11 G11 00 Polar coordinate interpolation ON G12.1 G12.1 26 Polar coordinate interpolation OFF â²G13.1 â²G13.1 26 X-Y plane selection â G17 â G17 02 Z-X plane selection â G18 â G18 02 Y-Z plane selection â G19 â G19 02 Inch command â G20 â G20 06 Metric command â G21 â G21 06 G22 G22 04 Pre-move stroke check ON Pre-move stroke check OFF â²G23 â²G23 04 Reference point check G27 G27 00 Reference point return G28 G28 00 Return from reference point G29 G29 00 Return to 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference points G30 G30 00 Skip function G31 G31 00 Multi-step skip 1 G31.1 G31.1 00 Multi-step skip 2 G31.2 G31.2 00 Multi-step skip 3 G31.3 G31.3 00 Thread cutting (straight, taper) G32 G33 01 Variable lead thread cutting G34 G34 01 Hole machining pattern cycle (on a circle) G234.1 G34.1 00 Hole machining pattern cycle (on a line) G235 G35 00 Hole machining pattern cycle (on an arc) G236 G36 00 Hole machining pattern cycle (on a grid) G237.1 G37.1 00 Automatic tool length measurement â G37 00 Vector selection for tool radius compensation â G38 00 Corner arc for tool radius compensation â G39 00 Nose R/Tool radius compensation OFF â²G40 â²G40 07 Nose R/Tool radius compensation (left) G41 G41 07 3-10 Return to Library DATA FORMATS G-code series Function T M Group 3-D tool radius compensation (left) G41.2 G41.2 07 Nose R/Tool radius compensation (right) G42 G42 07 3-D tool radius compensation (right) G42.2 G42.2 07 G43 08 Tool length offset (+) â Tool tip point control (Type 1) ON G43.4 G43.4 08 Tool tip point control (Type 2) ON G43.5 G43.5 08 Tool length offset (â) â G44 08 Tool position offset, extension â G45 00 00 Tool position offset, reduction â G46 Tool position offset, double extension â G47 00 Tool position offset, double reduction â G48 00 Tool position offset OFF â â²G49 08 G50 G92 00 Scaling OFF â â²G50 11 Scaling ON â G51 11 Mirror image OFF â â²G50.1 19 Mirror image ON â G51.1 19 â²G50.2 23 Coordinate system setting/Spindle clamp speed setting Polygonal machining mode OFF â²G50.2 Polygonal machining mode ON G51.2 G51.2 23 Local coordinate system setting G52 G52 00 â G52.5 MAZATROL coordinate system cancel Machine coordinate system selection G53 â 00 G53 00 MAZATROL coordinate system selection â G53.5 â 00 Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1 â²G54 â²G54 12 Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2 G55 G55 12 Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 G56 12 Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4 G57 G57 12 Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5 G58 G58 12 Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6 G59 G59 12 Additional workpiece coordinate systems G54.1 G54.1 12 â G54.2 23 Selection of fixture offset One-way positioning G60 G60 00 Exact stop mode G61 G61 13 High-accuracy mode (Geometry compensation) G61.1 G61.1 13 Automatic corner override G62 G62 13 Tapping mode G63 G63 13 Cutting mode â²G64 â²G64 13 User macro single call G65 G65 00 User macro modal call A G66 G66 14 User macro modal call B G66.1 G66.1 14 User macro modal call OFF Programmed coordinate rotation ON Programmed coordinate rotation OFF 3-D coordinate conversion ON 3-D coordinate conversion OFF â²G67 â²G67 14 â G68 16 â G69 16 G68.5 G68 16 â²G69.5 â²G69 16 Finishing cycle G70 G270 09 Longitudinal roughing cycle G71 G271 09 Transverse roughing cycle G72 G272 09 3-11 3 Return to Library 3 DATA FORMATS G-code series Function Group T M Contour-parallel roughing cycle G73 G273 09 Longitudinal cut-off cycle G74 G274 09 Transverse cut-off cycle G75 G275 09 Compound thread-cutting cycle G76 G276 09 â²G80 â²G80 09 Front driling cycle G83 G283 09 Front tapping cycle G84 G284 09 Front synchronous tapping cycle G84.2 G284.2 09 Fixed cycle OFF Front boring cycle G85 G285 09 Outside driling cycle G87 G287 09 Outside tapping cycle G88 G288 09 Outside synchronous tapping cycle G88.2 G288.2 09 Outside boring cycle G89 G289 09 Fixed cycle A (Longitudinal turning cycle) G90 G290 09 Threading cycle G92 G292 09 Fixed cycle B (Transverse turning cycle) G94 G294 09 Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 1, CW) â G71.1 09 Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 2, CCW) â G72.1 09 Fixed cycle (High-speed deep-hole drilling) â G73 09 Fixed cycle (Reverse tapping) â G74 09 Fixed cycle (Boring 1) â G75 09 Fixed cycle (Boring 2) â G76 09 Fixed cycle (Back spot facing) â G77 09 Fixed cycle (Boring 3) â G78 09 Fixed cycle (Boring 4) â G79 09 Fixed cycle (Spot drilling) â G81 09 Fixed cycle (Drilling) â G82 09 Fixed cycle (Deep-hole drilling) â G83 09 Fixed cycle (Tapping) â G84 09 Fixed cycle (Synchronous tapping) â G84.2 09 Fixed cycle (Synchronous reverse tapping) â G84.3 09 Fixed cycle (Reaming) â G85 09 Fixed cycle (Boring 5) â G86 09 Fixed cycle (Back boring) â G87 09 Fixed cycle (Boring 6) â G88 09 Fixed cycle (Boring 7) â G89 09 Absolute data input â â G90 03 Incremental data input â â G91 Workpiece coordinate system rotation â Inverse time feed 03 G92.5 00 G93 G93 05 Constant peripheral speed control ON â G96 â G96 17 Constant peripheral speed control OFF â G97 â G97 17 Feed per minute (asynchronous) â G98 â G94 05 Feed per revolution (synchronous) â G99 â G95 05 Initial point level return in fixed cycles â â²G98 10 R-point level return in fixed cycles â G99 10 G109 G109 00 Single program multi-system control 3-12 Return to Library DATA FORMATS G-code series Function Group T M Cross machining control ON G110 G110 20 Cross machining control OFF G111 G111 20 M, S, T, B output to opposite system G112 G112 00 Hob milling mode OFF G113 G113 23 Hob milling mode ON G114.3 G114.3 23 Polar coordinate input ON G122 G16 18 Polar coordinate input OFF G123 G15 18 X-axis radial command ON G122.1 â 00 â 00 X-axis radial command OFF â²G123.1 Selection between diameter and radius data input â 3 G10.9 Tornado cycle G130 G130 Measurement macro, workpiece/coordinate measurement G136 G136 Compensation macro G137 G137 Notes: 1. The codes marked with â² are selected in each group when the power is turned ON or executing reset for initializing modal. 2. The codes marked with ' are able to be selected by a parameter as an initial modal which is to become valid when the power is turned ON or executing reset for initializing modal. Changeover of inch/metric system, however, can be made valid only by turning the power ON. 3. G-codes of group 00 are those which are not modal, and they are valid only for commanded blocks. 4. If a G-code not given in the G-code list is commanded, an alarm is displayed. And if a Gcode without corresponding option is commanded, an alarm is displayed (808 MIS-SET G CODE). 5. If G-codes belong to different groups each other, any G-code can be commanded in the same block. The G-codes are then processed in order of increasing group number. If two or more G-codes belonging to the same group are commanded in the same block, a G-code commanded last is valid. 3-13 Return to Library 3 DATA FORMATS - NOTE - 3-14 E Return to Library BUFFER REGISTERS 4 4-1 4 BUFFER REGISTERS Input Buffer 1. Overview During tape operation or RS-232C operation, when the preread buffer becomes empty, the contents of the input buffer will be immediately shifted into the pre-read buffer and, following this, if the memory capacity of the input buffer diminuishes to 248 à 4 characters or less, next data (up to 248 characters) will be preread from the tape and then stored into the input buffer. The input buffer makes block-to-block connections smooth by eliminating any operational delays due to the tape-reading time of the tape reader. These favorable results of prereading, however, will be obtained only if the execution time of the block is longer than the tape-reading time of the next block. Tape Preread buffer 5 Input buffer Buffer 4 Memory Mode selection Buffer 3 Buffer 2 Keyboard Buffer 1 Arithmetic operation process Note: One block of data is stored in one buffer. TEP010 2. Detailed description - The memory capacity of the input buffer is 248 à 5 characters (including the EOB code). - The contents of the input buffer register are updated in 248-character units. - Only the significant codes in the significant information area are read into the buffer. - Codes, including â(â and â)â, that exist between Control Out and Control In, are read into the input buffer. Even if optional block skip is valid, codes from / to EOB will also be read into the input buffer. - The contents of the buffer are cleared by a reset command. 4-1 Return to Library 4 4-2 BUFFER REGISTERS Preread Buffer 1. Overview During automatic operation, one block of data is usually preread to ensure smooth analysis of the program. During tool nose radius compensation, however, maximal five blocks of data are preread to calculate crossing point or to check the interference. 2. Detailed description - One block of data is stored into the prepared buffer. - Only the significant codes in the significant information area are read into the pre-read buffer. - Codes existing between Control Out and Control In are not read into the pre-read buffer. If optional block skip is valid, codes from / to EOB will not also be read into the pre-read buffer. - The contents of the buffer are cleared by a reset command. - If the single block operation mode is selected during continuous operation, processing will stop after pre-reading the next block data. 4-2 E Return to Library POSITION PROGRAMMING 5 5-1 5-1-1 5 POSITION PROGRAMMING Dimensional Data Input Method Absolute/Incremental data input (Series T) In the use of G-code series T, absolute and incremental data input methods are distinguished by axis addresses as shown in the table below. Command system Absolute data Incremental data Example: X-axis Address X Z-axis Address Z C-aixs Address C Y-aixs Address Y X-axis Address U Z-axis Address W C-aixs Address H Y-aixs Address V Remarks - The address corresponding to the desired axis is to be set by machine parameter. - Absolute and incremental data can be used together in the same block. - Address of incremental data input for A- and B-axes does not exist. X_____ W_____ ; Incremental data input for the Z-axis Absolute data input for the X-axis 5-1 Return to Library 5 POSITION PROGRAMMING 5-1-2 Absolute/Incremental data input: G90/G91 (Series M) 1. Function and purpose Setting of G90 or G91 allows succeeding dimensional data to be processed as absolute data or incremental data. Setting of arc radius (with address R) or arc center position (with addresses I, J, K) for circular interpolation, however, must always refer to incremental data input, irrespective of preceding G90 command. 2. Programming format G90 (or G91) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 αα1 (α : Additional axis) where G90: Absolute data input G91: Incremental data input 3. Detailed description 1. In the absolute data mode, axis movement will be performed to the program-designated position within the workpiece coordinate system, irrespective of the current position. N1 G90G00X0 Y0 In the incremental data mode, axis movement will be performed through the programdesignated distance as relative data with respect to the current position. N2 G91G01X200. Y50. F100 N2 G90G01X200. Y50. F100 Y 200. Tool 100. N1 N2 X W 100. 200. 300. MEP011 Commands for a movement from the origin of the workpiece coordinate system are given with the same values, irrespective of whether the absolute data mode or the incremental data mode is used. 2. The last G90 or G91 command works as a modal one for the following blocks. (G90) N3 X100. Y100. This block will perform a movement to the position of X = 100 and Y = 100 in the workpiece coordinate system. (G91) N3 X-100. Y50. This block will perform a movement of â100 on the X-axis and +50 on the Y-axis, and thus result in a movement to the position of X = 100 and Y = 100. 5-2 Return to Library POSITION PROGRAMMING 5 Y 200. 100. N3 X 100. 200. 300. W 3. MEP012 Multiple G90 or G91 commands can be set in one block, and thus only a specific address can be set as absolute data or incremental data. N4 G90X300. G91Y100. In this example, dimensional data X300 preceded by G90 will be processed as an absolute data input, and Y100 preceded by G91 as an incremental data input. Therefore, this block will result in a movement to the position of X = 300 and Y = 200 (100 + 100) in the workpiece coordinate system. Y 200. N4 100. W 100. 200. 300. X MEP013 Moreover, G91 (incremental data input mode) will work for the succeeding blocks. 4. Either the absolute data mode or the incremental data mode can be freely selected as initial mode by setting the bit 2 of user parameter F93. 5. Even in the MDI (Manual Data Input) mode, G90 and G91 will also be handled as modal commands. 5-3 Return to Library 5 5-2 POSITION PROGRAMMING Inch/Metric Selection: G20/G21 1. Function and purpose Inch command/metric command selection is possible with G-code commands. 2. Programming format G20: Inch command selection G21: Metric command selection 3. Detailed description 1. Changeover between G20 and G21 is effective only for linear axes; it is meaningless for rotational axes. Example: 2. Axis Example X Initial Inch (parameter) OFF G20 G21 G20 X100 0.0100 mm 0.0254 mm 0.00039 inches 0.00100 inches Y Y100 0.0100 mm 0.0254 mm 0.00039 inches 0.00100 inches Z Z100 0.0100 mm 0.0254 mm 0.00039 inches 0.00100 inches B B100 0.0100 deg 0.0100 deg 0.0100 deg 0.0100 deg To perform G20/G21 changeover in a program, you must first convert variables, parameters, and offsetting data (such as tool length/tool position/tool diameter offsetting data) according to the unit of data input for the desired system (inch or metric) and then set all these types of data either on each data setting display or using the programmed parameter input function. If Initial inch selection is OFF and offsetting data is 0.05 mm, the offsetting data must be converted to 0.002 (0.05 ÷ 25.4 â 0.002) before changing the G21 mode over to the G20 mode. In principle, G20/G21 selection should be done before machining. If you want this changeover to be performed in the middle of the program, temporarily stop the program by an M00 command after G20 or G21 and convert the offsetting data as required. Example: G21 G92 Xx1 M M M M M M Yy1 Zz1 G20 G92 Xx2 Yy2 M00 â M F10 â Note: 4. Initial Inch (parameter) ON G21 Example: 3. Preset unit of data input and G20/G21 (for decimal-point input type Î) Zz2 Convert offsetting data here. Set an F (Feed rate) command anew. Do not fail to give an F command appropriate to the new unit system after changeover between G20 and G21. Otherwise, axis movements would be performed using the last F value before the changeover, without any conversion, on the basis of the new unit system. Whether G20 or G21 is to be selected upon switching-on can be specified by the bit 4 of user parameter F91 (Initial Inch parameter). 5-4 Return to Library POSITION PROGRAMMING 5-3 5 Decimal Point Input 1. Function and purpose The decimal point can be used to determin the units digit (mm or inch) of dimensional data or feed rate. 2. Programming format !!!!!.!!!! Metric system !!!!.!!!!! 3. Inch system Detailed description 1. Decimal-point commands are valid only for the distance, angle, time, speed, and scaling factor (only after G51) that have been set in the machining program. 2. As listed in the table below, the meaning of command data without the decimal point differs between decimal-point input types Î and ÎÎ according to the type of command unit system. Command Type Î Command unit à 10 X1 Type ÎÎ OFF 0.0001 (mm, inches, deg) 1.0000 (mm, inches, deg) ON 0.0010 (mm, inches, deg) 1.0000 (mm, inches, deg) 3. Decimal-point commands are only valid for addresses X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, E, F, P, Q and R, where address P only refers to a scaling factor. 4. The number of effective digits for each type of decimal-point command is as follows: Move command (Linear) Move command (Rotational) Feed rate Dwell Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part mm 0. - 99999. .0000 - .9999 inch 0. - 9999. .00000 .99999 0. - 99999. .0000 - .9999 0. - 200000. .0000 - .9999 0. - 99999. .000 - .999 0. - 99999. (359.) .0000 - .9999 0. - 20000. 0. - 99999. .000 - .999 .00000 .99999 5. Decimal-point commands are also valid for definition of variables data used in subprograms. 6. For data which can be, but is not specified with the decimal point, either the minimum program data input unit or mm (or in.) unit can be selected using bit 5 of parameter F91. 7. A decimal-point command issued for an address which does not accept the decimal point will be processed as data that consists of an integral part only. That is, all decimal digits will be ignored. Addresses that do not accept the decimal point are D, H, L, M, N, O, S and T. All types of variables command data are handled as the data having the decimal point. 5-5 Return to Library 5 POSITION PROGRAMMING 4. Sample programs A. Sample programs for addresses accepting the decimal point Command category Program example For 1 = 1 µ For 1 = 0.1 µ 1 = 1 mm G0X123.45 (With the decimal point always given as the millimeter point) X123.450 mm X123.450 mm X123.450 mm G0X12345 X12.345 mm* X1.2345 mm** X12345.000 mm*** #111=123 #112=5.55 X#111 Y#112 X123.000 mm Y5.550 mm #113=#111+#112 (ADD) #113 = 128.550 #114=#111â#112 (SUBTRACT) #114 = 117.450 #115=#111ïª#112 (MULTIPLY) #115 = 682.650 #116=#111/#112 #117=#112/#111 (DIVIDE) #116 = 22.162 #117 = 0.045 * The least significant digit is given in 1 micron. ** The least significant digit is given in 0.1 micron. *** The least significant digit is given in 1 mm. 5-6 Return to Library POSITION PROGRAMMING B. Address Validity of decimal point for each address Decimal point command Valid A Invalid Application Valid Coordinate position data Valid Invalid Valid Valid Subprogram call number Invalid Number of helical pitches Invalid Offset amount (in G10) Valid Scaling factor Valid Cutting depth for deep-hole drilling cycle Valid Shift amount for back boring Corner chamfering amount Valid Shift amount for fine boring Offset number (tool position, tool length and tool diameter) Valid R point in fixed cycle Coordinate position data Rotary table Miscellaneous function code Valid F Valid Feed rate G Valid Preparatory function code Q Valid R Offset number (tool postion, tool length and tool diameter) Intra-subprogram sequence number Valid Radius of an arc with R selected Radius of an arc for corner rounding Valid Offset amount (in G10) Valid Weight for NURBS curve S Invalid Spindle function code T Invalid Tool function code Valid Coordinate of arc center U Valid Coordinate position data Valid Vector component for tool diameter offset V Valid Coordinate position data Valid Coordinate of arc center W Valid Coordinate position data Valid Vector component for tool diameter offset Valid Coordinate position data Valid Dwell time I J K Dwell time Rank for NURBS curve E Invalid Application Invalid Invalid H P Rotary table Miscellaneous function code D Invalid Decimal point command Invalid Rotary table Miscellaneous function code Linear angle data Invalid Remarks Address Coordinate position data Valid B C 5 X Valid Coordinate of arc center Valid Vector component for tool diamater offset Y Valid Coordinate position data Valid Knot for NURBS curve Z Valid Coordinate position data L Invalid Fixed cycle/subprogram repetition M Invalid Miscellaneous function code N Invalid Sequence number O Invalid Program number Note: The decimal point is valid in all the arguments for a user macroprogram. 5-7 Remarks Return to Library 5 5-4 POSITION PROGRAMMING Polar Coordinate Input ON/OFF: G122/G123 [Series M: G16/G15] 1. Function and purpose The end point of interpolation can be designated with polar coordinates (radius and angle). Polar coordinate input is available only in the mode of polar coordinate interpolation. 2. Programming format G122...... Polar coordinate input ON (G-code group No. 18) G123...... Polar coordinate input OFF (G-code group No. 18) 3. Detailed description Even in the mode of polar coordinate input, positional commands for the axes that have no relation to the polar coordinate interpolation are available as ordinary commands. In the mode of polar coordinate input, the length must always be designated in radius values, regardless of the modal state for radius/diameter data input (G122.1/G123.1). This also applies to the axes that have no relation to the polar coordinate interpolation. The last modal state for radius/diameter data input before the G122 command will be restored automatically by the cancel command G123. 4. Sample program G12.1; â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦Polar coordinate interpolation ON G122; â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦Polar coordinate input ON G01 X50.C30.F100; G02 X50.C60.R50; G123; â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦Polar coordinate input OFF G13.1; â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦â¦Polar coordinate interpolation OFF 5. Remarks 1. Enter polar coordinates with respect to the plane of polar coordinate interpolation. 2. Positive values (+) for angle data refer to measurement in the counterclockwise direction on the plane of polar coordinate interpolation. 3. Use address R to designate the radius for circular interpolation (G02 or G03). 4. If the G122 command is given without selecting the mode of polar coordinate interpolation (by G12.1), an alarm will occur. 5. If the polar coordinate interpolation mode is cancelled (by G13.1) during polar coordinate input, the mode of polar coordinate input will be cancelled together with the mode of polar coordinate interpolation. 6. G122 and G123 must be given in an independent block. That is, the block of G122 or G123 must not contain any other G-codes or addresses with the exception of N and P. 7. The following G-codes are available during polar coordinate input. An alarm will occur if any G-code other than these is specified. Available G-codes G00 G01 G02 Positioning Linear interpolation Circular interpolation (CW) 5-8 Return to Library POSITION PROGRAMMING G03 G04 G09 G13.1 G15 G40-G42 G61 G64 G65 G66 G66.1 G67 G80-G89 G98 G123 5-5 5 Circular interpolation (CCW) Dwell Exact-stop check Polar coordinate interpolation OFF Polar coordinate input OFF (in G-code series M) Tool radius compensation Exact-stop mode Cutting mode User macro single call User macro modal call A User macro modal call B User macro modal call OFF Fixed cycles for hole machining Asynchronous feed Polar coordinate input OFF X-axis Radial Command ON/OFF: G122.1/G123.1 (Series T) 1. Function and purpose The X-axis dimensions can be entered in radial values, instead of diametrical ones, by the aid of a preparatory function (G-code) in order to improve EIA/ISO programming efficiency for milling. 2. Programming format G122.1.... X-axis radial data input ON (G-code group No. 25) G123.1.... X-axis radial data input OFF (G-code group No. 25) 3. Detailed description All the X-axis dimensions entered after G122.1 are processed as radial values until the command G123.1 is given for the restoration of diametrical data input mode for the X-axis. 4. Sample program M G122.1; M G1X10.F100; M G123.1; M G1X10.F100; Counter indication on POSITION display Modal indication on POSITION display X20. G122.1 X10. G123.1 ...X-axis radial data input ON ...Radial dimension ...X-axis radial data input OFF ...Diametrical dimension M 5. Remarks 1. The counter indication on the POSITION display always refers to a diametrical value even in the mode of G122.1. 2. The selection of the G122.1 mode does not exercise any influence upon parameters, offset values, etc. 3. G123.1 is selected as the initial mode when the power is turned on. 4. Resetting causes the mode of G122.1 to be canceled and replaced by the G123.1 mode. 5-9 Return to Library 5 POSITION PROGRAMMING 5. Even in the G122.1 mode the X-axis dimensions entered under the following modal functions are always processed as diametral values. Issuance of these G-code commands also cancels G122.1 mode: G7.1 G12.1 G69.5 G123 G22 6. Even in the G123.1 mode the X-axis dimensions entered under the following modal functions are always processed as radial values (with diametrical indication on the POSITON display): G68.5 G122 7. 5-6 Cylindrical interpolation Polar coordinate interpolation ON 3-D coordinate conversion OFF Polar coordinate input OFF Pre-move stroke check ON 3-D coordinate conversion ON Polar coordinate input ON Various settings for software limits and barrier functions are not to be changed. Selection between Diameter and Radius Data Input: G10.9 (Series M) 1. Function and purpose The G10.9 command allows changeover between diameter data input and radius data input, facilitating the creation of the turning section in a compound machining program. 2. Programming format G10.9 Ax_ Ax: Address of the axis for which diameter or radius data input is to be specified. Numerical value = 0: Radius data input 1: Diameter data input 3. Remarks 1. Give the G10.9 command in a single-command block. Otherwise it may be ignored. 2. If the G10.9 command is not followed by an axis address, the alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is caused. Also, the alarm 806 ILLEGAL ADDRESS is caused if a rotational axis is specified in the G10.9 command. 3. Do not assign a decimal point to the numerical value that follows the axis address. Moreover, assigning a value other than 0 and 1 results in the alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT. 4. The G10.9 command only changes the method of programming the positional data for the particular axis. It does not affect various external data such as parameters, workpiece origin data, tool data, and tool offset data. 5. Irrespective of whether the absolute programming (G90) or the incremental programming (G91) is currently modal, designate the position in diameter values for the axis for which diameter data input has been selected. 5-10 Return to Library POSITION PROGRAMMING Relationship to other G-codes Diameter data input applies in general to the positional data of the specified axis. 1. For positioning (G00), linear interpolation (G01) and coordinate system setting (G92) Designate the position in diameter values for the specified axis. 2. For circular interpolation (G02/G03) Only the position of the ending point is to be designated in a diameter value for the specified axis. The center, or radius, of the arc must always be designated in radius values (with I, K, or R). The example below refers to a turning program with the X-axis specified as the axis in question. The values with X and I denote the diameter data of the ending point and the radius data of the arc center (incremental to the starting point), respectively, for the X-axis. Absolute programming: Incremental programming: X-axis G90 G02 X120.Z70.I50.F200 G91 G02 X100.Z-30.I50.F200 Ending point 50. Starting point 120. 4. 5 Z-axis 20. 70. 3. 30. For fixed cycle of turning Designate the position in diameter values for the specified axis. The amount of taper (for turning fixed cycle) as well as the depth of cut and the finishing allowance (for compound cycle of turning), however, must always be designated in radius values. 4. For threading (G32/G33, G34, G1.1) Designate the position of the ending point in diameter values for the specified axis. The lead, however, must always be designated in radius values (with F or E). 5-11 Return to Library 5 POSITION PROGRAMMING - NOTE - 5-12 E Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 6-1 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Positioning (Rapid Feed) Command: G00 1. Function and purpose Positioning command G00 involves use of a coordinate word. This command positions a tool by moving it linearly to the ending point specified by a coordinate word. 2. Programming format G00 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww αα ; (α denotes an additional axis, that is, B-, C- or Y-axis) Where x, u, z, w and α denote a coordinate. The command addresses are valid for all additional axis. 3. Detailed description 1. Once this command has been given, the G00 mode will be retained until any other G-code command that overrides this mode, that is, either G01, G02, G03, or G32 of command group 01 is given. Thus, a coordinate word will only need be given if the next command is also G00. This function is referred to the modal function of the command. 2. In the G00 mode, acceleration/deceleration always takes place at the starting/ending point of a block and the program proceeds to the next block after confirming that the pulse command in the present block is 0 and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration cycle is 0. The width of in-position can be changed using a parameter (S13). 3. The G-code functions (G83 to G89) of command group 09 are canceled by the G00 command (G80). 4. The tool path can be made either linear or nonlinear using a parameter (F91 bit 6) but the positioning time remains unchanged. - Linear path As with linear interpolation (G01), the tool speed is limited according to the rapid feed rate of each axis. - Nonlinear path The tool is positioned according to the separate rapid feed rate of each axis. 5. When no number following G address, this is treated as G00. 6-1 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Sample programs Example: +X Chuck Jaw Workpiece Starting point (+180, +300) Ending point (+100, +150) +Z (Unit: mm) TEP012â The diagram above is for: Absolute data command Incremental data command G00 X100.000 Z150.000; G00 Uâ80.000 Wâ150.000; 5. Remarks 1. If bit 6 of user parameter F91 is 0, the tool will take the shortest path connecting the starting and ending points. The positioning speed will be calculated automatically to give the shortest allocation time within the limits of the rapid feed rate of each axis. For example, if you set a rapid feed rate of 9600 mm/min for both X- and Z-axes and make the program: G00 Zâ300.000 X400.000; then the tool will move as shown in the diagram below. F91 bit 6 = 0 X-axis effective feedrate: 6400 mm/min Ending point 400 fx X 300 fz Z Starting point Z-axis effective feedrate: 9600 mm/min (Unit: mm) TEP013 For inch-specification machines, the rapid feed rate of the C-axis is limited to 89 rpm (32000/360) even if item C of parameter M1 is set to a value greater than 32000. 2. If bit 6 of user parameter F91 is 1, the tool will move from the starting point to the ending point according to the rapid feed rate of each axis. For example, if you set a rapid feed rate of 9600 mm/min for both X- and Z-axes and make the program: G00 Zâ300.000 X400.000; 6-2 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 then the tool will move as shown in the diagram below. F91 bit 6 = 1 X-axis effective feedrate: 9600 mm/min Ending point 400 fx X 300 fz Z Starting point (Unit: mm) Z-axis effective feedrate: 9600 mm/min TEP014 3. The rapid feed rate that you can set for each axis using the G00 command varies from machine to machine. Refer to the relevant machine specification for further details. 4. Rapid feed (G00) deceleration check When processing of rapid feed (G00) is completed, the next block will be executed after the deceleration check time (Td) has passed. The deceleration check time (Td) is calculated by following expressions depending on the acceleration/deceleration type. Linear acceleration/linear deceleration ............... Td = Ts + a Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration ........... Td = 2 à Ts + a Exponential acceleration/exponential deceleration...... Td = 2 à Ts + a (Where Ts is the acceleration time constant, a = 0 to 14 msec) The time required for the deceleration check during rapid feed is the longest among the rapid feed deceleration check times of each axis determined by the rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time constants and by the rapid feed acceleration/deceleration mode of the axes commanded simultaneously. 6-3 Return to Library 6 6-2 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS One-Way Positioning: G60 1. Function and purpose Highly accurate positioning free from any backlash error can be performed when the axis movement is controled by the G60 command so that the final access always takes place in one determined direction. 2. Programming format G60 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww αα; (α: Additional axis) 3. Detailed description 1. The direction of final access and its creeping distance must be set in parameter I1. 2. After rapid approach to a position away from the ending point by the creeping distance, the final access is performed in the predetermined direction at a speed corresponding with the rapid feed. G60 a Positioning point Final access direction (â) Starting point Ending point (+) Starting point Temporary stop G60 âa G60 creeping distance MEP018 3. The positioning pattern described above also applies during machine locking or for a Z-axis command with the Z-axis cancellation activated. 4. In the dry run mode (G00 mode), the whole positioning is carried out at the dry-running speed. 5. The creeping to the einding point can be halted with Reset, Emergency stop, Interlock, or Feed hold, or by setting the rapid feed override to 0 (zero). The creeping is performed according to the setting of the rapid feed, and the rapid feed override function is also effective for the creeping. 6. One-way positioning is automatically invalidated for the hole-drilling axis in hole-drilling fixed-cycle operations. 7. One-way positioning is automatically invalidated for shifting in fine-boring or back-boring fixed-cycle operations. 8. Usual positioning is performed for an axis not having a parameter-set creeping distance. 9. One-way positioning is always of non-interpolation type. 10. An axis movement command for the same position as the ending point of the preceding block (movement distance = 0) will cause reciprocation through the creeping distance so that the final access can be performed in the predetermined direction for an accurate positioning to the desired point. 6-4 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-3 6 Linear Interpolation Command: G01 1. Function and purpose Command G01 involves use of both a coordinate word and a feed rate command. This command moves (interpolates) linearly a tool from the current position to the ending point specified by a coordinate word, at the feed rate specified by address F. The feed rate specified by address F, however, acts as the linear velocity relative to the direction of movement of the tool center. 2. Programming format G01 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww αα Ff; (α: Additional axis) where x, u, z, w and α each denote a coordinate. X-axis z w Command point u 2 Current position X-axis x TEP015 3. Detailed description Once this command has been given, the G01 mode will be retained until any other G-code command that overrides this mode, that is, either G00, G02, G03 or G32 of command group 01 is given. Thus, a coordinate word will only need be given if the next command is also G01, that is, if the feed rate for the next block remains the same. A programming error will result if an F-code command is not given to the first G01 command. The feed rates for rotational axes must be set in deg/min. (Example : F300 = 300 deg/min) The G-code functions (G70 to G89) of command group 09 are cancelled by G01 (set to G80). 6-5 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Sample program Example 1: Taper turning X-axis 20.0 Current position Z-axis 50.0 TEP016 G01 X50.0 Z20.0 F300; Example 2: Program for moving the tool at a cutting feed rate of 300 mm/min via the route of P1âP2 âP3 âP4 (where the sections P0âP1 and P4 âP0 form a positioning route for the tool): +X Turret 240 P0 P1 200 +Z 140 P4 Unit: mm 100 40 P2 P3 90 160 220 230 TEP017 G00 G01 G00 X200.000 Z40.000; X100.000 Z90.000 F300; Z160.000; X140.000 Z220.000; X240.000 Z230.000; 6-6 P0 â P1 P1 â P2 P2 â P3 P3 â P4 P4 â P0 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-4 6 Circular Interpolation Commands: G02, G03 1. Function and purpose Commands G02 and G03 move the tool along an arc. 2. Programming format G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww (Yy/Vv) Coordinates of the ending point Ii Kk (Jj) Coordinates of the arc center Ff ; Feedrate Counterclockwise(CCW) Clockwise (CW) X/U: Arc ending point coordinates, X-axis (absolute value of workpiece coordinate system for X, incremental value from present position for U) Z/W: Arc ending point coordinates, Z-axis (absolute value of workpiece coordinate system for Z, incremental value from present position for W) Y/V: Arc ending point coordinates, Y-axis (absolute value of workpiece coordinate system for Y, incremental value from present position for V) I : Arc center, X-axis (radius command, incremental value from starting point) K : Arc center, Z-axis (incremental value from starting point) J : Arc center, Y-axis (incremental value from starting point) F : Feed rate Center X-axis Ending point i u 2 z Starting point w k x Z-axis TEP018 6-7 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS For machines with Y-axis control, arc interpolation is, additionally to Z-X plane, also available for X-Y and Y-Z planes. 3. X-Y plane G17; G02 (G03) X_Y_I_J_F_; For milling on the face Z-X plane G18; G02 (G03) X_Z_I_K_F_; For normal turning Y-Z plane G19; G02 (G03) Y_Z_J_K_F_; For Y-axis milling on OD surface Detailed description 1. Once the G02 (or G03) command has been given, this command mode will be retained until any other G-code command used to override the G02 (or G03) command mode, that is, G00 or G01 of command group 01 is given. 2. The direction of circular movement is determined by G02/G03. G02: CW (Clockwise) G03: CCW (Counterclockwise) +X Turret Chuck +X CCW (G03) CW (G02) +Z +Z Workpiece TEP019 3. Interpolation of an arc that spans multiple quadrants can be defined with one block. 4. To perform circular interpolation, the following information is required: - Rotational direction ........... CW (G02) or CCW (G03) - Arc ending point coordinates .... Given with address X, Z, Y, U, W, V. - Arc center coordinates......... Given with address I, K, J. (Incremental dimension) - Feed rate................... Given with address F. 5. If none of the addresses I, K, J and R is specified, a program error will occur. 6. Addresses I, K and J are used to specify the coordinates of the arc center in the X, Z and Y directions respectively as seen from the starting point, therefore, care must be taken for signs. 6-8 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. 6 Sample programs X-axis 50.0 Coordinate zero point 120.0 20.0 70.0 Z-axis 50.0 TEP020 G02 X120.0 Z70.0 I50.0 F200; G02 U100.0 Wâ50.0 I50.0 F200; 5. Absolute data setting Incremental data setting Notes on circular interpolation 1. Clockwise (G02) or Counterclockwise (G03) during circular interpolation refers to the rotational direction in the right-handed coordinate system when seen from the plus side toward the minus side of the coordinate axis perpendicular to the plane to be interpolated. 2. If the coordinates of the ending point are not set or if the starting and ending points are set at the same position, designating the center using address I, K or J will result in an arc of 360 degrees (true circle). 3. The following will result if the starting-point radius and the ending-point radius are not the same. - If error âR is larger than the parameter F19 (tolerance for radial value difference at ending point), a program error (817 INCORRECT ARC DATA) will occur at the starting point of the arc. G02 Z80.K50.; +X Alarm stop Center Starting point Radius at starting point Ending point Radius at ending point âR +Z TEP021 6-9 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - If error âR is equal to or smaller than the parameter data, interpolation will take a spiral form heading for the programmed ending point of the arc. G02 Z90.K50.; Spiral interpolation +X Starting point Ending point Center Radius at starting point Radius at ending point âR +Z TEP022 The examples shown above assume that excessively large parameter data is given to facilitate your understanding. 6-5 Radius Designated Circular Interpolation Commands: G02, G03 1. Function and purpose Circular interpolation can be performed by designating directly the arc radius R as well as using conventional arc center coordinates (I, K, J). 2. Programming format G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww (Yy/Vv) Rr Ff ; where x/u: z/w: y/v: r: f: 3. X-axis coordinate of the ending point Z-axis coordinate of the ending point Y-axis coordinate of the ending point Radius of the arc Feed rate Detailed description The arc center is present on the mid-perpendicular to the segment which connects the starting point and the ending point. The crossing point of the mid-perpendicular and that circle of the designated radius r that has the center set at the starting point gives the center coordinates of the designated arc. A semi-circle or smaller will be generated if R is a positive value. An arc larger than the semi-circle will be generated if R is a negative value. 6-10 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 Path of an arc with a negative-signed R Ending point (x1, z1) O2 Path of an arc with a positive R O1 L O1, O2 : Center point r Starting point TEP023 To use the radius-designated arc interpolation commands, the following requirement must be met: L 2â¢r â¤1 where L denotes the length of the line from the starting point to the ending point. If radius data and arc center data (I, J, K) are both set in the same block, the circular interpolation by radius designation will have priority in general. For complete-circle interpolation (the ending point = the starting point), however, use centerdesignation method with addresses I, J and K, since the radius-specification command in this case will immediately be completed without any machine operation. 4. Sample programs 1. G02 Xx1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 ; 2. G02 Xx1 Zz1 Ii1 Kk1 Rr1 Ff1 ; (If radius data and center data (I, K, J) are set in the same block, circular interpolation by radius designation will have priority.) Note: âI0â, âK0â or âJ0â can be omitted. 6-11 Return to Library 6 6-6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Spiral Interpolation: G2.1, G3.1 (Option) 1. Function and purpose Commands G2.1 and G3.1 provide such an interpolation that the starting and ending points are connected smoothly for an arc command where the radii of the both points differ from each other. (Normal circular interpolation) Ending point re = rs (Spiral interpolation) Ending point re â rs rs Starting point Center MEP031 2. Programming format G17 G2.1 (or G3.1) Xp_ Yp_ I_ J_ (α_) F_ P_ Arc center coordinates Arc ending point coordinates G18 G2.1 (or G3.1) Zp_ Xp_ K_ I_ (α_) F_ P_ G19 G2.1 (or G3.1) Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ (α_) F_ P_ P : Number of pitches (revolutions) (P can be omitted if equal to 0.) α : Any axis other than circular interpolation axes (For helical cutting only) F : Rate of feed along the tool path 3. Detailed description 1. Circular movement directions of G2.1 and G3.1 correspond with those of G02 and G03, respectively. 2. Radius designation is not available for spiral interpolation. (The starting and ending points must lie on the same arc for a radius designation.) Note: When a radius is designated, this command will be regarded as a radiusdesignated circular interpolation. 3. Conical cutting or tapered threading can be done by changing the radii of the arc at its starting and ending points and designating a linear-interpolation axis at the same time. 4. Even for normal circular command G2 or G3, spiral interpolation will be performed if the difference between the radii of the starting point and the ending point is smaller than the setting of parameter F19. 6-12 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Example: 6 When the following program is executed, the feed rates for each of the points will be as shown in the diagram below. Y B D E C A X A B C D E 3000 mm/min 2500 2000 1500 1000 MEP032 G28 X0 Y0 G00 Yâ200. G17 G3.1 Xâ100. Y0 Iâ150. J0 F3000 P2 M30 6-13 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Sample programs Example 1: Spiral cutting Shown below is an example of programming for spiral contouring with incremental data input of the arc center (X = 0, Y = 45.0) and absolute data input of the arc ending point (X = 0, Y = â15.0). Y X 45 15 D735PB001 G28 W0 G80 G40 T001T000M06 G54.1 P40 G94 G00 X0 Y-45.0 G43 Z30.0 H01 Z3.0 S1500 M03 M50 G01 Z-1.0 F150 G2.1 X0 Y-15.0 I0 J45.0 F450 P2 Zero point return on the Z-axis G00 Z3.0 M05 M09 Z30.0 M30 Return on the Z-axis Fixed-cycle cancellation Tool change Coordinate system setting Approach in the XY-plane to the starting point (0, â45.0) Positioning on the Z-axis to the initial point Normal rotation of the spindle Air blast ON Infeed on the Z-axis Command for spiral interpolation with arc ending point = (0, â15.0), arc center = (0, 0)*, and pitch = 2. * I- and J-values refer to increments to the starting point. Spindle stop and Air blast OFF End of machining The rate of feed at the starting point is 450 mm/min, as specified in the block of G2.1, and the rate of feed at the ending point can be calculated as follows: (Ending pointâs radius/Starting pointâs radius) à Command value of the rate of feed. As the radius of the starting point = 45.0, that of the ending point = 15.0, and the command rate of feed (F) = 450, the rate of feed results in (15.0/45.0) à 450 = 150 mm/min at the ending point. Note 1: Take care not to use radius designation (argument R) for spiral interpolation; otherwise a normal circular interpolation (by G02 or G03) will be executed. Note 2: It is not possible to give the command for a spiral interpolation the starting and ending points of which should have different centers specified. 6-14 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Example 2: 6 Heart-shaped cam (by absolute data input) Y 1 X 70 D735PB002 Zero point return on the Z-axis G28 W0 G80 G40 T001T000M06 G54.1 P40 G94 G00 X0 Y-70.0 G43 Z30.0 H01 S1500 M03 Z3.0 M50 G01 Z-1.0 F150 G2.1 X0 Y1.0 I0 J70.0 F450 X0 Y-70.0 I 0 J-1.0 G00 Z3.0 M05 M09 Z30.0 M30 Fixed-cycle cancellation Tool change Coordinate system setting Approach in the XY-plane to the starting point (0, â70.0) Positioning on the Z-axis to the initial point Normal rotation of the spindle Air blast ON Infeed on the Z-axis Command for the left-hand half curve Command for the right-hand half curve Return on the Z-axis Spindle stop and Air blast OFF End of machining 6-15 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Example 3: Heart-shaped cam (by incremental data input) Y X 0 a b (30.) (100.) Starting and Ending points MEP033 The difference (bâa) between the radii of the starting point and ending point denotes a displacement for heart shape. Use two blocks for programming separately the right-half and the left-half shape. A sample program in incremental data input: G3.1 Y130. J100. F1000........ (Right half) a+b b G3.1 Yâ130. Jâ30 ............ (Left half) âaâb âa a = 30. b = 100. a + b = 130. âa â b = â130. (Minimum arc radius) (Maximum arc radius) (Ending-point coordinate of the right half-circle) (Ending-point coordinate of the left half-circle) 6-16 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Example 4: 6 Large-size threading To perform large-size threading, use three heilical-interpolation blocks for programming separately infeed section, threading section and upward-cutting section. Spiral interpolation is required to designate the amounts of diameter clearance for both the infeed block and the upward-cutting block. (The starting and ending points are shifted through the designated clearance amounts from the circumference of threading section.) Clearance X i1 i3 0 Z i2 Y l z1 Infeed z2 Threading z3 Upward cutting MEP034 G3.1 Xâi1âi2 Y0 Zz1 Iâi1 J0 Ff1 G03 X0 Y0 Zz2 Ii2 J0 Pp2 G3.1 Xi2+i3 Y0 Zz3 Ii2 J0 * (Infeed block, half-circle) (Threading block, complete circle) (Upward-cutting block, half-circle) The number of pitches, p2, in the threading block is given by dividing the stroke z2 by the pitch l. Note that the value p2 must be an integer. 6-17 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Example 5: Tapered threading As shown in the figure below, tapered helical cutting that begins at any angle can be performed. X e 0 x1 i1 Z Y s y1 j1 l p1 z1 MEP035 Data with addresses X, Y and Z must be the increments x1, y1 and z1 respectively, from the starting point s to the ending point e; data of I and J must be the increments i1 and j1 respectively, from the starting point s to the circular center, and data of P must be equal to the number of pitches p1. G3.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 The amount of taper t and the pitch l are calculated as follows: t= where rs = l= 2(re â rs) x1 i12 + j12 , re = (x1 â i1)2 + (y1 â j1)2 ; z1 (2Ï â¢ Ï1 + θ) / 2Ï where θ = θe â θs = tanâ1 j1 â y1 i1 â x1 â tanâ1 âj1 âi1 where rs and re denote the radii at the starting point and the ending point respectively, and qs and qe denote the angles at the starting point and the ending point respectively. 6-18 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Example 6: Conical cutting Conical cutting is an application of tapered threading, and have its starting or ending point on the center line. Tapering results from gradually increasing or decreasing the arc diameter. The pitch is determined by z1/p1. Z p1 z1 Y X 0 x1 MEP036 G2.1 Xâx1 Y0 Zz1 Iâx1 Pp1 Ff1 x1 z1 p1 f1 Note: 6 : Radius of the base : Height : Number of pitches : Feed rate Use the TRACE display to check the tool path during spiral interpolation. 6-19 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-7 Plane Selection Commands: G17, G18, G19 6-7-1 Outline 1. Function and purpose Commands G17, G18 and G19 are used to select a plane on which arc interpolation, tool nose radius compensation, etc. are to be done. Registering the three fundamental axes as parameters allows you to select a plane generated by any two non-parallel axes. The available planes are the following three types: - Plane for circular interpolation - Plane for tool nose radius compensation - Plane for polar coordinate interpolation 2. Programming format G17; (X-Y plane selection) G18; (Z-X plane selection) G19; (Y-Z plane selection) Y X, Y, and Z denote respective coordinate axes or their corresponding parellel axes. X Z G03 G03 G02 G03 G02 G02 X Z G17 (XY) plane Y G18 (ZX) plane G19 (YZ) plane TEP024â 6-7-2 Plane selection methods Plane selection by parameter setting is explained in this section. 1. Which of the fundamental axes or their parallel axes are to form the plane you want to select is determined by the type of plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) and the axis address specified in the same block. Y X G17X Y; Z G18X Z; G03 G19Y Z; G03 G02 G03 G02 X G02 Z Y TEP025â 6-20 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 2. Automatic plane selection does not occur for blocks that do not have an issued planeselection command (G17, G18 or G19) G18 X_ Z_; Y_ Z_; 3. 6 Z-X plane Z-X plane (No plane change) If axis addresses are not set for blocks having an issued plane-selection command (G17, G18 or G19), the fundamental three axes will be regarded as set. G18_; (Z-X plane = G18 XZ ;) Note 1: Upon power on or resetting, G18 plane is selected. Note 2: In turning mode, G17 or G19 plane selection is impossible and in milling mode, G18 plane selection respectively. If such selection were attempted, alarm would be caused. Note 3: The G-codes for plane selection (G17, G18 or G19) should be commanded in a block independently. If such a G-code is commanded in a block containing the axis move command, a movement independent from the selected plane can be caused. 6-8 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ON/OFF: G12.1/G13.1 1. Function and purpose It is available for face helical grooving or cam shaft grinding on the lathe. It is a function to convert a command programmed by the rectangular coordinate system into the linear axis movement (tool movement) and the rotational axis movement (workpiece rotation) to give contouring control. 2. Programming format The polar coordinate interpolation is commanded by the following G-codes (group 26). G12.1: Polar coordinate interpolation mode (Mode by which the polar coordinate is interpolated) G13.1: Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (Mode by which the polar coordinate is not interpolated) These G-codes should be commanded in an independent block. 3. Detailed description 1. When turning on the power and resetting, the polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (G13.1) is provided. Commanding G12.1 provides a plane selected by G17. 2. The polar coordinate interpolation uses the zero point of workpiece coordinate system as that of the coordinate system. A plane (hereinafter referred to as âpolar coordinate interpolation planeâ) is selected using the linear axis as the 1st axis of the plane and the virtual axis perpendicular to the linear axis as the 2nd axis of the plane. The polar coordinate interpolation is given on that plane. 3. The program during polar coordinate interpolation mode is commanded by the rectangular coordinate value on the polar coordinate interpolation plane. The axis address of the rotational axis (C) is used for that of the command of the 2nd axis of the plane (virtual axis). A command is given in mm or inch as with the 1st axis of the plane (command by the axis address of the linear axis), and not in degrees. And whether designation is given by the diameter or by the radius is not determined by the 1st axis of the plane, but the designation is the same as the rotational axis. 6-21 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Absolute command and incremental command for the linear interpolation (G01) and the circular interpolation (G02, G03) can be commanded during the polar coordinate interpolation mode. The nose radius compensation can also be made for the program command, and the polar coordinate interpolation is given to the path after the nose radius compensation. However, the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1, G13.1) cannot be changed during the nose radius compensation mode (G41, G42). G12.1 and G13.1 must be commanded in G40 mode (Nose radius compensation cancel mode). 5. The feed rate is commanded using tangential speed (relative speed of the workpiece and a tool) on the polar coordinate interpolation plane (rectangular coordinate system) as F (mm/min or inch/min is used for a unit of F). 6. The coordinate value of the virtual axis when G12.1 is commanded provides â0â. That is, the polar coordinate interpolation is started taking the position where G12.1 is commanded as the angle = 0. G17: X-C(virtual axis) plane X C Z C (Virtual axis) D732S0008 6-22 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Sample programs C (Virtual axis) C N070 N080 N060 N050 X N100 N090 Nose radius center path Program path D732S0009 M N001 N004 N008 N010 N020 N030 N040 N050 N060 N070 N080 N090 N100 N110 N120 N130 N140 G00 G97 G98; G28 U0 W0; M200; T001T000M06; G00 X100.0 Z10.0 C0.0; G12.1; G42; G01 X50.0 F500; C10.0; G03 X-50.0 C10.0 I-25.0; G01 C-10.0; G03 X50.0 C-10.0 R25.0; G01 C0.0; G00 X100.0; G40; G13.1; M202; Positioning to the start point Polar coordinate interpolation start Shape program (Program with rectangular coordinate values on X-C plane) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel M 6-23 6 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5. Notes 1. Before G12.1 is commanded, a workpiece coordinate system must be set using the center of rotational axis as the zero point of the coordinate system. The coordinate system must not be changed during G12.1 mode. 2. The plane before G12.1 is commanded (plane selected by G17, G18 or G19) is temporarily cancelled, and it is restored when G13.1 (polar coordinate interpolation cancel) is commanded. The polar coordinate interpolation mode is cancelled in resetting, and the G18 plane is provided. 3. The method of commanding the circular radius (which address of I, J and K is used) when the circular interpolation (G02, G03) is given on the polar coordinate interpolation plane depends on which axis of the basic coordinate system the 1st axis of the plane (linear axis) corresponds to. - Command is given by I and J taking the linear axis as the X-axis of Xp-Yp plane. - Command is given by J and K taking the linear axis as the Y-axis of Yp-Zp plane. - Command is given by K and I taking the linear aixs as the Z-axis of Zp-Xp plane. The circular radius can also be designated by R command. 4. G-codes capable of command during G12.1 mode are G04, G65, G66, G67, G00, G01, G02, G03, G98, G99, G40, G41 and G42. 5. Move command of an axis other than those on the selected plane during G12.1 mode is executed independently of the polar coordinate interpolation. 6. Tool offset must be commanded in the polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode before G12.1 is commanded. It cannot be commanded during the polar coordinate interpolation mode. Offset amount must not be changed during the polar coordinate interpolation mode. 7. Current position display during G12.1 mode Every current position during the polar coordinate interpolation mode is displayed with an actual coordinate value. However, only âresidue moving distanceâ (REMAIN) is displayed with the residue moving distance on the polar coordinate command plane. 8. Program restart cannot be made for a block during G12.1 mode. 6-24 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-9 6 Virtual-Axis Interpolation: G07 1. Function and purpose Specify with G07 code one of the two circular-interpolation axes for helical or spiral interpolation with synchronous linear interpolation as a virtual axis (a pulse-distributed axis without actual movement), and an interpolation on the plane defined by the remaining circular axis and the linear axis can be obtained along the sine curve which corresponds with the side view of the circular interpolation with synchronous linear interpolation. 2. Programming format G07 α0 M G07 α1 3. 4. To set a virtual axis To interpolate with the virtual axis To cancel the virtual axis Detailed description 1. Only helical or spiral interpolation can be used for the virtual-axis interpolation. 2. In the program section from G07α0 to G07α1, the âalphaâ axis is processed as a virtual axis. If, therefore, the alpha axis is included independently in this section, the machine will remain in dwell status until pulse distribution to the virtual axis is completed. 3. The virtual axis is valid only for automatic operation; it is invalid for manual operation. 4. Protective functions, such as interlock, stored stroke limit, etc., are valid even for the virtual axis. 5. Handle interruption is also valid for the virtual axis. That is, the virtual axis can be shifted through the amount of handle interruption. Sample program G07 Y0 G17G2.1X0Yâ5.I0Jâ10.Z40.P2F50 G07 Y1 Sets the Y-axis as a virtual axis. Sine interpolation on X-Z plane Resets the Y-axis to an actual axis. X-axis X-axis 10. 5. Z-axis 20. 40. â5. â10. Y-axis â5. â10. MEP037 6-25 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-10 Spline Interpolation: G06.1 (Option) 1. Function and purpose The spline interpolation automatically creates a curve that smoothly traces specified points, and thus enables a high-speed and high-accuracy machining for free shapes along smoothly curved tool path. 2. Programming format G06.1 Xx1 Yy1 3. Detailed description A. Setting and cancellation of spline interpolation mode The spline interpolation mode is set by the preparatory function G06.1, and cancelled by another Group 01 command (G00, G01, G02 or G03). Example 1: N100 G00 N200 G06.1 N201 N202 N203 M N290 N300 G01 X_Y_ X_Y_ X_Y_ X_Y_ X_Y_ M X_Y_ X_Y_ P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Pn Pn+1 Pn Pn+1 P2 P3 P5 P4 P1 Fig. 6-1 Interpolated line by spline interpolation In the above example, the spline interpolation is activated at N200 (block for movement from P1 to P2) and it is cancelled at N300. Therefore, a spline curve is created for a group of ending points from P1 to Pn, and interpolation is applied along the created curve. For creating a spline interpolation curve, it is generally required to specify two or more blocks (at least three points to be traced) in the mode. If the spline interpolation mode is set just for one block, the path to the ending point of the block is interpolated in a straight line. Example 2: N100 N200 N300 G01 X_Y_ G06.1 X_Y_ G01 X_Y_ P1 P2 P3 Linear interpolation for the single spline-interpolation block P1 P2 P3 Fig. 6-2 Spline interpolation applied to a single block 6-26 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS B. 6 Division of spline curve in spline-interpolation mode The spline interpolation mode generally creates a continuous curve that smoothly connects all specified points from the beginning of the mode to the end of it. However, the spline curve is divided into two discontinuous curves as often as one of the following conditions is satisfied: - When the angle between linear movement lines of two neighboring blocks is beyond the spline-cancel angle, - When the movement distance of a block exceeds the spline-cancel distance, or - When there is a block without any movement command in the spline-interpolation mode. 1. When the relative angle of two neighboring blocks is beyond the spline-cancel angle Spline-cancel angle LLL Parameter F101 As to the sequence of points P1, P2, P3, L Pn in a spline interpolation mode, when the angle θi made by two continuous vectors Piâ1 Pi and PiPi+1 is larger than F101, the point Pi is regarded as a corner. In that event, the point group is divided into two sections of P1 to Pi and Pi to Pn at Pi, and spline curve is individually created for each section. When the spline-cancel angle is not set (F101 = 0), this dividing function is not available. Example 1: F101 = 80 deg θ3 P4 P3 θ4 θ2 P2 P4 P3 P5 θ5 Forms a corner P5 θ4 > F101 P2 P6 P6 θ6 P1 P1 P7 P7 P4 P3 P5 F101 not set P2 P6 P1 Fig. 6-3 Spline cancel depending on angle 6-27 P7 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS When there are more than one point where θi > F101, such points are treated as corners to divide the point group and multiple spline curves are created for respective sections. θi > F101 θi > F101 Fig. 6-4 Multiple-cornered spline curve depending on angle When any two corner points (where θi > F101) successively exist, the block for the second point is automatically set under control of linear interpolation. Therefore, it can be omitted to specify G01 code in each intermediate block of pick feed, for example, during 2.5dimensional machining, which considerably simplifies the programming. Example 2: N100 N200 N210 M N300 N310 N320 M N400 N410 N420 M N700 N710 F101 < 90 (deg) In the following program (shown in Fig. 6-5), the angle of the Y-directional pick feed to the X-Z plane (of spline interpolation) is always 90°. If F101 is set slightly smaller than 90°, spline interpolation is automatically cancelled in the pick-feed blocks (N310, N410, !!!), which are then linearly interpolated each time. If no value is set for F101, it is required to specify G-codes parenthesized in the program below to change the mode of interpolation. G00 G06.1 (G01) (G06.1) (G01) (G06.1) G01 X_Y_Z_ X_Z_ X_Z_ M X_Z_ Y_ X_Z_ M X_Z_ Y_ X_Z_ M X_Z_ M P1 P2 P3 Pi Pi+1 Pi+2 Pj+1 P1 Pj Z Pj Pj+1 Pj+2 Y Pn X Pn Pi+1 Pi Fig. 6-5 Linear interpolation for pick feed in spline-interpolation mode 6-28 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 2. 6 When the movement distance of a block exceeds the spline-cancel distance Spline-cancel distance LLL Parameter F100 As to the sequence of points P1, P2, P3, !!! Pn in a spline interpolation mode, when the length PiPi+1 of the vector PiPi+1 is longer than F100, the block for point Pi+1 is automatically set under control of linear interpolation, while the preceding and succeeding sections P1 to Pi and Pi+1 to Pn are individually interpolated in spline curves. In this case, the inclination of the tangent vector at Pi (at the end of spline P1 to Pi) and the inclination of the tangent vector at Pi+1 (at the beginning of spline Pi+1 to Pn) do not correspond to that of the line segment PiPi+1 in general. When the spline-cancel distance is not set (F100 = 0), this dividing function is not available. (a) P4P5 > F100, PiPi+1 ⤠F100 for other blocks P4 P3 (b) F100 is not specified P5 P4 P6 P4P5 > F100 P2 P3 P7 P1 P5 P6 P2 P8 P7 P1 P8 Interpolated as follows: P1 to P4: Spline curve, P4 to P5: Straight line, P5 to P8: Spline curve. The whole path P1 to P8 is interpolated in one spline curve. Fig. 6-6 Spline cancel depending on movement distance of a block When there are more than one block where PiPi+1 > F100, all those blocks will individually undergo the linear interpolation. 3. When there is a block without any movement command in the spline-interpolation mode Any block without movement command temporarily cancels the spline interpolation, and the sections before and after such a block will independently be spline-interpolated. N100 N110 N120 G01 X_Y_ G06.1 X_Y_ X_Y_ M N300 N310 N320 M X_Y_ X0 X_Y_ M N500 N510 M X_Y_ X_Y_ G01 P1 P2 P7 P8 P6 P5 P5 (Not moved) P6 P5 P4 Spline from P5 to P8 P3 Forms a corner P2 P8 Spline from P1 to P5 P1 Fig. 6-7 Spline cancel by a block without movement command 6-29 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS C. Fine spline function (curved shape correction) The fine spline function works with spline interpolation and automatically corrects the shape of a spline curve, as required, to make the path of the curve smoother. More specifically, the fine spline function works in the following two cases: - The case that the curve errors in blocks are significant - The case that an unusually short block exists (automatic correction in this case is referred to as fairing.) Automatic correction in the above cases is explained below. 1. Automatic correction for significant curve errors in blocks When the curve data in CAD undergoes micro-segmentation with CAM, approximation using a polygonal line is usually executed with a curve tolerance (chord error) of about 10 microns. At this time, if any inflection points are included in the curve, the micro-segment block including the inflection points may increase in length (see P3 P4 . in the figure below) Also, if the length of this block becomes unbalanced against those of the immediately preceding and succeeding blocks, the spline curve in this zone may have a significant error with respect to the original curve. P2 P1 Tolerance P3 Tolerance (minus side) P0 Spline curve (deviation from the CAD curve is significant) Inflection point in the original curve P7 Tolerance (plus side) CAD curve P4 P6 P5 Fig. 6-8 Spline curve having a significant chord error (inflection points present) This function detects the sections whose chord errors in the curve due to the presence of inflection points become significant, and corrects the shape of the spline curve in that zone automatically so that the chord errors in the curve fall within the data range of the specified parameter. Curve error 1 LLL Parameter F102 6-30 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 If a block in the spline interpolation mode is judged to have inflection points in the spline curve and the maximum chord error of the spline curve from the segment is greater than the value of F102, the shape of that spline curve will be corrected for a maximum chord error not exceeding the value of F102. Uncorrected spline curve Corrected spline curve A B F102 or less Fig. 6-9 Shape correction 1 for spline curve The shape of a curve can also be corrected if the chord error in the spline curve increases due to an imbalance in the lengths of adjoining blocks occurs for any reasons other than the presence of inflection points or for other reasons. Curve error 2 LLL Parameter F104 If a blocks in the spline interpolation mode is judged to have no inflection points in the spline curve and the maximum chord error in the spline curve and block is greater than the value of F104, the shape of that spline curve will be corrected for a maximum chord error not exceeding the value of F104. Uncorrected spline curve Correction Corrected spline curve F104 or less Fig. 6-10 Spline curve having a significant chord error (no inflection points) Remark 1: In all types of spline curve correction, the curve correction function works only for the corresponding block. Therefore, the tangential vectors at the boundaries with the immediately preceding and succeeding blocks become discontinuous. Remark 2: If parameter F102 is set to 0, all blocks regarded as including inflection points will become linear. If parameter F104 is set to 0, all blocks regarded as including no inflection points will become linear. Remark 3: Curved-shape correction based on parameter F102 or F104 usually becomes necessary when adjoining blocks are unbalanced in length. If the ratio of the adjoining block lengths is very large, however, spline interpolation may be temporarily cancelled between the blocks prior to evaluation of the chord error. 6-31 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 2. Automatic correction of the spline curve in an unusually short block (Fairing) When CAD data is developed into micro-segments by CAM, a very small block may be created in the middle of the program because of internal calculation errors. Such a block is often created during creation of a tool diameter offset program which requires convergence calculation, in particular. Since this unusually small block usually occurs at almost right angles to the direction of the spline curve, this curve tends not to become smooth. Distorted spline curve Very small block Fig. 6-11 Distortion of a spline curve due to the effects of a very small block If it detects such an extremely small block during spline interpolation, the shape correction function will remove that block and then connect the preceding and succeeding blocks directly (this is referred to as fairing) to create a smooth spline curve free from distortion. Block fairing length LLL Parameter F103 Assume that the length of the i-th block in spline interpolation mode is taken as li and that the following expressions hold: li â 1 > F103 à 2 li ⤠F103 li + 1 > F103 à 2 In the above case, the ending point of the (iâ1)-th block and the starting point of the i+1 block are moved to the mid-point of the ith block and as a result, the ith block is deleted. Spline interpolation is executed for the sequence of points that has thus been corrected. li ⤠F103 liâ1 > F103 à 2 li+1 > F103 à 2 Correction of the passing point Fig. 6-12 Created spline curve Correction of spline curve passing points by fairing 6-32 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 Assume that the first block in spline interpolation mode is very small and that the following expressions hold: l1 ⤠F103 l2 > F103 à 2 In the above case, the starting point of the second block is changed to that of the first block and as a result, the first block is deleted. l1 ⤠F103 Non-spline block l2 > F103 à 2 Created spline curve Deletion of the passing point Fig. 6-13 Fairing at the starting point of a spline curve Assume that the last block in spline interpolation mode is very small and that the following expressions hold: lnâ1 > F103 à 2 ln ⤠F103 In the above case, the ending point of the (nâ1)-th block is changed to that of the nth block and as a result, the nth block is deleted. ln ⤠F103 lnâ1 > F103 à 2 Non-spline block Created spline curve Deletion of the passing point Fig. 6-14 Fairing at the ending point of a spline curve This function is executed preferentially over the curve slitting function based on the angle of spline cancellation. 6-33 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D. Feed-rate limitation in spline-interpolation mode The modal cutting feed rate F remains valid in general for the spline interpolation; however, if the feed rate should be kept constant, it would yield excessively high acceleration at portions where the curvature is big (the curvature radius is small) as shown in Fig. 6-15. Acceleration: High Curvature: Small F Acceleration: Low Curvature: Big Fig. 6-15 Change of acceleration depending on curvature In the spline-interpolation mode of our NC, the feed rate can be controlled so that it does not exceed the allowable limit, calculated from the related parameters, for pre-interpolation acceleration. To obtain an appropriate feed rate for each block of spline interpolation, the limit feed rate F' is calculated by the equation [1] shown below where the smaller between two radii Rs (curvature radius at the starting point of the block) and Re (curvature radius at its ending point) will be regarded as the reference radius R for the block. The modal feed rate F will then be temporarily overridden by F' for the respective block if F>F', so that the whole spline curve can be interpolated block-by-block at the appropriate feed rate according to the curvature radius. Fâ Pi Pj+1 F : Modal feed rate (mm/min) Rs : Curvature radius at the starting point of block (mm) Re : Curvature radius at the ending point of block (mm) R : Reference curvature radius for the block (mm) R = min {Rs, Re} âV : Maximum of pre-interpolation acceleration Fâ : Limit feed rate (mm/min) Rs Re Fig. 6-16 Feed-rate limitation for spline interpolation F' = R à âV à 60 à 1000 âV = G1bF (mm/min) G1btL (msec) ..... [1] 6-34 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS E. 6 Spline interpolation during tool-diameter offset The spline interpolation can be performed during tool-diameter offset as follows. 1. Tool-diameter offset (2-dimensional) Shown in Fig. 6-17 is an example that the command route is straight in the section P0P1, polygonal line in the section P1P2 . . . Pn that is the object of spline interpolation, and straight in the section PnPn+1. The interpolation route with tool-diameter offset is created by the following procedure. 1) In the first step is created a polygonal line P0'P1'P2' . . . Pn'Pn+1' that is offset by the tool-diameter offset value r compared with the original polygonal line P0P1P2 . . . PnPn+1. 2) Next, a point Pi' where PiPi' = r on the vector PiPi' is determined for all the pass points Pi (i = 2, 3, . . . nâ1) other than the starting point P1 and the ending point Pn of the spline curve. 3) Spline interpolation is now conducted for the polygonal line P1'P2'P3' . . . Pnâ1'Pn' and the curve thus created will act an offset path of tool center for the commanded spline curve. P2' 1) P3' P2 r P1' P0' r Pn+1' Pn' P3 r P1 P0 Pn Pn-1' Pn+1 Pn-1 P2' P2' 2) r P3 P0' P2 P1' P P3' P Pn+1' Pn' r P3 Pn Pn-1' Pn+1 r Pn-1' Spline curve for commanded points offset P2' 3) Pn-1 P3' P2 P0' P0 P1' P Spline curve for commanded points Pn+1' Pn' P3 Pn-1' Pn Pn+1 Pn-1 Fig. 6-17 Spline interpolation during tool-diameter offset The spline curve created in the above-mentioned procedure is not the strict offset, indeed, of the commanded spline curve, but an approximation of it. 6-35 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 2. 3-dimensional tool-diameter offset In the 3-dimensional tool-diameter offset, each point defined with programmed coordinates is first offset through the tool radius ârâ in the direction of the specified normal vector (i, j, k) and then, the serial points thus offset in the spline-interpolation section are connected in a smooth curve, which will act as the path of tool-radius center for the 3-dimensional spline interpolation. F. Others 1. The spline interpolation targets the basic coordinate axes of X, Y and Z; however, it is not always required to specify objective axes on commanding the spline interpolation. Moreover, the spline-interpolation command code (G06.1) can be given in a block without any movement command. Example: N100 G06.1 N200 N300 X_Y_Z_ X_Y_Z_ M N100 X_Y_Z0 M G06.1 N100 G06.1 X_Y_ N200 N300 X_Y_Z_ X_Y_Z_ M M F_ ( â No movement commands) N200 X_Y_Z_ N300 X_Y_Z_ M â M 2. The spline-interpolation command (G06.1) falls under the G-code group 01. 3. In the single-block operation mode, the spline interpolation is cancelled and all the respective blocks will individually undergo the linear interpolation. 4. In tool-path check, the blocks of spline interpolation are not actually displayed in a spline curve but in a polygonal line that connects linearly the repective points, which, in case of tool-diameter offset, will have been offset in the same manner as described in the foregoing article E. 5. During spline interpolation, when feed hold is executed, the block for which the feed hold function has been executed will be interpolated, at the beginning of the restart operation along the spline curve existing before the feed hold function was executed, and then the spline curve in the next block onward will be re-created and interpolation executed. 6. Althouth spline interpolation can also be executed in the high-speed maching mode (G05P2 mode), curve shape correction by fairing becomes invalid in the G05P2 mode. 6-36 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 6-11 NURBS Interpolation: G06.2 (Option) 1. Function The NURBS interpolation function provides interpolation by performing NURBS-defined CNCinternal computations on the command issued from the CAD/CAM system in the NURBS format. With this optional function, a very smooth interpolation path can be obtained since the interpolation process is performed directly without dividing a NURBS-formatted free-form curve into minute line segments. 2. Definition of the NURBS curve NURBS, short for Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline, provides rationalization of the B-spline function. The NURBS curve is defined as follows: Pn n Pnâ1 P(t) = Ni,m(t)wiPi Σ i=0 P2 Ni,1(t) = P1 Ni,k(t) = P(t) n Ni,m(t)wi Σ i=0 (xmâ1 ⤠t ⤠xn+1) 1 (xi ⤠t ⤠xi+1) 0 (t < xi, xi+1 < t) (t â xi) Ni,kâ1(t) (xi+k â t) Ni+1,kâ1(t) + xi+kâ1 â xi xi+k â xi+1 P0 MEP300 Fig. 6-18 NURBS curve - âPiâ and âwiâ denote respectively a control point and the weight on the control point. - âmâ denotes the rank, and the NURBS curve of rank âmâ is a curve of the (mâ1)-th order. - âxiâ denotes a knot (xi ⤠xi+1), and an array of knots [x0 x1 x2 .. xn+m] is referred to as the knot vector. - A variation in parameter âtâ from xmâ1 to xn+1 produces NURBS curve P(t). - Ni, k(t) is the B-spline basis function expressed by the above recurrence equation. Thus the NURBS curve is uniquely defined from the weighted control points and the knot vector. 3. Programming format G6.2[P] K_X_Y_Z_[R_][F_] â NURBS interpolation ON K_X_Y_Z_[R_] K_X_Y_Z_[R_] K_X_Y_Z_[R_] M K_X_Y_Z_[R_] K_ K_ K_ K_ â NURBS interpolation OFF 6-37 P : Rank (omissible) X, Y, Z : Coordinates of the control point R : Weight on the control point (omissible) K : Knot F : Speed of interpolation (omissible) Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Detailed description Set the G6.2 code to select the NURBS interpolation mode. Subsequently, designate the rank, the coordinates and weights of the control points, and the knots to determine the shape of the NURBS curve. The modal code G6.2, which belongs to group 1 of G-codes, is of temporary validity and the modal function relieved by a G6.2 code will automatically be retrieved upon cancellation (termination) of the NURBS interpolation. The G6.2 code can only be omitted for an immediately subsequent setting of the next NURBS curve. Address P is used to set the rank, and the NURBS curve of rank âmâ is of the (mâ1)-th order, that is, set as the rank - P2 for a straight line (curve of the first order), - P3 for a quadratic curve (of the second order) or - P4 for a cubic curve (of the third order). Setting another value than 2, 3 and 4 will cause an alarm, and P4 will be used in default of argument P. The rank, moreover, should be specified in the first block (containing the G6.2 code). Designate the control points in as many sequential blocks as required by specifying their respective coordinates and weights at addresses X, Y, Z and R. Argument R denotes the weight proper to each control point (R1.0 will be used in default), and the more the weight is applied, the closer will be drawn the NURBS curve to the control point. Address K is assigned to knots, and the NURBS curve of rank âmâ for an ânâ number of control points requires an (n+m) number of knots. The required array of knots, referred to as knot vector, is to be designated in sequential blocks, namely: the first knot in the same block as the first control point, the second knot in the same block as the second control point, and so forth. Following the ânâ blocks entered thus, designate the remaining âmâ knots in single-command blocks. The leading single-command block of argument K also notifies the NC of the completion of entering the control points, and the NURBS interpolation function itself will be terminated with the last block for the âmâ knots. 5. Remarks 1. Only the fundamental axes X, Y and Z can undergo the NURBS interpolation. 2. Do not fail to explicitly designate all the required axes X, Y and/or Z in the first block (containing G6.2). Designating a new axis in the second block onward will cause an alarm. 3. Since the first control point serves as the starting point of the NURBS curve, set in the first block (with G6.2) the same coordinates as the final point of the previous block. Otherwise, an alarm will be caused. 4. The setting range for the weight (R) is from 0.0001 to 99.9999. For a setting without decimal point, the least significant digit will be treated as units digit (for example, 1 = 1.0). 5. The knot (K) must be designated for each block. Omission results in an alarm. 6. Knots, as with the weight, can be set down to four decimal digits, and the least significant digit of a setting without decimal point will be regarded as units digit. 7. Knots must be monotonic increasing. Setting a knot smaller than that of the previous block will result in an alarm. 8. The order of addresses in a block can be arbitrary. 6-38 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 9. 6. 6 The shape of the NURBS curve can theoretically be modified very flexibly by changing the rank, the positions and weights of the control points, and the knot vector (the relative intervals of knots). In practice, however, manual editing is almost impossible, and a special CAD/CAM system should be used to edit the NURBS curve and create the program for the interpolation. Generally speaking, do not edit manually the program created by a CAD/CAM system for the NURBS interpolation. Variation of curve according to knot vector The NURBS curve, which in general passes by the control points, can be made to pass through a specific control point by setting a certain number of knots in succession with the same value. In particular, setting as many leading and trailing knots as the rank (value of P) with the respective identical values will cause the NURBS curve to start from the first control point (P0) and to end in the last one (P5). The examples given below exhibit a variation of the NURBS curve according to the knot vector with the control points remaining identical. Example 1: Rank : 4 Number of control points : 6 Knot vector : [ 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 ] The starting point of the curve differs from the first control point. P1 The final point of the curve differs from the last control point. P5 P2 P0 P4 P3 MEP301 Fig. 6-19 Example 2: NURBS curve for continuously increasing knots Rank : 4 Number of control points : 6 Knot vector : [ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 ] [1] [2] Point [1]: The first four (=rank) knots have the same value assigned. Point [2]: The last four (=rank) knots have the same value assigned. The curve starts from the first control point. P1 P5 P2 P0 P3 The curve ends in the last control point. P4 MEP302 Fig. 6-20 NURBS curve for some identical knots 6-39 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Note 1: The NURBS interpolation can be performed only for the NURBS curve that starts and ends from the first and in the last control point. Do not fail, therefore, to set as many leading and trailing knots as the rank with the respective identical values. Note 2: The NURBS interpolation is executed at the designated feed rate (F-code). During the shape correction mode, however, the interpolation speed is controlled in order that the maximum available acceleration may not be exceeded in the section of a considerable curvature. 7. Compatibility with the other functions The tables in this section specify the compatibility of the NURBS interpolation with the other functions. Pay attention to the incompatible functions, especially G-codes. A. Preparatory, feed and auxiliary functions The table below enumerates the G-codes, F-, M-, S-, T- and B-codes with regard to their availability before, with and after G6.2. ': available Ã: not available Code before G6.2 with G6.2 after G6.2 G-codes of group 00 Function all ' à à G-codes of group 01 all ' ' (Note) à ' ' à G22 à à à G23 ' à à ' ' à ' ' à G17 G-codes of group 02 G18 G19 G-codes of group 04 G93 G-codes of group 05 G98 G99 G-codes of group 06 G-codes of group 07 G-codes of group 09 G-codes of group 12 G-codes of group 13 G-codes of group 14 G-codes of group 16 High-speed machining mode Feed function Auxiliary function G20 G21 G40 ' à à G41 à à à G42 à à à G80 ' à à the others à à à G54 - G59 ' ' à G61.1 ' à à G61.2 ' à à G61 à à à G62 à à à G63 à à à G64 ' à à G66 à à à G66.1 à à à G66.2 à à à G67 ' à à G68.5 à à à G69.5 ' à à G5P0 ' à à G5P2 à à à F ' ' à MSTB ' à à 6-40 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS B. 6 Skip instructions The table below enumerates the skip instructions with regard to their availability before, with and after G6.2. ': available Ã: not available Instruction before G6.2 with G6.2 after G6.2 Optional block skip ' ' à Control Out/In ' ' à Note: C. Designating another address than X, Y, Z, R and K in the mode of (i. e. after) G6.2 will cause an alarm. Interruption and restart The table below enumerates the functions for interrupting and restarting the program flow with regard to their availability before, with and after G6.2. ': available Ã: not available Function before G6.2 with G6.2 Single-block operation ' à Feed hold ' à ' Reset ' ' ' Program stop ' à à Optional stop ' à à Manual interruption (Pulse feed and MDI) ' à à Restart ' à à Comparison stop ' à à Note: D. after G6.2 ' (Note) The single-block stop only occurs between blocks with different knots. Tool path check The tool path in a section of the NURBS interpolation can only be displayed as if the control points were linearly interpolated (in the mode of G01). 6-41 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 8. Sample program The program section below refers to a NURBS interpolation of rank 4 (cubic curve) for seven control points. Control points: P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 Knot vector: [ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 ] M M G90 G01 X0 Y120.F3000 Y100. ....... G6.2 P4 X0 Y100.R1.K0.. X10.Y100.R1.K0..... X10.Y60.R1.K0...... X60.Y50.R1.K0...... X80.Y60.R1.K1...... X100.Y40.R1.K2..... X100.Y0 R1.K3...... K4. K4. K4. K4. G01 X120........ M M P0 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P1 P0 NURBS interpolation for the control points Linear interpolation for the control points P4 P2 P3 P5 Y X P6 P7 MEP303 Fig. 6-21 NURBS interpolation and linear interpolation 6-42 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 9. 6 Related alarms The table below enumerates the alarms related to the NURBS interpolation. Alarm list Alarm No. Alarm message Cause Remedy 806 ILLEGAL ADDRESS Another address than those for the nominated axes (X, Y and/or Z), the weight (R) and the knot (K) is set in the G6.2 mode. Clear the inadequate address. 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT 1. The modal condition is not appropriate to set G6.2. 1. Satisfy the modal condition with reference to item 7-A. 2 A block in the G6.2 mode is set without knot (K). 2. Do not fail to set a knot in each block in the G6.2 mode. 3. The number of blocks with the same knot in succession does not reach the rank. 3. Set an appropriate knot vector with reference to example 2 given in item 6. 1. The number of digits exceeds the specification of axis commands (X, Y or Z). 1. Specify the axis command within eight digits. 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT 2. The rank (P) is not admissible. 2. Set 2, 3 or 4 at address P. 3. The value of a knot is not admissible. 3. Set a value in a range of 0.0001 to 99.9999. 4. The knot vector is not monotonic increasing. 4. Check the blocks for a decreasing knot. 816 FEEDRATE ZERO The feed rate (F-code) has not yet been designated. Set an F-code before or in the same block as the G6.2 code. 936 OPTION NOT FOUND The system is not equipped with the optional function of the NURBS interpolation. Purchase and install the optional function. 955 START AND END POINT NOT AGREE The axis coordinates designated in the block of G6.2 do not correspond to the final point of the previous block. Designate in the first block of the NURBS interpolation the same position as the final point of the previous block. 956 RESTART OPERATION NOT ALLOWED The designated restart block falls within the mode of G6.2. Restart operation is not allowed from the midst of the NURBS interpolation. 957 MANUAL INTERRUPT NOT ALLOWED An interruption by pulse handle or MDI operation is commanded in the midst of the G6.2 mode. Manual interruption is not allowed in the midst of the NURBS interpolation. 6-43 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-12 Cylindrical Interpolation Command: G07.1 1. Function and purpose Cylindrical interpolation function refers to a function by which the sides of a cylindrical workpiece are machined. The cylindrical interpolation function capable of programming in the form in which the sides of a cylinder are spread can very easily prepare programs including cylindrical camgrooving. 2. Programming format G07.1 C_; Cylindrical interpolation mode (C: cylindrical radius) G07.1 C0; Cylindrical interpolation cancel mode (These G-codes should be commanded in an independent block.) * When the cylindrical radius (address C) is not commanded, a cylinder is defined taking as radius current value of X-axis (treated as radius value) when G07.1 is commanded. 3. Operation +C +X 360° l C r 2Ïr 180° +Z 0° l +Z D732S0010 The moving distance of rotational axis commanded with an angle is converted to the linear distance on the circumference in CNC. After the conversion, linear interpolation or circular interpolation is given with the other axis. After the interpolation, the calculated movement is converted again to the moving distance of rotational axis. 6-44 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Sample programs In case of the figure on the right: G00 G98; G28 U0 W0; T001T000M06; M200; G18 W0 H0; X52. M203 S1000; G01 X40.F100; G07.1 C50.; G01 C80.F100; G03 Z-25.C90.R50.; G01 Z-80.C225.; G02 Z-75.C270.R55.; G01 Z-25.; G03 Z-20.C280.R80.; G01 C360.; G07.1 C0.; G28 U0; G28 W0 H0; M202; M30; 5. 6 P0âP1âP2âP3âP4âP5âP6âP7 (r = 50 mm) +C P7 360 Unitï¼mm P4 P0 â P1 P1 â P2 P2 â P3 P3 â P4 P4 â P5 P5 â P6 P6 â P7 P5 P6 280 270 225 P3 P2 P1 90 80 P0 â80 â75 â25 â20 +Z Supplement Relation of cylindrical interpolation mode to other functions A. Feed rate designation The feed rate commanded during cylindrical interpolation mode provides a speed on the plane where cylindrical sides are spread. Note: B. The example of programming shown on the right (F10) realizes a C-axis feed of 143°/min [approximation of 10/(4 à 2Ï) à 360]. M G98; G07.1 C4; G01 C_ F10; M Circular interpolation (G02, G03) 1. Plane selection Giving the circular interpolation between the rotational axis and other linear axis during cylindrical interpolation mode requires the command of plane selection (G17, G18, G19). Example: When the circular interpolation is given between Z- and C-axes, the circular interpolation command is G18 Z_ C_ ; G02/G03 Z_ C_ R_ ; 2. Radius designation The circular radius by word address I, J or K cannot be commanded during cylindrical interpolation mode. The circular radius is commanded by address R. The radius must be commanded not with angle, but with mm or inch. 6-45 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS C. Tool nose radius compensation Giving the tool nose radius compensation during cylindrical interpolation mode requires the command of plane selection as with the circular interpolation. However, giving the tool nose radius compensation requires start-up and cancel during cylindrical interpolation mode. Establishing a cylindrical interpolation mode with the tool nose radius compensation given does not provide proper compensation. D. Positioning Positioning (including commands producing the cycle of rapid feed such as G28 and G80 to G89) cannot be accomplished during cylindrical interpolation mode. Positioning requires establishing a cylindircal interpolation cancel mode. E. Coordinate system setting The workpiece coordinate system (G50) cannot be commanded during cylindrical interpolation mode. 6. Notes 1. The cylindrical interpolation mode cannot be re-established during cylindrical interpolation mode. Re-establishment requires the cancel of cylindrical interpolation mode. 2. The cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) cannot be commanded during positioning mode (G00). 3. Accuracy - Automatic operation During cylindrical interpolation mode, the moving distance of rotational axis commanded with an angle is once internally converted to the distance on the circumference. And after arithmetic operation is performed on linear interpolation or circular interpolation with the other axis, the calculated movement is again converted to the angle. As a result, where the cylindrical radius is small, the actual moving distance may differ from the commanded value. However, the error produced then is not accumulated. Actual moving distance = ( MOVE 2 à 2Ïr à (Command value à )) 2 à 2Ïr MOVE MOVE : Moving distance per rotation of rotational axis (Parameter) r : Workpiece radius ( ) : Rounding to the least input increment - Manual operation Performing manual operation during cylindrical interpolation mode in manual absolute ON status may cause an error for the above reason. 4. The hole machining fixed cycle (G83 to G89) cannot be commanded during cylindrical interpolation mode. 6-46 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 6-13 Threading 6-13-1 Constant lead threading: G32 [Series M: G33] 1. Function and purpose The G32 command controls the feedrate of the tool in synchronization with the spindle rotation and so this enables both the straight and scrolled thread cutting of constant leads and the continuous thread cutting. F/E F/E F/E Scrolled thread Straight thread Continuous thread TEP026 2. Programming format G32 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ff; Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Ff: (Normal lead thread cutting commands) Thread ending point addresses and coordinates Lead of long axis (axis of which moving distance is the longest) direction G32 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ee; Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Ee: (Precision lead threading commands) Thread ending point addresses and coordinates Lead of long axis (axis of which moving distance is the longest) direction w X-axis Ending point u 2 α δ2 z Starting point δ1 Z-axis x TEP027 6-47 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 3. Detailed description 1. The E command is also used for the number of threads in inch threading, and whether the thread number or precision lead is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting. (Bit 7 of address F91 is set to 0 for precision lead designation.) 2. The lead in the long axis direction is commanded for the taper thread lead. X Tapered thread section u 2 a° w Z When a < 45° lead is in Z-axis direction. When a > 45° lead is in X-axis direction. When a = 45° lead can be in either Z- or X-axis direction. TEP028 Refer to Section 7-5 for details of lead setting range. Note: It is not possible to designate a lead where the feed rate as converted into perminute feed exceeds the maximum cutting feed rate. 3. The constant peripheral speed control function should not be used here. 4. The spindle speed should be kept constant throughout from the roughing until the finishing. 5. If the feed hold function is employed to stop the feed during thread cutting, the thread height will lose their shape. For this reason, feed hold does not function during thread cutting. If the feed hold button is pressed during threading, block stop will result at the ending point of the block following the block in which threading is completed (no longer in G32 mode). 6. The converted cutting feed rate is compared with the cutting feed clamp rate when threading starts, and if it is found to exceed the clamp rate, an alarm will result. (See the Note in item 2 above.) 7. In order to protect the lead during threading, a converted cutting feed rate may sometimes exceed the cutting feed clamp rate. 8. An illegal lead is produced at the start and at the end of the thread cutting because of servo system delay and other factors. Therefore, it is necessary to command a thread length obtained by adding the illegal lead lengths δ1 and δ2 to the required thread length. 9. The spindle speed is subject to the following restriction: 1 ⤠R ⤠Maximum feed rate/Thread lead where R : Spindle speed (rpm) ⤠Permissible speed of encoder (rpm) Thread lead = mm or inches Maximum feed rate = mm/min or inch/min (this is subject to the restrictions imposed by the machine specifications). 10. During threading, use or disuses of dry run can be specified by setting parameter F111 bit 1. 11. Synchronous feed applies for the threading commands even with an asynchronous feed mode (G98). 6-48 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 12. Spindle override is valid even during threading. But the override value will not be changed during threading. 13. When a threading command is programmed during tool nose R compensation, the compensation is temporarily cancelled and the threading is executed. 14. When the mode is switched to another automatic operation mode while G32 is executed, the following block which does not contain a threading command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops. 15. When the mode is switched to manual operation mode while G32 is executed, the following block which does not contain a threading command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops. In the case of the single block operation, the following block which does not contain a threading command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops. 16. The threading command waits for the single rotation synchronization signal of the rotary encoder and starts movement. With this NC unit, however, movement starts without waiting for this signal when another system issues a threading command during threading by one system. Therefore, threading commands should not be issued by a multiple number of systems. 4. Sample programs X-axis 20.0 Z-axis 90.0 40.0 50.0 TEP029 G32 X90.0 Z40.0 E12.34567; G32 U70.0 Wâ50.0 E12.34567; Absolute data command Incremental data command 6-49 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-13-2 Inch threading: G32 [Series M: G33] 1. Function and purpose If the number of threads per inch in the long axis direction is designated in the G32 command, the feed of the tool will be controlled to synchronize with the spindle rotation. That is, constant lead straight threading, taper threading and continuous threading can be performed. 2. Programming format G32 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ee; Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Thread ending point addresses and coordinates Ee: Number of threads per inch in direction of long axis (axis of which the moving distance is the longest) (Decimal point command can also be assigned.) w X-axis Ending point u 2 α δ2 z Starting point δ1 Z-axis x TEP030 3. Detailed description 1. The number of threads in the long axis direction is assigned as the number of threads per inch. 2. The E code is also used to assign the precision lead length, and whether the thread number or precision lead length is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting (allowed by parameter F91 bit 7). 3. The E command value should be set within the lead value range when converted to the lead. 4. See Subsection 6-13-1 on âConstant lead threadingâ for further details. 6-50 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. 6 Sample programs X-axis 20.0 Z-axis 90.0 40.0 50.0 TEP031 G32 X90.0 Z40.0 E12.0; G32 U70.0 Wâ50.0 E12.0; Absolute data command Incremental data command 6-13-3 Continuous threading Continous threading is possible by designating threading commands continuously. In this way, it is possible to cut special threads whose lead or shape changes. G32 G32 G32 TEP032 6-51 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6-13-4 Variable lead threading: G34 1. Function and purpose Variable lead threading is possible by commanding the increase or decrease of a lead per screw rotation. D732S0012 2. Programming format G34 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ff/Ee Kk; It is the same as the case of straight and taper threading of G32 except an address K. A value commanded with K gives the increase or decrease of a lead per screw rotation. Values which K can take are as follows: Metric input: ±0.00001 to ±999.99999 mm/rev Inch input: ±0.000001 to ±99.999999 in./rev 3. Notes 1. As a result of the increase or decrease of a lead, when exceeding the range of the command value of screw lead or when cutting feed gets excessively high, the feed rate is clamped at rapid feed rate. 2. âFeed hold during threadingâ function is invalid for G34. 6-52 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 6-13-5 Threading with C-axis interpolation: G01.1 1. Function and purpose The G01.1 command in the milling mode enables a simultaneous interpolation on the C-axis and the X- and/or the Z-axis for straight, tapered or scrolled thread cutting of constant leads. 2. Programming format G01.1 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ff Ss; Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Thread ending point addresses and coordinates (mm or in.) Ff: Lead of long axis (axis of which moving distance is the longest) direction Ss: Rotational speed of C-axis (rpm) Set parameter F111 bit 3 to select the direction of C-axis rotation: F111 bit 3 = 0 : Normal rotation of C-axis = 1 : Reversed rotation of C-axis 3. Detailed description 1. For tapered thread cutting, specify the lead in the long axis direction. Straight thread +X Lead Scrolled thread +Z a U 2 Lead Tapered thread Lead Tapered thread section Lead in Z-axis direction for a ⤠45° Lead in X-axis direction for a > 45° 2. Range of specification of lead (address F) - For data input in mm : 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm - For data input in in. : 0.000001 to 9.999999 in. 3. Specification range of rotational speed (address S) 1 ⤠S ⤠Max. speed of C-axis rotation - The maximum speed of C-axis rotation (1/360 of value âCâ of parameter M3) depends on the respective machine model. - Do not create a program nor operate the overriding keys in such a manner that the maximum speed of C-axis rotation should be exceeded. 4. During execution of G01.1 command, it is possible, indeed, but not advisable at all to apply feed hold or to change the override value for fear of deformation of the thread. 5. The speed of C-axis rotation should be kept constant throughout from roughing till finishing. 6. The number of C-axis revolutions for execution of one G01.1 command must not exceed 2982. 6-53 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Sample programs G98 G97; G28 U0 W0; T001T000M06; G50 X300.Z100.; M200; G00 X100.Z2.C0.; G01.1 W-100.F2.S400;(*) G00 U10.; W100.C0.; U-11.; G01.1 W-100.F2.S400;(*) G00 U11.; W100.C0.; G00 U-12.; G01.1 W-100.F2.S400;(*) G00 U12.; W100.; G28 U0 W0.; M202; M30; (*) Chuck Jaw Workpiece +X +Z Command for threading with C-axis control, 2 mm lead and 400 rpm 6-54 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 6-13-6 Automatic correction of threading start position (for overriding in a threading cycle) 1. Function and purpose The phase of the spindle is automatically corrected at the start of each threading pass to prevent the threading position from deviating even when the spindle override value is updated in the middle of a threading cycle. The use of this option allows the thread cutting conditions to be changed even in the flow of a threading cycle. Ending point as programmed Starting point as programmed G00 G00 G00 Starting point of machining 1st threading pass 2nd threading pass Automatic phase correction for the same angular position at the start of threading Spindle override value changed during 1st pass Overridden speed validated from 2nd pass 2. Acceleration distance Related G-codes The automatic correction function is applicable to the following G-codes of threading: Function G32 Turning fixed cycle for threading G92 Compound fixed cycle for threading G76 Note: 3. G-code series T Thread cutting (straight, taper) Variable-lead threading (G34), or continuous threading for different-pitch sections, requires continuous or transitional acceleration between blocks, as well as different distances of acceleration. The automatic correction function cannot guarantee correct thread forming for a speed overriding in the middle of these threading cycles. Detailed description 1. The automatic correction function is an option. 6-55 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 2. Even in the middle of a threading pass, operating the turning/milling spindle speed overriding keys immediately changes the speed indication in percentages, indeed, but the actual speed will not accordingly change till completion of the threading block (or a series of the threading blocks in the case of âcontinuous threadingâ). Overridden speed validated from this position G00 G00 G00 Starting point of machining G32 Ending point as programmed Starting point as programmed Spindle override value changed during a threading pass 3. The function for automatic correction of threading start position does not include corresponding adjustment of the acceleration distance for threading. To use an overriding value above 100%, therefore, specify in the machining program such an acceleration distance as to allow for the maximum spindle speed. 4. As for the end of thread, the length of the upward cutting path on the workpiece will become shorter, or greater, for a spindle override value below, or above, 100%. Upward cutting path for 100% Upward cutting path for more than 100% Upward cutting path for less than 100% Root of thread Workpiece front view Changes in the upward cutting path according to the spindle override value 4. Notes 1. This function is not valid for a threading by simultaneous cutting with both turrets. 2. This function is not valid for a threading by synchronization of both turning spindles. 3. This function is only valid for a longitudinal threading (by cutting feed on the Z-axis). 4. After changing the spindle override value the execution of a threading block should not be started until spindle rotation has been stabilized; otherwise the starting section will only be cut to an incomplete thread. 5. Do not allow a threading block to be executed with the spindle override value set to 0%; otherwise the machine operation will be stopped at the beginning of that block. 6-56 Return to Library INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 6 6-14 Helical Interpolation: G17, G18, G19 and G02, G03 1. Function and purpose Command G02 or G03 with a designation for the third axis allows synchronous circular interpolation on the plane specified by plane-selection command G17, G18 or G19 with the linear interpolation on the third axis. 2. Programming format G17 G02 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 ; Feed rate Number of pitches Arc center coordinates Linear axis ending point coordinate Arc ending point coordinates (G03) or G17 G02 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Rr2 Pp2 Ff2 ; Feed rate Number of pitches Arc radius Linear axis ending point Arc ending point coordinates (G03) 3. Detailed description z1 p1-th 2nd 1st l X X θ θe θs Y Z Y H734P0001 1. For helical interpolation, movement designation is additionally required for one to two linear axes not forming the plane for circular interpolation. 2. The velocity in the tangential direction must be designated as the feed rate F. 3. The pitch l is calculated as follows: z1 l = (2Ï â¢ p + θ)/2Ï 1 θ = θe â θs = tan where â1 ye â1 ys â tan ï¼0 ⤠θ < 2Ïï¼ xe xs (xs, ys): relative coordinates of starting point with respect to the arc center (xe, ye): relative coordinates of ending point with respect to the arc center 6-57 Return to Library 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4. Address P can be omitted if the number of pitches is 1. 5. Plane selection As with circular interpolation, the circular-interpolation plane for helical interpolation is determined by the plane-selection code and axis addresses. The basic programming procedure for helical interpolation is: selecting a circular-interpolation plane using a planeselection command (G17, G18 or G19), and then designating the two axis addresses for circular interpolation and the address of one axis (perpendicular to the circular-interpolation plane) for linear interpolation. - X-Y plane circular, Z-axis linear After setting G02 (or G03) and G17 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses X, Y and Z. - Z-X plane circular, Y-axis linear After setting G02 (or G03) and G18 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses Z, X and Y. - Y-Z plane circular, X-axis linear After setting G02 (or G03) and G19 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses Y, Z and X. 4. Sample programs Example 1: G28 U0 W0 Y0; X G50 X0 Z0 Y0; G17 G03 X100. Y50. Z-50. R50. F1000; 100. Ending point â50. Z Starting point 50. H734P0002 Y Example 2: G28 U0 W0 Y0; X G50 X0 Z0 Y0; G17 G03 X100. Y50. Z-50. R50. P2 F1000; 100. Ending point â50. Z 50. Starting point Y H734P0003 6-58 E Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 7 7-1 7 FEED FUNCTIONS Rapid Traverse Rates A separate rapid traverse rate can be set for each axis. The maximum rate of rapid traverse, however, is limited according to the particular machine specifications. Refer to the Operating manual for the machine for rapid traverse rates. Two types of tool paths are available for positioning: an interpolation type, which uses a line to perform interpolation from the starting point through the ending point, and a non-interpolation type, which moves the tool at the maximum speed of each axis. Use a parameter to select the interpolation type or the non-interpolation type. The positioning time is the same for both types. 7-2 Cutting Feed Rates A cutting feed rate must be designated using address F and an eight-digit number (F8-digit direct designation). The F8 digits must consist of five integral digits and three decimal digits, with the decimal point. Cutting feed rates become valid for commands G01, G02, G03, G32 and G34. Example: Asynchronous feed Feed rate G01 X100. Z100. F200*; 200.0 mm/min G01 X100. Z100. F123.4; 123.4 mm/min G01 X100. Z100. F56.789; 56.789 mm/min * It means the same if F200. or F200.000 is set in stead of F200. Note: 7-3 An alarm (No. 713) will result if a feed rate command is not set for the first cutting command (G01, G02, G03, G32 or G34) that is read firstly after power-on. Asynchronous/Synchronous Feed: G98/G99 [Series M: G94/G95] 1. Function and purpose Command G99 allows a feed rate per revolution to be set using an F-code. To use this command, a rotational encoder must be mounted on the spindle. 2. Programming format G98: Feed per minute (/min) [Asynchronous feed] G99: Feed per revolution (/rev) [Synchronous feed] Since the command G99 is modal command, it will remain valid until the command G98 is issued. 7-1 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS 3. Detailed description 1. Feed rates that can be set using F-codes are listed in the table below. The table below also lists synchronous feed rates, which are to be set in millimeters (or inches) per spindle revolution using F-codes. Input in mm Input in inches 2. G98F_ (Feed per minute) G99F_ (Feed per revolution) 1 to 240000 mm/min (F1 to F240000) 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev (F1 to F5000000) 0.01 to 9600.00 in./min (F1 to F960000) 0.000001 to 9.999999 in./rev (F1 to F9999999) The effective feed rate per revolution, that is, the actual moving speed of the machine, can be calculated as follows: FC = F à N à OVR (Expression 1) where FC: F: N: OVR: Effective feed rate (mm/min or inches/min) Designated feed rate (mm/rev or inches/rev) Spindle speed (rpm) Cutting feed override If multiple axes are selected at the same time, effective feed rate FC given by expression 1 above will become valid for the corresponding vectorial direction. 4. Remarks 1. An effective feed rate that is expressed in a feed rate per minute (mm/min or inches/min) is displayed on the POSITION display. 2. If the effective feed rate is larger than the cutting feed clamping speed, that clamping speed will become valid. 3. During machine lock high-speed processing, the feed rate is 60000 mm/min (or 2362 inches/min, 60000 deg/min) regardless of the commanded speed and spindle speed. When high-speed processing is not undertaken, the feed rate is the same as for nonmachine lock conditions. 4. In the dry run mode, feed will become asynchronous and the machine will operate at an externally preset feed rate (mm/min or inches/min). 5. According to the setting of bit 1 of parameter F93, synchronous or asynchronous feed mode (G99 or G98) is automatically made valid upon power-on or by execution of M02 or M30. 7-2 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 7-4 7 Selecting a Feed Rate and Effects on Each Control Axis As mentioned earlier, the machine has various control axes. These control axes can be broadly divided into linear axes, which control linear motions, and rotational axes, which control rotational motions. Feed rates for control axes have different effects on the tool speed, which is of great importance for machining quality, according to the particular type of axis controlled. The amount of displacement must be designated for each axis, whereas the feed rate is to be designated as a single value for the intended tool movement. Before letting the machine control two or more axes at the same time, therefore, you must understand how the feed rate designated will act on each axis. In terms of this, selection of a feed rate is described below. 1. Controlling linear axes The feed rate that has been selected using an F-code acts as a linear velocity in the moving direction of the tool, irrespective of whether only one axis is to be controlled or multiple axes simultaneously. Example: If linear axes (X- and Z-axes) are to be controlled using a feed rate of f: X P2 (Tool ending point) x âfâ denotes the velocity in this direction. P1 (Tool starting point) z Z TEP033 When only linear axes are to be controlled, setting of a cutting feed rate itself is only required. The feed rate for each axis refers to that component of the specified feed rate which corresponds with the ratio of movement stroke on the respective axis to the actual movement distance. In the example shown above: x X-axis feed rate = f à 2 x + z2 Z-axis feed rate = f à 2. z 2 x + z2 Controlling a rotational axis When a rotational axis is to be controlled, the selected feed rate acts as the rotating speed of the rotational axis, that is, as an angular velocity. Thus, the cutting speed in the moving direction of the tool, that is, a linear velocity varies according to the distance from the rotational center to the tool. This distance must be considered when setting a feed rate in the program. 7-3 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS Example 1: If a rotational axis (C-axis) is to be controlled using a feed rate of f (deg/min): P2 (Tool ending point) âfâ denotes the angular velocity. The linear velocity is obtainable from Ï!r!f 180 c Center of rotation P1 (Tool ending point) r TEP034 In this case, the cutting speed in the moving direction of the tool (linear velocity) âfcâ is calculated by: Ïâ¢r fc = f à 180 Hence, the feed rate to be programmed for the required value fc is: 180 f = fc à Ïâ¢r Note: If the tool is to be moved by controlling linear axes along the circumference using the circular interpolation function, the feed rate programmed is the velocity acting in the moving direction of the tool, that is, in the tangential direction. Example 2: If linear axes (X- and Z-axes) are to be controlled at a feed rate of f using the circular interpolation function: X P2 x âfâ denotes this linear velocity. P1 z Z k TEP036 In this case, the X- and Z-axis feed rates will change with the movement of the tool. The resultant velocity, however, will be kept at the constant value, f. 7-4 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 3. 7 Controlling a linear axis and a rotational axis at the same time The NC unit controls linear axes and rotational axes in exactly the same manner. For control of rotational axes, data given as a coordinate word (C or H) is handled as an angle, and data given as a feed rate (F) is handled as a linear velocity. In other words, an angle of one degree for a rotational axis is handled as equivalent to a moving distance of 1 mm for a linear axis. Thus, for simultaneous control of a linear axis and a rotational axis, the magnitudes of the individual axis components of the data that has been given by F are the same as those existing during linear axis control described previously in Subparagraph 1. above. In this case, however, the velocity components during linear axis control remain constant in both magnitude and direction, whereas those of rotational axis control change in direction according to the movement of the tool. Therefore, the resulting feed rate in the moving direction of the tool changes as the tool moves. Example: If a linear axis (X-axis) and a rotational axis (C-axis) are to be controlled at the same time at a feed rate of f: ft fc P2 - âfxâ is constant in both size and direction. - âfcâ is constant in size, but varies in direction. - âftâ varies in both size and direction. fx fc r θ ft P1 fx c x θ Center of rotation MEP036 X-axis incremental command data is expressed here as x, and that of C-axis as c. The X-axis feed rate (linear velocity), fx, and the C-axis feed rate (angular velocity), Ï, can be calculated as follows: fx = f à x 2 2 x +c !!!!!!! [1] Ï=fà c 2 x + c2 !!!!!!! [2] The linear velocity âfcâ that relates to C-axis control is expressed as: fc = Ï â¢ Ïâ¢r !!!!!!! [3] 180 If the velocity in the moving direction of the tool at starting point P1 is taken as âftâ, and its X- and Y-axis components as âftxâ and âftyâ respectively, then one can express âftxâ and âftyâ as follows: ftx = âr sin ( Ï Ï Î¸) Ã Ï + fx !!!!!!! [4] 180 180 fty = âr cos ( Ï Ï Î¸) Ã Ï 180 180 !!!!!!! [5] where r denotes the distance (in millimeters) from the rotational center to the tool, and q denotes the angle (in degrees) of starting point P1 to the X-axis at the rotational center. 7-5 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS From expressions [1] through [5] above, the resultant velocity âftâ is: ft = ftx2 + fty2 =fà x2 â x ⢠c ⢠r sin ( Ï Î¸) Ï + ( Ï â¢ r ⢠c )2 180 90 180 !!!!!!! [6] x2 + c2 The feed rate f that is to be set in the program must be therefore: f = ft à x2 + c2 x â x ⢠c ⢠r sin ( Ï Î¸) Ï + ( Ï â¢ r ⢠c )2 !!!!!!! [7] 2 180 90 180 In expression [6], âftâ is the velocity at starting point P1 and thus the value of ft changes with that of θ which changes according to the rotational angle of the C-axis. To keep cutting speed âftâ as constant as possible, the rotational angle of the C-axis in one block must be minimized to ensure a minimum rate of change of θ. 7-5 Threading Leads The thread lead in the threading mode (G32, G34, G76 or G92) can be designated using a seven-digit value preceded by address F or eight-digit value preceded by address E. The thread lead command range is 0.0001 to 999.9999 mm/rev (F with 7 digits) or 0.0001 to 999.99999 mm/rev (E8-digit) (with unit of data setting of microns). Thread cutting (metric input) Unit of program data input 0.0001 mm Command address F (mm/rev) Unit of minimum data setting Range of command data 0.0001 to 500.0000 E (mm/rev) E (Number of threads per inch) 1 (=0.0001) (1.=1.0000) 1 (=1) (1.=1.00) 0.0001 to 999.9999 0.01 to 9999999.9 Thread cutting (inch input) Unit of program data input Command address 0.000001 inch F (in./rev) Unit of minimum data setting Range of command data 0.000001 to 9.999999 7-6 E (in./rev) E (Number of threads per inch) 1 (=0.000001) (1.=1.000000) 1 (=1) (1.=1.0000) 0.000001 to 99.999999 0.0001 to 9999.9999 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 7-6 7 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration The rapid traverse and manual feed acceleration/deceleration pattern is linear acceleration and linear deceleration. Time constant TR can be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1 msec steps within a range from 1 to 500 msec. The cutting feed (not manual feed) acceleration/deceleration pattern is exponential acceleration/deceleration. Time constant TC can be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1 msec steps within a range from 1 to 500 msec. (Normally, the same time constant is set for each axis.) f f Continuous command TR TR Continuous command t t Td Tc Rapid feed acceleration/deceleration pattern (TR = Rapid feed time constant) (Td = Deceleration check time) Tc Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration pattern (Tc = Cutting feed time constant) TEP037 During rapid traverse and manual feed, the following block is executed after the command pulse of the current block has become â0â and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit has become â0â. During cutting feed, the following block is executed as soon as the command pulse of the current block becomes â0â and also the following block can be executed when an external signal (error detection) can detect that the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit has reached â0â. When the in-position check has been made valid (selected by machine parameter) during the deceleration check, it is first confirmed that the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit has reached â0â, then it is checked that the position deviation is less than the parameter setting, and finally the following block is executed. 7-7 Speed Clamp This function exercises control over the actual cutting feed rate in which override has been applied to the cutting feed rate command so that the speed clamp value preset independently for each axis is not exceeded. Note: Speed clamping is not applied to synchronous feed and threading. 7-7 Return to Library 7 7-8 FEED FUNCTIONS Exact-Stop Check Command: G09 1. Function and purpose Only after the in-position status has been checked following machine deceleration and stop or after deceleration checking time has been passed, may you want to start the next block command in order to reduce possible machine shocks due to abrupt changes in tool feed rate and to minimize any rounding of workpieces during corner cutting. An exact-stop check function is provided for these purposes. 2. Programming format G09 G01 (G02, G03) ; Exact-stop check command G09 is valid only for the cutting command code (G01, G02, or G03) that has been set in that block. 3. Sample program N001 G09 G01 N002 f X100.000 F150; The next block is executed after an in-position status check following machine deceleration and stop. Z100.000 ; (Selected feedrate) Tool X-axis With G09 available N001 N001 Time Z-axis Without G09 N002 N002 The solid line indicates a feedrate pattern with the G09 available. The dotted line indicates a feedrate pattern without the G09. TEP038 Fig. 7-1 Validity of exact-stop check 7-8 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 4. 7 Detailed description A. Continuous cutting feed commands Preceding block Next block Ts TEP039 Fig. 7-2 B. Continuous cutting feed commands Cutting feed commands with in-position status check Preceding block Next block Lc Ts Ts TEP040 Fig. 7-3 Block-to-block connection in cutting feed in-position status check mode In Fig. 7-2 and 7-3 above, Ts: Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant Lc: In-position width As shown in Fig. 7-3, in-position width Lc represents the remaining distance within the block immediately preceding the next block to be executed. The in-position width helps keep any rounding of workpieces during corner cutting within a fixed level. If rounding of workpieces at corners is to be completely suppressed, include dwell command G04 between cutting blocks. Lc Next block Preceding block TEP041 7-9 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS C. With deceleration check - With linear acceleration/deceleration Next block Preceding block Ts Ts : Acceliration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = Ts + (0 to 14ms) Td TEP042 - With exponential acceleration/deceleration Next block Preceding block Ts Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = 2 à Ts + (0 to 14ms) Td TEP043 - With exponential acceleration/linear deceleration Preceding block Next block 2ÃTs Td Ts Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = 2 à Ts + (0 to 14ms) TEP044 The time required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the cutting feed deceleration check times of each axis determined by the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constants and by the cutting feed acceleration/ deceleration mode of the axes commanded simultaneously. 7-10 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 7-9 7 Exact-Stop Check Mode Command: G61 1. Function and purpose Unlike exact-stop check command G09 which performs an in-position status check on that block only, command G61 functions as a modal command. That is, this command acts on all its succeeding cutting commands (G01, G02, and G03) so that deceleration occurs at the end of each block, followed by an in-position status check. This command is cleared by automatic corner override command G62 or cutting mode command G64. 2. Programming format G61; 7-10 Automatic Corner Override Command: G62 1. Function and purpose Command G62 automatically overrides in the tool-diameter offset mode the selected feed rate to reduce the tool load during inner-corner cutting or automatic inner-corner rounding. Once this command has been issued, the automatic corner override function will remain valid until it is cancelled by tool-diameter offsetting cancellation command G40, exact-stop check mode command G61, or cutting mode command G64. 2. Programming format G62 ; 3. Detailed description A. Inner-corner cutting When inner corner of a workpiece is cut as shown in the figure below, the load on the tool increases because of large amount of cutting. Using G62 in such a case allows the cutting feed rate to be automatically overriden within the preset zone, and thus the tool load to be reduced to accomplish appropriate cutting. This function, however, is valid only for programming the as-finished shape of a workpiece. θ Programmed path (Finish shape) Cutting amount Workpiece S [1] Workpiece surface shape [2] [3] Tool center path Cutting amount Ci Tool θ : Inner-corner maximum angle Ci : Deceleration zone (IN) MEP046 Fig. 7-4 Inner-corner cutting 7-11 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS - When the automatic corner override function is not used: In the figure above, as the tool is moving in order of positions [1]â[2]â[3], the load on the tool increases because the cutting amount at position [3] is larger than that of position [2] by the area of hatched section S. - When the automatic corner override function is used: In the figure above, if maximum angle q of the inner corners is smaller than that preset in the appropriate parameter, the feed rate is automatically overriden with the preset value for movement through deceleration zone Ci. Set the following parameters as user parameters: - E22: Override 0 to 100 (%) - F21: Inner-corner maximum angle θ 0 to 180 (deg) - F22: Deceleration zone Ci data 0 to 99999.999 (mm) or to 3937.000 (inches) For further details of parameter setting, refer to the description in the Operating manual and the Parameter list. B. Automatic corner rounding Workpiece surface shape Programmed path Tool center path Corner rounding center Workpiece Corner rounding section Ci Cutting amount TEP046 For inner corner cutting with automatic corner rounding, override will be effected as set in parameter through the deceleration zone Ci and corner rounding section (No check made about angle). 7-12 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 4. 7 Operation examples - Line-to-line corner Programmed path θ Tool center path Ci Tool MEP047 The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through deceleration zone Ci. - Line-to-circular (outside offsetting) corner Programmed path Tool center path θ Ci Tool MEP048 The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through deceleration zone Ci. - Arc(internal compensation)-to-line corner θ Programmed path Tool center path Ci Tool Tool MEP049 The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through deceleration zone Ci. Note: Data of deceleration zone Ci at which automatic overriding occurs represents the length of the arc for a circular interpolation command. 7-13 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS - Arc(internal compensation)-to-arc (external compensation) corner N2 θ N1 Programmed path Ci Tool center path MEP050 The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through deceleration zone Ci. 5. Correlationships to other command functions Function 6. Override at corners Cutting feedrate override Automatic corner override is applied after cutting feed override. Override cancel Automatic corner override is not cancelled by override cancel. Feed rate clamp Valid (for the feed rate after automatic corner override) Dry run Automatic corner override is invalid. Synchronous feed A synchronous feed rate is automatically corner-overridden. Skip (G31) During tool-diameter offset, G31 will result in a program error. Machine lock Valid G00 Invalid G01 Valid G02, G03 Valid Precautions 1. Automatic corner override is valid only during the G01, G02 or G03 modes; it is invalid during the G00 mode. Also, when the command mode is changed over from G00 to G01, G02, or G03 (or vice versa) at a corner, automatic corner override is not performed on the G00-containing block at that corner. 2. Even in the automatic corner override mode, automatic corner override is not performed until the tool diameter compensation mode has been set. 3. Automatic corner override does not occur at corners where tool diameter compensation is to start or to be cancelled. 7-14 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS Startup block Programmed path 7 Cancel block Tool center path Automatic corner override remains invalid. TEP051 4. Automatic corner override does not occur at corners where tool diameter compensation I, J and K vector commands are to be executed. Programmed path Tool center path Block including I and J vector commands Automatic corner override remains invalid. (G41X_Y_I_J_;) TEP052 5. Automatic corner override occurs only when crossing points can be calculated. Crossing points can not be calculated in the following case: - Four or more blocks that do not include move command appear in succession. 6. For circular interpolation, the deceleration zone is represented as the length of the arc. 7. The parameter-set angle of an inner corner is applied to the angle existing on the programmed path. 8. Setting the maximum angle to 0 or 180 degrees in the angle parameter results in an automatic corner override failure. 9. Setting the override to 0 or 100 in the override parameter results in an automatic corner override failure. 7-15 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS 7-11 Cutting Mode Command: G64 1. Function and purpose Command G64 enters the NC unit into a control mode proper to obtain smoothly cut surfaces. Unlike the exact-stop check mode (G61 command mode), the cutting mode allows the next block to be executed without decelerating/stopping the machine between cutting feed blocks. The G64 command mode is cleared by exact-stop check mode command G61 or automatic corner override command G62. In the initial state of the NC unit, the cutting mode is selected. 2. Programming format G64 ; 7-12 Geometry Compensation/Accuracy Coefficient: G61.1/,K 7-12-1 Geometry compensation function: G61.1 1. Function and purpose The geometry compensation function (G61.1) is provided to reduce conventional geometry errors caused by delayed follow-up of smoothing circuits and servo systems. The geometry compensation function is canceled, or replaced, by the functions of exact stop mode (G61), automatic corner override (G62) and cutting mode (G64). The geometry compensation function is composed of the following four functions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration Feed forward control Optimum corner deceleration Precise vector compensation Refer to Section 11-2 âGeometry Compensation Functionâ in Chapter 3 of the Operating Manual for the description of the above functions. 2. Programming format G61.1; 3. Sample program N001 G0X100.Z100. G61.1G01F2000 U10.W30. U5.W30. U-5.W30. U-10.W10. U-30.W5. G64 Selection of the geometry compensation function Cancellation of the geometry compensation function 7-16 Return to Library FEED FUNCTIONS 4. 7 Remarks 1. The geometry compensation function cannot be selected or canceled for EIA/ISO programs by the setting of the parameter F72 (which is only effective for MAZATROL programs). 2. The geometry compensation is an optional function. On machines without corresponding option the code G61.1 can only lead to an alarm (808 MIS-SET G CODE). 3. The geometry compensation function is suspended during execution of the following operations: Rapid traverse of non-interpolation type (according to bit 6 of parameter F91), Synchronous tapping, Measurement (skipping), Constant peripheral speed control, Threading. 4. The pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is effective from the block of G61.1 onward. 7-12-2 Accuracy coefficient (,K) 1. Function and purpose In the mode of geometry compensation (G61.1) the feed of the tool is automatically decelerated at relevant corners and for circular motions by the optimal corner deceleration and the circular feed limitation, respectively, in order to enhance the machining accuracy. Specifying an accuracy coefficient in the machining program can further improve the accuracy by additionally decelerating the feed for the sections concerned. 2. Programming format ,K_; Specify the rate of reduction of the corner deceleration speed and the circular feed rate limitation in percentage terms. The accuracy coefficient is canceled in the following cases: - Resetting is performed, - The geometry compensation function is canceled (by G64), - A command of â,K0â is given. 3. Sample program N001 G61.1 N200 G1U_W_,K30 N300 U_W_ The rate of feed for a corner deceleration or circular motion in the section from this block onward will be reduced to 70% of the value applied in default of the accuracy coefficient command. N400 ⦠N001 G61.1 N200 G2I-10.,K30 Deceleration to 70% occurs for this block only. N300 G1U10.,K0 The accuracy coefficient is canceled from this block onward. N400 ⦠4. Remarks 1. The accuracy coefficient cannot be specified in a MAZATROL program. 2. Specifying an accuracy coefficient 1 to 99 at address â,Kâ increases the machining time according to the additional deceleration at relevant corners and for circular motions. 7-17 Return to Library 7 FEED FUNCTIONS - NOTE - 7-18 E Return to Library DWELL FUNCTIONS 8 8 DWELL FUNCTIONS The start of execution of the next block can be delayed using a G04 command. 8-1 Dwell Command in Time: (G98) G04 [Series M: (G94) G04] 1. Function and purpose Setting command G04 in the feed-per-second mode (command G98) delays the start of execution of the next block for the specified time. 2. Programming format G98 G04 X/U_; or G98 G04 P_; Data must be set in 0.001 seconds. For address P, the decimal point is not available. Setting a decimal point will cause an alarm. 3. Detailed description 1. 2. The setting range for dwell time is as follows: Unit of data setting Range for address X or U Range for address P 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inches 0.001 to 99999.999 (sec) 1 to 99999999 (à 0.001 sec) The count for the dwell command which is preceded by a block with cutting-feed command is not started until the movement of the preceding block has been brought to a complete stop. Cutting command in the preceding block Next block Dwell command Dwell time TEP053 If the dwell command is given in one block together with an M-, S- T- or B-code, the dwell count and the execution of the respective code will be started at the same time. 3. If the bit 2 of parameter F92 is set to 1, dwell command value is always processed in time specification irrespective of G98 and G99 modes. 8-1 Return to Library 8 DWELL FUNCTIONS 4. Sample programs - When data is to be set in 0.01 mm, 0.001 mm or 0.0001 inches: G04 X 500 ;.....................Dwell time = 0.5 sec G04 X 5000 ;....................Dwell time = 5.0 sec G04 X 5. ;.......................Dwell time = 5.0 sec G04 P 5000 ;....................Dwell time = 5.0 sec G04 P 12.345 ; ..................Alarm - When data is to be set in 0.0001 inches and dwell time is included before G04: X5. G04 ;.......................Dwell time = 50 sec (Equivalent to X50000G04.) 8-2 Dwell Command in Number of Revolutions: (G99) G04 [Series M: (G95) G04] 1. Function and purpose Setting command G04 in the feed-per-revolution mode (command G99) suspends the start of execution of the next block until the spindle has rotated the specified number of revolutions. 2. Programming format G99 G04 X/U_ ; or G99 G04 P_ ; Data must be set in 0.001 revolutions. For address P, the decimal point is not available. Setting a decimal point will cause an alarm. 3. Detailed description 1. The setting range for number of dwell revolutions is as follows: Unit of data setting 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inches 2. Range for address X or U 0.001 to 99999.999 (rev) Range for address P 1 to 99999999 (à 0.001 rev) The count for the dwell command which is preceded by a block with cutting-feed command is not started until the movement of the preceding block has been brought to a complete stop. Cut command in the preceding block Next block Dwell command Revolutions for dwell (12.345 rev) TEP053 If the dwell command is given in one block together with an M-, S- T- or B-code, the dwell count and the execution of the respective code will be started at the same time. 3. The dwell function is also valid during the machine lock mode. 8-2 Return to Library DWELL FUNCTIONS 8 4. During rest of the spindle, dwell count is also halted. When the spindle restarts rotating, dwell count will also restart. 5. If the bit 2 of parameter F92 is set to 1, dwell command value is alway processed in time specification. 6. This function cannot be used unless the position detecting encoder is provided to the spindle. 8-3 Return to Library 8 DWELL FUNCTIONS - NOTE - 8-4 E Return to Library MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS 9 9-1 9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS Miscellaneous Functions (M3-Digit) Miscellaneous functions, which are also referred to as M-code functions, give spindle forward/ backward rotation and stop commands, coolant on/off commands, and other auxiliary commands to the NC machine. For the NC unit, these functions must be selected using M3-digit data (three-digit data preceded by address M). Up to four sets of M3-digit data can be included in one block. Example: G00 Xx1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4; If five or more sets of M3-digit data are set, only the last four sets will become valid. Refer to the machine specification for more specific relationships between available data and functions. For M-codes M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, M998 and M999, the next block of data is not read into the input buffer since pre-reading is disabled automatically. The M-codes can be included in any block that contains other command codes. If, however, the M-codes are included in a block that contains move commands, then the execution priority will be either - the M-code functions are executed after completion of movement, or - the M-code functions are executed together with movement. It depends on the machine specifications which type of processing is applied. Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all M commands except M98 and M99. The following lists six types of special M-code functions: 1. Program Stop: M00 When this M-code is read, the tape reader will stop reading subsequent block. Whether the machine function such as spindle rotation and coolant will also stop depends on the machine specifications. The machine operation is restarted by pressing the cycle start button on the operation panel. Whether resetting can be initiated by M00 or not also depends on the machine specifications. 2. Optional Stop: M01 When the M01 code is read with the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu function set to ON, the tape reader will stop operating to perform the same function as M00. The M01 command will be ignored if the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu function is set to OFF. Example: M N10 N11 N12 M G00 X1000; M01; G01 X2000 Z3000 F600; If the menu function is on, operation stops at N11. If the menu function is off, operation does not stop at N11 and N12 is executed. 3. Program End: M02 or M30 Usually, the program end command is given in the final block of machining program. Use this command mainly for reading data back to the head of the program during memory operation, or rewinding the tape. The NC unit is automatically reset after tape rewinding and 9-1 Return to Library 9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS execution of other command codes included in that block. Automatic resetting by this command cancels both modal commands and offsetting data, but the designated-position display counter is not cleared to zero. The NC unit will stop operating when tape rewinding is completed (the automatic run mode lamp goes out). To restart the NC unit, the cycle start button must be pressed. Beware that if, during the restart of the NC unit following completion of M02 or M30 execution, the first movement command has been set in a coordinate word only, the valid mode will be the interpolation mode existing when the program ended. It is recommended, therefore, that the first movement command be given with an appropriate G-code. 4. Subprogram Call/End: M98, M99 Use M98 or M99 to branch the control into a subprogram or to recall it back to the calling program. As M99 and M99 are internaly processed by the NC M-code signals ans strobe signals are not output. After M00, M01, M02 or M30 has been read, data pre-reading is automatically aborted. Other tape rewinding operations and the initialization of modals by resetting differ according to the machine specification. Note 1: M00, M01, M02 and M30 output independent signals, which will be cancelled by pressing the RESET key. Note 2: Tape rewinding is performed only when the tape reader has a rewinding function. 9-2 No. 2 Miscellaneous Functions (A8/B8/C8-Digit) The No. 2 miscellaneous functions are used for positioning an index table. For the NC unit, these functions must be designated using an eight-digit value (form 0 to 99999999) preceded by address A, B or C. The output signals are BCD signals of command data and start signals. A, B or C codes can be included in any block that contains other command codes. If, however, the A, B or C codes can be included in a block that contains move commands, then the execution priority will be either - the A, B or C code functions are performed after completion of movement, or - the A, B or C code functions are performed together with movement. It depends on the machine specifications which type of processing is applied. Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all No. 2 miscellaneous functions. Address combinations are shown below. The same address for both additional axis and the No. 2 miscellaneous functions cannot be used. Additional axis A B C A à ! ! B ! à â C ! ! à No. 2 miscellaneous functions Note: When A has been designated as the No. 2 miscellaneous function address, linear angle commands cannot be used. 9-2 E Return to Library SPINDLE FUNCTIONS 10 10 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS 10-1 Spindle Function (S5-Digit Analog) When the S5-digit function is added, this function must be set using the numerical command of five digits preceding an S code (0 to 99999) and for other case, two digits preceding by an S code is used. S command binary outputs must be selected at this time. By designating a 5-digit number following the S code, this function enables the appropriate gear signals, voltages corresponding to the commanded spindle speed (rpm) and start signals to be output. Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands. The analog signal specifications are given below. - Output voltage ............................. 0 to 10V or â8 to +8V - Resolution................................ 1/4096 (2 to the power of â12) - Load conditions ............................ 10 kiloohms - Output impedance .......................... 220 ohms If the parameters for up to 4 gear range steps are set in advance, the gear range corresponding to the S command will be selected by the NC unit and the gear signal will be output. The analog voltage is calculated in accordance with the input gear signal. - Parameters corresponding to individual gears .. Limit speed, maximum speed, gear shift speed and maximum speed during tapping. - Parameters corresponding to all gears ....... Orient speed, minimum speed 10-2 Constant Peripheral Speed Control ON/OFF: G96/G97 1. Function and purpose This function controls automatically the spindle speed as the coordinates are changed during cutting in diametral direction so as to execute cutting by keeping constant the relative speed between tool tip and workpiece. 2. Programming format G96 Ss Pp Rr; ... Constant peripheral speed control ON s: Axis for constant peripheral speed control p: Peripheral speed r: Spindle for constant peripheral speed control G97; ........... Constant peripheral speed control OFF 3. Detailed description 1. Axis for constant peripheral speed control is to be set by address P. P1: First axis P2: Second axis X-axis (the first axis) is automatically selected if argument P is omitted. 10-1 Return to Library 10 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS 2. Spindle for constant peripheral speed control is to be set by address R. R1: Turning spindle (see the figure below) R2: Turning spindle (see the figure below) Upper turret Turning spindle 1 R1 R2 R2 Turning spindle 2 R1 Lower turret D740PB006 The default value is âR1â (automatically set if argument R is omitted). 3. Control change program and actual movement G90 G96 G01 X50. Z100. S200; Spindle speed is controlled for a peripheral speed of M 200 m/min. G97 G01 X50. Z100. F300 S500; Spindle speed is controlled for 500 rpm. M The initial modal state will be resumed. M02; 4. Remarks 1. The initial modal state (G96 or G97) can be selecyed by parameter F93 bit 0. F93 bit 0 = 0: G97 (Constant peripheral speed control OFF) = 1: G96 (Constant peripheral speed control ON) 2. The function is not effective for blocks of rapid motion (G00). The spindle speed calculated for the peripheral velocity at the ending point is applied to the entire motion of a block of G00. 3. The last value of S in the control mode of G96 is stored during cancellation of the control (G97) and automatically made valid upon resumption of the control mode (G96). Example: G96 S50; G97 S1000; G96 X3000; 50 m/min or 50 ft/min 1000 rpm 50 m/min or 50 ft/min 4. The constant peripheral speed control is effective even during machine lock. 5. Cancellation of the control mode (G96) by a command of G97 without specification of S (revs/min) retains the spindle speed which has resulted at the end of the last spindle control in the G96 mode. Example: 6. G97 S800; 800 rpm G96 S100; 100 m/min or 100 ft/min G97; x rpm The speed x denotes the spindle speed of G96 mode at the end of the preceding block. The peripheral speed constant control does not apply to the milling spindle. 10-2 Return to Library SPINDLE FUNCTIONS 10 10-3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting: G50 [Series M: G92] 1. Function and purpose The code G50 can be used to set the maximum and minimum spindle speeds at addresses S and Q, respectively. 2. Programming format G50 Ss Qq Rr; Constant peripheral speed control ON s: Maximum spindle speed q: Minimum spindle speed r: Spindle for speed clamping 3. Detailed description 1. For gear change between the spindle and spindle motor, four steps of gear range can be set by the related parameters in steps of 1 minâ1 (rpm). In range defined by two ways, parameter setting and S50 SsQq setting, the smaller data will be used for the upper limit and the larger data for the lower limit. 2. Spindle for speed clamping is to be set by address R. R1: Turning spindle (see the figure below) R2: Turning spindle (see the figure below) R3: Milling spindle Upper turret Turning spindle 1 R1 R2 R2 Turning spindle 2 R1 Lower turret D740PB006 The default value is âR1â (automatically set if argument R is omitted). 10-3 Return to Library 10 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS - NOTE - 10-4 E Return to Library TOOL FUNCTIONS 11 11 TOOL FUNCTIONS 11-1 Tool Function [for ATC systems] A next tool and tool offset number can be designated for the machine provided with ATC function by commanding T-code in the format shown below. The next tool refers to a tool used for the next machining, which can be assigned when it is currently accomodated in the magazine. The next tool in the magazine can be indexed at ATC position beforehand by commanding the next tool, thus permitting reduced ATC time. T !!!.ââ Tâ³â³â³.ââ M6 D '' ; !!!: ââ: !!!: '': Number of the tool to be changed for Tool ID code Number of the tool to be used next Tool offset number (only for Series T) Use two digits after the decimal point as follows to designate the tool ID code with reference to the settings on the TOOL DATA display: ID code w/o A B C D E F G H J K L M ââ 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 ID code N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ââ 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 ID code A B C D E F G H J K L M ââ 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 71 72 73 ID code N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ââ 74 75 76 77 78 79 81 82 83 84 85 86 11-2 Tool Function [4-Digit T-Code for Turret-Indexing Systems] (Series T) Tool function, also referred to as T-code function, is used to designate the tool number and offset number. Of a four-digit integer at address T, upper and lower two digits are respectively used to specify the tool number and offset number. Use bit 4 of parameter F162 to select the number of digits for the tool function (0 or 1 for 4- or 6digit T-code). T !!'.ââ ; Tool ID code Tool offset number Tool number Only one T-code can be included in a block, and the available range of T-codes depends on the machine specifications. For further details, especially on how to number the actual tools to be used, refer to the operating manual of the relevant machine. The T-code can be given with any other commands in one block, and the T-code given together with an axis motion command is executed, depending upon the machine specifications, in one of the following two timings: - The T-code is not executed till completion of the motion command, or - The T-code is executed simultaneously with the motion command. 11-1 Return to Library 11 TOOL FUNCTIONS 11-3 Tool Function [6-Digit T-Code for Turret-Indexing Systems] (Series T) This function is also used to designate the tool number and offset number. Of a six-digit integer at address T, upper and lower three digits are respectively used to specify the tool number and offset number. See the above description of the 4-digit T-code for the meaning of the decimal fractions. The available range of T-codes depends on the machine specifications. For further details, refer to the operating manual of the relevant machine. Only one T-code can be included in a block. Use bit 4 of parameter F162 to select the number of digits for the tool function (0 or 1 for 4- or 6digit T-code). T !!!''.ââ ; Tool ID code Tool offset number Tool number 11-4 Tool Function [8-digit T-code] This function allows you to select a tool number (from 0 to 99999999) using eight-digit command data preceded by address T. Only one T-code can be included in a block. Set bit 4 of parameter F94 to 0 to select the group-number designation for T-code funciton, or set this bit to 1 to select the tool-number designation. 11-2 E Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12-1 Tool Offset 1. Outline Tool offset must be set either for the upper turret with a three-digit number following address D, or for the lower turret with the lower two or three digits of a four-digit or six-digit number folowing address T (where the higher two or three digits are used to designate the tool number). Whether the offset number is set by lower two or three digits is selected by parameter F162 bit 4. One set of T command can be included in the same block. The tool offset amount differs according to the combination of G53.5/G52.5 (MAZATROL coordinate system selection/cancel) and parameter F111 bit 5 (MAZATROL tool wear offset data valid/invalid) as in the following table. G53.5 (MAZATROL coordinate system) Program G52.5 (Cancellation of MAZATROL coord. sys.) Upper turet T001 T000 M6 D000 [1] [2] T001 T000 M6 D001 [1] [2]â T001 T000 M6 D000 [1] [2] T001 T000 M6 D001 [1] [2]â Lower turret T001 000 [1] [2] T001 001 [1] [2]â T001 000 [1] [2] T001 001 [1] [2]â [1] - Tool of TNo. 1 indexed F111 bit 5 = 1 Parameter (Validation of MAZATROL tool wear offset data) [1] - Tool of TNo. 1 indexed - TOOL SET data (on TOOL DATA display) of TNo. 1 validated - TOOL SET, WEAR COMP. and TL EYE CM data (on TOOL DATA display) of TNo. 1 validated [2] - Tool offset cancel [2]â - Data of No. 1 on TOOL OFFSET display validated [1] - Tool of TNo. 1 indexed [1] - Tool of TNo. 1 indexed [2] - Tool offset cancel [2]â - Data of No. 1 on TOOL OFFSET display validated [1] - Tool of TNo. 1 indexed F111 bit 5 = 0 (Invalidation of MAZATROL tool wear offset data) See above. - TOOL SET data (on TOOL DATA display) of TNo. 1 validated [2]â - Data of No. 1 on TOOL OFFSET display validated 12-1 See above. See above. Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 2. Tool offset start There are two ways to execute tool offset and these can be selected by parameter K95 bit 2: executing offset when the T command is executed and executing offset not in T command execution but in the block containing move commands. A. Offset in T command execution N1 T001T000M6D001; N2 X100.Z200.; N2 Tool length offset and tool nose wear offset are executed simultaneously. N1 Offset amount Toll path after offset Programmed path TEP054 Note 1: The movement when offsetting with the T command is rapid feed in a G00 modal and cutting feed with other modals. Note 2: When performing offset in T command execution, the path is made by linear interpolation in an arc modal. Note 3: When performing offset in T command execution, offset will not function until the arrival of any command G except those listed below when the T command is included in the same block as those commands G. G04: Dwell G10: Data setting G50: Coordinate system setting B. Offset with move command N1 T001T000M6D001; N2 X100.Z200.; N2 Tool path after offset Tool offset is executed simultaneously. Offset amount N1 Programmed path TEP055 Note: When performing offset with a move command, offset is applied if the offset amount is lower than the parameter value of âtolerance for radial value difference at starting and ending points in arc commandâ when offset is performed for the first time with an arc command. If the amount is higher, a program error will occur. (This also applies when the arc command and T command are in the same block for offsetting with T command.) 12-2 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12-2 Tool Position Offset 1. Tool position offset amount setting This function offsets tool position with respect to the program reference position. This position may generally be set to either the center position of the turret or the tool nose position of the reference tool. A. Setting to the center position of turret Reference position (reference point) X-axis tool position offset amount X Z-axis tool position offset amount Z TEP056 B. Setting to the tool nose position of reference tool Reference tool Reference tool Tool used for machining X-axis tool position offset amount X Z-axis tool position offset amount Z TEP057 2. Tool position offset number change When tool number is changed, the tool position offset for the new tool number is added to the movement amount in the machining program. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 T001T000M6D001; G1 X10.0 Z10.0 F100; G1 X13.0 Z15.0 F20.0; T001T000M6D002; G1 X13.0 Z20.0 F25.0; Tool offset path N4 N2 In this example, the tool position is offset with the tool number and offset is performed in the block including the move command. Offset amount (new) N3 N5 Offset amount (old) Programmed path TEP058 12-3 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. Tool position offset cancel A. When an offset number of zero is set Offset is cancelled when 0 as the tool position offset number preceded by T-code is executed. N1 X10.0 Z10.0 F10; N2 T001T000M6D000; N3 G1 X10.0 Z20.0; Tool offset path N2 N1 N3 In this case, offset is performed by the block with the move command. Offset amount Programmed path TEP059 B. When 0 is set as the offset amount Offset is cancelled when 0 is set as the offset amount of the tool position offset number. N1 G1 X10.0 Z10.0 F10; N2 T001T000M6D000; N3 G1 X10.0 Z20.0; Tool offset path N2 N1 N3 In this case, offset is performed by the block with the move command. Offset amount Programmed path TEP060 4. Remarks - When G28, G29 or G30 is commanded, the movement is performed to the position where offset is cancelled. But as offset amount remains stored in the memory, the positioning for the succeeding move command is executed with the offset operation. - The tool position offset is cleared by resetting and by emergency stop. 12-4 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12-3 Nose R/Tool Radius Compensation: G40, G41, G42 12-3-1 Outline 1. Function and purpose The tool nose is generally rounded and so a hypothetical tool nose point is treated as the tool nose for programming. With such a programming, an error caused by the tool nose rounding arises during taper cutting or arc interpolation between the actually programmed shape and the cutting shape. Nose R or tool radius compensation is a function for automatically calculating and offsetting this error by setting the nose radius or tool radius value. The command codes enable the offset direction to be fixed or automatically identified. Tool nose center path on programmed machining shape Tool nose center Actual machining shape Machining shape commanded in program 2. Hypothetical tool nose point Nose R TEP061 Programming format Code Function Programming format G40 Nose R/Tool radius compensation mode cancel G40 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ii G41 Nose R/Tool radius compensation left mode ON G41 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww ; G42 Nose R/Tool radius compensation right mode ON G42 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww ; 12-5 Kk ; Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. Detailed description 1. G40 serves to cancel the tool nose radius compensation mode. 2. Tool nose radius compensation function prereads the data in the following two move command blocks (up to 5 blocks when there are no move function commands) and controls the tool nose radius center path by the intersection point calculation method so that it is offset from the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the nose radius. N003 r N002 N001 Prior to the N001 block execution, the next move command block is preread and the coordinates at the intersection point are calculated. TEP063 In the above figure, ârâ is the tool nose radius compensation amount (nose radius). 3. The tool nose radius compensation amount corresponds to the tool length number and it should be preset with the tool nose point. 4. If four or more blocks without move commands exist in five continuous blocks, overcutting or undercutting will result. However, blocks in which optional block skip is valid are ignored. 5. Tool nose radius compensation function is also valid for fixed cycles (G77 to G79) and for roughing cycles (G70, G71, G72 and G73). However, in the roughing cycles, the tool nose radius compensation function applied for finish shape is cancelled and upon completion of the roughing, NC unit will re-enter the compensation mode. 6. With threading commands, compensation is temporarily cancelled in one block before. 7. The compensation plane, move axes and next advance direction vector follow the plane selection command designated by G17, G18 or G19. G17........ XY plane G18........ ZX plane G19........ YZ plane X, Y; I, J Z, X; K, I Y, Z; J, K 12-6 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12-3-2 Tool nose point and compensation directions 1. Tool nose point Since the tool nose is generally rounded, the programmed tool nose position is aligned with point P shown in the examples of the figures below. For tool nose radius compensation, select one point among those in the figures below for each tool length number and preset. (Selection from 0 to 9 in the G41/G42 mode.) 2 6 1 4 +X 0, 9 7 8 3 5 P 5 P 3 4 8 1 Tool nose point 0 or 9 7 2 6 Correspondence between hypothetical tool nose numbers and tool nose points +Z TEP064 2. Tool nose point and compensation operation A. When the nose radius center has been aligned with the machining start position Machining completion position +X G40 Machining start position Nose radius center path with nose radius compensation G42 r Machining shape without nose radius compensation +Z Program path or machining shape with nose radius compensation TEP065 B. When the tool nose point has been aligned with the machining start position Machining start position Machining completion position +X G40 Machining shape without nose radius compensation r G42 or G46 Tool nose point path with nose radius compensation +Z Program path or machining shape with nose radius compensation 12-7 TEP066 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12-3-3 Operations of nose R/tool radius compensation 1. Cancellation of nose R/tool radius compensation Nose R/Tool radius compensation is automatically cancelled in the following cases: - After power has been turned on After the reset key on the NC operation panel has been pressed After M02 or M30 has been executed (if these two codes have a reset function) After G40 (tool nose radius compensation cancellation command) has been executed After tool number 0 has been selected (T00 has been executed) In the compensation cancellation mode, the offset vector becomes zero and the tool nose point path agrees with the programmed path. Programs containing the tool nose radius compensation function must be terminated during the compensation cancellation mode. 2. Startup of nose R/tool radius compensation Nose R/Tool radius compensation will begin when all the following conditions are met: - Command G41 or G42 has been executed. - The command used with the offsetting command is a move command other than those used for arc interpolation. Offsetting will be performed only when reading of two through five blocks in succession is completed, irrespective of whether the continuous operation or the single-block operation mode is used. (Two blocks are preread if move command is present and five blocks are preread if such command is not present.) During offsetting, maximal five blocks are preread and then calculation for offsetting is performed. Some G-codes may not allow prereading. If startup compensation vector cannot be provided owing to inability of prereading, program error will occur. (Example: G41 T0101; G28 X10. Z20. ; L) Prereading is not allowed for the following G-codes: G10, G27, G28, G29, G30, G30.1, G36, G37 If error is caused because of the reason above, provide serveral blocks including move commands after G41, G42 or T command. Control status T_; S_; G00_; G41_; G01_; G02_; Machining program Start of prereading two to five blocks G01_; Preread buffer Blocks executed T_; S_; T_; G00_; S_; G00_; G41_; G41_; G02_; G01_; G01_; G02_; G02_; TEP068 12-8 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. 12 Start operation for nose R/tool radius compensation In the following figures, âsâ denotes the single block stop point. A. For the corner interior Linear â arc Linear â linear θ θ Program path r = tool nose radius r Tool nose radius center path s s G42 G42 Starting point B. Program path Starting point Arc center Tool nose radius center path TEP069 For the corner exterior (obtuse angle) (90° ⤠θ < 180°) Linear â arc Linear â Linear Point of intersection s Tool nose radius center path r r Point of intersection s Tool nose radius center path r r Program path θ θ G41 G41 Starting point Starting point Arc center Program path TEP070 C. For the corner exterior (acute angle) ( θ < 90°) Linear â Linear Linear â arc Tool nose radius center path Arc center s Tool nose radius center path r r θ s Program path r G41 θ r Starting point Program path G41 Starting point Note: TEP071 When there is no axis move command in the same block, compensation is performed perpendicularly to the movement direction of the next block direction. 12-9 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 4. Movement in compensation mode Compensation is valid both for positioning and for interpolation commands such as arc and linear interpolation. Even if the same compensation command G41/G42 is set in a nose R/tool radius compensation mode (G41/G42), the command will be ignored. When four or more blocks not including move command are commanded in the compensation mode, overcutting or undercutting will result. When the M00 command has been set during nose R/tool radius compensation, pre-reading is prohibited. 12-10 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) A. 12 For the corner exterior Linear â linear (0° < θ < 90°) Linear â linear (90° ⤠θ < 180°) Tool nose radius center path r θ s Program path θ r Program path s Tool nose radius center path Point of intersection Linear â Arc (0° < θ < 90°) Linear â arc (90° ⤠θ < 180°) θ s θ r Program path r Tool nose radius center path r Program path r s Tool nose radius center path Arc center Arc center Arc â Linear (0° < θ < 90°) Arc â Linear (90° ⤠θ < 180°) Arc center Program path Program path θ θ r r Arc center Tool nose radius center path r Tool nose radius center path r s s Arc â arc (90° ⤠θ < 180°) Point of intersection Arc â arc (0° < θ < 90°) Arc center Program path Program path θ θ r r r s Point of intersection r Tool nose radius center path Tool nose radius center path Arc center Arc center s Arc center TEP072 12-11 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) B. For the corner interior Linear â linear (obtuse angle) Linear â linear (obtuse angle) θ θ Program path Program path r r s s Point of intersection Tool nose radius center path Tool nose radius center path r Linear â arc (obtuse angle) Linear â arc (obtuse angle) θ θ Program path Arc center Program path s Point of intersection Tool nose radius center path r s Tool nose radius center path r Point of intersection r Arc center Arc â linear (obtuse angle) Arc â linear (obtuse angle) θ Arc center θ Program path Program path s s r Tool nose radius center path Point of intersection Point of intersection r Tool nose radius center path Arc center Arc â arc (obtuse angle) Point of intersection s Arc â arc (acute angle) Tool nose radius center path Arc center θ r θ Program path Arc center Arc center Arc center s Tool nose radius center path Point of intersection r Program path TEP073 12-12 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) C. 12 For the arc on which the ending point is not found If the error applied after compensation is within the âarc errorâ set by parameter, the area from the arc starting point to the ending point is interpolated as a spiral arc. Virtual circle Tool nose radius center path Program path Ending point of arc r s r R Arc center TEP074 D. In cases that no inner intersection point exist inside the corner In cases such as those shown in the figure below, there may or may not be an intersection point of arcs A and B, depending on the particular offset data. In latter cases, a program error occurs and the tool stops at the ending point of the previous block. Stop with program error Tool nose radius center path Center of arc A r r Program path A B Tool path can be normally drawn through the calculated intersection point. Line of intersection points between arcs A and B TEP075 5. Cancellation of nose R/tool radius compensation If either of the following conditions is met in the nose R/tool radius compensation mode, the compensation will be cancelled. - Command G40 has been executed. - Tool number T00 has been executed. However, the move command executed must be one other than those used for arc interpolation. A program error will occur if an attempt is made to cancel compensation using an arc command. The cancel mode is established once the compensation cancel command has been read, fiveblocks prereading is suspended and one-block pre-reading is made operational. 12-13 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 6. Cancel operation for nose R/tool radius compensation A. For the corner interior Arc â linear Linear â linear θ θ Program path r = tool nose radius r Program path Tool nose radius center path s s G40 G40 Ending point Ending point Tool nose radius center path Arc center TEP076 B. For the corner exterior (obtuse angle) Arc â linear Linear â linear Point of intersection Tool nose radius center path s s r r Program path r θ G40 Tool nose radius center path r θ G40 Ending point Ending point Program path Arc center TEP077 C. For the corner exteiror (acute angle) Arc â linear Linear â linear Tool nose radius center path s Tool nose radius center path Arc center r s r θ Program path Program path r G40 r θ G40 Ending point Ending point 12-14 TEP078 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12-3-4 Other operations during nose R/tool radius compensation 1. Changing the compensation direction during nose R/tool radius compensation The compensation direction is determined by the nose R/tool radius compensation commands (G41, G42). G41 G42 Lef-hand compensation Right-hand compensation The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command without commanding compensation cancel in the compensation mode. However, no change is possible in the compensation start block and the following block. Linear â Linear Tool nose radius center path r Program path r Point of intersection G41 G41 This figure shows an example in which no points of intersection are present during offset direction change. G42 r r r Arc â Linear r r G41 G42 G41 G41 G42 r Program path r r Tool nose radius center path Arc â Arc Tool nose radius center path Arc center G42 r Program path G41 G42 G41 r G41 G41 G42 Arc center TEP079 12-15 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) Linear return G41 Tool nose center path G42 r Program path TEP080 In the following cases, it is possible that the arc may exceed 360°. - Compensation direction is changed by the selection of G41 or G42. - I, J, K are commanded with G40. In such cases, compensation is provided as shown above and a section will be left uncut. Arc of 360° or more due to compensation G42 Program path Tool nose center path G41 G42 Section left uncut TEP081 2. Nose R/Tool radius compensation by G41/G42 for closed path a) Operation for G42âG41 b) Operation for G42âG41 G01(G42) Left G41 given G01(G41) (G42) G01 G41 G01 G01 (G41) Right 12-16 G01 (G42) TEP084â Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. 12 Command for temporarily canceling offset vectors When the following command is set in the compensation mode, the current offset vectors are lost temporarily and then the NC unit will re-enter the compensation mode. In this case, the compensation is not cancelled, and the program control will be transferred from one intersection point vector directly to the vectorless point, that is, to the programmed point. Control will also be transferred directly to the next intersection point when the offset mode is reentered. A. Reference point return command X s s Z s Intermediate point N5 N6 N7 N8 M (G41) N5 G01 U+30. W+60.; N6 G28 U-40. W+50.; â Temporarily vector 0 as compensation at intermediate point (Reference point when the intermediate point is N7 U-60. W+30.; not available) N8 U+40. W+70.; M TEP083 Note: B. The offset vectors do not change with the coordinate system setting command G52. G32 thread cutting command Tool nose radius compensation does not apply to the G32 block. G32 Tool nose radius center path Point of intersection r Program path TEP084 12-17 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) C. Compound fixed cycles When a compound fixed cycle I command (G70, G71, G72, G73) is assigned, the tool nose radius compensation is temporarily cancelled, the finishing shape to which tool nose radius compensation has been applied is cut in turning mode with the compensation cancelled and, upon completion, the compensation mode is automatically re-entered. 4. Blocks that do not include move command The following blocks are referred to as those which do not include movement. M03;................. M command S12;................. S command T001T000M6D001;..... T command G04X500; ............. Dwell Move-free G10P01R50;........... Offset stroke setting G50X600.Z500.;...... Coordinate system setting Y40.; ................ Movement not on offset plane G00;................. G-code only U0;.................. Moving stroke 0 Movement stroke is zero A. When a block that does not include movement is set during the start of compensation Vertical compensation will be performed on the next move block. N1 N2 N3 N4 U60.W30.T001T000M6D001; G41; Move-free block U-50.W20.; U-20.W50.; N2 N3 N1 N4 X Z TEP085 Compensation vectors, however, will not be generated if four or more blocks that do not include move commands appear in succession. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 U60.W30.T001T000M6D001; G41; G4 X1000; Move-free block F100; S500; M3; U-50.W20.; U-20.W50.; N2 to N6 N7 (Point of intersection) N1 N8 X Z TEP086 12-18 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 T001T000M6D001; G41 U60.W30.; G4 X1000; F100; Move-free block S500; M3; U-50.W20.; U-20.W50.; 12 N3 to N6 N7 (Point of intersection) N2 N8 X Z TEP086 B. When a block that does not include movement is set during the compensation mode Usual intersection point vectors will be generated unless four or more blocks that do not include movement appear in succession. N6 U200.W100.; N7 G04 X1000; N8 W200.; Move-free block N7 N8 N6 N8 N6 Block N007 is executed here TEP087 Vertical compensation vectors will be generated at the end point of preceding block if four or more blocks that do not include movement appear in succession. N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 U200.W100.; G4 X1000; F100; Move-free block S500; M4; W100.; N11 N11 N6 N7 to N10 In this case, excessive cutting may occur. N6 TEP089 12-19 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) C. When a block that does not include movement is set together with compensation cancellation Only offset vectors will be cancelled if the block that does not include movement contains G40. X N6 N7 N8 U200.W100.; G40 G04 P1000; U50.W100.; N8 Z N7 N6 TEP089 5. If I, J and K are set with G40 When the last move command of the four blocks which immediately precede the G40 command block is G41 or G42, movement will be handled as if it had been programmed to occur in the vectorial direction of I, J, and K from the ending point of that last move command. That is, the area up to the intersection point with the virtual tool center path will be interpolated and then compensation will be cancelled. The compensation direction will remain unchanged. Virtual tool nose radius center path (a, b) Tool nose radius center path (i, k) A N002 r G41 r N001 Program path N1 (G41) G1 Z_; N2 G40 Xa Zb li Kk; TEP090 In this case, pay attention that, irrespective of the compensation direction, the coordinates of the intersection point will be calculated even if wrong vectors are set as shown in the diagram below. 12-20 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 (a, b) N002 Tool nose radius center path A G41 r N001 Program path Where I and K in the sample program shown above have wrong signs r (i, k) Virtual tool nose radius center path TEP091 Also, pay attention that a vertical vector will be generated on the block before that of G40 if the compensation vector cannot be obtained by intersection point calculation. (a, b) G40 Tool nose radius center path X A G41 Program path r Z r (i, k) Virtual tool nose radius center path TEP091 Note: Part of the workpiece will be left uncut if the I/J/K command data in G40 preceded by an arc command generates an arc of more than 360 degrees. N1 (G42) G01 W200.; N2 G03 I150.; N3 G40 G1 U-150.W150.I100.K-100.; Portion left uncut r N2 (i, j) Program path Tool nose radius center path r N1 r G42 G40 N3 12-21 TEP093 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 6. Corner movement If multiple offset vectors are generated at connections between move command blocks, the tool will move linearly between those vectors. This action is referred to as corner movement. If the multiple vectors do not agree, the tool will move around the corresponding corners (but this movement belongs to the connection block). During single-block operation, the section of (Preceding block + Corner movement) is executed as one block and the remaining section of (Remaining corner movement + Next block) is executed during next movement as another block. N001 Program path N002 θ r Tool nose radius center path r Arc center This movement and its feedrate belong to block N002. Stopping point in the single block mode TEP094 12-3-5 Commands G41/G42 and I, J, K designation The compensation direction can be intentionally changed by setting the command G41/G42 and I, J, K in the same block. 1. Programming format G18 (Z-X plane) G41/G42 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ; Set a linear interpolation command (G00, G01) as move command. 2. I, K type vector (G18 Z-X plane selection) The new I, K type vector (G18 plane) created by this command is described here. (Similar descriptions apply to I, J vector for the G17 plane and to J, K vector for the G19 plane.) Being different from the vector on the intersection point of the programmed path, the I, K type compensation vector is the vectors equivalent to the offset value, perpendicular to the direction designated by I, K. The I, K vector can be commanded even in the tool nose radius compensation mode (G41/G42 mode in the preceding block) and even at the compensation start (G40 mode in the preceding block). 12-22 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) A. 12 When I, K is commanded at compensation start: X N110 N120 N130 N140 Z N100 N150 N110 N120 N130 N140 N150 D1 N100 Program path Tool nose radius center path (G40) M G41 U100.W100.K150. T001T000M6D001; G04 X1000; G01 F1000; S500; M03; Z150.; M TEP095 When there are no move commands at the compensation start X N3 Z (G40) M N1 G41 K150. T001T000M6D001; N2 U100.W100.; N3 W150.; M N2 D1 N1 TEP096 B. When I, K has been commanded in the tool nose radius compensation mode (G18 plane) (I, K) [2] N100 N110 D1 (N120) [1] X M (G18 G41) N100 G41 G00 W150.I50.; N110 G02 W100.K50.; N120 G00 W150.; M [1] I,K type vector [2] Intersection point calculation type vector Z Program path Tool nose radius center path Path for intersection point calculation 12-23 TEP097 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) When I, K has been commanded in a block without move command X N4 N3 Z N5 N2 (I, K) N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N1 D1 G41 T001T000M6D001 G01 F1000; U100.W100.; G41 K50.; W150.; G40; TEP098 3. Direction of offset vectors A. In G41 mode Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K vector through 90° to the left as seen from the forward direction of the Y-axis (third axis) to the zero point. Example 2: With Kâ100. Example 1: With K100. I, K direction (0, â100) Offset vector direction I, K direction Offset vector direction (0, 100) TEP099 B. In G42 mode Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K vector through 90° to the right as seen from the forward direction of the Y-axis (third axis) to the zero point Example 1: With K100. Example 2: With Kâ100. I, K direction (0, 100) Offset vector direction Offset vector direction (0, â100) I, K direction 12-24 TEP100 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 4. 12 Selection of offset modal The G41 or G42 modal can be selected at any time. N1 N2 N3 N4 X Z (I, K) N4 N3 D2 G28 X0Z0; G41 T001T000M6D001 F1000; G01 U100.W100.; G42 W100.I-100.K100. T001T000M6D002; N5 U-100.W100.; N6 G40; N7 M02; % N2 N5 D1 N6 TEP101 5. Offset stroke of offset vectors The offset stroke is determined by the offset number (modal) in the block including the I, K designation. (A) T1 T1 (I, K) N100 X N110 Z (G41 T001T000M6D001) M N100 G41ãW150.K50.; N110 U-100.W100.; M TEP102 Vector (A) is the offset stroke entered in tool offset number modal 1 in the N100 block. (B) T1 T2 (I, K) N200 X (G41 T001T000M6D001) M N200 G41 W150.K50. T001T000M6D002; N210 U-100.W100.; M N210 Z TEP103 Vector (B) is the offset stroke entered in tool offset number modal 2 in the N200 block. 12-25 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 6. Notes - Set the I, K type vector in a linear interpolation mode (G0, G1). If it is set in an arc interpolation mode at the start of compensation, program error will result. An I, K designation in an arc interpolation during the compensation mode functions as an arc center designation. - When the I, K type vector has been designated, it is not deleted (avoidance of interference) even if there is interference. Consequently, overcutting may occur in such a case. X Z N3 N4 N6 N5 N2 Overcutting N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 G28 X0 Z0; G41 T001T000M6D001 F1000; W100.; G41 U-100.W100.K10.; U100.W100.; G40; M02; (I, K) TEP104 7. Supplementary notes Refer to the following table for the compensation methods based on the presence and/or absence of the G41 and G42 commands and I, K (J) command data. G41/G42 I, K, (J) No No Intersection point calculation type vector Compensation method Yes No Intersection point calculation type vector Yes Yes I, K type vector, No insertion block 12-26 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12-3-6 Interruptions during nose R/tool radius compensation 1. Interruption by MDI Nose R/tool radius compensation is valid during automatic operation, whether it is based on the tape, memory, or MDI operation mode. The following diagrams show what will occur if tape or memory operation is interrupted using the MDI function following termination of the program at a block: A. Interruption without movement Tool path is not affected at all. N1 G41 T001T000M6D001; MDI interruption N2 U50.W20.; S1000 M3; N3 G3 U-40.W40.R70.; s (Stop position in the single block mode) X N2 Z N3 TEP105 B. Interruption with movement The offset vectors are recalculated automatically at the move command block after interruption. With linear interruption N1 G41 T001T000M6D001; N2 U50.W20.; s MDI interruption N3 G3 U-40.W40. R70.; U-30.W50.; U50.W30.; s N2 N3 With arc interruption s N1 G40 T001T000M6D001; N2 U50. W20.; MDI interruption N3 G3 U-40.W40. R70.; G2 U-40.W40.R70.; G1 W40.; s N2 N3 TEP106 12-27 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 2. Manual interruption A. Interruption with manual absolute OFF The tool path is shifted by an interruption amount. Tool path after interruption Interruption Tool path after compensation Program path TEP107 B. Interruption with manual aboslute ON In the incremental value command mode, the same operation results as with manual absolute OFF. In the absolute value command mode, however, the tool returns to its original path at the ending point of the block following the interrupted block, as shown in the figure. Interruption Interruption TEP108 12-28 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12-3-7 General precautions on nose R/tool radius compensation 1. Selecting the amounts of compensation The amounts of compensation are selected by specifying an offset number using a last one or two digits of the T-code. Depending on the machine specifications, the first digits may be used. Once a T-code has been set, it will remain valid until a new T-code is set. T-codes are also used to select tool position offset data. 2. Updating the selected amounts of compensation Updating of the selected amounts of compensation is usually to be done after a different tool has been selected during the compensation cancellation mode. If such updating is done during the compensation mode, vectors at the ending point of a block will be calculated using the offset data selected for that block. 3. Errors during tool nose radius compensation 1. An error results when any of the following commands are programmed during tool nose radius compensation. G17, G18, G19 (when a plane different from that selected during the compensation has been commanded) G31 G74, G75, G76 G81 to G89 2. An error results when an arc command is set in the first or last block of the tool nose radius compensation. 3. A programming error results during tool nose radius compensation when the intersection point is not determined with single block skip in the interference block processing. 4. A programming error results when an error occurs in one of the preread blocks during tool nose radius compensation. 5. A programming error results when interference can arise without no interference avoidance function during tool nose radius compensation. 12-29 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12-3-8 Interference check 1. Overview Even a tool whose nose radius has been compensated by usual tool nose R compensation based on two-block prereading may move into the workpiece to cut it. This status is referred to as interference, and a function for the prevention of such interference is referred to as interference check. The following two types of interference check are provided and their selection is to be made using the parameter. Function Parameter (F92 bit 5) Operation Interference check/alarm Interference check/prevention OFF (F92 bit 5 = 0) The system will stop, with a program error resulting before executing the cutting block. Interference check/prevention Interference check/prevention ON (F92 bit 5 = 1) The path is changed to prevent cutting from taking place. Example: Interference prevention path (G41) N1 G1ãX-100.ãZ50.; N2 X-100.ãZ70.; N3 X0. Z120.; Tool outside diameter N3 N1 X N2 Z Cutting by N002 Cutting by N002 TEP109 - For the alarm function An alarm occurs before N001 is executed. Machining can be continued by updating the program into, for example, N001 G1 Xâ100. Zâ20.; - Using the buffer correction function. For the interference check/prevention function Interference prevention vectors are generated by N001 and N003 intersection point calculation. 12-30 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 2. Operation during interference prevention Solid line vector: valid Dotted-line vector: invalid Tool nose radius center path when interference prevented Tool nose radius center path without interference check N003 N002 N001 Tool nose radius center path when interference prevented Linear movement Tool nose radius center path without interference check r N002 N003 Arc center N001 r TEP110 In the case of the figure below, the groove will be left uncut. Intererence prevention path Tool nose radius center path Program path TEP111 12-31 12 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. Interference check/alarm Cases that an interference check/alarm occurs are listed below. A. When interference check/alarm is selected 1. If all vectors at the ending point of the current block are erased: Prior to execution of N001, a program error will result if vectors 1 through 4 at the ending point of the N001 block are all erased as shown in the diagram below. N1 1 N2 2, 3 N3 4 TEP112 B. When interference check/prevention is selected 1. If all vectors at the ending point of the current block are erased but an effective vector(s) remains at the ending point of the next block: - For the diagram shown below, interference checking at N002 will erase all vectors existing at the ending point of N002, but leave the vectors at the ending point of N003 effective. Alarm stop N1 2 3 1 4 N4 N3 N2 TEP113 At this time, a program error will occur at the ending point of N001. 12-32 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 - For the diagram shown below, the direction of movement becomes opposite at N002. At this time, a program error will occur before execution of N001. 1, 2, 3, 4 N1 N4 N2 N3 TEP114 2. When prevention vectors cannot be generated: - Prevention vectors may not be generated even when the conditions for generating them are satisfied. Or even after generation, the prevention vectors may interfere with N003. A program error will therefore occur at the ending point of N001 if those vectors intersect at angles of 90 degrees or more. â Alarm stop N1 â Alarm stop N1 N2 N2 N4 θ N4 N3 θ: Intersection angle N3 TEP115 - Prevention vectors may not be generated when preread prohibit blocks are interfered with and so program error occurs. (G41) M N10 G01 Zz1; N20 Xx1; N30 M02 M N10 N20 Preread prohibit block TEP116 12-33 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. When the after compensating moving direction of the tool is opposite to that of the program: - For a program for the machining of parallel or downwardly extending grooves narrower than the tool diameter, interference may be regarded as occurring even if it is not actually occurring. Tool nose radius center path Stop Program path TEP117 12-34 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12 12-4 Programmed Data Setting: G10 1. Function and purpose The G10 command allows tool offset data, work offset data and parameter data to be set or modified in the flow of program. 2. Programming formats A. Programming workpiece offsets - Programming format for the workpiece origin data G10 L2 P_ X_ Y_ Z_α_ (α: Additional axis) P: 0...Coordinate shift (Added feature) 1...G54 2...G55 3...G56 4...G57 5...G58 6...G59 Data of P-commands other than those listed above are handled as P = 1. If P-command setting is omitted, the workpiece offsets will be handled as currently effective ones. - Programming format for the additional workpiece origin data (option) G10 L20 P_ X_ Y_ Z_α_ (α: Additional axis) P1: G54.1 P1 P2: G54.1 P2 M P47: G54.1 P47 P48: G54.1 P48 The setting ranges of the data at axial addresses are as follows: Linear axis Metric Inch ±99999.9999 mm ±9999.99999 in. ±99999.9999° ±99999.9999° Rotational axis B. Programming tool offsets - Programming format for the tool offset data of Type A G10 L10 P_R_ P: Offset number R: Offset amount - Programming format for the tool offset data of Type B G10 L10 P_R_ G10 L11 P_R_ G10 L12 P_R_ G10 L13 P_R_ Geometric offset concerning the length Wear compensation concerning the length Geometric offset concerning the radius Wear compensation concerning the radius 12-35 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) - Programming format for the tool offset data of Type C G10 L10 P_R_ G10 L11 P_R_ G10 L12 P_R_ G10 L13 P_R_ G10 L14 P_R_ G10 L15 P_R_ G10 L16 P_R_ G10 L17 P_R_ G10 L18 P_R_ Length offset; Geometric Z Length offset; Wear comp. Z Tool radius/Nose R offset (Geometric) Tool radius/Nose R offset (Wear comp.) Length offset; Geometric X Length offset; Wear comp. X Length offset; Geometric Y Length offset; Wear comp. Y Nose-R offset; Direction The setting ranges for programming tool offset data are as follows: Offset number (P): 1 to 128 or 512 (according to the number of available data sets) Offset amount (R): TOOL OFFSET Type A Metric Inch ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Length Geom. TOOL OFFSET Type B Length Wear ±99.9999 mm ±9.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Radius Geom. ±999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Radius Wear ±9.9999 mm ±0.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Geom. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Geom. Nose R ±999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Wear ±99.9999 mm ±9.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Wear Nose R ±9.9999 mm ±0.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Direction 0-9 0-9 XYZ XYZ 12-36 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) C. Programming parameter data G10 L50........ Parameter input mode ON N_P_R_ N_R_ G11 ........... Parameter input mode OFF N: Parameter number P: Axis number (for axis type parameter) R: Data of parameter Specify the parameters with address N as indicated below: Parameter N: Number P: Axis No. A 1 to 108 1001 to 1108 â B 1 to 108 2001 to 2108 â C 1 to 108 3001 to 3108 â D 1 to 108 4001 to 4108 â E 1 to 108 5001 to 5108 â F 1 to 154 (47 to 66 excluded) 6001 to 6154 â I 1 to 18 9001 to 9018 1 to 14 J 1 to 108 10001 to 10108 â K 1 to 108 11001 to 11108 â L 1 to 108 12001 to 12108 â M 1 to 22 13001 to 13022 1 to 14 N 1 to 22 14001 to 14022 1 to 14 P 1 to 5 150001 to 150005 1 to 14 ï¼ 0 to 4095 150100 to 154195 1 to 14 S 1 to 22 16001 to 16022 1 to 14 SV 1 to 96 17001 to 17096 1 to 14 SP 1 to 384 18001 to 18384 1 to 4 SA 1 to 88 19001 to 19088 1 to 4 BA 1 to 132 20001 to 20132 â TC 1 to 154 21001 to 21154 â Note: As for the setting ranges of parameter data, refer to the Parameter List. 12-37 12 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. Detailed description A. Workpiece origin data input 1. The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59. 2. Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or a program error. 3. Irrespective of workpiece offset type (G54 - G59 and G54.1), the data to the axial addresses have to refer to the origin of the fundamental machine coordinate system. 4. L-code and P-code commands can be omitted, indeed, but take notice of the following when omitting them: 1) Omit both L-code and P-code commands only when The axial data should refer to the coordinate system that was last selected. 2) The L-code command only may be omitted when the intended axial data refer to a coordinate system of the same type (in terms of L-code: L2 or L20) as the last selected one; give a P-command in such a case as follows: - Set an integer from 0 to 6 with address P to specify the coordinate shift data or one of the coordinate systems from G54 to G59. - Set an integer from 1 to 48 with address P to specify one of the additional workpiece coordinate systems of G54.1. 3) If the P-code command only is omitted: An alarm will result if the value of L mismatches the coordinate system last selected. 5. Axis data without a decimal point can be entered in the range from â99999999 to +99999999. The data settings at that time depend upon the data input unit. Example: G10 L2 P1 Xâ100. Yâ1000 Zâ100 Bâ1000 The above command sets the following data: Metric system X â100. Metric system (up to 4 dec. places) X â100. Inch system X â100. Inch system (up to 5 dec. places) X â100. Y â1. Y â0.1 Y â0.1 Y â0.01 Z â0.1 Z â0.01 Z â0.01 Z â0.001 B â1. B â0.1 B â1. B â0.1 6. The origin data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the WORK OFFSET display until that display has been selected anew. 7. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm. 8. Setting an illegal P-code value causes an alarm. 9. Setting an illegal axial value causes an alarm. 10. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check. 12-38 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) B. 12 Tool offset data input 1. The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59. 2. Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or a program error. 3. Offset data (R) without a decimal point can be entered in the range from â999999 to +999999 for geometric offset, or in the range from â99999 to +99999 for wear compensation. The data settings at that time depend upon the data input unit. Example: G10 L10 P1 R1000 The above command sets the following data: Metric system 1. Metric system (up to 4 dec. places) 0.1 Inch system 0.1 Inch system (up to 5 dec. places) 0.01 C. 4. The offset data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the TOOL OFFSET display until that display has been selected anew. 5. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm. 6. A command of âG10 P_ R_â without an L-code is also available for tool offset data input. 7. Setting an illegal P-code value causes an alarm. 8. Setting an illegal offset value (R) causes an alarm. 9. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check. Parameter data input 1. The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59. 2. Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or a program error. 3. Other NC statements must not be given in the parameter input mode. 4. No sequence number must be designated with address N in the parameter input mode. 5. Irrespective of the data input mode â absolute (G90) or incremental (G91) â the designated data will overwrite the existing parameter. Moreover, describe all the data in decimal numbers (hexadecimal and bit type data, therefore, must be converted). Example: For changing a bit type data of 00110110 to 00110111: Since (00110111)2 = (55)10 [a binary number of 00110111 corresponds to â55â in decimal notation], set 55 with address R. 6. All decimal places, even if inputted, are ignored. 12-39 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 7. Some specific bit-type parameters require selection of one of multiple bits. For the parameter shown as an example below, set data that turns on only one of bits 2 to 5. Example: Parameter K107 bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S-shaped speed filter S-shaped speed filter S-shaped speed filter S-shaped speed filter 7.1 ms 14.2 ms 28.4 ms 56.8 ms Setting â1â for bits 2 and 3, for example, could not make valid a speed filter of 21.3 msec (= 7.1 + 14.2). 8. The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not made valid till the execution of a G11 command. 9. The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not indicated as they are on the PARAMETER display until that display has been selected anew. 10. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm. 11. Setting an illegal N-code value (parameter No.) causes an alarm. 12. Omission of P-code for an axis type parameter causes an alarm. 13. Setting an illegal parameter value with address R causes an alarm. 14. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check. 4. Sample programs A. Entering tool offset data from tape L G10L10P10Râ12345 G10L10P05R98765 G10L10P40R2468 L H10 = â12345 H05 = 98765 H40 = 2468 12-40 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) B. 12 Updating the workpiece coordinate system offset data Assume that the previous workpiece coordinate system offset data is as follows: X = â10.000 M N100 N101 N102 M M02 âX Y = â10.000 G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 G10 L2 P1 Xâ15.000 Yâ15.000 X0 Y0 â20. M â10. Fundamental machine coordinate system zero point N100 Coordinate system of G54 before change â10. âX N101 (W1) Coordinate system of G54 after change âX N102 W1 â20. âY âY âY MEP135 Note 1: Changes in the display of the workpiece position at N101 At N101, the display of tool position in the G54 coordinate system changes before and after workpiece coordinate system updating with G10. X=0 Y=0 X = +5.000 Y = +5.000 Note 2: Prepare the following program to set workpiece coordinate system offset data in G54 to G59: G10L2P1Xâ10.000 G10L2P2Xâ20.000 G10L2P3Xâ30.000 G10L2P4Xâ40.000 G10L2P5Xâ50.000 G10L2P6Xâ60.000 Yâ10.000 Yâ20.000 Yâ30.000 Yâ40.000 Yâ50.000 Yâ60.000 12-41 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) C. Programming for using one workpiece coordinate system as multiple workpiece coordinate systems M #1=â50. #2=10. M98 P200 L5 M M02 % N1 G90 G54 G10 L2 P1 X#1 N2 G00 X0 Y0 N3 Xâ5. F100 N4 X0 Yâ5. N5 Y0 N6 #1=#1+#2 N7 M99 % Main program Subprogram (O200) âX â60. â50. â40. â30. â20. â10. G54'' G54'' G54' G54' G54 W W W W W Y#1 M â10. Fundamental machine coordinate system zero point 5th cycle â20. 4th cycle â30. 3rd cycle â40. 2nd cycle â50. 1st cycle âY MEP136 D. Programming for parameter data input G10L50 N4017R10 N6088R96 N12067Râ1000 N12072R67 N150004P1R50 G11 Parameter input mode ON D17 is set to â10â. F88 is set to â01100000â. [ (01100000)2 = (96)10 ] L67 is set to ââ1000â. L72 is set to â0x43â. [ (43)16 = (67)10 ] P4 data for the 1st axis (X-axis) is set to â50â. Parameter input mode OFF 12-42 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 5. 12 Related alarms Alarm No. 807 Alarm message ILLEGAL FORMAT Cause Work offset setting: P-command is omitted in a block of G10 L20 (or L2) although the last selected coordinate system is one of the systems from G54 to G59 (or of the G54.1 systems). Remedy Review the program data. Parameter setting: An illegal parameter number is set. Work offset setting: The setting range of the coordinate system number or the offset data is overstepped. 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT Tool offset setting: The setting range of the offset data is overstepped. Review the program data. Parameter setting: The axis number is not specified for an axis type parameter. The setting range of the axis number or the parameter data is overstepped. 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. Tool offset setting: The specified offset number is greater than the number of available data sets. Correct the offset number according to the number of available data sets. 903 ILLEGAL G10 L NUMBER Work offset setting: A command of G10 L20 is set although the corresponding function for the G54.1 coordinate systems is not provided. Give an available L-code command. 12-43 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12-5 Tool Offsetting Based on MAZATROL Tool Data Tool length and diameter offset can be performed on the basis of the MAZATROL tool data (diameter and length data) by particular parameter setting. 12-5-1 Selection parameters Using the following parameters, select whether or not MAZATROL tool data is to be used: User parameters F92 bit 7 = 1: Tool diameter offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data ACT-Ï (tool diameter data). F93 bit 3 = 1: Tool length offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data LENGTH (tool length data). F94 bit 2 = 1: Tool length offsetting using the MAZATROL tool data is prevented from being cancelled by a reference-point return command. F94 bit 7 = 1: Tool offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data ACT-Ï CO. (or No.) and LENG CO. (or No.). (Set F94 bit 7 to 0 to use the data stored on the TOOL OFFSET display.) 1. Tool length offsetting Parameter F93 F94 bit 3 bit 7 Data items used TOOL OFFSET Tool offset No. LENGTH TOOL DATA (MAZATROL) [1] 0 Remarks G43/G44 H_ (P_) T_ LENGTH [1] + OFFSET No. or LENGTH + LENG CO. [2] OFFSET No. LENG CO. [2] TOOL OFFSET + TOOL DATA 0 [1] Programming format or Tool offset No. + LENGTH [1] 1 1 - Length offset cancellation not required for tool change. T_ + H_ - G43 not required. 0 1 G43/G44 H_ Length offset cancellation required for tool change. [3] 1 0 (G43/G44 H_) + (T_) (P_) Length offset cancellation required for tool change. [3] TOOL LENGTH data for milling tools, and LENGTH A and LENGTH B for turning tools. [2] LENG CO. data are only used for milling tools. [3] Canceling method - Set G49 before tool change command. - Set G28/G30 before tool change command (when F94 bit 2 = 0). 2. Tool diameter offsetting Parameter Data items used TOOL OFFSET TOOL DATA (MAZATROL) TOOL OFFSET + TOOL DATA Programming format F92 bit 7 F94 bit 7 Tool offset No. 0 0 G41/G42 D_ ACT-Ï + ACT-Ï CO. or ACT-Ï + OFFSET No. 1 1 G41/G42 T_ ACT-Ï CO. or OFFSET No. 0 1 G41/G42 T_ 1 0 G41/G42 D_ + T_ Tool offset No. + ACT-Ï 12-44 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 3. 12 Nose-R compensation Parameter Data items used F92 bit 7 F94 bit 7 Programming format TOOL OFFSET Tool offset No. 0 0 G41/G42 D_ TOOL DATA (MAZATROL) NOSE-R + OFFSET No. 1 1 G41/G42 T_ OFFSET No. 0 1 G41/G42 T_ Tool offset No. + NOSE-R 1 0 G41/G42 D_ + T_ TOOL OFFSET + TOOL DATA 12-5-2 Tool diameter offsetting 1. Function and purpose Tool diameter offsetting by a G41 or G42 command uses MAZATROL tool data ACT-Ï as the offset amounts. 2. Parameter setting Set bit 7 of parameter F92 to 1. 3. Detailed description - Tool diameter offsetting uses as its offset amounts the diameter data of the tool which is mounted in the spindle at the issuance of G41/G42. - Tool diameter offsetting is cancelled by G40. - If the tool diameter offset function is used with a D-command, the sum total of the data indicated by the corresponding offset number (D) and the radius of the tool will be used as the offset data. Note 1: The tool used must be mounted in the spindle before restarting the program. Note 2: Offsetting based on tool diameter data will not occur if registered MAZATROL tool diameter data is not present or if a tool for which tool diameter data cannot be entered is to be used. Note 3: To carry out for an EIA/ISO program the radius compensation operations using the tool diameter data included in MAZATROL tool data, it is necessary to insert tool change command blocks, as is the case with tool length offsetting (refer to Note 5 in Subsection 13-7-2). 12-45 Return to Library 12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES T) 12-5-3 Tool data update (during automatic operation) 1. Function and purpose Tool Data Update allows MAZATROL tool data to be updated during automatic operation based on an EIA/ISO program. 2. Parameter setting Set parameter L57 to 1. 3. Detailed description This function allows the entire tool data, except for spindle tools, to be updated during automatic operation based on an EIA/ISO program. Parameter TOOL NOM-Ï ACT-Ï LENGTH COMP. THR/HP LIFE TIME MAT. REV. L57 = 0 No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes L57 = 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note 1: In the table given above, âYesâ indicates that you can update the data, and âNoâ indicates that you cannot update the data. Identification between MAZATROL programs and EIA/ISO programs is automatically made by whether the program currently being executed, is MAZATROL or EIA/ISO, irrespective of whether it is a main program or subprogram. If, however, the main program is MAZATROL and its subprograms are EIA/ISO, then the currently active set of programs is regarded as a MAZATROL program. Note 2: An alarm 428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION) will occur if the spindle tool data is modified during automatic operation based on an EIA/ISO program. 12-46 E Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13-1 Tool Offset 1. Overview As shown in the diagram below, three types of basic tool offset functions are available: tool position offset, tool length offset, and tool diameter offset. These three types of offset functions use offset numbers for designation of offset amount. Set the amount of offset directly using the operation panel or by applying the function of programmed parameter input. MAZATROL tool data can also be used for tool length offset or tool diameter offset operations according to the parameter setting. Tool position offset L2 L1 r r L1âr L2+2r (Double extension) (Contraction) Plan Reference point Tool length Tool length offset Side view Tool diameter offset Offset to the right Plan Offset to the left MEP055 13-1 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 2. Selecting the amounts of tool offset The amounts of tool offset corresponding to the offset numbers must be prestored on the TOOL OFFSET display by manual data input method or programmed data setting function (G10). The mounts of tool offset can be selected using one of the following three types: A. Type A The same amount of offset will be set if identical offset numbers are selected using commands D and H. Reference point a1 a2 MEP056 (Dn) = an (Hn) = an B. Type B Set an H-code and D-code, respectively, to use the total sum of the geometric offset amount and the wear compensation amount for tool length offset and tool diameter offset. Reference point b1 c1 d1 e1 MEP057 (Hn) = bn + cn (Dn) = dn + en 13-2 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) C. 13 Type C Data items used for turning tools are as follows: X, Y, Z, and Nose-R of Geometric Offset, X, Y, Z, and Nose-R of Wear Compensation, and Direction. Data items used for milling tools are as follows: Z and Nose-R of Geometric Offset, and Z and Nose-R of Wear Compensation. Set an H-code and D-code, respectively, to use the total sum of the geometric offset amount and the wear compensation amount for tool length offset and tool diameter offset. Reference point (Hn) = cn+fn (Dn) = gn+kn c1 f1 g1 k1 k1 (Hn) (x,y,z) = (an+dn, bn+en, cn+fn) (Dn) = gn+kn g1 D1 d1 H1 a1 Reference point f1 c1 H1 13-3 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. TOOL OFFSET display types As a data storage area for tool offsetting functions, three types of the TOOL OFFSET display are provided: Type A, Type B, and Type C. A. Type Length/Diameter distinguished Geometric/Wear distinguished Geometric/Wear for each axis distinguished Milling Turning A No No No Used Not used B Yes Yes No Used Not used C Yes Yes Yes Used Used Type A As listed in the table below, one offset data is given for one offset number. No distinction is drawn between length, diameter, geometric and wear compensation amounts. That is, one set of offset data comprises all these four factors. (D1) = a1, (D2) = a2, M (Dn) = an, B. (H1) = a1 (H2) = a2 M (Hn) = an Offset No. Offset amount 1 a1 2 a2 3 a3 M M M M n an Type B As listed in the table below, two types of offset data can be set for one offset number. That is, different amounts of geometric offset and wear compensation can be set for each of the selected tool length and the selected tool diameter. Use command H to select offset data concerning the tool length, and use command D to select offset data concerning the tool diameter. (H1) = b1 + c1, (D1) = d1 + e1 (H2) = b2 + c2, (D2) = d2 + e2 M M (Hn) = bn + cn, (Dn) = dn + en Offset No. Tool length (H) Tool diameter (D) / (Position offset) Geometric offset Wear compensation Geometric offset Wear compensation 1 b1 c1 d1 e1 2 b2 c2 d2 e2 3 b3 c3 d3 e3 M M M M M M M M M M n bn cn dn en 13-4 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) C. 13 Type C (for turning tools and milling tools) As tabulated below, various types of offset data can be set for one offset number: Geometric offset and Wear compensation data (X, Y, Z) for tool length, Geometric offset and Wear compensation data for tool diameter, and Direction. Data items used for milling tools are: Geometric offset Z and Wear compensation Z (Length) and Geometric offset and Wear compensation (Diameter). Data items used for turning tools are: Geometric offset X, Y, Z and Wear compensation X, Y, Z (Length), Geometric offset and Wear compensation (Diameter), and Direction. For milling tools For turning tools (H1) = c1 +f1, (D1) = g1 +k1 (H2) = c2 +f2, (D2) = g2 +k2 M M (Hn) = cn +fn, (Dn) = gn +kn (H1) (x, y, z) = (a1+d1, b1+e1, c1+f1), (D1) = g1+k1 (H2) (x, y, z) = (a2+d2, b2+e2, c2+f2), (D2) = g2+k2 M M (Hn) (x, y, z) = (an+dn, bn+en, cn+fn), (Dn) = gn+kn Diameter (D)/(Position offset) Nose-R (D) Length (H) Tool offset No. 4. Geometric offset Wear comp. Geometric offset Wear comp. Direction X Y Z X Y Z R R 1 a1 b1 c1 d1 e1 f1 g1 k1 l1 2 a2 b2 c2 d2 e2 f2 g2 k2 l2 3 a3 b3 c3 d3 e3 f3 g3 k3 l3 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M n an bn cn dn en fn gn kn ln Tool offset numbers (H/D) Tool offset numbers can be selected using address H or D. - Use address H to offset the selected tool length. Use address D to offset the selected tool position or the selected tool diameter. - Once a tool offset number has been selected, it will remain unchanged until a new H or D is used. - Offset numbers can be set only once for one block. If offset numbers are set more than once for one block, only the last offset number will be used. - The maximum available number of sets of offset numbers is as follows: Standard: 128 sets: H01 to H128 (D01 to D128) Optional: 512 sets: H01 to H512 (D01 to D512) - The alarm 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. will result if these limits are exceeded. 13-5 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) - The offset data range is as listed in the table below. Offset data for each offset number must be set beforehand on the TOOL OFFSET display. Micron system Metric Inch Sub-micron for all axes Metric Inch ±9999.9999 mm ±845.0000 in. ±1999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B ±9999.9999 mm ±845.0000 in. Length Geom. ±1999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type A Metric Inch TOOL OFFSET Type B Length Wear ±99.9999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.9999 mm ±9.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Dia. Geom. ±999.9999 mm ±99.9999 in. ±999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Dia. Wear ±9.9999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.9999 mm ±0.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Geom. XYZ ±9999.9999 mm ±845.0000 in. ±1999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Geom. Nose-R ±999.9999 mm ±99.9999 in. ±999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Wear XYZ ±99.9999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.9999 mm ±9.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Wear Nose-R ±9.9999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.9999 mm ±0.99999 in. Note: 5. Sub-micron for rotational axes The tool offset number (H- or D-code) is not be made effective if it is not designated in the corresponding offset mode. Number of sets of tool offset numbers The maximum available number of sets of tool offset numbers depends on the particular machine specifications. Number of tool offset combinations (max.) Standard specifications 128 Optional specifications 512 Note: The maximum available number of sets of tool offset numbers under optional machine specifications refers to the total number of sets of tool offset numbers including those available under the standard machine specifications. 13-6 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-2 Tool Length Offset/Cancellation: G43, G44, or T-code/G49 1. Function and purpose Commands G43 and G44 allow the ending point of execution of move commands to be shifted through the previously set offset amount for each axis. Any deviations between programmed tool lengths/diameters and actual lengths/diameters can be set as offset data using these commands to make the program more flexible. 2. Programming format G43 Zz Hh (Pp) G44 Zz Hh (Pp) G49 Zz Tool length offset + Tool length offset â Cancellation of tool length offset There are two types of tool length offset: for milling tools and for turning tools. For milling tools: Length offsetting is executed on the axis specified in the G43 or G44 block (unless the length offset axis is fixed to âZâ by a parameter setting [F92 bit 3 = 1]). For turning tools: Length offsetting is executed on all axes for which offset amounts are registered (and G49 cancels all offset amounts concerned). Add an argument P as follows to designate the tool type. Note that the offset type for turning tools is to be selected in a measurement program using a touch sensor. Tool type 3. Designation Milling tool The value of P is 0 (P0), or P is omitted. Turning tool The value of P is 1 (P1). Detailed description The maximum available number of sets of offset numbers is as follows: Standard: 128 sets : H1 to H128 Optional: 512 sets : H1 to H512 where the maximum available number of sets of offset numbers refers to the total number of sets of offset numbers including those concerning the tool length, the tool position, and the tool diameter. The following represents the relationship between the programming format and the stroke of movement after offsetting. A. Tool length offsetting for milling tools 1. Z-axis motion distance G43Z±zHh1 ±z + ï½Â±lh1 â (±lh0)ï½ Positive-direction offset by length offset amount G44Z±zHh1 ±z + ï½Â±lh1 â (±lh0)ï½ Negative-direction offset by length offset amount G49Z±z ±z â (±lh1) Cancellation of the offset amount lh1: BA62 + Value of offset No. h1 lh0: Offset amount existing before the G43 or G44 block Irrespective of whether absolute or incremental programming method is used, the actual ending point coordinates are calculated by offsetting the programmed end point coordinate through the offset amount. The initial state (upon turning-on or after M02) is of G49 (tool length offset cancellation). 13-7 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 2. Sample programs X Length offset amount (Z) Machine zero point H01: Geometric Offset Z = 95 Z Workpiece coordinate X (G54) BA62 Workpiece zero point +5.00 Workpiece coordinate Z (G54) For absolute data input (H01: Z = 95.) N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 G90 G91 T01 G90 G43 G01 G94 G00 G40 G28 Z0 X0 T00 M06 G54 X0 Y0 Z5. H01 Z-50. F100 G80 X Machine zero point Z Workpiece coordinate X (G54) BA62 Workpiece zero point H01: Geometric Offset Z = 95. +5.00 Workpiece coordinate Z (G54) For absolute data input (H01: Z = 95.) N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 N007 N008 G90 G94 G00 G40 G80 G91 G28 Z0 X0 B0 T01 T00 M06 G90 G54 G00 B45. G68 X0 Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R45. G00 X0 Y0 G43 Z5. H01 G01 Z-50. F100 13-8 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. 13 Supplement 1) Tool length offset data can be set for the X-axis, the Y-axis, and additional axes, as well as the Z-axis. Whether the offset data is to be used for the Z-axis only or for the axis specified in the G43 or G44 block can be selected using bit 3 of parameter F92. 2) Even if multiple axis addresses are programmed in one block, offsetting will be performed on only one of the axes and the priority in this case is as follows: C>Z>B>Y>X>A Example: G43 Xx1 Hh1 M G49 Xx2 G44 Yy3 Hh3 M G49 Yy4 G43 αα5 Hh5 M G49 αα6 Positive-direction offset on the X-axis, and cancellation Negative-direction offset on the Y-axis, and cancellation Pos.-direct. offset on the additional axis, and cancellation G43 Xx7 Yy7 Zz7 Hh7 ........ Positive-direction offset on the Z-axis 3) Offsetting is always performed on the Z-axis if no axis addresses are programmed in the G43 or G44 block. Example: G43 Hh1 M G49 4) Offsetting on the Z-axis, and cancellation If reference point (zero point) return is performed in the offsetting mode, the mode is cancelled after completion of the returning operation. Example: G43 Hh1 M G28 Zz2 G43 Hh1 G49 G28 Zz2 Upon completion of return to the reference point (zero point), the offset stroke is cleared. Reference point return after a Z-axis motion at the current position for clearing the offset amount 5) If command G49 or H00 is executed, length offsetting will be immediately cancelled (the corresponding axis will move to clear the offset amount to zero). When using MAZATROL tool data, do not use G49 as a cancellation command code; otherwise interference with the workpiece may result since automatic cancellation moves the tool on the Z-axis in minus direction through the distance equivalent to the tool length. Use an H00 command, rather than a G49 command, if G43/G44 mode is to be cancelled temporarily. 6) The alarm 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. will occur if an offset number exceeding the machine specifications is set. 7) When tool offset data and MAZATROL tool data are both validated, offsetting is executed by the sum of the two data items concerned. 13-9 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 8) B. In order to apply length offset for a milling tool in its axial direction, give the corresponding G68 command (Coordinate Rotation) following a B-axis angular motion command. Tool length offsetting for turning tools 1. Z- and X-axis motion distance G43X±xZ±zHh1P1 G44X±xZ±zHh1P1 G49X±xZ±z lh1x: lh1z: lh0x: lh0z: P1: ±z + ï½Â±lh1z â (±lh0z)ï½ Positive-direction length offset ±x + ï½Â±lh1x â (±lh0x)ï½ Positive-direction length offset ±z + ï½Â±lh1z â (±lh0z)ï½ Negative-direction length offset ±x + ï½Â±lh1x â (±lh0x)ï½ Negative-direction length offset ±z â (±lh1z) Cancellation of the offset amount ±x â (±lh1x) Cancellation of the offset amount BA62 + X-axis value of offset No. h1 Z-axis value of offset No. h1 X-axis offset amount existing before the G43 or G44 block Z-axis offset amount existing before the G43 or G44 block Selection of the length offsetting type for turning tools Irrespective of whether absolute or incremental programming method is used, the actual ending point coordinates are calculated by offsetting the programmed end point coordinates through the offset amount. Offsetting for a turning tool is executed on all axes for which offset amounts are registered. The initial state (upon turning-on or after M02) is of G49 (tool length offset cancellation). As for an angular application of the tool, the X- and Z-axis component vectors for length offsetting are automatically computed for the particular application angle, as shown below: X-axis offset amount = (âGeometricâ Z + BA62) sin θ + (âGeometricâ X) cos θ Z-axis offset amount = (âGeometricâ Z + BA62) cos θ â (âGeometricâ X) sin θ Example 1: B-axis position = 90° Geometric offset X X BA62 Geometric offset Z X-axis length offset amount Z Workpiece zero point Z-axis length offset amount 13-10 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Example 2: B-axis = 45° Geometric offset X X X-axis length offset amount BA62 Geometric offset Z Z Workpiece zero point Z-axis length offset amount 13-11 13 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 2. Sample programs X Z-axis length offset amount H01: âGeometricâ Z = 95 Machine zero point BA62 Z +10.0 Workpiece coordinate X (G54) Workpiece zero point H01: âGeometricâ X = â5. = X-axis length offset amount +5.00 Workpiece coordinate Z (G54) For absolute data input (H01: Z = 95. X = â5.) For incremental data input (H01: Z = 95. X = â5.) N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 G90 G91 T01 G90 G43 G01 G94 G00 G40 G80 G28 Z0 T00 M06 G54 X100. Y0 X10. Z5. H01 P1 Z-50. F100 G90 G91 T01 G90 G91 G01 G94 G00 G40 G80 G28 Z0 T00 M06 G54 X100. Y0 G43 X-90. Z-195. H01 P1 Z-55. F100 X Machine zero point H01: âGeometricâ X = â5. Z Workpiece coordinate X (G54) X-axis length offset amount +10.0 BA62 H01: âGeometricâ Z = 95. Wrokpiece zero point Z-axis length offset amount +5.00 Workpiece coordinate Z (G54) For absolute data input (H01: Z = 95. X = â5.) N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 N007 G90 G91 T01 G90 G54 G43 G01 G94 G28 T00 G0 G00 G40 Z0 B0 M06 B45. For incremental data input (H01: Z = 95. X = â5.) G80 X10. Z5. H01 P1 Z-50. F100 13-12 N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 N007 G90 G91 T01 G90 G54 G91 G01 G94 G28 T00 G0 G00 G40 G80 X0 Z0 B0 M06 B45. G43 X-90. Z-195. H01 P1 Z-55. F100 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. 13 MAZATROL âWear Compensationâ data for turning tools Of MAZATROL tool data items, âLength Aâ and âLength Bâ correspond to the length and width of the tool, respectively, and âWear Compâ values are used for tool compensation on the relevant controlled axes. X-axis length offset amount X-axis wear comp. amount Z-axis length offset amount Z-axis wear comp. amount Set the following parameter to â1â to use the MAZATROL wear compensation data. 4. F111 bit 5 MAZATROL wear comp. valid/invalid 0 Invalid (Not used for EIA/ISO programs) 1 Valid (Used also for EIA/ISO programs) Supplement 1) For turning tools, length offsetting is executed on all axes for which offset amounts are registered (and G49 cancels all offset amounts concerned). Set âP1â in the block of G43 or G44 to select the length offsetting type for turning tools. Example: G43 Xx1 Zz1 Hh1 P1 M G49 Xx2 2) Positive-direction offset on X and Z (and Y) Cancellation of offsetting on X and Z (and Y) Offsetting is always performed on all the axes concerned even if no axis addresses are programmed in the G43 or G44 block. Example: G43 Hh1 P1 M G49 3) Offsetting on X and Z (and Y), and cancellation If reference point (zero point) return is performed in the offsetting mode, the mode is cancelled after completion of the returning operation (if F94 bit 2 = 0). Example: G43 Hh1 M G28 Zz2 G43 Hh1 G49 G28 Zz2 Upon completion of return to the reference point (zero point), the offset stroke is cleared. Reference point return after a Z-axis motion at the current position for clearing the offset amount 13-13 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 4) If command G49 or H00 is executed, offsetting will be immediately cancelled (the corresponding axis will move to clear the offset amount to zero). When using MAZATROL tool data, do not use G49 as a cancellation command code; otherwise interference with the workpiece may result since automatic cancellation moves the tool on the Z-axis in minus direction through the distance equivalent to the tool length. Use an H00 command, rather than a G49 command, if G43/G44 mode is to be cancelled temporarily. 5) The alarm 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. will occur if an offset number exceeding the machine specifications is set. 6) As for offsetting by T-codes, offset amount is not actually made valid until a movement command is executed. Example: G28 Xx3 G28 Zz3 T01 M6 G00 Xx3 Zz3 7) Offset amount of T01 validated, but no axis movement. Motion on the X-axis only with offsetting. Motion on the Z-axis with offsetting. Length offset is automatically executed in the axial direction of a turning tool for any angle of the B-axis. There is no need to give a command of G68 (Coordinate Rotation), which is required in the case of milling tools. 13-14 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-3 Tool Position Offset: G45 to G48 1. Function and purpose Command G45 or G46 allows the axis movement distance set previously in that block to be increased or decreased, respectively, according to the offset data. Likewise, command G47 or G48 extends or contracts the previously set distance by twice the offset stroke, respectively. The maximum available number of sets of offset numbers is as follows: Standard: 128 sets: D1 to D128 Optional: 512 sets: D1 to D512 where the maximum available number of sets of offset numbers refers to the total number of sets of offset numbers including those concerning the tool length, the tool position, and the tool diameter. G45 command G46 command Extended thru offset stroke only Contracted thru offset stroke only Internal calculation Internal calculation Moving stroke Moving stroke Starting point Ending point Starting point G47 command G48 command Extended thru twice the offset stroke Contracted thru twice the offset stroke Internal calculation Internal calculation Moving stroke Moving stroke Ending point Starting point Starting point ± (Program command value) 2. Ending point Ending point = (Offset stroke) (Moving stroke after offset) Programming format Command format Function G45 Xx Dd To extend a moving stroke by the offset stroke which has been set in the offset memory. G46 Xx Dd To contract a moving stroke by the offset stroke which has been set in the offset memory. G47 Xx Dd To extend a moving stroke by twice the offset stroke which has been set in the offset memory. G48 Xx Dd To contract a moving stroke by twice the offset stroke which has been set in the offset memory. 13-15 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. Detailed description - Programming based on incremental data is shown below. Tape command Stroke of movement by equivalent tape command (selected offset stroke = l) Example (with x = 1000) G45 Xx Dd X {x + l} l = 10 l = â10 X = 1010 X = 990 G45 Xâx Dd X â {x + l} l = 10 l = â10 X = â1010 X = â990 G46 Xx Dd X {x â l} l = 10 l = â10 X = 990 X = 1010 G46 Xâx Dd X â {x â l} l = 10 l = â10 X = â990 X = â1010 G47 Xx Dd X {x + 2!l} l = 10 l = â10 X = 1020 X = 980 G47 Xâx Dd X â {x + 2!l} l = 10 l = â10 X = â1020 X = â980 G48 Xx Dd X {x â 2!l} l = 10 l = â10 X = 980 X = 1020 G48 Xâx Dd X â {x â 2!l} l = 10 l = â10 X = â980 X = â1020 - Even if no offset numbers are set in the same block as that which contains commands G45 to G48, offsetting will be performed, based on previously stored tool position offset numbers. - An alarm 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. will occur if the designated offset number is an unavailable one. - These G-code commands are not modal ones, and thus they are valid only for the designated block. - These commands must be used in modes other than the fixed-cycle mode. They will be ignored if used in the fixed-cycle mode. - The axis will move in reverse if internal calculation for changing the movement distance results in inversion of the direction of movement. Starting point Program command: G48 X20.000 Offset stroke: + 15.000 Real move: Xâ10.000 Ending point MEP060 - The following lists how the machine operates if a movement distance of 0 using the incremental data command mode (G91) is programmed: NC command G45 X0 D01 G45 Xâ0 D01 G46 X0 D01 Equivalent command X1234 Xâ1234 Xâ1234 G46 Xâ0 D01 X1234 D01: 1234: Offset number Offset amount for D01 For absolute data commands, if the movement distance is set equal to 0, the block will be immediately completed and no movement through the offset distance will occur. 13-16 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 - When absolute data commands are used, each axis will also move from the ending point preset in the preceding block to the position set in the block that contains commands G45 through G48. That is, when absolute data commands are used, offsetting will be performed according to the movement distance (increments in distance) set in that block. 4. Sample programs 1. During arc interpolation, tool diameter offsetting using commands G45 to G48 can be done only for a 1/4, 1/2, or 3/4 circle whose starting and ending points are present on a coordinate axis passing through the arc center. Y (D01 = 200) G91 G45 G03 Xâ1000 Y1000 Iâ1000 F1000 D01 Ending point Tool center path 1000 Program path 200 Tool X Program arc center 1000 Starting point Tool position offset, with 1/4 arc command given 2. MEP061 If an ânâ number of axes are designated at the same time, the same amount of offsetting will be performed on all designated axes. This also applies to additional axes, but within the limits of the simultaneously controllable axis quantity. G01 G45 X220. Y60. D20 (D20 = +50.000) Y Ending point after offset 110. 50. 60. 50. Ending point on the program X Starting point 220. 270. MEP062 13-17 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Note: Use tool diameter offset commands G40, G41, or G42 if simultaneous offsetting of two axes is likely to result in excessive or insufficient cutting as shown below. Program path Tool center path Desirable shape G01 G45 Xx1 Dd1 Xx2 Yy2 G45 Yy3 Machining shape Workpiece Y Insufficient cutting l X Tool l: Set value of offset stroke MEP063 Program path Tool center path G01 Xx1 G45 Xx2 Yy2 Dd2 Yy3 Machining shape Desirable shape Workpiece l Y Excessive cutting X Tool l: Set value of offset stroke MEP064 13-18 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. Cornering in a 1/4 circle N4 Tool center path N3 Program path N1 N2 N3 N4 G46 G45 G45 G01 G00 G01 G03 Xx4 Xx1 Yy2 Xx3 Yy1 Ff2 Yy3 Dd1 Ii3 Y N2 X N1 MEP065 13-19 13 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 4. When commands G45 to G48 are set, each of the corresponding amounts of offsetting will become those designated by the offset numbers; unlike the tool length offset command (G43), these commands will not move the axes through the difference from the previous offset amount. Tool center path Program path N111 N107 N112 N106 N108 N110 N105 30 R10 N113 N104 R20 N109 N114 N103 40 R10 N115 N102 40 N101 N116 N100 30 10 30 30 40 10 Starting point MEP066 Offset stroke: D01 = 10.000 mm (Tool diameter offset stroke) N100 N101 N102 N103 N104 N105 N106 N107 N108 N109 N110 N111 N112 N113 N114 N115 N116 N117 % G91 G45 G45 G45 G46 G46 G45 G47 G48 G45 G45 G45 G46 M02 G46 G01 G03 G01 X0 G02 G01 Xâ30. Yâ30. Xâ30. Y30. Xâ30. G03 G01 X10. Yâ40. Xâ40. G00 X40. X100. F200 X10. Y10. Y40. Xâ20. Y20. Y0 Y40. J10. J20. Xâ10. Yâ10. Jâ10. Yâ20. Yâ40. 13-20 D01 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-4 Tool Diameter Offset Function: G40, G41, G42 13-4-1 Overview 1. Function and purpose Offsetting in any vectorial direction can be done according to the tool radius preselected using G-codes (G38 to G42) and D-codes. This function is referred to as tool diameter offsetting. For turning tools, nose-R compensation can be performed according to the designated direction (only when TOOL OFFSET type C is selected). 2. Programming format Command format 3. Function G40X_Y_ To cancal a tool diameter offset G41X_Y_ To offset a tool diameter (Left) G42X_Y_ To offset a tool diameter (Right) G38 I_J_ To change and hold an offset vector G39 To interpolate a corner arc Remarks These commands can be given during the diameter offset mode. Detailed description The maximum available number of sets of offset numbers is as follows: Standard: 128 sets: D1 to D128 Optional: 512 sets: D1 to D512 where the maximum available number of sets of offset numbers refers to the total numbers including those concerning the tool length, the tool position, and the tool diameter. For tool diameter offsetting, all H-code commands are ignored and only D-code commands become valid. Also, tool diameter offsetting is performed for the plane that is specified by either the plane selection G-code command or two-axis address code command appropriate for tool diameter offsetting. No such offsetting is performed for axes other than those corresponding or parallel to the selected plane. See 6-4 Plane Selection Commands, to select a plane using a G-code command. 13-4-2 Tool diameter offsetting 1. Tool diameter offsetting cancellation Tool diameter offsetting is automatically cancelled in the following cases: - After power has been turned on - After the reset key on the NC operation panel has been pressed - After M02 or M30 has been executed (these two codes have a reset function) - After G40 (offsetting cancellation command) has been executed In the offsetting cancellation mode, the offset vector becomes zero and the tool center path agrees with the programmed path. Programs containing the tool diameter offset function must be terminated during the offsetting cancellation mode. Give the G40 command in a single-command block (without any other Gcode). Otherwise it may be ignored. 13-21 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 2. Startup of tool diameter offsetting Tool diameter offsetting will begin during the offset mode when all the following three conditions are met: - Command G41 or G42 has been executed. - The offset number for tool diameter offsetting is larger than zero, but equal to or smaller than the maximum available offset number. - The command used with the offsetting command is a move command other than those used for arc interpolation. Offsetting will be performed only when reading of five blocks in succession is completed, irrespective of whether the single-block operation mode is used. During offsetting, five blocks are pre-read and then calculation for offsetting is performed. Control Status Work program T_ S_ G00_ G41_ G01_ G02_ Start of pre-reading five blocks G01_ Offset buffer Pre-read buffer T_ S_ G00_ Blocks executed T_ S_ G00_ G41_ G41_ G01_ G01_ G02_ G02_ G02_ MEP067 There are two types of offsetting startup operation: Type A and Type B. It depends on the setting of bit 4 of parameter F92 whether Type A or Type B is automatically selected. These two types of startup operation are similar to those of offsetting cancellation. In the descriptive diagrams below, âsâ signifies the ending point of single-block operation. 13-22 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. 13 Tool diameter offsetting startup operation A. For the corner interior Linear â Linear Linear â Arc θ θ Programmed path Programmed path r r (Offset stroke) Tool center path s s G42 G42 Tool center path Starting point Starting point Arc center MEP068 B. For the corner exterior (obtuse angle) [90° ⤠θ < 180°] (Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter.) Linear â Arc (Type A) Linear â Linear (Type A) s s Tool center path Tool center path r r (Offset stroke) G41 Programmed path θ Starting point G41 θ Starting point Programmed path Arc center MEP069 Linear â Linear (Type B) Linear â Arc (Type B) Point of intersection s Point of intersection s r r Tool center path r Tool center path r θ Programmed path G41 Starting point G41 θ Starting point Programmed path Arc center MEP070 13-23 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) C. For the corner exterior (sharp angle) [θ < 90°] (Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter.) Linear â Linear (Type A) Linear â Arc (Type A) Arc center s Tool center path r s Programmed path θ r G41 θ G41 Starting point Starting point Linear â Linear (Type B) Linear â Arc (Type B) Arc center s r Tool center path θ r Programmed path s r G41 θ r G41 Starting point Starting point MEP071 4. Operation during the offset mode Offsetting is performed for linear or arc interpolation commands and positioning commands. Identical offset commands G41 or G42 will be ignored if they are used during the offset mode. Successive setting of four or more blocks that do not involve movement of axes during the offset mode may result in excessive or insufficient cutting. 13-24 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) A. 13 For the corner exterior Linear â Linear (90° ⤠θ < 180°) Linear â Linear (0° < θ < 90°) Tool center path r θ s s θ r Programmed path Programmed path Tool center path Linear â Arc (0° < θ < 90°) Linear â Arc (90° ⤠θ < 180°) θ Tool center path r s r r s Programmed path θ r Programmed path Tool center path Arc center Arc center Arc â Linear (90° ⤠θ < 180°) Arc center Arc â Linear ( 0° < θ < 90° ) Programmed path Programmed path θ θ r r r Tool center path r Arc center Tool center path s s Arc â Arc (90° ⤠θ < 180°) Arc â Arc (0° < θ < 90°) Arc center Programmed path θ Programmed path θ r r Tool center path r r s Tool center path Arc center Arc center s Arc center MEP072 13-25 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) B. For the corner interior Linear â Linear (Obtuse angle) Linear â Linear (Obtuse angle) θ r θ Programmed path r Programmed path r s s Tool center path r Tool center path Linear â Arc (Obtuse angle) Linear â Arc (Obtuse angle) θ θ Programmed path Programmed path Arc center r s Tool center path s Tool center path r r Arc center Arc â Linear (Obtuse angle) Arc â Linear (Obtuse angle) θ θ Programmed path Arc center Programmed path s Tool center path s r r Tool center path Arc center Arc â Arc (Sharp angle) Arc â Arc (Obtuse angle) Arc center θ Tool center path s r θ Arc center Programmed path Arc center s Arc center Tool center path r Programmed path MEP073 13-26 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) C. 13 For an arc that does not have the ending point on it The area from the starting point of the arc to the ending point is interpolated as a spiral arc. Virtual circle Tool center path Programmed path Arc ending point r s r R Arc center MEP074 D. For arcs that do not have their inner crossing point In cases such as those shown in the diagram below, there may or may not be a crossing point of arcs A and B, depending on the particular offset data. In the latter case, the program terminates at the ending point of the preceding block after an alarm 836 NO INTERSECTION has been displayed. Stop with program error Tool center path Center of Arc A r r Programmed path A B Line of intersection points between Arcs A and B MEP075 5. Tool diameter offsetting cancellation During the tool diameter offset mode, tool diameter offsetting will be cancelled in any of the two cases listed below. - Command G40 has been executed. - Offset number code D00 has been executed. At this time, however, the move command executed must be one other than those used for arc interpolation. An alarm 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR will occur if an attempt is made to cancel offsetting using an arc command. After the offsetting cancellation command has been read into the offset buffer, the cancellation mode is set automatically and subsequent blocks of data are read into the pre-read buffer, not the offset buffer. 13-27 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 6. Tool diameter offsetting cancellation operation A. For the corner interior Linear â Linear Arc â Linear θ θ Programmed path r r (Offset stroke) Tool center path Programmed path s s G40 Tool center path G40 Ending point Ending point Arc center MEP076 B. For the corner exterior (obtuse angle) (Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter) Linear â Linear (Type A) Arc â Linear (Type A) s s Tool center path r r (Offset stroke) G40 G40 Programmed path θ θ Ending point Ending point Arc center Linear â Linear (Type B) s Tool center path Programmed path Arc â Linear (Type B) Point of intersection Point of intersection s Tool center path r G40 r r r θ Programmed path Ending point G40 Tool center path θ Ending point Arc center Programmed path MEP077 13-28 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) C. 13 For the corner exterior (sharp angle) (Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter) Arc â Linear (Type A) Linear â Linear (Type A) Arc center s Tool center path r s Programmed path θ r G40 θ G40 Ending point Ending point Linear â Linear (Type B) Arc center Arc â Linear (Type B) s Tool center path r θ r Programmed path s r G40 θ r G40 Ending point Ending point MEP079 13-29 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13-4-3 Tool diameter offsetting operation using other commands 1. Interpolation of the corner arc When command G39 (corner-arc interpolation) is used, the coordinates of the crossing points at workpiece corners will not be calculated and an arc with offset data as its radius will be interpolated. Point of intersection Interpolated arc Interpolated arc Programmed path Tool center path r r Tool center path Programmed path Point of intersection (Without G39 command ) (G39 command given) (Without G39 command) (G39 command given) Outside Offset Inside Offset MEP080 2. Changing/retaining offset vectors Using command G38, you can change or retain offset vectors during tool diameter offsetting. - Retaining vectors Setting G38 in block that contains move commands allows crossing-point calculation at the ending point of that block to be cancelled and the vectors in the preceding block to be retained. This can be used for pick and feed operations. G38 Xx Yy - Changing vectors The directions of new offset vectors can be designated using I, J, and K (I, J, and K depend on the selected type of plane), and offset data can be designated using D. (These commands can be included in the same block as that which contains move commands.) G38 Ii Jj Dd 2 r2 = i +j 2 à r1 j r1 Tool center path r1 i N15 N13 N14 j N16 Programmed path N12 N11 N11G1Xx11 N12G38Yy12 N13G38Xx13 N14G38Xx14Yy14 N15G38Xx15IiJjDd2 N16G40Xx16Yy16 Vector held Vector changed 13-30 NEP081 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. 13 Changing the offset direction during tool diameter offsetting The offset direction is determined by the type of tool diameter offset command (G41 or G42) and the sign (plus or minus) of the offset data. Offset stroke sign + â G41 Left side offset Right side offset G42 Right side offset Left side offset G-code The offset direction can be changed by updating the offset command without selecting the offsetting cancellation function during the offset mode. This can, however, be done only for blocks other than the offset startup block and the next block. See subsection 12-4-7, General precautions on tool diameter offsetting, for NC operation that will occur if the sign is changed. Linear â Linear Tool center path r Programmed path r Point of intersection G41 G41 G42 r This figure shows an example in which no points of intersection are present during offset direction change. r r Linear âArc r r G41 G42 G41 G41 G42 r Programmed path r r Tool center path Arc â Arc Tool center path G42 Arc center r Programmed path G41 G42 G41 r G41 G41 G42 Arc center MEP082 13-31 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Linear turnaround G41 Tool center path G42 r Programmed path MEP083 The arc of more than 360 degrees may result in the following cases: - The offset direction has been changed by G41/G42 selection. - Commands I, J, and K have been set for G40. Arc of 360° or more (depends on the offsetting method used) G42 Programmed path G41 G42 Tool center path 4. MEP084 Cases where the offset vectors are temporarily lost If the command listed below is used during the offset mode, the current offset vectors will be lost temporarily and then the NC unit will re-enter the offset mode. In that case, movements for offsetting cancellation will not occur and program control will be transferred from one crossing-point vector directly to the vector-less point, that is, to the programmed point. Control will also be transferred directly to the next crossing point when the offset mode is re-entered. 13-32 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) A. 13 Reference-point return command s s s Intermediate point N5 N6 (G41) M N5 G91 G01 Xâ60. Yâ30. N6 G28 Xâ50. Y+40. N7 Xâ30. Y+60. N8 Xâ70. Yâ40. M 5. N7 N8 â Temporary vector 0 as offset at the intermediate point (reference point when the intermediate point is not available) MEP085 Blocks that do not include movement The blocks listed below are referred to as those which do not include movement: M03......................... M command S12......................... S command T45......................... T command G04 X500................... Dwell Move-free G22 X200. Y150. Z100...... To set a machining-prohibited area G10 P01 R50 ................ To set an offset stroke G92 X600. Y400. Z500...... To set a coordinate system (G17) Z40. .................. To move outside the offsetting plane G90......................... G code only G91 X0 ..................... Moving stroke 0 ......Moving stroke is 0. A. When a block that does not include movement is set during the start of offsetting Vertical offsetting will be performed on the next move block. N1 N2 N3 N4 X30. Y60. G41 D10 X20. Yâ50. X50. Yâ20. â Move-free block N2 N3 N1 N4 MEP086 13-33 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Offset vectors, however, will not be generated if four or more blocks that do not include move commands appear in succession. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 X30. Y60. G41 D10 G4 X1000 F100 S500 M3 X20. Yâ50. X50. Yâ20. N2 to N6 Move-free blocks N7 (Point of intersection) N1 N8 MEP087 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 G41 X30. Y60. D10 G4 X1000 F100 Move-free blocks S500 M3 X20. Yâ50. X50. Yâ20. N2 to N5 N6 (Point of intersection) N1 N7 MEP088 B. When a block that does not include movement is set during the offset mode Usual crossing-point vectors will be generated unless four or more blocks that do not include movement appear in succession. N6 N7 N8 G91 X100. G04 P1000 X200. Y200. â Move-free block N7 N6 N8 N8 N6 Block N7 is executed here. MEP089 Vertical offset vectors will be generated at the end point of preceding block if four or more blocks that do not include movement appear in succession. 13-34 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 X100. Y200. G4 X1000 F100 S500 M4 X100. 13 N11 Move-free blocks N11 N6 N7 to N10 N6 In this case, excessive cutting may occur. C. MEP090 When a block that does not include movement is set together with offsetting cancellation Only offset vectors will be cancelled if the block that does not include movement contains G40. N6 N7 N8 X100. Y200. G40 G04P1000 X100. Y50. N8 N7 N6 MEP091 6. If I, J, and K are set with G40 When the last of the four move command blocks which immediately precede the G40 command block contains G41 or G42, movement will be handled as if it had been programmed to occur in the vectorial direction of I, J, and K from the ending point of that last move command. That is, the area up to the crossing point with the virtual tool center path will be interpolated and then offsetting will be cancelled. The offset direction will remain unchanged. Virtual tool center path (a, b) (i, j) N2 A Tool center path G41 r r N1 N2 N1 (G41) G1 X_ G40XaYbIiJj Programmed path MEP092 13-35 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) In this case, beware that irrespective of the offset direction, the coordinates of the crossing point will be calculated even if wrong vectors are set as shown in the diagram below. (a, b) N2 Tool center path A G41 r N1 Programmed path r Where I and J in the sample program shown above have wrong signs (i, j) Virtual tool center path MEP093 Also, beware that a vertical vector will be generated on the block before that of G40 if crossingpoint calculation results in the offset vector becoming too large. (a, b) G40 Tool center path A G41 r Programmed path (i, j) r Virtual tool center path MEP094 Note: Part of the workpiece will be cut twice if the I/J/K command data in G40 preceded by an arc command generates an arc of more than 360 degrees. N1 N2 N3 (G42, G91) G01X200. G02 J150. G40 G1X150. Yâ150.Iâ100. J100. r N2 (i, j) Programmed path Tool center path r N1 r G42 G40 N3 MEP095 13-36 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-4-4 Corner movement If multiple offset vectors are generated at connections between move command blocks, the tool will move linearly between those vectors. This action is referred to as corner movement. If the multiple vectors do not agree, the tool will move around the corresponding corners (but this movement belongs to the next block). During single-block operation, the section of (Preceding block + Corner movement) is executed as one block and the remaining section of (Connections movement + Next block) is executed during next movement as another block. Programmed path N1 N2 Tool center path r Arc center r This movement and its feedrate belong to Block N2. Stopping point in the single block mode MEP096 13-4-5 Interruptions during tool diameter offsetting 1. Interruption by MDI Tool diameter offsetting is valid during automatic operation, whether it is based on the tape, memory, or MDI operation mode. The following diagrams show what will occur if tape or memory operation is interrupted using the MDI function following termination of the program at a block: A. Interruption without movement No change in tool path N1 G41D1 N2 Xâ20. Yâ50. MDI interruption N3 G3 Xâ40. Y40. R70. s (Stop position in the single block mode) S1000 M3 N2 N3 MEP097 13-37 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) B. Interruption with movement The offset vectors are recalculated automatically at the first effective move block after interruption. Linear interruption N1 G41D1 s MDI interruption N2 Xâ20. Yâ50. N3 G3 Xâ40. Y40. R70. Xâ50. Y30. Xâ30. Yâ50. s N2 N3 MEP098 Arc interruption N1 G41D1 s MDI interruption N2 Xâ20. Yâ50. N3 G3 Xâ40. Y40. R70. G2 Xâ40. Yâ40. R70. G1 Xâ40. s N2 N3 MEP099 2. Manual interruption - For the incremental data command mode, the tool path shifts through the interruption amount. - For the absolute data command mode, the intended tool path is restored at the ending point of the block immediately following that at which interruption has been performed. This state is shown in the diagram below. Interruption Interruption 13-38 MEP100 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-4-6 Nose-R compensation 1. Tool nose point (Direction) To apply the tool diameter offset function to turning tools for nose-R compensation, register the data sets of nose radius and hypothetical nose point (âNose-Râ and âDirectionâ) for the required tools on the TOOL OFFSET display (type C). âHypothetical nose pointâ refers here to the reference position for preparing program data of machining with the particular tool (see the figure below). 2 6 1 4 +X 0, 9 7 5 P 5 P 4 3 8 1 Nose point 0 or 9 8 3 2 7 6 Hypothetical nose point numbers for various types of tool tip position +Z TEP064 2. Detailed description 1. Register the compensation amount (nose radius) together with the nose point No. (Direction) under a tool offset number. 2. If four or more blocks without move commands exist in five continuous blocks, overcutting or undercutting may result. However, blocks for which optional block skip is valid are ignored. 3. Nose radius compensation function is also valid for fixed cycles (G277 to G279) and roughing cycles (G270, G271, G272 and G273). A roughing cycle, however, is carried out with respect to the finishing contour compensated for nose-R with the compensation being temporarily canceled, and upon completion of the roughing, the compensation mode is retrieved. 4. For threading commands, compensation is temporarily cancelled in one block before. 5. The compensation plane, movement axes and next advance direction vectors depend upon the plane selection with G17, G18 or G19. G17 G18 G19 XY plane; X, Y; I, J ZX plane; Z, X; K, I YZ plane; Y, Z; J, K 13-39 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13-4-7 General precautions on tool diameter offsetting 1. Selecting the amounts of offset The amounts of offset are selected by specifying an offset number using a D code. Once a D code has been used, it will remain valid until a second D code is used. No H codes can be used to make these selections. D codes are also used to select tool position offset data. 2. Updating the selected amounts of offset Updating of the selected amounts of offset is usually to be done after a different tool has been selected during the diameter offsetting cancellation mode. If such updating is done during the offset mode, vectors at the ending point of a block will be calculated using the offset data selected for that block. 3. The sign of offset data and the tool center path Minus-signed (â) offset data generates the same figure as that obtained when G41 and G42 are exchanged each other. Therefore, the tool center will move around the inside of the workpiece if it has been moving around the outside. Conversely, the tool center will move around the outside of the workpiece if it has been moving around the inside. Sample programs are shown below. Usually, offset data is to be programmed as plus (+) data. If the tool center has been programmed to move as shown in diagram (a) below, the movement can be changed as shown in diagram (b) below by changing the sign of the offset data to minus (â). Conversely, if the tool center has been programmed to move as shown in diagram (b) below, the movement can be changed as shown in diagram (a) below by changing the sign of the offset data to plus (+). One tape for machining of both inside and outside shapes can be created in this way. Also, a dimensional tolerance between both shapes can be freely set by selecting appropriate offset data (however, Type A is to be used during the start of offsetting or during its cancellation). Workpiece Workpiece Tool center path G41 offset stroke positive or G42 offset stroke negative (a) Tool center path G41 offset stroke negative or G42 offset stroke positive (b) MEP101 4. Offset data item âDirectionâ As for data item âDirectionâ of TOOL OFFSET type C, specify the nose point direction for turning tools. Always set âDirection = 0â for offset numbers to be used for diameter offsetting of milling tools. 13-40 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-4-8 Offset number updating during the offset mode In principle, offset numbers should not be updated during the offset mode. If updating is done, the tool center will move as shown below. If an offset number (offset data) is updated 1. G41 G01 M M M Dr1 N101 G0α Xx1 N102 G0α Xx2 N103 Xx3 Yy1 Yy2 Yy3 α = 0, 1, 2, 3 Dr2 To change an offset number Line-to-line movement The offset stroke selected in N102 will be used. The offset stroke selected in N101 will be used. Tool center path r2 r1 r1 N102 r2 N101 N103 Programmed path r1 Tool center path r1 Programmed path r1 N101 r1 N102 r2 N103 r2 MEP102 13-41 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 2. Line-to-arc movement Tool center path r2 Programmed path N102 G02 r1 r1 N101 Arc center Tool center path r1 r1 Programmed path N101 r1 r1 N102 G03 r2 Arc center 3. MEP103 Arc-to-arc movement Tool center path Programmed path r1 N101 r1 r2 N102 Arc center Arc center r1 r1 N102 Tool center path r1 r1 N101 r2 Arc center Programmed path Arc center MEP104 13-42 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-4-9 Excessive cutting due to tool diameter offsetting If an interference check function is not provided, excessive cutting may result in the following three cases: 1. Machining of the inside of an arc smaller than the tool radius If the radius of the programmed arc is smaller than that of the tool, excessive cutting may result from offsetting of the inside of the arc. Tool center Programmed path R Programmed arc Excessive cutting 2. MEP105 Machining of a groove smaller than the tool radius Excessive cutting may result if tool diameter offsetting makes the moving direction of the tool center opposite to that of the program. Tool center path Programmed path M Opposite direction MEP106 Excessive cutting 3. Machining of a stepped section smaller than the tool radius Tool center path Programmed path Excessive cutting 13-43 MEP107 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 4. Relationship between the start of tool diameter offsetting and the cutting operation in the Z-axis direction It is generally done that diameter offsetting (usually, on the X-Y plane) is done at a suitable distance from the workpiece during the start of cutting and then the workpiece is cut along the Z-axis. At this time, incorporate the following programming considerations if you want to split the Z-axis action into rapid feed and cutting feed which is to follow only after the Z-axis has moved close to the workpiece: If you make a program such as that shown below: N1 N2 N3 N4 N6 . . . . G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. D1 S1000 M3 G01 Zâ300. F1 Y100. F2 Tool center path N6 N6 N4 N4: Z axis moves downward Y (1 block) N1 Y N1 Z X MEP108 With this program, all blocks up to N6 can be read during the start of offsetting based on N1. Thus, the NC unit will judge the relationship between N1 and N6 and correctly perform the offset operation as shown in the diagram above. A sample program in which the N4 block in the program shown above has been split into two parts is shown below. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. D1 S1000 M3 Zâ250. G01 Zâ50. F1 Y100. F2 N1 N6 N4 N5 N6 Y Excessive cutting Z N1 X X MEP109 In this case, the N2 through N5 blocks do not have any command corresponding to the X-Y plane and the relevant block N6 cannot be read during the start of offsetting based on N1. As a result, offsetting will be based only on the information contained in the N1 block and thus the NC unit will not be able to create offset vectors during the start of offsetting. This will cause excessive cutting as shown in the diagram above. Even in such a case, however, excessive cutting can be prevented if a command code that moves the tool in exactly the same direction as that existing after the Z-axis has moved downward is included immediately before the Z-direction cutting block. 13-44 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) N1 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y400. D1 N2 Y100. S1000 N3 M3 N4 Zâ250. N5 G01 Zâ50. F1 N6 Y100. F2 13 N6 N6 N6 N4 N2 N2 N5 Y Y N1 N1 Z X MEP110 For the sample program shown above, correct offsetting is ensured since the moving direction of the tool center at N2 is the same as at N6. 13-4-10 Interference check 1. Overview Even a tool whose diameter has been offset by usual tool-diameter offsetting based on two-block pre-reading may move into the workpiece to cut it. This status is referred to as interference, and a function for the prevention of such interference is referred to as interference check. The following two types of interference check are provided and their selection is to be made using bit 5 of parameter F92. Function Parameter Operation Interference check and alarm Interference check and prevention off The system will stop, with a program error resulting before executing the cutting block. Interference check and prevention Interference check and prevention on The path is changed to prevent cutting from taking place. 13-45 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Example: (G41) N1 G90 G1 Xâ50. Yâ100. N2 Xâ70. Yâ100. N3 Xâ120. Y0 Interference prevention path Tool outside diameter N3 N1 N2 Cutting by N2 Cutting by N2 MEP111 - For the alarm function An alarm occurs before N1 is executed. Machining can therefore be proceeded with by updating the program into, for example, N1 G90 G1 Xâ20. Yâ40. using the buffer correction function. - For the prevention function Interference prevention vectors are generated by N1 and N3 crossing-point calculation. [2] + [4]â [3]â [1] N3 [2]â [3] [4] [1]â N1 N2 MEP112 Vector [1] [4]' check â No interference â Vector [2] [3]' check â No interference â Vector [3] [2]' check â Interference â Vector [3] [2]' deletion â Vector [4] [1]' deletion The above process is performed to leave vectors [1] [2] [3]' and [4]' as effective ones. Resultantly, the route that connects vectors [1] [2] [3]' and [4] is taken as a bypass for the prevention of interference. 13-46 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 2. 13 Detailed description A. The case where interference is regarded as occurring When move commands are present in three of the five command blocks to be pre-read, interference will be regarded as occurring, if the offset calculation vectors at the block connections of the individual move commands intersect. Tool center path Programmed path r N1 N3 Vectors intersect. N2 B. MEP113 Cases where interference check cannot be performed - When pre-reading of three move command blocks of the five to be pre-read is not possible (since the three blocks do not contain move commands). - When the fourth and subsequent move command blocks themselves interfere. Tool center path Programmed path N6 N1 N2 N5 Interference cannot be checked N3 N4 MEP114 C. Movements during the prevention of interference The following shows the movements occurring when interference prevention is provided: Tool center path Programmed path N3 N1 N2 MEP115 13-47 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Solid-line indicated vector: Valid Dotted-line indicated vector: Invalid Tool center path with interference prevented Tool center path without interference check Programmed path N3 N2 N1 Tool center path with interference prevented Linear move Tool center path without interference check r Programmed path N3 N2 Arc center N1 r MEP116 Prevention vector N3 N2 Tool center path N1 Prevention vector Programmed path Once all interference prevention linear vectors have been erased, a new prevention vector is made as shown at right. Thus, interference is prevented. N4 r2 r1 N3 Prevention vector 1 N2 Prevention vector 2 Tool center path 2 Tool center path 1 r1 r2 N1 Programmed path MEP117 13-48 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 In the diagram shown below, part of the groove is left uncut: Interference prevention path Tool center path Programmed path MEP118 3. Interference alarm Cases that an interference alarm 837 TOOL OFFSET INTERFERENCE ERROR occurs are listed below. When interference check and alarm is selected 1) If all vectors at the ending point of the current block are erased: Prior to execution of N1, a program error will result if vectors 1 through 4 at the ending point of the N1 block are all erased as shown in the diagram below. N1 1 N2 2, 3 N3 4 MEP119 13-49 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) When interference check and prevention is selected 2) If all vectors at the ending point of the current block are erased but an effective vector(s) remains at the ending point of the next block: - For the diagram shown below, interference checking at N2 will erase all vectors existing at the ending point of N2, but leave the vectors at the ending point of N3 effective. At this time, a program error will occur at the ending point of N1. N4 3 4 N3 Alarm stop N2 2 1 N1 MEP120 - For the diagram shown below, the direction of movement becomes opposite at N2. At this time, a program error will occur before execution of N1. 1, 2, 3, 4 N4 N1 N2 N3 MEP121 13-50 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3) 13 When prevention vectors cannot be generated: Prevention vectors may not be generated even when the conditions for generating them are satisfied. Or even after generation, the prevention vectors may interfere with N3. A program error will therefore occur at the ending point of N1 if those vectors cross at angles of 90 degrees or more. Alarm stop N1 Alarm stop N1 N2 N2 N4 θ N4 N3 θ: Intersection angle N3 4) MEP122 When the after-offsetting moving direction of the tool is opposite to that of the program: For a program for the machining of parallel or downwardly extending grooves narrower than the tool diameter, interference may be regarded as occurring even if it is not actually occurring. Tool center path Programmed path Stop MEP123 13-51 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13-5 Three-Dimensional Tool Diameter Offsetting (Option) Three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting is performed to offset a tool in three-dimensional space according to the previously designated three-dimensional vectors. 13-5-1 Function description Tool Tool center coordinates (xâ, yâ, zâ) (I, J, K) Plane-normal vector Z (K) r Tool radius Workpiece Program coordinates (x, y, z) 3-dimensional offset vector Y (J) X (I) MEP124 As shown in the diagram above, the tool is moved through the tool radius r in the plane-normal vectorial direction of (I, J, K) from the program coordinates (x, y, z) to the offset tool center coordinates (xâ, yâ, zâ). Also, unlike two-dimensional tool diameter offsetting, which generates vectors perpendicular to the direction of (I, J, K), three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting generates vectors in the direction of (I, J, K). (The vectors are generated at the ending point of that block.) The axis components of three-dimensional offset vectors become: Hx = Hy = Hz = I â¢r 2 I + J2 + K2 J â¢r 2 I + J2 + K2 K â¢r 2 I + J2 + K2 Hence, the tool center coordinates (xâ, yâ, zâ) are expressed as xâ = x + Hx yâ = y + Hy zâ = z + Hz where (x, y, z) denote the program coordinates. Note 1: The three-dimensional vectors (Hx, Hy, Hz) refer to plane-normal vectors that are identical to the plane-normal vectors (I, J, K) in direction and have a magnitude of r (tool radius). Note 2: If parameter F11 is set to a value other than 0, the value of F11 will be used as I2 + J2 + K2 . 13-52 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-5-2 Programming methods 1. G-codes and their functions Parameter and feature G-code 2. Offset stroke positive Offset stroke negative Offset No. D00 G40 To cancel the 3-dimensional tool diameter offset To cancel To cancel G41 To offset in (I, J, K) direction To offset in the direction opposite to (I, J, K) To cancel G42 To offset in the direction opposite to (I, J, K) To offset in (I, J, K) direction To cancel Offset data For the tool radius r that is to be offset, the offset number under which that offset amount has been registered must be selected using D. The maximum available number of sets of offset numbers is as follows: Standard: 128 sets: D1 to D128 Optional: 512 sets: D1 to D512 (max.) 3. Space in which offsetting is to be performed The space in which offsetting is to be performed is determined by the axis address commands (X, Y, Z, U, V, W) that are contained in the starting block of three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting. When the U-, V-, and W-axes are taken as additions to the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively, priority will be given to the X-, Y-, or Z axis if the X axis and the U axis (or Y and V, or Z and W) are selected at the same time. Coordinate axes that have not been addressed will be interpreted as the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis, respectively. Example: 4. G41 G41 G41 G41 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Yy2 Ii2 Jj2 Kk2 Xx3 Vv3 Zz3 Ii3 Kk3 Ww4 Ii4 Jj4 Kk4 XYZ space XYZ space XVZ space XYW space Starting a three-dimensional tool diameter offset operation Offset number D and the plane-normal vectors (I, J, K) must be set in the same block as that which contains three-dimensional tool diameter offset command code G41 (or G42). In that case, (I, J, K) must be set for each of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. If this vector setting is not complete (setting of zero for I, J or K is effective), the usual tool diameter offset mode will be set. If, however, the machine does not have the three-dimensional tool diameter offset function, an alarm 838 3-D OFFSET OPTION NOT FOUND will result. G41 (G42) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Dd1 G41 (G42) : 3-dimensional tool diameter offset command X, Y, Z : Command to move each axis and to determine an offsetting space I, J, K : To indicate the offsetting direction in plane-normal vectors D : Offset number Use the G00 or G01 mode to start the three-dimensional tool diameter offset operation. Use of the G02 or G03 mode results in an alarm 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR. 13-53 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Example 1: If move commands are present: G41 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Dd1 3-dimensional offset vector Tool center path Programmed path Starting point MEP125 Example 2: If move commands are not present: G41 Ii2 Jj2 Kk2 Dd2 Tool center path 3-dimentional offset vector Starting point MEP126 5. During three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting Set move commands and new plane-normal vector commands as follows: Xx3 Yy3 Example 1: Zz3 Ii3 Jj3 Kk3 If move commands and plane-normal vector commands are present: Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 Ii3 Jj3 Kk3 Tool center path New vector Old vector Programmed path Starting point MEP127 13-54 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Example 2: Xx4 Yy4 13 If plane-normal vector commands are not present: The new vector is the same as the old one. Zz4 Tool center path New vector Old vector Programmed path Starting point MEP128 Example 3: For arc or helical cutting: The new vector is the same as the old one. G02 Xx5 Yy5 (Zz5) Ii0 Jj0 I and J(K) represent the center of an arc. or G02 Xx5 Yy5 (Zz5) Rr0 (Radius-selected arc). Tool center path New vector Old vector Programmed path Starting point Note: MEP129 The arc shifts through the amount of vector. Example 4: For changing the offset data: Set offset number D in the same block as that of three-dimensional tool diameter offset command G41 or G42. Use the G00 or G01 mode to change the offset data. Use of the arc mode results in 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR. G41 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ii0 Jj0 Kk0 Dd1 M G41 Xx6 Yy6 Zz6 Ii6 Jj6 Kk6 Dd2 Tool center path New vector Old vector Starting point Programmed path MEP130 13-55 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) Example 5: For changing the offset direction: G41 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ii0 Jj0 Kk0 Dd1 M G42 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ii0 Jj0 Kk0 Tool center path Programmed path Old vector New vector Starting point MEP131 Use the G00 or G01 mode to change the offset direction. Use of the arc mode results in an alarm 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR. 6. Cancelling the three-dimensional tool diameter offset operation Make the program as follows: G40 Xx7 Yy7 Zz7 Use the G00 or G01 mode to cancel three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting. Use of the G02 or G03 mode results in an alarm 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR. Example 1: If move commands are present: G40 Xx7 Yy7 Zz7 Tool center path Old vector Starting point Programmed path Ending point MEP132 Example 2: If move commands are not present: G40 (or D00) Old vector Programmed path 13-56 Tool center path MEP133 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-5-3 Correlationships to other functions 1. Tool diameter offset The usual tool-diameter offset mode will be selected if setting of plane-normal vectors (I, J, K) in the starting block of three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting is not done for each of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. 2. Tool length offset Tool length offsetting is performed according to the coordinates existing after execution of three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting. 3. Tool position offset Tool position offsetting is performed according to the coordinates existing after execution of three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting. 4. Selection of fixed-cycle operation results in an alarm 901 INCORRECT FIXED CYCLE COMMAND. 5. Scaling Three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting is performed according to the coordinates existing after execution of scaling. 6. Home position check (G27) The current offset data is not cancelled. 13-5-4 Miscellaneous notes on three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting 1. Although they can be used to select offset numbers, D-code commands are valid only after command G41 or G42 has been set. If a D-code command is not present, the previous Dcode command becomes valid. 2. Use the G00 or G01 mode to change the offset mode, the offset direction or the offset data. An alarm 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR will occur if an attempt is made to perform these changes in an arc mode. 3. During the three-dimensional tool diameter offset mode using a space, three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting cannot be done using any other space. The cancel command code (G40 or D00) must be executed to select some other offset space. Example: G41 M X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ To start offsetting in X, Y and Z space G41 U_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ To offset in X, Y and Z space while the U axis moves by the command value 4. Selection of an offset number falling outside the range from 1 to 128 (for standard machine specifications) or from 1 to 512 (for optional machine specifications) results in an alarm 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. 5. Only the G40 or D00 command code can be used to cancel three-dimensional tool diameter offsetting. Cancellation is not possible with the NC reset key or external reset functions. 6. A program error will result if the vectorial magnitude specified by (I, J, K), that is 2 2 2 I + J + K , overflows. 13-57 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13-6 Programmed Data Setting: G10 1. Function and purpose The G10 command allows tool offset data, work offset data and parameter data to be set or modified in the flow of program. 2. Programming formats A. Programming workpiece offsets - Programming format for the workpiece origin data G10 L2 P_ X_ Y_ Z_α_ (α: Additional axis) P: 0...Coordinate shift (Added feature) 1...G54 2...G55 3...G56 4...G57 5...G58 6...G59 Data of P-commands other than those listed above are handled as P = 1. If P-command setting is omitted, the workpiece offsets will be handled as currently effective ones. - Programming format for the additional workpiece origin data (option) G10 L20 P_ X_ Y_ Z_α_ (α: Additional axis) P1: G54.1 P1 P2: G54.1 P2 M P47: G54.1 P47 P48: G54.1 P48 The setting ranges of the data at axial addresses are as follows: Micron system Metric B. Linear ±99999.999 mm Rotat. ±99999.999° Inch Sub-micron for rotational axes Metric Inch Metric Inch ±9999.9999 in. ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 in. ±99999.9999 mm ±9999.99999 in. ±99999.999° ±99999.9999° ±99999.9999° Programming tool offsets - Programming format for the tool offset data of Type A G10 L10 P_R_ P: Offset number R: Offset amount - Programming format for the tool offset data of Type B G10 L10 P_R_ G10 L11 P_R_ G10 L12 P_R_ G10 L13 P_R_ Sub-micron for all axes Geometric offset concerning the length Wear compensation concerning the length Geometric offset concerning the diameter Wear compensation concerning the diameter 13-58 ±99999.9999° ±99999.9999° Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 - Programming format for the tool offset data of Type C G10 L10 P_R_ G10 L11 P_R_ G10 L12 P_R_ G10 L13 P_R_ G10 L14 P_R_ G10 L15 P_R_ G10 L16 P_R_ G10 L17 P_R_ G10 L18 P_R_ Length offset; Geometric Z Length offset; Wear comp. Z Diameter/Nose-R offset (Geometric) Diameter/Nose-R offset (Wear comp.) Length offset; Geometric X Length offset; Wear comp. X Length offset; Geometric Y Length offset; Wear comp. Y Nose-R offset; Direction The setting ranges for programming tool offset data are as follows: Offset number (P): 1 to 128 or 512 (according to the number of available data sets) Offset amount (R): Micron system Metric Sub-micron for rotational axes Inch Metric Inch Sub-micron for all axes Metric Inch TOOL OFFSET Type A ±9999.999 mm ±845.0000 in. ±1999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Length Geom. ±9999.999 mm ±845.0000 in. ±1999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Length Wear ±99.999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.9999 mm ±9.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Dia. Geom. ±999.999 mm ±99.9999 in. ±999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type B Dia. Wear ±9.999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.9999 mm ±0.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Geom. XYZ ±9999.999 mm ±845.0000 in. ±1999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±1999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Geom. Nose-R ±999.999 mm ±99.9999 in. ±999.999 mm ±84.5000 in. ±999.9999 mm ±84.50000 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Wear XYZ ±99.999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.999 mm ±9.9999 in. ±99.9999 mm ±9.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Wear Nose-R ±9.999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.999 mm ±0.9999 in. ±9.9999 mm ±0.99999 in. TOOL OFFSET Type C Direction 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 13-59 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) C. Programming parameter data G10 L50........ Parameter input mode ON N_P_R_ N_R_ G11 ........... Parameter input mode OFF N: Parameter number P: Axis number (for axis type parameter) R: Data of parameter Specify the parameters with address N as indicated below: Parameter N: Number P: Axis No. A 1 to 108 1001 to 1108 â B 1 to 108 2001 to 2108 â C 1 to 108 3001 to 3108 â D 1 to 108 4001 to 4108 â E 1 to 108 5001 to 5108 â F 1 to 154 (47 to 66 excluded) 6001 to 6154 â I 1 to 18 9001 to 9018 1 to 14 J 1 to 108 10001 to 10108 â K 1 to 108 11001 to 11108 â L 1 to 108 12001 to 12108 â M 1 to 22 13001 to 13022 1 to 14 N 1 to 22 14001 to 14022 1 to 14 P 1 to 5 150001 to 150005 1 to 14 ï¼ 0 to 4095 150100 to 154195 1 to 14 S 1 to 22 16001 to 16022 1 to 14 SV 1 to 96 17001 to 17096 1 to 14 SP 1 to 384 18001 to 18384 1 to 4 SA 1 to 88 19001 to 19088 1 to 4 BA 1 to 132 20001 to 20132 â TC 1 to 154 21001 to 21154 â Note: As for the setting ranges of parameter data, refer to the Parameter List. 13-60 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. 13 Detailed description A. Workpiece origin data input 1. The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59, G90 and G91. 2. Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or a program error. 3. Irrespective of workpiece offset type (G54 - G59 and G54.1), the data to the axial addresses have to refer to the origin of the fundamental machine coordinate system. 4. Depending upon the data input mode â absolute (G90) or incremental (G91) â the designated data will overwrite, or will be added to, the existing data. 5. L-code and P-code commands can be omitted, indeed, but take notice of the following when omitting them: 1) Omit both L-code and P-code commands only when The axial data should refer to the coordinate system that was last selected. 2) The L-code command only may be omitted when the intended axial data refer to a coordinate system of the same type (in terms of L-code: L2 or L20) as the last selected one; give a P-command in such a case as follows: - Set an integer from 0 to 6 with address P to specify the coordinate shift data or one of the coordinate systems from G54 to G59. - Set an integer from 1 to 48 with address P to specify one of the additional workpiece coordinate systems of G54.1. 3) If the P-code command only is omitted: An alarm will result if the value of L mismatches the coordinate system last selected. 6. Axial data without a decimal point can be entered in the range from â99999999 to +99999999. The data settings at that time depend upon the data input unit. Example: G10 L2 P1 Xâ100. Yâ1000 Zâ100 Bâ1000 The above command sets the following data: Metric system X â100. Metric system (up to 4 dec. places) X â100. Inch system X â100. Inch system (up to 5 dec. places) X â100. Y â1. Y â0.1 Y â0.1 Y â0.01 Z â0.1 Z â0.01 Z â0.01 Z â0.001 B â1. B â0.1 B â1. B â0.1 7. The origin data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the WORK OFFSET display until that display has been selected anew. 8. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm. 9. Setting an illegal P-code value causes an alarm. 10. Setting an illegal axial value causes an alarm. 11. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check. B. Tool offset data input 1. The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59, G90 and G91. 2. Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or a program error. 13-61 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. Depending upon the data input mode â absolute (G90) or incremental (G91) â the designated data will overwrite, or will be added to, the existing data. 4. Offset data (R) without a decimal point can be entered in the range from â999999 to +999999 for geometric offset, or in the range from â99999 to +99999 for wear compensation. The data settings at that time depend upon the data input unit. Example: G10 L10 P1 R1000 The above command sets the following data: Metric system 1. Metric system (up to 4 dec. places) 0.1 Inch system 0.1 Inch system (up to 5 dec. places) 0.01 5. The offset data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the TOOL OFFSET display until that display has been selected anew. 6. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm. 7. A command of âG10 P_ R_â without an L-code is also available for tool offset data input. 8. Setting an illegal P-code value causes an alarm. 9. Setting an illegal offset value (R) causes an alarm. 10. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check. C. Parameter data input 1. The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59, G90 and G91. 2. Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or a program error. 3. Other NC statements must not be given in the parameter input mode. 4. No sequence number must be designated with address N in the parameter input mode. 5. Irrespective of the data input mode â absolute (G90) or incremental (G91) â the designated data will overwrite the existing parameter. Moreover, describe all the data in decimal numbers (hexadecimal and bit type data, therefore, must be converted). Example: For changing a bit type data of 00110110 to 00110111: Since (00110111)2 = (55)10 [a binary number of 00110111 corresponds to â55â in decimal notation], set 55 with address R. 6. All decimal places, even if inputted, are ignored. 7. Some specific bit-type parameters require selection of one of multiple bits. For the parameter shown as an example below, set data that turns on only one of bits 2 to 5. Example: Parameter K107 bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S-shaped speed filter S-shaped speed filter S-shaped speed filter S-shaped speed filter 7.1 ms 14.2 ms 28.4 ms 56.8 ms Setting â1â for bits 2 and 3, for example, could not make valid a speed filter of 21.3 msec (= 7.1 + 14.2). 13-62 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 8. The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not made valid till the execution of a G11 command. 9. The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not indicated as they are on the PARAMETER display until that display has been selected anew. 10. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm. 11. Setting an illegal N-code value (parameter No.) causes an alarm. 12. Omission of P-code for an axis type parameter causes an alarm. 13. Setting an illegal parameter value with address R causes an alarm. 14. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check. 4. Sample programs A. Entering tool offset data from tape L G10L10P10Râ12345 G10L10P05R98765 G10L10P40R2468 L H10 = â12345 B. 13 H05 = 98765 H40 = 2468 Updating tool offset data Assumes that H10 has already been set equal to â1000. Example 1: N1 N2 N3 N4 G01 G28 G91 G01 Example 2: G90 G43 Zâ100000 H10 Z0 G10 L10 P10 Râ500 G90 G43 Zâ100000 H10 (Z = â101000) (â500 is added in the G91 mode.) (Z = â101500) Assumes that H10 has already been set equal to â1000. Main program N1 G00 X100000 .................... a N2 #1=â1000 N3 M98 P1111L4 .................... b1, b2, b3, b4 Subprogram O1111 N1 G01 G91 G43 Z0 H10 F100 .... c1, c2, c3, c4 N2 G01 X1000 ...................... d1, d2, d3, d4 N3 #1=#1â1000 N4 G90 G10 L10 P10 R#1 N5 M99 (a) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4) c1 1000 d1 c2 1000 d2 c3 1000 d3 c4 d4 1000 Note: Final offset stroke: H10 = â5000 1000 1000 1000 1000 MEP134 13-63 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) The programs in Example 2 above can be rewritten as follows: Example 3: Main program N1 G00 X100000 N2 M98 P1111 L4 Subprogram O1111 N1 G01 G91 G43 Z0 H10 F100 N2 G01 X1000 N3 G10 L10 P10 Râ1000 N4 M99 Even when the command code is displayed on , the current offset number and variables will remain unupdated until that command is executed. Note: N1 N2 N3 N4 C. G10 G43 G0 G10 L10 P10 Zâ10000 Xâ10000 L10 P10 Râ100 H10 Yâ10000 Râ200 Executing block N4 will cause an offset stroke in H10 to be updated. Updating the workpiece coordinate system offset data Assume that the previous workpiece coordinate system offset data is as follows: X = â10.000 M N100 N101 N102 M M02 âX Y = â10.000 G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0 G10 L2 P1 Xâ15.000 Yâ15.000 X0 Y0 â20. M â10. Fundamental machine coordinate system zero point N100 Coordinate system of G54 before change â10. âX N101 (W1) Coordinate system of G54 after change âX N102 W1 â20. âY âY âY MEP135 13-64 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 Note 1: Changes in the display of the workpiece position at N101 At N101, the display of tool position in the G54 coordinate system changes before and after workpiece coordinate system updating with G10. X = +5.000 Y = +5.000 X=0 Y=0 Note 2: Prepare the following program to set workpiece coordinate system offset data in G54 to G59: G10L2P1Xâ10.000 G10L2P2Xâ20.000 G10L2P3Xâ30.000 G10L2P4Xâ40.000 G10L2P5Xâ50.000 G10L2P6Xâ60.000 D. Yâ10.000 Yâ20.000 Yâ30.000 Yâ40.000 Yâ50.000 Yâ60.000 Programming for using one workpiece coordinate system as multiple workpiece coordinate systems M #1=â50. #2=10. M98 P200 L5 M M02 % N1 G90 G54 G10 L2 P1 X#1 N2 G00 X0 Y0 N3 Xâ5. F100 N4 X0 Yâ5. N5 Y0 N6 #1=#1+#2 N7 M99 % Main program Subprogram (O200) âX â60. â50. â40. â30. â20. â10. G54'' G54'' G54' G54' G54 W W W W W Y#1 M â10. Fundamental machine coordinate system zero point 5th cycle â20. 4th cycle â30. 3rd cycle â40. 2nd cycle â50. 1st cycle âY MEP136 13-65 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) E. Programming for parameter data input G10L50 N4017R10 N6088R96 N12067Râ1000 N12072R67 N150004P1R50 G11 5. Parameter input mode ON D17 is set to â10â. F88 is set to â01100000â. [ (01100000)2 = (96)10 ] L67 is set to ââ1000â. L72 is set to â0x43â. [ (43)16 = (67)10 ] P4 data for the 1st axis (X-axis) is set to â50â. Parameter input mode OFF Related alarms Alarm No. 807 Alarm message ILLEGAL FORMAT Cause Work offset input: P-command is omitted in a block of G10 L20 (or L2) although the last selected coordinate system is one of the systems from G54 to G59 (or of the G54.1 systems). Remedy Review the program data. Parameter input: An illegal parameter number is set. Work offset input: The setting range of the coordinate system number or the offset data is overstepped. 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT Tool offset input: The setting range of the offset data is overstepped. Review the program data. Parameter input: The axis number is not specified for an axis type parameter. The setting range of the axis number or the parameter data is overstepped. 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. Tool offset input: The specified offset number is greater than the number of available data sets. Correct the offset number according to the number of available data sets. 903 ILLEGAL G10 L NUMBER Work offset input: A command of G10 L20 is set although the corresponding function for the G54.1 coordinate systems is not provided. Give an available L-code command. 13-66 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 13-7 Tool Offsetting Based on MAZATROL Tool Data Parameter selection allows you to offset both the tool length and the tool diameter using MAZATROL tool data (tool diameter and tool length data). 13-7-1 Selection parameters Using the following parameters, select whether or not MAZATROL tool data is to be used: User parameters F92 bit 7 = 1: Tool diameter offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data ACT-Ï (tool diameter data). F93 bit 3 = 1: Tool length offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data LENGTH (tool length data). F94 bit 2 = 1: Tool length offsetting using the MAZATROL tool data is prevented from being cancelled by a reference-point return command. F94 bit 7 = 1: Tool offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data ACT-Ï CO. (or No.) and LENG CO. (or No.). (Set F94 bit 7 to 0 to use the data stored on the TOOL OFFSET display.) 1. Tool length offsetting Parameter F93 F94 bit 3 bit 7 Data items used TOOL OFFSET Tool offset No. LENGTH TOOL DATA (MAZATROL) 0 2. Remarks G43/G44 H_ (P_) T_ LENGTH [1] + OFFSET No. or LENGTH + LENG CO. [2] OFFSET No. or LENG CO. [2] TOOL OFFSET + TOOL DATA 0 [1] Programming format Tool offset No. + LENGTH [1] 1 1 - Length offset cancellation not required for tool change. T_ + H_ - G43 not required. 0 1 G43/G44 H_ Length offset cancellation required for tool change. [3] 1 0 (G43/G44 H_) + (T_) (P_) Length offset cancellation required for tool change. [3] [1] TOOL LENGTH data for milling tools, and LENGTH A and LENGTH B for turning tools. [2] [3] LENG CO. data are only used for milling tools. Canceling method - Set G49 before tool change command. - Set G28/G30 before tool change command (when F94 bit 2 = 0). Tool diameter offsetting Parameter Data items used TOOL OFFSET TOOL DATA (MAZATROL) TOOL OFFSET + TOOL DATA Programming format F92 bit 7 F94 bit 7 Tool offset No. 0 0 G41/G42 D_ ACT-Ï + ACT-Ï CO. or ACT-Ï + OFFSET No. 1 1 G41/G42 T_ ACT-Ï CO. or OFFSET No. 0 1 G41/G42 T_ 1 0 G41/G42 D_ + T_ Tool offset No. + ACT-Ï 13-67 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 3. Nose-R compensation Parameter Data items used F92 bit 7 F94 bit 7 Programming format TOOL OFFSET Tool offset No. 0 0 G41/G42 D_ TOOL DATA (MAZATROL) NOSE-R + OFFSET No. 1 1 G41/G42 T_ OFFSET No. 0 1 G41/G42 T_ Tool offset No. + NOSE-R 1 0 G41/G42 D_ + T_ TOOL OFFSET + TOOL DATA 13-7-2 Tool length offsetting 1. Function and purpose Even when offset data is not programmed, tool length offsetting will be performed according to the MAZATROL tool data LENGTH that corresponds to the designated tool number. 2. Parameter setting Set both bit 3 of parameter F93 and bit 2 of parameter F94 to 1. 3. Detailed description 1. Tool length offsetting is performed automatically, but its timing and method differ as follows: - After a tool change command has been issued, offsetting is performed according to the LENGTH data of the tool mounted in the spindle. (A tool change command code must be set in the program before tool length offsetting can be done.) - After command G43 has been set, offsetting is performed according to the LENGTH data of the tool mounted in the spindle. 2. Tool length offsetting is cancelled in the following cases: - When a command for tool change with some other tool is executed - When M02 or M30 is executed - When the reset key is pressed - When command G49 is issued - When a reference-point return command is executed with bit 2 of parameter F94 set to 0 3. The table below shows how and when the tool length offsetting actually takes place. F94 bit 7 4. How and when the tool length offsetting actually takes place 0 For milling tools: Length offsetting in the first movement on the Z-axis. For turning tools: Simultaneous offsetting by LENGTH A and B in the first axis movement, be it on the X-, Y-, Z-, or B-axis. 1 For milling tools: Length offsetting in the first movement on the Z-axis. For turning tools: Offsetting by LENGTH A in the first movement on the Z-axis, and by LENGTH B in the first movement on the X-axis. If this offset function is used with a G43 H-command, offsetting will use as its offset data the sum total of the MAZATROL tool data LENGTH and the offset amount specified by the G43 H (or G44 H) command. Note 1: Set G43 H0 if tool length offsetting is to be done using a G43 H-command and only the offset amount specified by H is to be cancelled. 13-68 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 Note 2: With a G44 command, tool length offsetting based on MAZATROL tool data is not performed. Note 3: The restart operation must begin from a position before a G43 command code or a tool change command code. Even when the spindle has a mounted tool, G43 or the tool change command must be executed before offsetting based on MAZATROL tool data can take place. Note 4: Offsetting will fail if registered MAZATROL tool data LENGTH is not present. Note 5: For an EIA/ISO program, to carry out tool length offset operations using the tool length data included in MAZATROL tool data, it becomes necessary to set data in the validation parameter for the tool length data of the MAZATROL tool data and to insert a tool change T- and M-code command block. It is to be noted that the tool change command block may not be missed particularly in the following cases: - During automatic operation, if the first tool to be used has already been mounted in the spindle. - During call of an EIA/ISO program as a subprogram from the MAZATROL main program, if the tool to be used immediately prior to call of the subprogram is the same as that which is to be designated in that subprogram as the first tool to be used. 4. Sample programs For milling tools Machine zero point Workpiece coordinate Z (G54) Offsetting values: (LENGTH = 95.) Length offset amount =100. N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 BA62 T01: LENGTH =95. +5.00 Workpiece zero point 13-69 G90 G91 T01 G90 G0 G01 G94 G00 G40 G80 G28 Z0 T00 M06 G54 X-100. Y0 Z5. Z-50. F100 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) For turning tools LENGTH A = 95. LENGTH B = â5. N001 N002 N003 N005 N006 N007 G90 G91 T01 G90 G00 G01 G94 G00 G40 G28 Z0 T00 M06 G54 X10. Z5. Z-50. F100 G80 X Machine zero point Z Workpiece coordinate X (G54) BA62 LENGTH A =95. X-axis length offset amount +10.0 Workpiece zero point LENGTH B=5. = Z-axis length offset amount +5.00 Workpiece coordinate Z (G54) 13-7-3 Tool diameter offsetting 1. Function and purpose Tool diameter offsetting by a G41 or G42 command uses MAZATROL tool data ACT-Ï as the offset amounts. 2. Parameter setting Set bit 7 of parameter F92 to 1. 3. Detailed description - Tool diameter offsetting uses as its offset amounts the diameter data of the tool which is mounted in the spindle at the issuance of G41/G42. - Tool diameter offsetting is cancelled by G40. - If the tool diameter offset function is used with a D-command, the sum total of the data indicated by the corresponding offset number (D) and the radius of the tool will be used as the offset data. Note 1: The tool used must be mounted in the spindle before restarting the program. Note 2: Offsetting based on tool diameter data will not occur if registered MAZATROL tool diameter data is not present or if a tool for which tool diameter data cannot be entered is to be used. 13-70 Return to Library TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) 13 Note 3: To carry out for an EIA/ISO program the tool diameter offset operations using the tool diameter data included in MAZATROL tool data, it is necessary to insert tool change command blocks, as it is the case for tool length offsetting (refer to Note 5 in Subsection 13-7-2). 13-7-4 Tool data update (during automatic operation) 1. Function and purpose Tool Data Update allows MAZATROL tool data to be updated during automatic operation based on an EIA/ISO program. 2. Parameter setting Set parameter L57 to 1. 3. Detailed description This function allows the entire tool data, except for spindle tools, to be updated during automatic operation based on an EIA/ISO program. Parameter TOOL NOM-Ï ACT-Ï LENGTH COMP. THR/HP LIFE TIME MAT. REV. L57 = 0 No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes L57 = 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note 1: In the table given above, âYesâ indicates that you can update the data, and âNoâ indicates that you cannot update the data. Identification between MAZATROL programs and EIA/ISO programs is automatically made by whether the program currently being executed, is MAZATROL or EIA/ISO, irrespective of whether it is a main program or subprogram. If, however, the main program is MAZATROL and its subprograms are EIA/ISO, then the currently active set of programs is regarded as a MAZATROL program. Note 2: An alarm 428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION) will occur if the spindle tool data is modified during automatic operation based on an EIA/ISO program. 13-71 Return to Library 13 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS (FOR SERIES M) - NOTE - 13-72 E Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-1 Fixed Cycles for Turning When performing roughing and other such operations during turning, these functions permit to command in a single block the machining program which is normaly commanded in several blocks. In other words, they simplify the machining program. The following types of fixed cycles for turning are available. G-code 1. Function G90 Longitudinal turning cycle G92 Threading cycle G94 Transverse turning cycle The programming format is as follows: G90 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ; (Same for G92, G94) The taper values of fixed cycles G90, G92 and G94 are to be specified by argument R. 2. Fixed cycle commands are modal G-codes and so they are valid until another command in the same modal group or a cancel command is set. The following G-code cancels fixed cycle commands. G00, G01, G02, G03 G07, G09, G10, G27, G28, G29, G30, G30.1 G31, G32, G34 G37, G50, G52, G53 3. There are two types of fixed cycle call, move command block call and block-by-block call. These are selected by a parameter setting. A move command block call calls the fixed cycle macro subprogram only when there is an axial move command in the fixed cycle mode. The block-by-block call calls the fixed cycle macro subprogram in each block in the fixed cycle mode. Both types are executed until the fixed cycle is cancelled. 4. A manual interruption can be applied while a fixed cycle for turning (G90, G92 and G94) is being executed. Upon completion of the interruption, however, the tool must be returned to the position where the manual interruption was applied and then the fixed cycle for turning should be restarted. If it is restarted without the tool having been returned, all subsequent operation movements will deviate by an amount equivalent to the manual interruption value. 14-1 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-1-1 Longitudinal turning cycle: G90 [Series M: G290] 1. Straight turning This function enables continuous straight turning in the longitudinal direction using the following command. G90 X/U_Z/W_F_; X-axis R : Radid traverse F : Cutting feed 4(R) 3(F) U 2 1(R) 2(F) Z X W Z-axis TEP118 2. Taper turning This function enables continuous taper turning in the longitudinal direction using the following command. G90 X/U_Z/W_I_F_; R : Radid traverse F : Cutting feed I : Taper depth (radial incremental value with sign) X-axis 4(R) 3(F) 2(F) U 2 W X 1(R) I Z Z-axis TEP119 14-2 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Remarks In single-block operation mode, the tool stops either at the ending points of operations 1, 2, 3 and 4, or only on completion of one cycle (depending on bit 7 of parameter F111) Depending on the U, W and I signs, the following shapes are created. [1] U < 0, W < 0, I < 0 [2] U < 0, W < 0, I > 0 W W U 2 4 3 U 2 1 2 X I 4 3 1 2 I X Z Z [3] U > 0, W < 0, I < 0 [4] U > 0, W < 0, I > 0 X X Z U 2 Z 3 2 I I 2 4 U 2 1 W 1 3 4 W TEP120 Program error 899 ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH occurs in shapes [2] and [3] unless the following condition is satisfied. | U |â¥| 2 I | 14-3 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-1-2 Threading cycle: G92 [Series M: G292] 1. Straight threading This function enables straight threading using the following command. G92 X/U_ Z/W_ F/E_ ; (R) : Rapid traverse (F) : Threading X-axis 4(R) 3(R) 2(F) U 2 1(R) Z W X Z-axis TEP121 2. Taper threading This function enables taper threading using the following command. G92 X/U_ Z/W_ I_ F/E_ ; (R) : Rapid traverse (F) : Threading I : Taper depth (radial incremental value with sign) 4(R) X-axis 3(R) 2(F) 1(R) I U 2 Z W X Z-axis TEP122 14-4 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Remarks - Details for thread run-out θ α α : Length of thread run-out If the thread lead is assumed to be L, then the parameter can be set by 0.1 L in the range 0 to 4.0. θ : Run-out angle of threding The parameter (F28) can be set in 45° or 60°. TEP123 - In single-block operation mode, the tool stops either at the ending points of operations 1, 3 and 4, or only on completion of one cycle (depending on bit 7 of parameter F111). - When the feed hold function is applied during a threading cycle, automatic operation will stop at that position if not in threading. By setting of parameter F111 bit 2, threading under way can be stopped either at the next movement completion position (completion of operation 3) of the threading or after chamfering from the position where the feed hold function is applied. - During threading, use or disuse of dry run will not be changed. - Depending on the U, W and I signs, the following shapes are created. [1] U < 0, W < 0, I < 0 [2] U < 0, W < 0, I > 0 W U 2 W 4 3 U 2 1 X 2 4 3 1 2 I X I Z Z [3] U > 0, W < 0, I < 0 [4] U > 0, W < 0, I > 0 X X Z U 2 2 Z 3 I 2 4 U 2 1 I 1 3 4 W W TEP124 Program error 899 ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH occurs in shapes [2] and [3] unless the following condition is satisfied. | U |â¥| 2 I | - For machines with the optional function for automatic correction of threading start position, the thread cutting conditions can be changed by âoverridingâ the spindle speed. See Subsection 6-13-6 for more information. 14-5 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-1-3 Transverse turning cycle: G94 [Series M: G294] 1. Straight turning This function enables continuous straight turning in the face direction using the following command. G94 X/U_Z/W_F_; X-axis (R) : Rapid traverse (F) : Cutting feed 1(R) 2(F) 4(R) U 2 3(F) Z W X Z-axis TEP125 2. Taper turning This function enables continuous taper turning in the face direction using the following command. G94 X/U_Z/W_K_F_; X-axis K 1(R) 2(F) 4(R) U 2 (R) : Rapid traverse (F) : Cutting feed K : Taper depth (radical incremental value with sign) 3(F) Z W X Z-axis TEP126 14-6 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Remarks - In single-block operation mode, the tool stops either at the ending points of operations 1, 2, 3 and 4, or only on completion of one cycle (depending on bit 7 of parameter F111). - Depending on the U, W and K signs, the following shapes are created. [1] U < 0, W < 0, K < 0 K [2] U < 0, W < 0, K > 0 K W 1(R) U 2 2(F) 1(R) U 2 4(R) X 2(F) X 3(F) 3(F) Z W Z [3] U > 0, W < 0, K < 0 K U 2 [4] U > 0, W < 0, K > 0 W W 1(R) 3(F) 2(F) 4(R) U 2 4(R) X 2(F) X 3(F) Z 4(R) 1(R) Z K TEP127 Program error 899 ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH occurs in shapes [2] and [3] unless the following condition is satisfied. |W|â¥|K| 14-7 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-2 Compound Fixed Cycles These functions permit to execute the fixed cycle by designating a program in a block with corresponding G-code. The types of compound fixed cycles are listed below. G-code Function G70 Finishing cycle G71 Longitudinal roughing cycle (roughing along finish shape) G72 Transverse roughing cycle (roughing along finish shape) G73 Contour-parallel roughing cycle G74 Longitudinal cut-off cycle G75 Transverse cut-off cycle G76 Compound threading cycle Compound fixed cycles Î Compound fixed cycles ÎÎ - If the finish shape program has not been entered in the memory, any of the above functions for the compound fixed cycles Î (G70 to G73) cannot be used. - The programming formats are as follows. G-code Programming format G70 G70 A_P_Q_ ; G71 G71 G71 U_R_ ; A P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ; G72 G72 G72 W_R_ ; A_P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ; G73 G73 G73 U_W_R_; P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ; G74 G74 G74 R_ ; X(U)_Z(W)_P_Q_R_F_S_T_ ; G75 R_ ; G75 X(U)_Z(W)_P_Q_R_F_S_T_ ; G76 G76 P_Q_R_ ; X(U)_Z(W)_R_P_Q_F_ ; G75 G76 14-8 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-2-1 Longitudinal roughing cycle : G71 [Series M: G271] 1. Overview With commands as shown below for finish shape between (A) to (H), roughing by cutting depth D will be executed by leaving finishing allowances U and W. (0 or 2 for TC4) (H) (G) (A) Cycle starting point (F) (E) (1 for TC4) (D) (C) 45° (B) TEP128 The parameter TC4 will determine escape pattern from wall at right angle, whether 45° escape or feedrate accelerated at wall should be made during roughing cycle. By setting 2 for TC4, chamfering speed can be changed. (Refer to parameter TC3.) 2. Programming format G71 Uâd R_; G71 A_ P_ Q_ Uâu W_ F_ S_ T_; Uâd : Cutting depth It is commanded without sign (radius value). This command is modal and valid until a new value is commanded. R : Escape distance This command is modal and valid until a new value is commanded. Escape angle is fixed to 45°. A : Finish shape program No. P : Head sequence No. for finishing shape Q : End sequence No. for finishing shape Uâu : Finishing allowance and direction in X-axis direction (diametral value or radius value) W : Finishing allowance and direction in Z-axis direction F_ S_ T_: F, S and T command F, S and T specified in blocks of âPâ to âQâ are ignored during cycle, and those specified in or before G71 block become valid. - âd and âu are both specified by address U. The differentiation depends on whether P and Q are specified in the same block. Note: Even if F and S commands exist in blocks defined by P and Q, they will be ignored during roughing cycle because they are considered for finishing cycle. 14-9 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. Detailed description Machining shape executed by G71 may be one of the four combinations below. Basically machining will be executed by Z-axis displacement. Finishing allowances U and W may have different signs. (C) +X (A) (A) (B) (B) U>0 W>0 (C) U>0 W 0 < 0 âk < 0 < 0 âk > 0 D732S0014 âi, âk and âu, âw are both specified by addresses U and W. The differentiation is given by whether P and Q are commanded in the same block. That is, addresses U and W when P and Q are not commanded in G73 block represent âi and âk respectively, and those when P and Q are commanded represent âu and âw respectively. - When the cycle terminates, the tool is returned to point A. - In machining where the center of tool nose is aligned with the starting point, if cutting is performed with the tool nose radius compensation applied, the amount of tool nose radius compensation is added to âu and âw. - Others are as with G71. 14-18 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 6. Sample programs 90 75 2 3 3 50 30 5 Ï170 Ï150 4 4 2 +X (Ï120) Ï80 Ï50 +Z Unit: mm N010 N011 N012 N013 N014 N015 N016 N017 N018 N019 N020 N021 N022 N023 G00 G96 G98; G28 U0 W0; T001T000M6; X150.Z5.; G73 U8.W6.R3.; G73 P016 Q020 U4.W2. F150 S100 M3; G00 X50.; G01 Z-30; X80.Z-50.; Z-75.; X120.Z-90.; G70 P016 Q020; G28 U0 W0 M5; M30.; 14-19 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-2-4 Finishing cycle: G70 [Series M: G270] After roughing have been carried out by the G71 to G73 commands, finishing can be performed by the following programming format. G70 A_ P_ Q_ ; A : Finish shape program number (program being executed when omitted) P : Finish shape start sequence number (program head when omitted) Q : Finish shape end sequence number (end of program when omitted) Up to M99 command when M99 comes first even if Q command is present - The F, S and T commands in the finishing shape program are valid during the finishing cycle. - When the G70 cycle is completed, the tool returns to the starting point by rapid feed and the next block is read. Example 1: Example 2: When designating a sequence number M N200!!!; N100ãG70ãP200ãQ300; M N110 N300!!!; N120 M N200 Finishing shape program M N300 N310 M When designing a program number M N100 G70 A100; N110!!!; N120!!!; M O100 G01 X100 Z50 F0.5; M M99; After execution of the N100 cycle in either Example 1 or Example 2, the N110 block is executed next. 14-20 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-2-5 Longitudinal cut-off cycle: G74 [Series M: G274] 1. Overview This function is used for smooth disposal of machining chips in longitudinal cut-off machining. For SS materials which produce hard-to-cut machining chips this function can be managed for easy machining chip disposal. 2. Programming format G74 Re; G74 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Pâi Qâk Râd Ff Ss Tt; e x/u z/w âi âk âd f s t : Distance of return This command is modal and valid until a new value is commanded. : Absolute value/incremental value of X-axis : Absolute value/incremental value of Z-axis : X-axis movement distance (commmand without sign) : Z-axis cut depth (command without sign) : Tool escape distance at the bottom of cut It is usually commanded with a plus data. When address X/U and P are omitted, however, it is commanded with the sign of direction to be escaped. : Feed rate : S command : T command The distance âeâ is set by parameter TC74 (pecking return distance in grooving process). A âd âi U 2 e âk Z W X TEP141 14-21 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. Detailed description 1. For drilling X (U), P and Râd are not required. Omit these data. 15 15 50 15 5 G00 X0 Z5.0; G74 Z-50.0 Q15.0 F0.2; TEP142 2. Without Râd, escape will be considered as 0. Normally Râd is specified with plus data. When X (U) and P are omitted in outside or inside diameter machining, however, Râd requires a sign. Four combinations of G74 (B) (A) (C) (D) âd > 0 for (A), (B) âd < 0 for (C), (D) TEP143 3. During single block operation, all the blocks are executed step by step. 14-22 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. 5. 14 Remarks 1. During single block operation, all the blocks are executed step by step. 2. Omission of address X (U), P and Râd provides the operation of Z-axis alone, resulting in peck drilling cycle. 3. âeâ and âd are both command values of address R. The differentiation is given by whether Z (W) is commanded together. That is, the command R together with Z (W) results in that of âd. 4. Cycle operation is performed in the block where Z (W) is commanded. Sample programs 40 +X (Ï160) Ï50 Ï100 +Z Unit: mm G00 G96 G98; G28 U0 W0; X100.Z2.; G74 R2.; G74 U-50.Z-40.P5.Q7.F150 S100 M3; G28 U0 W0; M30; 14-23 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-2-6 Transverse cut-off cycle: G75 [Series M: G275] 1. Overview This function is used for smooth disposal of machining chips in transverse cut-off machining. This allows easy disposal of machining chips in face turning as well. 2. Programming format G75 Re ; G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ Râd F_ S_ T_ ; G75 executes cycle as shown below. A P e U 2 Q Z W âd X 14-24 TEP144 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Detailed description 1. For outside and inside diameter groove machining, Z (W), Q and Râd are not required. Omit these data. G00 X105.0 Z-60.0; G75 X90.0 P2.0 F0.05; 2 Ï100 60 Ï90 TEP145 2. Without Râd, escape distance in Z-axis direction will be considered as 0. Normally Râd is specified with plus data. When Z (W) and Q are omitted in edge machining, however, Râd requires a sign. Four combinations of G75 (C) (A) âd âd âd âd (D) (B) âd > 0 for (A), (B) âd < 0 for (C), (D) TEP146 3. During single block operation, all the blocks are executed step by step. 14-25 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. 5. Remarks 1. Both G74 and G75, which are used for cutting off, grooving or drilling, are a cycle to give the escape of a tool automatically. Four patterns which are symmetrical with each other are available. 2. The return distance âeâ can be set by parameter TC74. The parameter setting value will be overridden with program command. 3. During single block operation, all the blocks are executed step by step. Sample programs 15 20 +X +Z Ï70 Ï100 Unit: mm G00 G96 G98; G28 U0 W0; X102.Z-20.; G75 R2.; G75 W-15.X70.P6.Q5.F150 S100 M3; G28 U0 W0; M30; 14-26 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-2-7 Compound threading cycle: G76 [Series M: G276] 1. Cycle configuration U 2 âd i X k TC82 W Z TC82: Length of thread run-out (Parameter) F- or E-code command Rapid traverse TEP147 Tool tip a âd âd n 1. cut d= 2. cut TC78 2 k 3. cut n-th cut TC78: Thread finishing allowance (Parameter) (Diameter value) d TEP148 14-27 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. Programming format G76 Pmra Rd; (omission allowed) G76 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ri Pk Qâd Fl S_ T_; m : Repeat times of final finishing (1 to 99) This command is modal and valid until a new value is commanded. r : Length of thread run-out Assuming that the lead is l, the command is given with two numerals of 00 to 99 in 0.1 increments between 0.0 and 9.9. This command is modal and valid until a new value is commanded. a : Tool tip angle (thread angle) Six kinds of 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29° and 0° can be selected. The value correspoinding to the angle is commanded with two numerals. This command is modal and valid until a new value is commanded. d : Finishing allowance This command is modal and valid until a new value is commanded. i : Radial difference of threading portion If i = 0, straight thread cutting is provided. k : Thread height (Commanded with the distance in the X-axis direction and radius value) âd : First cut depth (radial data) l : Lead of thread (As with G32 thread cutting) S, T : As with G71 Note: âmâ, ârâ and âaâ are commanded together by address P. When m = 2 times, r = 1.2 l and a = 60° are provided, enter the data as follows. P 02 12 60 m r a 14-28 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Detailed description - Length of thread run-out can be set by parameter TC82 by 0.1 à L units in a range 0.1 à L to 4.0 à L (L as lead). - Cut depth is determined with âd for initial cut, and âd n for n-th cut to have a constant depth for each cut. Four combinations of G76 (A) (C) (D) (B) i < 0 for (A), (D) i > 0 for (B), (C) F- or E-code command Rapid traverse TEP149 14-29 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS - One cycle configuration The tool moves at rapid feed for operations [1], [2], [5] and [6] in the cycle and at the cutting feed based on the value designated to F for operations [3] and [4]. w z [1] [6] [5] U 2 [2] [4] [3] (âi) k r x When R is negative a°/2 TEP151 w z S [1] [6] [5] [2] U 2 k [4] [3] a°/2 i r x When Ri is positive TEP152 âd for first cutting pass a° Second cutting pass âd à 2 k n-th cutting pass âd à n Finishing allowance âdâ (cutting results for âmâ number of passes) TEP153 14-30 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. 14 Remarks 1. When the feed hold button is pressed during execution of G76, undergoing threading will be automatically stopped after completion of a block without threading or after completion of chamfering by setting the parameter F111 bit 2 as in the case of G92. (The feed hold lamp lights immediately in the feed hold mode and it goes off when automatic operation stops.) If threading is not being carried out, the feed hold lamp lights and the feed hold status is established. 2. The machining stops upon completion of operations [1], [4] and [5] when the mode is switched to another automatic mode during the G76 command execution, when automatic operation is changed to manual operations or when single block operation is conducted. 3. During execution of G76, validity or invalidity of dry run will not be changed while threading is under way. 4. During single block operation, all the blocks are executed step by step. For blocks of threading, however, the subsequent block is also executed. 5. For machines with the optional function for automatic correction of threading start position, the thread cutting conditions can be changed by âoverridingâ the spindle speed. See Subsection 6-13-6 for more information. +X E U 2 A B âd a D B i x 2 k k C d r z +Z C w Rapid traverse Cutting feed D732S0016 5. Parameter - Repeat times of final finishing can be set by parameter TC81. Parameter setting values will be overridden with program command. - Length of thread run-out can be set by parameter TC82. The parameter setting value will be overridden with program command. - Tool tip angle can be set by parameter TC80. Parameter setting values will be overridden with program command. - Finishing allowance can be set by a parameter TC78. The parameter setting will be overridden with program command. 14-31 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 6. Detailed description - Setting the tool tip angle provides the machining of a single tip, permitting the decrease in a load applied to the tool tip. - Cut amount is held constant by setting the first cut depth as âd and n-th cut depth as âd n. Tool tip a B âd First cut Second cut Third cut n-th cut âd n k d D732S0017 - Allowing for the sign of each address, four patterns are available, and internal threads can also be cut. - Threading cycle provides a feed commanded by F code or E code only between C and D, and rapid feed for others. - For the cycle shown above, the signs of increment are as follows: u, w ........According to the direction of paths AâC and CâD. i...........According to the direction of path AâC. k...........Plus (always plus) âd .........Plus (always plus) - Finishing allowance (d; diameter value) can be set by parameter (TC78) within the range as follows: 0 to 65.535 mm (6.5535 inches) 14-32 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 7. 14 Sample programes +X 80 20 +Z 6 1.8 Ï60.64 Ï68 Ï100 1.8 3.68 6 0.1 Unit: mm G00 G97 G99; G28 U0 W0; S500 M3; X100.Z20.; G76 P011060 R0.2; G76 X60.64 Z-80.P3.68 Q1.8 F6.0; G28 U0 W0 M5; M30; 14-33 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 8. Notes 1. For G76 cycle, the notes on threading are as with G32 and G92 threading. If feed hold works during threading, when the parameter of âfeed hold during threadingâ is valid (F111 bit 2 = 1), the tool stops at the chamferring position at that moment (see item 3 below). Refer to G92 threading cycle for details. 2. Run-out angle can be set in parameter F28 within the range from 0° to 89°, but it is valid only from 45° to 60°. Setting of 90° or more is taken as 45°. Setting of 0° to 45° is taken as 45°, and that of 46° to 89° as 60°. 3. During threading, the feed hold during cycle performs one of the follwing two stopping operations according to the parameter (F111 bit 2). - After the block following threading is executed, the tool stops. - The tool is stopped at the point where chamferring is accomplished at 60° from the position where the feed hold key is pressed. The tool stops immediately except during threading. Pressing the cycle start button again causes X and Z together to return to the starting point at rapid feed, and the cycle continues. 4. An alarm occurs in the cases below. - Either X or Z is not specified. - Either displacement distance of X- or Z-axis is 0°. - The thread angle exceeds the range from 0° to 120°. 5. During single block operation, all the blocks are executed step by step. For blocks of threading, however, the subsequent block is also executed. 6. Data commanded by P, Q and R is differentiated by whether addresses X (U) and Z (W) are specified in the same block. 7. The tool performs cycle operation in G76 block where addresses X (U) and Z (W) are commanded. 8. For machines with the optional function for automatic correction of threading start position, the thread cutting conditions can be changed by âoverridingâ the spindle speed. See Subsection 6-13-6 for more information. 14-2-8 Checkpoints for compound fixed cycles: G70 to G76 [Series M: G270 to G276] 1. Except for the parameters which have been preset, set all the required parameters in the blocks for the compound fixed cycle commands. 2. Provided that the finishing shape sequence has been registered in the memory, compound fixed cycle Î commands can be executed in the memory, MDI or tape operation mode. 3. When executing commands G70 to G73, ensure that the sequence number of the finishing shape sequence which is specified to addresses P and Q is not duplicated in that program. 4. The finishing shape sequence specified to addresses P and Q in the blocks G71 to G73 should be prepared so that the maximum number of blocks is 100 for all the commands for corner chamfering, corner rounding and other commands including the automatic insertion blocks based on tool nose radius compensation. If this number is exceeded, program error occurs. 5. The finishing shape sequences which are designated by the blocks G71 to G73 should be a program in monotonous changes (increases or reductions only) for both the X- and Z-axes. 14-34 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 6. Blocks without movement in the finishing shape sequence are ignored. 7. N, F, S, M and T commands in the finishing shape sequence are ignored during roughing. 8. When any of the following commands are present in a finishing shape sequence, program error occurs. - Commands related to reference point return (G27, G28, G29, G30) - Threading (G33) - Fixed cycles - Skip functions (G31, G37) 9. Subprogram call in the finish shape program can be made. 10. Except for threading cycles, operation stops at the ending (starting) point of each block in the single block mode. 11. Remember that, depending on whether the sequence or program number is designated, the next block upon completion of the G71, G72 or G73 command will differ. - When the sequence No. is designated: The next block is that which follows the block designated by Q. Operation moves to the N600 block upon completion of the cycle. - When the program Nn. is designated: The next block is that which follows the cycle command block. Operation moves to the N200 block upon completion of the cycle. 12. The next block upon completion of the G70 command is that which follows the command block. Operation moves to the N1100 block upon completion of the G70 command. M N100 G71 P200 Q500 U_ W_!!!!; N200 N300 Finishing shape sequence N400 N500 N600 M N100 G71 A100 U_ W_!!!!; N200 N300 N400 O100 N10 X100.Z50.; N20 M N100 !!!!!!!!; N200 !!!!!!!!; N300 !!!!!!!!; N400 !!!!!!!!; N500 !!!!!!!!; M N1000 G70 P200 Q500;(or G70 A100;) N1100 !!!!!!!!; M 13. Manual interruption can be applied during a compound fixed cycle command (G70 to G76). However, upon completion of the interruption, the tool must first be returned to the position where the interruption was applied and then the compound fixed cycle must be restarted. If it is restarted without the tool having been returned, all subsequent movements will deviate by an amount equivalent to the manual interruption amount. 14-35 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14. Compound fixed cycle commands are unmodal commands and so they must be set every time they are required. 15. Programming error No. 898 LAP CYCLE ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGN. occurs in the G71 and G72 commands even when, because of tool nose R compensation, there is no further displacement of the Z-axis in the second block or displacement of the Z-axis in the opposite direction is made. 16. Command which must not be entered in blocks for finish shape defined by P and Q in G70 to G73. M98/M99 T code G10, G27, G28, G29, G30 G20, G21, G94, G95, G52, G53, G68, G69 G32, G77, G78, G79 17. Sequence number specified by P and Q for G70 to G73 must not be entered more than once within a program. 18. In blocks for finishing shape defined by P and Q for G70 to G73, if command for final shape is chamfering (G01 X_ I_ ) (G01 Z_ K_ ) or corner rounding (G01 Z_ R_ ) (G01 X_ R_ ), alarm NO DIRECTIVE FOR NEXT MOVE R/C occurs. 19. Blocks with sequence number specified by P for G71 to G73 must be in G00 or G01 mode. 20. In the case of stopping the machining with the stop button during execution of G70 to G76 and applying the manual interruption, machining must be restarted with the start button after returning to the stopped position (by manual movement of tool tip). If not returned, the tool position at machining restart will be dislocated by pulse movement due to the handle interruption. Distance moved by handle interruption can be cancelled by resetting. 21. When setting M, T commands in blocks with G70 to G76, execution point must be considered. N041 G00 X100.Z0; N042 G71 P101 Q103 U0.5 W0.5 D4000 F0.5 S150 M08; M N101 G01 X90.F0.5; N102 Z-20.; N103 X100.; N041 N042 M08 execution point TEP155 14-36 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-3 Hole Machining Fixed Cycles: G80 to G89 [Series M: G80, G283 to G289] 14-3-1 Outline 1. Function and purpose When performing predetermined sequences of machining operations such as positioning, hole machining, boring and tapping, these functions permit to command in a single block the machining program which is normaly commanded in several blocks. In other words, they simplify the machining program. The following types of fixed cycles for hole machining are available. G-code Hole machining axis G80 â Hole machining start Operation at hole bottom Return movement â â â Application Cancel G83 Z Cutting feed, intermittent feed Dwell Rapid feed Deep hole drilling cycle G84 Z Cutting feed Dwell, spindle reverse rotation Cutting feed Tapping cycle G84.2 Z Cutting feed Spindle reverse rotation Cutting feed Synchronous tapping cycle G85 Z Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle G87 X Cutting feed, intermittent feed Dwell Rapid feed Deep hole drilling cycle G88 X Cutting feed Dwell, spindle reverse rotation Cutting feed Tapping cycle G88.2 X Cutting feed Spindle reverse rotation Cutting feed Synchronous tapping cycle G89 X Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle A fixed cycle mode is cancelled when the G80 or any G-code in the 01 group is set. The various data will also be cleared simultaneously to zero. 2. Programming format A. Face hole machining G8â X/U_ C/H_ Z/W_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ L(K)_ M_; M-code Number of repetitions Hole machining data Hole positioning data Hole machining mode (G83, G84, G84.2, G85) B. Outside hole machining G8' Z/W_ C/H_ X/U_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ L(K)_ M_; M-code Number of repetition Hole machining data Hole positioning data Hole machining mode (G87, G88, G88.2, G89) C. Cancel G80 ; 14-37 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS D. Data outline and corresponding address - Hole machining modes: These are the fixed cycle modes for drilling (G83, G87), tapping (G84, G84.2, G88, G88.2) and boring (G85, G89). These are modal commands and once they have been set, they will remain valid until another hole machining mode command, the cancel command for the hole machining fixed cycle or a G command in the 01 group is set. - Hole positioning data: These are for the positioning of the X(Z)- and C-axes. These are unmodal data, and they are commanded block by block when the same hole machining mode is to be executed continuously. - Hole machining data: These are the actual machining data. Except for Q, they are modal. Q in the G83 or G87 command is unmodal and is commanded block by block as required. - Number of repetitions: This number is designated for machining holes at equal intervals when the same cycle is to be repeated. The setting range is from 0 through 9999 and the decimal point is not valid. The number is unmodal and is valid only in the block in which it has been set. When this number is not designated, it is treated as L1. When L0 is deisgnated, the hole machining data are stored in the memory but no holes will be machined. Use address K for standard mode. - M-code: Commanding M210 causes M-code for C-axis clamping to be outputted at the start of operation 2 (described later), and M-code for C-axis unclamping to be outputted at the end of operation 5. For G84 (G88) and G84.2 (G88.2), M-code for the direction of spindle revolution is specified. If not specified, the preset data of the respective parameter will be used. Address Signification G Selection of hole machining cycle sequence (G80, G83, G84, G84.2, G85, G87, G88, G88.2, G89) X/U, (Z/W)*, C/H Z/W, (X/U)* Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental value) Designation of hole bottom position (absolute/incremental value from reference point) R Designation of R(apid feed)-point position (incremental value from initial point) (sign ignored.) Q Designation of cut amount for each cutting pass in G83 (G87); always incremental value, radial value (sign ignored, decimal point can be commanded in T32 compatible mode, but not in Standard mode) P Designation of dwell time at hole bottom point; relationship between time and designated value is same as for G04. F Designation of feed rate for cutting feed L (K) M Designation of number of repetitions, 0 to 9999 (default = 1) Designation of M-code * Addresses in parentheses apply for commands G87, G88 and G89. E. Use of the hole machining fixed cycles on the 2nd spindle side The hole machining fixed cycles can also be used for the lower turret on the 2nd spindle side with the aid of the related G-code (G109 L2). 14-38 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Outline drawing The hole machining axes for the hole machining fixed cycle and the positioning are shown in the outline drawing below. During the hole machining cycle, the C-axis (spindle) is clamped so that it does not move. z4 [3] [4] Rotary tool for Z-axis r4 [1] q4 [2] q2 x4 Rotary tool for X-axis r2 z2 +X x2 C [1] G83 [2] G83 [3] G87 [4] G87 4. Xx1 Cc1 Xx2 Cc2 Zz3 Cc3 Zz4 Cc4 Zz1 Zz2 Xx3 Xx4 Rr1 Rr2 Rr3 Rr4 Qq1 Qq2 Qq3 Qq4 Pp1 Pp2 Pp3 Pp4 Ff1 Ff2 Ff3 Ff4 Ll1 Ll2 Ll3 Ll4 ; ; ; ; Operations There are 7 actual operations which are each described in turn below. Operation 1 Operation 2 Initial point Operation 3 Operation 7 R-point Operation 6 Operation 4 Operation 5 TEP156 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 3 Operation 4 Operation 5 : : : : : Operation 6 : Operation 7 : Positionning by rapid feed to the X(Z) and C-axis initial point Output of the M-code for C-axis clamping if it is set Positionning to the R-point by rapid feed Hole machining by cutting feed Operation at the hole bottom position which differs according to the fixed cycle mode. Possible actions include rotary tools reverse rotation (M204), rotary tools forward rotation (M203) and dwell. Return to the R-point Return to the initial point at rapid feed 14-39 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS (Operation 6 and 7 may be a single operation depending on the fixed cycle mode.) Whether the fixed cycle is to be completed at operation 6 or 7 can be selected by the user parameter F162 bit 3. Parameter F162 bit 3 = 0: Initial level return Parameter F162 bit 3 = 1: R-point level return 14-3-2 Face/Outside deep hole drilling cycle: G83/G87 [Series M: G283/G287] 1. When the Q command is present (deep hole drilling) G83(G87)X(Z)_ C_ Z(X)_ Rr Qq Pp Ff Ll Mm ; Type Parameter F162 bit 3 = 0 (Mα) (Mβ ) r A (high speed) R-point q d r q q q q r (P) Z-point Initial point (Mα) r R-point q R-point (Mβ ) q d q R-point (Mβ ) d Z-point Initial point (Mβ ) (Mα) Initial point (Mα) q (P) B (normal speed) Parameter F162 bit 3 = 1 Initial point d q d q d q (P) Z-point (P) Z-point TEP157 - Return distance âdâ is set by the parameter (F12: Pecking return distance in drilling process). The tool returns at rapid feed. - (Mα): The C-axis clamping M-code (Mm) is outputted here if specified. - (Mβ): The C-axis unclamping M-code (C-axis clamp M-code + 1 = Mm+ 1) is output when there is a C-axis clamping M-code command (Mm). - (P): Dwell is performed for the duration equivalent to the time designated by P. 14-40 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. 14 When the Q command is not present (drilling) G83 (G87) X(Z)_ C_ Z(X)_ R_ P_ F_ L_ M_ ; Parameter F162 bit 3 = 0 Parameter F162 bit 3 = 1 Initial point (Mβ) Initial point (Mα) (Mα) R-point R-point (Mβ) Z point (P) Z point (P) TEP158 See 1 for details on (Mα), (Mβ) and (P). 14-3-3 Face/Outside tapping cycle: G84/G88 [Series M: G284/G288] G84 (G88) X(Z)_ C_ Z(X)_ R_ P_ F_ L_ M_ ; Parameter F162 bit 3 = 0 Parameter F162 bit 3 = 1 Rotary tool Rotary tool Initial point (Mα) (Mα) Initial point R-point (Mβ) R-point (Mβ) Forward rotation of rotary tool Forward rotation of rotary tool Reverse rotation of rotary tool Reverse rotation of rotary tool Z point (P) Z point (P) TEP159 - (Mα), (Mβ) and (P) are as with G83. - During the execution G84 (G88), the override cancel status is established and 100 % override is automatically applied. Dry run is also ignored. - When feed hold is applied during the execution of G84 (G88), block stop results after return movement. - The in-tapping signal is output in a G84 (G88) modal operation. - The fixed cycle subprograms should be edited if the rotary tool stop (M205) command is required before the rotary tool reverse rotation (M204) or forward rotation (M203) signal is output. Note: Tapping cycle in the turning mode is not available on the side of secondary spindle. 14-41 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-3-4 Face/Outside boring cycle: G85/G89 [Series M: G285/G289] G85 (G89) X(Z)_ C_ Z(X)_ R_ P_ F_ L_ M_ ; Parameter F162 bit 3 = 0 Parameter F162 bit 3 = 1 Initial point Initial point (Mα) (Mα) R-point (Mβ) R-point (Mβ) f 2f f Z point (P) 2f Z point (P) TEP160 - (Mα), (Mβ) and (P) are as with G83. - The tool returns to the R-point at a cutting feed rate which is double the designated feed rate command. However, it does not exceed the maximum cutting feed rate. 14-3-5 Face/Outside synchronous tapping cycle: G84.2/G88.2 [Series M: G284.2/G288.2] G84.2 (G88.2) X(Z)_ C_ Z(X)_ R_ P_ F_ L_ M_ ; Parameter F162 bit 3 = 0 Parameter F162 bit 3 = 1 Rotary tool Rotary tool Initial point Initial point (Mα) (Mα) R-point (Mβ) R-point (Mβ) Forward rotation of rotary tool Forward rotation of rotary tool Reverse rotation of rotary tool Reverse rotation of rotary tool Z point (P) Z point (P) TEP159 1. Detailed description - (Mα), (Mβ) and (P) are as with G83. - The spindle is reversed at the hole bottom to perform tapping cycle. During tapping cycle operation by G84.2 (G88.2), feed rate override is ignored. Even if feed hold is applied, the cycle does not stop until the end of return operation. 14-42 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 - Tapping cycle and reverse tapping cycle can be performed by specifying spindle normal or reverse rotation with M-codes (M03, M04, M203, M204). Output to the machine side is as follows: Programmed command Z point R point M03 M04 M03 M04 M03 M04 M203 M204 M203 M204 M203 M204 - As for synchronous tapping on the face (G84.2), the combination of the direction of the Z-axis movement (in the workpiece coordinate system) and that of the spindle rotation determines the type of tapping: normal or reverse. Type of tapping Z-axis movement direction (in the workpiece coordinate system) Command for the direction of spindle rotation Negative M03/M203 Normal tapping Reverse tapping Positive M04/M204 Negative M04/M204 Positive M03/M203 Programming example: 1) G00 Z0. G84.2 Z10. F0.1 M4 ..... Normal tapping 2) G00 Z0. G84.2 Zâ10. F0.1 M4 .... Reverse tapping - When G84.2 is commanded by feed per revolution (G95), where the unit of cutting feed rate F is set to mm/rev or inch/rev, tap thread pitch can be commanded directly. When X-axis is used as a hole machining axis, G88.2 is commanded in place of G84.2. - In tapping cycle (G84), the feed rate of Z-axis per spindle rotation must be equal to the thread pitch of a tap. This means that the most desirable tapping always fills the following conditions. P = F/S P : Tap thread pitch (mm) F : Z-axis feed rate (mm/min) S : Spindle speed (rpm) Spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are independently controlled in tapping cycle (G84). Therefore, the above condition are not always filled. Spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are both decelerated and stopped particularly at the hole bottom, and then the spindle and Z-axis move in the reverse direction, giving acceleration. Since each acceleration and deceleration are independently performed, the above conditions are not filled usually. As a result, for improving the accuracy of tapping, it is customary to compensate the feed by mounting a spring in the tap holder. On the other hand, for synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2), spinde rotation and Z-axis feed are controlled so that they are always synchronized. In other words, for normal rotation, the spindle is controlled only in relation to speed. However, for synchronous tapping, position control is given also to spindle rotation. And spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are controlled as the linear interpolation of two axes. This fills the condition of P=F/S even in deceleration and acceleration at the hole bottom, permitting tapping of high accuracy. 14-43 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. Remarks 1. Synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2) and tapping cycle (G84) differ only in the control method of spindle when Z-axis moves from point R to point Z and when it does from point Z to point R. In synchronous tapping, the movement of spindle is detected by the position coder as shown below, and position control is given. Spindle motor is controlled like a servo motor to give the linear interpolation of two axes of Z-axis and spindle. The movement distance of linear interpolation of Z-axis and spindle as well as the feed rate are as given below. Movement distance Z-axis Spindle Feed rate z = Distance between point R and point Z (mm, inch) Fz = F command value (mm/min, inch/min) s = z à (S command value / F command value) à 360 (deg) Fs = S command value (rpm) Synchronous tapping cycle is as with G84 except that it differs from tapping cycle in the control method of spindle when Z-axis moves from point R to point Z and when it does from point Z to point R. Refer to the section of fixed cycle G84 for the notes including programming. 2. Z-axis is used as a hole machining axis in the above description. When X-axis is used as a hole machining axis, G88.2 is commanded. Example: G88.2 Z/W_ C/H_ X/U_ R_ F_ ; X-axis is used as a hole machining axis. 3. For synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2), feed rate override is invalid, and it is fixed to 100%. 4. Synchronous tapping cycle in the turning mode is not available on the side of secondary spindle. 5. Two types of synchronous tapping are provided: spindle synchronous tapping and mill synchronous tapping. However, only either can be used. 14-3-6 Hole machining fixed cycle cancel: G80 This command cancels the hole machining fixed cycles (G83, G84, G84.2, G85, G87, G88, G88.2, G89). The hole machining mode as well as the hole machining data are cancelled. 14-3-7 Checkpoints for using hole machining fixed cycles 1. When the G84 and G88 fixed cycle commands are set, the rotary tool must be rotated in the designated direction beforehand using a miscellaneous function (M3, M4). 2. If the basic axis, additional axis and R data are present in a block, hole machining is performed in a fixed cycle mode; it will not be performed if these data are not present. Even if the X-axis data are present, hole machining will not be executed if a dwell (G04) command is present in the block. 3. The hole machining data (Q, P) should be commanded in the block (block including the basic axis, additional axis and R data) in which the holes are machined. The modal data will not be updated even if these data are commanded in a non-hole machining block. 4. When resetting is applied during the execution of the G85 (G89) command, the hole machining data will be erased. 14-44 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 5. 14 The hole machining fixed cycles are also cancelled by any G code in the 01 group besides G80. If it is commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle, the fixed cycle will be ignored. m = 01 group code, n = hole machining fixed cycle code - Gm Gn X(Z)_ C_ Z(X)_ R_ Q_ P_ L(K)_ F_; executed ignored executed ignored q - Gn Gm X(Z)_ C_ Z(X)_ R_ Q_ P_ L(K)_ F_; executed Example: executed ignored memorized G01 G83 X100.C30.Z50.Râ10.Q10.P1 F100.; G83 G01 X100.C30.Z50.Râ10.Q10.P1 F100.; In both cases, G01 X100.C30.Z50.F100. is executed. 6. When a miscellaneous command is set in the same block as the fixed cycle command, it is outputted after the initial positioning. However, the C-axis unclamping M-code (clamp M + 1) is output after the holes have been machined and the tool returns to the return point. When the number of repetitions has been designated, the M command execution in above condition is exercised only for the initial operation except for the C-axis clamping M-code. In the case of the C-axis clamping/unclamping M commands, as they are modal, the codes are outputted with each repetitions until the operation is cancelled by the fixed cycle cancel command. 7. When a tool position offset command (T function) is set in a hole machining fixed cycle mode, execution will follow the tool position offset function. 8. When a hole machining fixed cycle command is set during tool nose radius compensation, program error occurs. 9. Cutting feed rate by F will be kept after cancelling the drilling cycle. 14-45 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-3-8 Sample programs with fixed cycles for hole machining 1. Face deep hole drilling cycle (G83) 5. Outside tapping cycle (G88) G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S600; X102.Zâ50.C0; G88 Zâ50.H30.X70.R5.P.2 F300 L3 M203 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S800; X100.Z2.C0; G83 X50.H30.Zâ20.R5.Q5000 P.2 F200 L3 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; 2. Face tapping cycle (G84) 6. Outside boring cycle (G89) G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S800; X102. Zâ50.C0; G89 Zâ50. H30.Xâ70. R5.P.2 F200 L3 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S600; X102.Z-50.C0; G84 X50.H30.Zâ20.R5.P.2 F300 L3 M203 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; 3. Face boring cycle (G85) 7. Face synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2) G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S600; X100.Z2.C0; G84.2 X50.H30.Zâ20.R5.F2.00 L3 M203 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S600; X100.Z2.C0; G85 X50.H30.Zâ20.R5.P.2 F150 L3 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; 4. Outside deep hole drilling cycle (G87) 8. G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S800; X102. Zâ50. C0; G87 Zâ50.H30.X70.R5.Q5000 P.2 F200 L3 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; 14-46 Outside synchronous tapping cycle (G88.2) G00 G97 G98; G28 UW; M200; M203 S600 X102. Zâ50. C0; G88.2 Zâ50.H30.X70.R5.F2.L3 M203 M210; G80; G28 UW; M30; Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-4 Hole Machining Pattern Cycles: G234.1/G235/G236/G237.1 [Series M: G34.1/G35/G36/G37.1] 14-4-1 Overview 1. Function and purpose Hole machining patterns are used to arrange on a predetermined pattern hole positions at which to execute a hole-machining cycle. - Give beforehand a command of the desired hole-machining cycle without any axis positioning data (which only causes storage of the hole-machining data to be executed at the arranged hole positions). - The execution of this command begins with the positioning to the first one of the arranged holes. The type of hole machining depends on the corresponding cycle designated last. - The current mode of hole-machining cycle will remain active over the execution of this command till it is cancelled explicitly. - This command will only activate positioning when it is given in any other mode than those of hole-machining cycle. - These commands only cause positioning at the speed of the current modal condition (of Gcode group 01) in default of any preceding hole-machining cycle. 2. List of hole machining pattern cycles G-code G234.1 Description Argument addresses Holes on a circle X, Y, I, J, K G235 Holes on a line X, Y, I, J, K G236 Holes on an arc X, Y, I, J, P, K G237.1 Holes on a grid X, Y, I, P, J, K 14-47 Remarks Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-4-2 Holes on a circle: G234.1 [Series M: G34.1] As shown in the format below, a command of G234.1 determines a circle of radius ârâ around the center designated by X and Y. The circumference is then divided, beginning from the point of the central angle âθâ, regularly by ânâ, and the hole machining designated beforehand by a fixed cycle (G81 etc.) will be done around all the vertices of the regular n-gon. The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data of the G234.1 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution. 1. Programming format G234.1 Xx Yy Ir Jθ Kn; X, Y : Coordinates of the center of the circle. 2. I : Radius (r) of the circle. Always given in a positive value. J : Central angle (θ) of the first hole. Positive central angles refer to counterclockwise measurement. K : Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999). The algebraic sign of argument K refers to the rotational direction of the sequential machining of ânâ holes. Set a positive and a negative number respectively for counterclockwise and clockwise rotation. Sample programes Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions. N001 G91; N002 G81 Z-10. R5. L0. F200; N003 G90 G34.1 X200. Y100. I100. J20. K6; N004 G80; N005 G90 G0 X500. Y100.; x = 200 θ = 20° r = 100 y = 100 n=6 Last position before (500, 100) G34.1 execution D740PB0007 3. Notes - In the use of G-code series T, use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value. As for G-code series M, give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the position in absolute or incremental values. - As shown in the above example, the last position of the G234.1 (G34.1) command is on the last one of the arranged holes. Use the method of absolute data input, therefore, to specify the movement to the position for the next operation desired. (An incremental command would require a more or less complicated calculation with respect to that last hole.) 14-48 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-4-3 Holes on a line: G235 [Series M: G35] As shown in the format below, a command of G235 determines a straight line through the starting point designated by X and Y at the angle âθâ with the X-axis. On this line ânâ holes will be machined at intervals of âdâ, according to the current mode of hole machining. The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data of the G235 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution. 1. Programming format G235 Xx Yy Id Jθ Kn; X, Y : Coordinates of the starting point. 2. I : Interval (d) between holes. Change of sign for argument I causes a centrically symmetric hole arrangement with the starting point as the center. J : Angle (θ) of the line. Positive angles refer to counterclockwise measurement. K : Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999), inclusive of the starting point. Sample programes Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions. N001 G91; N002 G81 Z-10. R5. L0. F100; N003 G35 X200. Y100. I100. J30. K5; N004 G80; n=5 d = 100 θ = 30° y = 100 Last position before G35 execution x = 200 D740PB0008 3. Notes - In the use of G-code series T, use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value. As for G-code series M, give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the position in absolute or incremental values. - Omission of argument K or setting âK0â will result in a programming error. A setting of K with five or more digits will lead to the lowest four digits being used. - In a block with G235 any words with addresses other than G, L, N, X, Y, I, J, K, F, M, S, T and B will simply be ignored. - Giving a G-code of group 00 in the same block with G235 will cause an exclusive execution of either code which is given later. - In a block with G235 a G22 or G23 command will simply be ignored without affecting the execution of the G235 command. 14-49 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-4-4 Holes on an arc: G236 [Series M: G36] As shown in the format below, a command of G236 determines a circle of radius ârâ around the center designated by X and Y. On the circumference ânâ holes will be machined, starting from the point of the central angle âθâ, at angular intervals of ââθâ, according to the current mode of hole machining. The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data of the G236 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution. 1. Programming format G236 Xx Yy Ir Jθ Pâθ Kn; X, Y : Coordinates of the center of the arc. 2. I : Radius (r) of the arc. Always given in a positive value. J : Central angle (θ) of the first hole. Positive central angles refer to counterclockwise measurement. P : Angular interval (âθ) between holes. The algebraic sign of argument P refers to the rotational direction of the sequential machining of ânâ holes. Set a positive and a negative value respectively for counterclockwise and clockwise rotation. K : Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999). Sample programes Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions. N001 G91; N002 G81 Zâ10. R5. F100; N003 G36 X300. Y100. I300. J10. P15. K6; N004 G80; n=6 âθ = 15° θ = 10° y = 100 Last position before G36 execution x = 300 D740PB0009 3. Notes - In the use of G-code series T, use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value. As for G-code series M, give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the position in absolute or incremental values. 14-50 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-4-5 Holes on a grid: G237.1 [Series M: G37.1] As shown in the format below, a command of G237.1 determines a grid pattern of [âx]â[nx] by [ây]â[ny] with the point designated by X and Y as starting point. On the grid points the hole machining designated beforehand by a fixed cycle will be done ânxâ in number along the X-axis at intervals of ââxâ, and ânyâ in number along the Y-axis at intervals of ââyâ. The main progression of machining occurs in the X-axis direction. The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data of the G237.1 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution. 1. Programming format G237.1 Xx Yy Iâx Pnx Jây Kny; X, Y : Coordinates of the starting point. 2. I : Hole interval (âx) on the X-axis. Set a positive and a negative value to arrange holes in respective directions from the starting point on the X-axis. P : Number (nx) of holes to be arranged on the X-axis (from 1 to 9999). J : Hole interval (ây) on the Y-axis. Set a positive and a negative value to arrange holes in respective directions from the starting point on the Y-axis. K : Number (ny) of holes to be arranged on the Y-axis (from 1 to 9999). Sample programs Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions. N001 G91; N002 G81 Zâ10. R5. F20; N003 G37.1 X300. Y-100. I50. P10 J100. K8; N004 G80; ây = 100 ny = 8 Last position before G37.1 execution y = 100 âx = 50 x = 300 nx = 10 3. D740PB0010 Notes - In the use of G-code series T, use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value. As for G-code series M, give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the position in absolute or incremental values. - Omission of argument P or K, or setting âP0â or âK0â will result in a programming error. A setting of K or P with five or more digits will lead to the lowest four digits being used. - In a block with G237.1 any words with addresses other than G, L, N, X, Y, I, J, K, F, M, S, T and B will simply be ignored. 14-51 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS - Giving a G-code of group 00 in the same block with G237.1 will cause an exclusive execution of either code which is given later. - In a block with G237.1 a G22 or G23 command will simply be ignored without affecting the execution of the G237.1 command. 14-52 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-5 Fixed Cycles (Series M) 14-5-1 Outline 1. Function and purspose The fixed-cycle functions allow positioning, hole-drilling, boring, tapping, or other machining programs to be executed according to the predetermined job sequence by the commands of a single block. The available job sequences for machining are listed below. The fixed-cycle function mode is cancelled on reception of G80 or a G-command (G00, G01, G02, G03, G2.1, or G3.1) of group G01. All related types of data are also cleared to zero at the same time. 2. List of fixed cycles G-Code Description Arguments G71.1 Chamfering cutter (CW) [X, Y] Z, Q, R, F [P, D] G72.1 Chamfering cutter (CCW) [X, Y] Z, Q, R, F [P, D] G73 High-speed deep-hole drilling [X, Y] Z, Q, R, F [P, D, K, I, J(B)] G74 Reverse tapping [X, Y] Z, R, F [P, D, J(B), H] G75 Boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [Q, P, D, K, I, J(B)] G76 Boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [Q, P, D, J(B)] G77 Back spot facing [X, Y] Z, R, F [Q, P, E, J(B)] G78 Boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [Q, P, D, K] G79 Boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [Q, P, D, K, E] G81 Spot drilling [X, Y] Z, R, F G82 Drilling [X, Y] Z, R, F [P, D, I, J(B)] G83 Deep-hole drilling [X, Y] Z, Q, R, F [P, D, K, I, J(B)] G84 Tapping [X, Y] Z, R, F [P, D, J(B), H] G85 Reaming [X, Y] Z, R, F [P, D, E] G86 Boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [P] G87 Back boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [Q, P, D, J(B)] G88 Boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [P] G89 Boring [X, Y] Z, R, F [P] Notes Dwell in seconds Return to initial point only. Dwell in seconds Return to initial point only. Note 1: The arguments enclosed in brackets ([ ]) can be omitted. Note 2: Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command 14-53 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-2 Fixed-cycle machining data format 1. Setting fixed-cycle machining data Set fixed-cycle machining data as follows: Gâ¡â¡X_Y_Z_Q_R_P_D_K_I_J(B)_E_H_F_L_ Hole position data Repeat times Hole-machining mode Hole-machining data - Hole-machining mode (G-code) See the list of the fixed cycles. - Hole position data (X, Y) Set hole positions using incremental or absolute data. - Hole-machining data Z..... Set the distance from R-point to the hole bottom using incremental data, or set the position of the hole bottom using absolute data. Q ..... Set this address code using incremental data. (This address code has different uses according to the type of hole-machining mode selected.) R ..... Set the distance from the initial point of machining to R-point using incremental data, or set the position of R-point using absolute data. P ..... Set the desired time or the number of spindle revolutions, for dwell at the hole bottom. (Set the overlapping length for the chamfering cutter cycles G71.1 and G72.1.) D ..... Set this address code using incremental data. (This address code has different uses according to the type of hole-machining mode selected.) K ..... Set this address code using incremental data. (This address code has different uses according to the type of hole-machining mode selected.) I...... Set the feed override distance for the tool to be decelerated during the last cutting operation of drilling with a G73, G82, or G83 command code. J(B) ... For G74 or G84, set the timing of dwell data output; for G75, G76, or G87, set the timing of M3 and M4 output, or; for G73, G82, or G83, set the feed override ratio for deceleration during the last cutting operation. E ..... Set a cutting feed rate (for G77, G79 and G85). H ..... Select synchronous/asynchronous tapping cycle and set the return speed override during a synchronous tapping cycle. F..... Set a cutting feed rate. - Repeat times (L) If no data is set for L, it will be regarded as equal to 1. If L is set equal to 0, hole-machining will not occur; hole-machining data will only be stored into the memory. 14-54 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 - The differences between the G90 mode data setting method and the G91 mode data setting method are shown in the diagram below. G90 G91 Initial point Initial point R Z=0 R R-point D R-point D Point D Point D Z Z Point Z Point Z MEP138 : Signifies signed distance data that begins at #. : Signifies unsigned distance data. Note 1: The initial point refers to the Z-axis position existing at the moment of the fixed-cycle mode selection. Note 2: Point D is that at which positioning from R-point can be done further at a rapid feed rate. 2. Programming format As shown below, the fixed-cycle command consists of a hole-machining mode section, a hole position data section, a hole-machining data section, and a repeat instruction section. Gâ¡â¡X_Y_Z_Q_R_P_D_K_I_J(B)_E_H_F_L_ Hole position data Repeat times Hole-machining mode 3. Hole-machining data Detailed description 1. The hole-machining mode refers to a fixed-cycle mode used for drilling, counterboring, tapping, boring, or other machining operations. Hole position data denotes X- and Y-axis positioning data. Hole-machining data denotes actual machining data. Hole position data and repeat times are non-modal, whereas hole-machining data are modal. 2. If M00 or M01 is set either in the same block as a fixed-cycle command or during the fixedcycle mode, then the fixed-cycle command will be ignored and then after positioning, M00 or M01 will be outputted. The fixed-cycle command will be executed if either X, Y, Z, or R is set. 14-55 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. During fixed-cycle operation, the machine acts in one of the following seven types of manner: - Action 1 For positioning on the X-, and Y-axes, the machine acts according to the current G-code of group 01 (G02 and G03 will be regarded as G01). - Action 2 M19 is sent from the NC unit to the machine at the positioning complete point (initial point) in the G87 mode. After execution of this M-command, the next action will begin. In the single-block operation mode, positioning is followed by block stop. Initial point 2 1 7 3 R-point 6 4 5 MEP139 - Action 3 Positioning to R-point by rapid motion. - Action 4 Hole-machining by cutting feed. - Action 5 Depending on the selected fixed-cycle type, spindle stop (M05), spindle reverse rotation (M04), spindle normal rotation (M03), dwell, or tool shift is performed at the hole bottom. - Action 6 Tool relief to R-point is performed by cutting feed or rapid motion (according to the selected fixed-cycle type). - Action 7 Return to the initial point is performed by rapid motion. Whether fixed-cycle mode operation is to be terminated at action 6 or action 7 can be selected with the following G-codes: G98: Return to the initial point level G99: Return to the R-point level Both commands are modal. Once G98 has been given, for example, the G98 mode remains valid until G99 is given. The G98 mode is the initial state of the NC. For a block without positioning data, the hole-machining data are only stored into the memory and fixed-cycle operation is not performed. 14-56 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-3 G71.1 [Chamfering cutter CW] (Series M) G71.1 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qq0 [Pp0 Dd0] Ff0 Initial point G98 R-point G99 d0 Point D f0 Point Z 3 2 q0 5 1 4 p0 q0 : Radius p0 : Overlapping length (in arc) MEP140 d0 : Distance from R-point f0 : Feed rate - X, Y, P, and/or D can be omitted. - Omission of Q or setting âQ0â results in a program error. 14-57 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-4 G72.1 [Chamfering cutter CCW] (Series M) G72.1 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qq0 [Pp0 Dd0] Ff0 Initial point G98 R-point G99 d0 Point D f0 Point Z 3 2 q0 5 1 4 p0 q0 : Radius p0 : Overlapping length (in arc) d0 : Distance from R-point f0 : Feed rate - X, Y, P, and/or D can be omitted. - Omission of Q or setting âQ0â results in a program error. 14-58 MEP141 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-5-5 G73 [High-speed deep-hole drilling] (Series M) G73 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qtz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Ii0 Jj0(Bb0)] Initial point G98 R-point k0 Point D tz f0 f2 [1] f0 G99 d0 tz + d0 f2 [2] i0 f1 Dwell (tc) Point Z Dwell (tc) MEP142 tz tc d0 k0 i0 : : : : Depth of cut per pass Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) Return distance Distance from R-point to the starting point of cutting feed : Feed override distance j0 : (b0) f0 : f1 : f2 : Feed override ratio (%) Feed rate Feed overridden f1 = f0Ãj0(b0)/100 Return speed (fixed) Max. speed: 9999 mm/min (for mm-spec.) 999.9 in./min (for in.-spec.) - The feed rate will remain unchanged if either I or J(B) is omitted. - X, Y, P, D, K, I, and/or J(B) can be omitted. If D is omitted or set to 0, the machine operates according to the value of parameter F12. - The alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will occur if Q is set to 0. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. - The feed rate is f1 only if the starting point of a cutting pass is within the range of i0. Example: In the diagram shown above, during the second cutting operation, since pecking return point [1] falls outside the range of feed override distance i0, feeding does not decelerate and cutting is performed at feed rate f0; during the third cutting operation, since pecking return point [2] falls within the range of i0, feeding decelerates and cutting is performed at feed rate f1. 14-59 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-6 G74 [Reverse tapping] (Series M) G74 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0] Initial point G98 M04 Point Râ d0 G99 R-point k0 f0 f1 Point D f1 Point Z Dwell M03 tc : Dwell (always in time) f0 : Feed rate j0 : 1â¦M03 after dwell at hole bottom (b0) 2â¦M03 before dwell at hole bottom 4â¦M04 after dwell at R-point d0 : Distance from R-point MEP143â h0 : Flag for synchronous/asynchronous tapping and the return speed override (%) for synchronous tapping h0 = 0 h0 > 0 Asynchronous tapping Synchronous tapping k0 : Distance from R-point (Tap lifting distance) - X, Y, P, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted. If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2. If H is omitted, the selection between synchronous/asynchronous tapping is performed by the bit 6 of parameter F94. - For synchronous tapping, see Subsection 14-5-21. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. 14-60 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-5-7 G75 [Boring] (Series M) G75 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Dd0 Jj0(Bb0) Kk0 Ii0] M03 q0 Initial point G98 M03 q0 R-point d0 Point D G99 f0 M19 q0 i0 k0 Point Z Dwell Feed and Spindle speed 70% MEP144 tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) q0 : Amount of relief on the XY-plane (Direction determined by bits 3 & 4 of I14) f0 : Feed rate d0 : Distance from R-point j0 : 0 or omitted・・・・・・・ M03 after machining (b0) Value except 0・・・・ M04 after machining k0 : Distance from point Z i0 : Distance from point Z - X, Y, P, Q, D, J(B), K, and/or I can be omitted. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. 14-61 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-8 G76 [Boring] (Series M) G76 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff1 [Dd0 Jj0(Bb0)] M03 q0 Initial point G98 M03 q0 R-point G99 d0 Point D f1 q0 Point Z M19 Dwell MEP145 f1 : Feed rate j0 : 0 or omitted ・・・・・・・ M03 after machining (b0) Value except 0 ・・・・ M04 after machining tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) q0 : Amount of relief on the XY-plane (Direction determined by bits 3 & 4 of I14) - X, Y, P, Q, D, and/or J(B) can be omitted. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. 14-62 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-5-9 G77 [Back spot facing] (Series M) G77 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qtz] Ff0 [Ef1 Jj0(Bb0) Dd0] Initial point tz Point Râ d0 Point D Dwell (â) f1 f1 Point Z (z) f0 f0 R-point (r) M03 M04 MEP146â tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) tz : Distance from the initial point f0 : Feed rate 0 f1 : Feed rate 1 j0(b0) : Output order of M03 and M04 at hole bottom. 0: M03, then M04 (for normal spindle rotation) 1: M04, then M03 (for reverse spindle rotation) d0 : Distance from point Râ - Normally, asynchronous feed (G94) is used for the pass marked with (â). If f1 = 0, or if f1 is omitted, however, synchronous feed (G95) is used (feed rate = 0.5 mm/rev). - X, Y, P, Q, E, J (B), and/or D can be omitted. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. - In G91 (incremental data input) mode, the direction of hole machining is automatically determined according to the sign of Z data (the sign of data at address R will be ignored). 14-63 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-10 G78 [Boring] (Series M) G78 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Qi0] Initial point G98 R-point d0 G99 Point D f0 k0 i0 Point Z Dwell M19 MEP147 tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) d0 : Distance from R-point k0 : Distance from point Z i0 : Distance from point Z - X, Y, P, D, K, and/or Q can be omitted. 14-64 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-11 G79 [Boring] (Series M) G79 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Qi0 Ef1] Initial point G98 R-point d0 G99 Point D f1 f0 i0 k0 Point Z Dwell MEP148 tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) f0 : Feed rate 0 d0 : Distance from R-point k0 : Distance from point Z i0 : Distance from point Z f1 : Feed rate 1 - Asynchronous feed is used for f1. If, however, f1 is set equal to 0 or is not set, then the tool is fed at the setting of f0. - X, Y, P, D, K, Q, and/or E can be omitted. 14-5-12 G81 [Spot drilling] (Series M) G81 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Initial point G98 R-point G99 Point Z MEP149 - X and/or Y can be omitted. 14-65 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-13 G82 [Drilling] (Series M) G82 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Ii0 Jj0(Bb0)] Initial point G98 R-point d0 Point D f0 G99 i0 f1 Point Z Dwell (tc) tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) d0 : Distance from R-point to the starting point of cutting feed i0 : Feed override distance MEP150 j0 : Feed override ratio (%) (b0) f0 : Feed rate f1 : Feed overridden f1 = f0Ãj0(b0)/100 - The feed rate will remain unchanged if either I or J(B) is omitted. - X, Y, P, D, I, and/or J(B) can be omitted. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1 : Argument J-command = 0 : Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. 14-66 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-5-14 G83 [Deep-hole drilling] (Series M) G83 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qtz Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Ii0 Jj0(Bb0)] Initial point R-point k0 Point D f0 tz [1] G99 G98 d0 f0 tz + d0 [2] i0 f1 Point Z MEP151 tz : Depth of cut per pass d0 : Rapid motion stopping allowance k0 : Distance from R-point to the starting point of cutting feed j0 : Feed override ratio (%) (b0) f0 : Feed rate f1 : Feed overridden f1 = f0Ãj0(b0)/100 i0 : Feed override distance - The feed rate will remain unchanged if either I or J(B) is omitted. - X, Y, P, D, K, I, and/or J(B) can be omitted. If D is omitted or set to 0, the machine will operate according to the value of parameter F13. - The alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will occur if Q is set to 0. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. - The feed rate is f1 only if the starting point of a cutting pass is within the range of i0. Example: In the diagram shown above, during the second cutting operation, since rapid feed positioning point [1] falls outside the range of feed override distance i0, feeding does not decelerate and cutting is performed at feed rate f0; during the third cutting operation, since rapid feed positioning point [2] falls within the range of i0, feeding decelerates and cutting is performed at feed rate f1. 14-67 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-15 G84 [Tapping] (Series M) G84 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0] Initial point Dwell M03 Point Râ d0 R-point k0 Point D G99 G98 Point Z Dwell M04 tc : Dwell (always in time) f0 : Feed rate j0 : 1â¦M04 after dwell at hole bottom (b0) 2â¦M04 before dwell at hole bottom 4â¦M03 after dwell at R-point d0 : Distance from R-point MEP152â h0 : Flag for synchronous/asynchronous tapping and the return speed override (%) for synchronous tapping h0 = 0 h0 > 0 Asynchronous tapping Synchronous tapping k0 : Distance from R-point (Tap lifting distance) - X, Y, P, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted. If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2. If H is omitted, the selection between synchronous/asynchronous tapping is performed by the bit 6 of parameter F94. - For synchronous tapping, see Subsection 14-5-21. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1 : Argument J-command = 0 : Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. 14-68 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-16 G85 [Reaming] (Series M) G85 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptz] Ff0 [Ef1 Dd0] Initial point R-point d0 f1 f0 G99 G98 Point Z Dwell tz : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) f0 : Feed rate 0 MEP153 f1 : Feed rate 1 d0 : Distance from R-point - Asynchronous feed is used for f1. If, however, f1 is set equal to 0 or is not set, then the tool is fed at the setting of f0. - X, Y, P, E, and/or D can be omitted. 14-5-17 G86 [Boring] (Series M) G86 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Initial point G98 M03 R-point G99 Point Z Dwell M05 tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) - X, Y, and/or P can be omitted. 14-69 MEP154 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-18 G87 [Back boring] (Series M) G87 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Dd0 Jj0(Bb0)] M03 Initial point M19 Dwell Point Z d0 M19 M03 R-point q0 MEP155 tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) q0 : Amount of relief on the XY-plane d0 : Distance from point Z j0 : 0 or omitted・・・・・・・ M03 at R-point (b0) Value except 0・・・・ M04 at R-point (Direction determined by bits 3 & 4 of I14) f0 : Feed rate - X, Y, P, Q, D, and/or J(B) can be omitted. - Initial-point return is always used for G87 (even if the current modal is of G99). - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. - In G91 (incremental data input) mode, the direction of hole machining is automatically determined according to the sign of Z data (the sign of data at address R will be ignored). 14-70 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-19 G88 [Boring] (Series M) G88 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Initial point G98 R-point G99 Point Z Dwell, M05, M00 MEP156 tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) - X, Y, and/or P can be omitted. - At the hole bottom, M05 and M00 are outputted. 14-5-20 G89 [Boring] (Series M) G89 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Initial point G98 R-point G99 Point Z Dwell MEP157 tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions) - X, Y, and/or P can be omitted. 14-71 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-5-21 Synchronous tapping [Option] (Series M) In an EIA/ISO program, synchronous tapping can be selected by additionally setting data at the address H in the tapping cycle block of G74 or G84. Address H is used to select a synchronous/asynchronous tapping and to designate the override of return speed. Special preparatory functions G84.2 and G84.3 are also provided for both types of synchronous tapping. 1. G74 [Reverse tapping] G74 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0] Initial point Spindle stop G98 M04 Point Râ d0 G99 R-point k0 Point D f0 f1 f1 Point Z Dwell M03 tc : Dwell (always in time) f0 : Feed rate (Set the pitch for synchronous tapping) j0 : 1â¦M03 after dwell at hole bottom (b0) 2â¦M03 before dwell at hole bottom 4â¦M04 after dwell at R-point MEP143â d0 : Distance from R-point (Tap lifting distance) h0 : Return speed override (%) h0 = 0 ...Asynchronous tapping h0 ⥠1 ..Synchronous tapping k0 : Distance from R-point - X, Y, P, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted. If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2. If H is omitted, the selection between synchronous/asynchronous tapping is performed by the bit 6 of parameter F94. - H is used to select whether synchronous tapping cycle operation or asynchronous tapping cycle operation is to be performed using a machine capable of synchronous tapping. This code is also used to override the return speed for synchronous tapping cycle operation. H becomes invalid for a machine not capable of synchronous tapping, or if your machine has synchronous tapping function but bit 6 of parameter F94 is not set to 1. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. - During gear selection for tapping, due consideration must be given to ensure the minimum spindle acceleration/deceleration time. Refer to the machine-operating manual. 14-72 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. 14 G84 [Normal tapping] G84 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0] Initial point Spindle stop Dwell M03 Point Râ d0 R-point k0 Point D G99 G98 Point Z Dwell M04 tc : Dwell (always in time) f0 : Feed rate (Set the pitch for synchronous tapping) j0 : 1â¦M04 after dwell at hole bottom (b0) 2â¦M04 before dwell at hole bottom 4â¦M03 after dwell at R-point MEP152â d0 : Distance from R-point (Tap lifting distance) h0 : Return speed override (%) h0 = 0 ...Asynchronous tapping h0 ⥠1 ..Synchronous tapping k0 : Distance from R-point - X, Y, P, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted. If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2. If H is omitted, the selection between synchronous/asynchronous tapping is performed by the bit 6 of parameter F94. - H is used to select whether synchronous tapping cycle operation or asynchronous tapping cycle operation is to be performed using a machine capable of synchronous tapping. This code is also used to override the return speed for synchronous tapping cycle operation. H becomes invalid for a machine not capable of synchronous tapping, or if your machine has synchronous tapping function but bit 6 of parameter F94 is not set to 1. - Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of parameter F84. Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command = 0: Argument B-command Note: For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool. - During gear selection for tapping, due consideration must be given to ensure the minimum spindle acceleration/deceleration time. Refer to the machine-operating manual. 14-73 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. G84.2 [Normal tapping] G84.2 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 Initial point Spindle stop G98 G99 R-point f0 f0 f0 Point Z Dwell M04 tc : Dwell (in time) at point Z and upon return to R-point f0 : Feed rate (in pitch) - X, Y, and/or P can be omitted. - G84.2 and G84.3 always performs a synchronous tapping, irrespective of the setting in bit 6 of parameter F94. - Designation of G84.2 or G84.3 without the corresponding option would cause the alarm No. 952 NO SYNCHRONIZED TAP OPTION. - During gear selection for tapping, due consideration must be given to ensure the minimum spindle acceleration/deceleration time. Refer to the machine-operating manual. - The value of parameter K90 is always referred to as the return speed override (%). 14-74 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. 14 G84.3 [Reverse tapping] G84.3 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 Initial point Spindle stop G98 G99 R-point f0 f0 f0 Point Z Dwell M03 tc : Dwell (in time) at point Z and upon return to R-point f0 : Feed rate (in pitch) - X, Y, and/or P can be omitted. - G84.2 and G84.3 always performs a synchronous tapping, irrespective of the setting in bit 6 of parameter F94. - Designation of G84.2 or G84.3 without the corresponding option would cause the alarm No. 952 NO SYNCHRONIZED TAP OPTION. - During gear selection for tapping, due consideration must be given to ensure the minimum spindle acceleration/deceleration time. Refer to the machine-operating manual. - The value of parameter K90 is always referred to as the return speed override (%). 14-75 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-6 Initial Point and R-Point Level Return: G98 and G99 (Series M) 1. Function and purpose Commands G98 or G99 can be used to select whether the return level of the final sequence during fixed-cycle operation is to be set at R-point or at the initial point of machining. 2. Programming format G98: Initial point level return G99: R-point level return 3. Detailed description The following represents the relationship between the G98/G99 mode and repeat times: Number of holes Only one Sample program G98 (At power-on or after cancellation using M02, M30, or RESET key) G99 Initial point Initial point R-point R-point G81 X100. Y100. Zâ50. R25. F1000 Return to R-point level. Return to initial point level. â â Two or more G81 X100. Y100. Zâ50. R25. L5 F1000 1st hole 2nd hole Always return to initial point. 14-76 Last hole 1st hole 2nd hole Last hole MEP158 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-7 Scaling ON/OFF: G51/G50 (Series M) 1. Function and purpose The shape specified in a machining program can be enlarged or reduced in size using scaling command G51. The range of scaling (enlargement/reduction) factors is from 0.000001 to 99.999999. Use command G51 to specify a scaling axis, the center of scaling, and a scaling factor. Use command G50 to specify scaling cancellation. 2. Programming format G51 Xx Yy Zz Pp Scaling on (specify a scaling axis, the center of scaling (incremental/absolute), and a scaling factor) G50 3. Scaling cancel Detailed description A. Specifying a scaling axis The scaling mode is set automatically by setting G51. Command G51 does not move any axis; it only specifies a scaling axis, the center of scaling, and a scaling factor. Scaling becomes valid only for the axis to which the center of scaling has been specified. Center of scaling The center of scaling must be specified with the axis address according to the absolute or incremental data command mode (G90 or G91). This also applies even when specifying the current position as the center. Scaling factor Use address P to specify a scaling factor. Minimum unit of specification: 0.000001 Specifiable range of factors: 1 to 99999999 or 0.000001 to 99.999999 (times) (Although both are valid, the latter with a decimal point must be preceded by G51.) Scaling factor: b/a b Machining shape a Programmed shape Scaling center MEP177 14-77 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS The scaling factor set in parameter F20 will be used if you do not specify any scaling factor in the same block as that of G51. The current setting of this parameter will be used if it is updated during the scaling mode. That is, the parameter setting existing when G51 is set is valid. Data will be calculated at a scaling factor of 1 if neither the program nor the parameter has a specified scaling factor. Program errors occur in the following cases: - If scaling is specified for a machine not capable of scaling (Alarm 872 G51 OPTION NOT FOUND) - If a scaling factor exceeding its maximum available value is specified in the same block as that of G51 (Alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT) (All scaling factors less than 0.000001 are processed as 1.) B. Cancellation of scaling The scaling cancel mode is set automatically by setting G50. Setting this command code offsets any deviation between the program coordinates and the coordinates of the actual machine position. Even for axes that have not been designated in the same block as that of G50, the machine moves through the offset amount specified by scaling. 4. Precautions 1. Scaling does not become valid for tool diameter offsetting, tool length offsetting, or tool position offsetting. Offsets and other corrections are calculated only for the shape existing after scaling. 2. Scaling is valid only for move commands associated with automatic operation (tape, memory, or MDI); it is not valid for manual movement. 3. After-scaling coordinates are displayed as position data. 4. Scaling is performed on the axis for which the center of scaling is specified by G51. In that case, scaling becomes valid for all move commands associated with automatic operation, as well as for the parameter-set return strokes of G73 and G83 and for the shift strokes of G76 and G87. 5. If only one axis of the plane concerned is selected for scaling, circular interpolation is performed with the single scaling on that axis. 6. Scaling will be cancelled if either M02, M30, or M00 (only when M0 contains reset) is issued during the scaling mode. Scaling is also cancelled by an external reset command or any other reset functions during the reset/initial status. 7. Data P, which specifies a scaling factor, can use a decimal point. The decimal point, however, becomes valid only if scaling command code G51 precedes data P. G51P0.5 P0.5G51 P500000G51 G51P500000 8. 0.5 time 1 time (regarded as P = 0) 0.5 time 0.5 time The center of scaling is shifted accordingly if the coordinate system is shifted using commands G92 or G52 during scaling. 14-78 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 5. Sample programs 1. Basic operation I N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 N09 N10 N11 N12 G92X0Y0Z0 G90G51Xâ100.Yâ100.P0.5 G00G43Zâ200.H02 G41Xâ50.Y-50.D01 G01Zâ250.F1000 Yâ150.F200 Xâ150. G02Yâ50.J50. G01Xâ50. G00Z0 G40G50X0Y0 M02 Y â200. â150. â100. â50. X W â50. N09 N11 N04 N08 â100. M N06 N07 â150. Tool path after 1/2 scaling Program path after 1/2 scaling Tool path without scaling Program path without scaling D01 = 25.000 M: Scaling center MEP178 14-79 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. Basic operation II N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 N09 G92X0Y0 G90G51P0.5 ......... See [1] to [4] below. G00Xâ50.Yâ50. G01Xâ150.F1000 Yâ150. Xâ50. Yâ50. G00G50 M02 [1] Without scaling N02 G90G51P0.5 [2] If scaling is to be done for X, Y N02 G90G51Xâ100.Yâ100.P0.5 [3] If scaling is to be done for X only N02 G90G51Xâ100.P0.5 [4] If scaling is to be done for Y only N02 G90G51Yâ100.P0.5 Y â150. â100. â50. X W [3] â50. [4] [2] â100. M [1] â150. MEP179 14-80 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Basic operation III N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 N09 N10 N11 N12 G92X0Y0 G90G51P0.5 ......... See [1] to [4] below. G00Xâ50.Yâ50. G01Yâ150.F1000 G02Xâ100.Iâ25. G01Xâ150. G02Xâ200.Iâ25. G01Xâ250.Yâ100. Yâ50. Xâ50. G00G50 M02 [1] Without scaling N02 G90G51P0.5 [2] If scaling is to be done for X, Y N02 G90G51Xâ125.Yâ100.P0.5 [3] If scaling is to be done for X only N02 G90G51Xâ125.P0.5 [4] If scaling is to be done for Y only N02 G90G51Yâ100.P0.5 Y â150. â200. â250. â125. â100. â50. X W â50. [2] [4] [1] M â100. [3] â150. MEP180 14-81 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. Reference-point (zero point) check (G27) during scaling Setting G27 during scaling cancels the scaling mode after G27 has been executed. N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 G28X0Y0 G92X0Y0 G90G51Xâ100.Yâ100.P0.5 G00Xâ50.Yâ50. G01Xâ150.F1000 G27X0Y0 M If a program is constructed in the manner that the reference point is reached under normal mode, it will also be reached even under scaling mode. Y â150. â100. â50. X W N06* N06** â50. N04 N05 â100. N06* ....... Without scaling N06**...... During scaling M MEP181 14-82 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 5. 14 Reference-point (zero point) return (G28, G29, or G30) during scaling Setting G28 or G30 during scaling cancels the scaling mode at the middle point and then executes the reference-point (zero point) return command. If the middle point has not been set, the reference-point (zero point) return command is executed with the point where scaling has been cancelled as middle point. If G29 is set during the scaling mode, scaling will be performed for the entire movement after the middle point. N01 G28X0Y0 N02 G92X0Y0 N03 G90G51Xâ100.Yâ150.P500000 N04 N05 N06 N07 0.5 G00Xâ50.Yâ100. G01Xâ150.F1000 G28Xâ100.Yâ50. G29Xâ50.Yâ100. Y â150. â100. â50. X W N06 N07 Intermediate point â50. N04 N07* N06* N07** N06** â100. N05 â150. N06* N07* Without scaling N06** N07** During scaling M MEP182 14-83 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 6. One-way positioning (G60) during scaling Setting G60 during the scaling mode executes scaling at the final point of positioning, and thus no scaling is performed for the parameter l1 of creeping. That is, the amount of creeping remains constant, irrespective of whether scaling is valid. N01 N02 N03 N04 G92X0Y0 G91G51Xâ100.Yâ150.P0.5 G60Xâ50.Yâ50. G60Xâ150.Yâ100. Y â150. â100. â50. X W Without scaling â50. N03 â100. N04 During scaling M â150. MEP183 14-84 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 7. 14 Workpiece coordinate system updating during scaling Updating of the workpiece coordinate system during scaling causes the center of scaling to be shifted according to the difference in offset amount between the new workpiece coordinate system and the old one. Subprogram N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 G90G54G00X0Y0 G51Xâ100.Yâ100.P0.5 G65P100 G90G55G00X0Y0 G65P100 O100 G00Xâ50.Yâ50. G01Xâ150.F1000 Yâ150. Xâ50. Yâ50. M99 % G54 W1 M W2 G55 Mâ MEP184 14-85 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 8. Figure rotation during scaling Setting a figure rotate command during scaling executes scaling for both the center and radius of rotation of the figure. Subprogram N01 N02 N03 N04 G92X0Y0 G90G51X0Y0P0.5 G00Xâ100.Yâ100. M98P200Iâ50.L8 O200 G91G01Xâ14.645Y35.355F1000 M99 % Scaling center â200. â150. â100. Y â50. X W â50. After scaling â100. Machining program â150. MEP185 14-86 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 9. 14 Scaling using a figure rotation subprogram Setting a scaling command in a figure rotation subprogram executes scaling only for the shape predefined in the subprogram. Scaling is not executed for the radius of rotation of the figure. Subprogram G92X0Y0 G90G00X100. M98P300Iâ100.L4 G90G00X0Y0 M02 O300 G91G51X0Y0P0.5 G00Xâ40. G01Yâ40.F1000 X40. G03Y80.J40. G01Xâ40. Yâ40. G00G50X40. Xâ100.Y100. M99 % Machining program W After scaling MEP186 14-87 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 10. Scaling during coordinate rotation If scaling during coordinate rotation is programmed the center of scaling will rotate and scaling will be performed at that rotated center of scaling. N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 N09 G92X0Y0 M00 G90G51Xâ150.Yâ75.P0.5 G00Xâ100.Yâ50, G01Xâ200.F1000 Yâ100. Xâ100. Yâ50. G00G50X0Y0 (Coordinate rotation data setting) Y â200. â150. â100. â50. X W Scaling only Machining program â50. N04 Shift of scaling center by coordinate rotation N05 Coordinate rotation only â100. N08 N06 N07 â150. Coordinate rotation and scaling MEP187 14-88 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 11. Setting G51 during scaling If command G51 is set during the scaling mode, the axis for which the center of scaling is newly specified will also undergo scaling. The scaling factor specified by the latest G51 command becomes valid in that case. N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 G92X0Y0 G90G51Xâ150.P0.75 G00Xâ50.Yâ25. G01Xâ250.F1000 Yâ225. Xâ50. Yâ25. G51Yâ125.P0.5 G00Xâ100.Yâ75. G01Xâ200. Yâ175. Xâ100. Yâ75. G00G50X0Y0 Scaling axis X; P = 0.75 Scaling axes X and Y; P = 0.5 Cancel Y â250. â200. â150. â100. â50. X W N03 N14 N04 N05 â50. N09 N10 Machining program â100. N11 N13 N12 â150. N07 â200. N06 MEP188 14-89 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-8 Mirror Image ON/OFF: G51.1/G50.1 (Series M) You can use G-code commands to turn the mirror image mode on or off for each axis. Higher priority is given to setting of the mirror image mode using G-code commands over setting using any other methods. Programming format: G51.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 G50.1 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 (Mirror image On) (Mirror image Off) Detailed description - When using command G51.1, the name of the axis for which mirror image processing is to be performed must be designated using the appropriate coordinate word, and the mirror image center coordinates must be designated using absolute or incremental data as the coordinate data. - If the coordinate word is designated in G50.1, then this denotes the axis for which the mirror image is to be cancelled. Coordinate data, even if predefined, is ignored in that case. - After mirror image processing has been performed for only one of the axes forming a plane, the rotational direction and the offset direction become reverse during arc interpolation, tool diameter offsetting, or coordinate rotation. - Since the mirror image processing function is valid only for local coordinate systems, the center of mirror image processing moves according to the particular counter preset data or workpiece coordinate offsetting data. Y [1] [2] X [3] [4] MEP189 Specific examples (Main program) G00G90G40G49G80 M98P100 G51.1X0 M98P100 G51.1Y0 M98P100 G50.1X0 M98P100 G50.1Y0 M30 X Y [1] OFF OFF [2] ON OFF [3] ON ON [4] OFF OFF OFF OFF 14-90 (Subprogram O100) G91G28X0Y0 G90G00X20.Y20. G42G01X40.D01F120 Y40. X20. Y20. G40X0Y0 M99 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-9 Subprogram Control: M98, M99 1. Function and purpose Fixed sequences or repeatedly used programs can be stored in the memory as subprograms which can then be called from the main program when required. M98 serves to call subprograms and M99 serves to return from the subprogram. Furthermore, it is possible to call other subprograms from particular subprograms and the nesting depth can include as many as 8 levels. Main program Sub program O0010; O1000; M98P1000; M98P1200 Q20; M02; M99; Sub program (Level 1) Sub program O1200; O2000; N20; M98P2000; M98P2500; N60; M99; M99P60; (Level 2) Sub program O5000; M99; (Level 3) (Level 8) Nesting depth TEP161 The table below shows the functions which can be executed by adding and combining the tape storing and editing functions, subprogram control functions and fixed cycle functions. Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes 1. Memory operation $ $ $ $ 2. Tape editing (main memory) $ $ $ $ 3. Subprogram call à $ $ à 4. Subprogram nesting level call (Note 2) à $ $ à 5. Fixed cycles à à $ $ 6. Fixed cycle subprogram editing à à $ $ 1. Tape storing and editing 2. Subprogram control 3. Fixed cycles Function Notes: 1. â$â denotes a function which can be used and âÃâ a function which cannot be used. 2. The nesting depth can include as many as 8 levels. 14-91 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. Programming format Subprogram call M98 Q_ L_; Number of subprogram repetitions (L1 if omitted) Sequence number in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted) (Use the address H for G-code series M.) Program name of subprogram to be called (own program if omitted). Can only be omitted during memory operation. Alternatively, M98 P_ Q_ L_; Number of subprogram repetitions (L1 if omitted) Sequence number in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted) (Use the address H for G-code series M.) Program number [composed of numerals only] of subprogram to be called (own program if omitted). P can only be omitted during memory operation. Return to main program from subprogram M99 P_ L_; Number of times after repetition number has been changed Sequence number of return destination (returned to block following block of call if omitted) 3. Creating and entering subprograms Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory operation except that the subprogram completion instruction M99 (P_ L_) is entered as an independent block at the last block. Oââââ ; ........; ........; M ........; M99; %(EOR) Program number as subprogram Main body of subprogram Subprogram return command End of record code (% with ISO code and EOR with EIA code) The above program is registered by editing operations. For further details, refer to the section on program editing. Only those subprograms numbers ranging from 1 through 9999 designated by the optional specifications can be used. When there are no program numbers on the tape, the setting number for âprogram inputâ is used. Up to 8 nesting levels can be used for calling programs from subprograms, and program error occurs if this number is exceeded. Main programs and subprograms are registered in order in which they were read because no distinction is made between them. This means that main programs and subprograms should not be given the same numbers. (If the same numbers are given, error occurs during entry.) 14-92 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 Example: ; O$$$$ ; .........; Subprogram A M M99; % ; Oââââ ; .........; Subprogram B M M99; % ; O'' ; .........; Subprogram C M M99; % Note 1: Main programs can be used during memory and tape operation but subprograms must have been entered in the memory. Note 2: The following commands are not the object of subprogram nesting and can be called even beyond the 8th nesting level. - Fixed cycles - Pattern cycles 4. Subprogram execution M98: Subprogram call command M99: Subprogram return command Programming format M98 Q_ L_; or M98 P_ Q_ L_; Where < > : Name of the subprogram to be called (up to 32 characters) P : Number of the subprogram to be called (up to 8 digits) Q : Any sequence number within the subprogram to be called (up to 5 digits) (Use the address H for G-code series M.) L : Number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 with numerical value of four figures; if L is omitted, the subprogram is executed once ; with L0, there is no execution. For example, M98 P1 L3; is equivalent to the following : M98 P1; M98 P1; M98 P1; 14-93 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Example 1: When there are 3 subprogram calls (known as 3 nesting levels) Main program Subprogram 1 O1; [1] M98P1; Subprogram 3 O10; O20; [2] [3] M98P10; [1]â M02; Subprogram 2 M98P20; [2]â [3]â M99; M99; M99; Sequence of execution: [1]â[2]â[3]â[3]ââ[2]ââ[1]â TEP162 For nesting, the M98 and M99 commands should always be paired off on a 1 : 1 basis [1]' for [1], [2]' for [2], etc. Modal information is rewritten according to the execution sequence without distinction between main programs and subprograms. This means that after calling a subprogram, attention must be paid to the modal data status when programming. Example 2: The M98 Q_ ; and M99 P_ ; commands designate the sequence numbers in a program with a call instruction. M98Q_; M99P_; O123; M98Q3; Search N3__; M99; N100__; M98P123; N200__; N300__; N400__; M M M99P100; TEP163 14-94 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Example 3: 14 Main program M98 P2 ; O1; M M99; % O2; M N200 M M99; % O3; M N200 M M99; % Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2 Subprogram 3 - When the O2 N200 block is searched with the memory search function, the modal data are updated according to the related data of O2 to N200. - The same sequence number can be used in different subprograms. - When the subprogram (No. p1) is to be repeatedly used, it will be repeatedly executed for I1 times provided that M98 Pp1 Ll1 ; is programmed. 5. Other precautions - Programming error occurs when the designated program number (P) is not found. - Single block stop does not occur in the M98P _ ; and M99 ; block. If any address except O, N, P, Q or L is used, single block stop can be executed. (With X100. M98 P100 ; operation branches to O100 after X100. is executed.) - When M99 is commanded in the main program, operation returns to the head. - Operation can branch from tape or PTR operation to a subprogram by M98P_ but the sequence number of the return destination cannot be designated with M99P_ ;. (P_ is ignored.) - Care should be taken that the search operation will take time when the sequence number is designated by M99P_ ; 14-95 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS - In the execution of a subprogram composed of sections each proper to either of the upper and lower turrets with the aid of G109L_ blocks, only the program sections for that system (headstock or turret) which is currently active in the main program at the call of the subprogram will selectively be executed with the other sections being appropriately skipped, as shown below: Pattern 1: Main program (EIA) G109L1 : (for machining with Upper turret) Subprogram (WNo. 1000) G109L1 (for machining with Upper turret) : Executed M99 M98 . . . G109L2 (for machining with Lower turret) : Skipped Pattern 2: Main program (EIA) : G109L2 (for machining with Lower turret) Subprogram (WNo. 2000) G109L1 (for machining with Upper turret) : : Skipped M98 G109L2 (for machining with Lower turret) : Executed M99 - The Z- and C-offset values stored on the SET UP MANAG. display for the main program will remain intact for the execution of a subprogram prepared in the EIA format. 14-96 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 6. 14 MAZATROL program call from EIA/ISO program A. Overview MAZATROL machining program can be called as a subprogram from the machining program described with EIA/ISO codes. EIA/ISO â MAZATROL (Program call) MAZATROL (WNo. 1000) EIA/ISO MAZATROL machining program is called from EIA/ISO program, and entire machining program can be used. M98P1000; Note 1: When the execution of MAZATROL machining program is completed, the execution is returned again to EIA/ISO program. It should be noted that the used tool, current position and others are changed though EIA/ISO modal information is not changed. Note 2: MAZATROL programs (with commands for both the upper and lower turret) can successfully be called up as a subprogram from two positions of an EIA program of similar structure on condition that one and the same program is called up on completion of blocks of the same waiting command. Example: Main program (EIA) G109L1 : M950 M98 G109L2 : M950 M98 MAZATROL (WNo. 3000) Data for machining with Upper turret : : Data for machining with Lower turret : : Note 3: The Z- and C-offset values used for the execution of a MAZATROL program as a subprogram called up from an EIA program depend upon the setting of parameter F161 bit 6 as follows: F161 bit 6 = 0: Values of the subprogram (MAZATROL) = 1: Values of the main program (EIA) 14-97 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS B. Programming format M98 L_; or M98 P_ L_; < > or P: Name, or number, of the MAZATROL machining program to be called. When not specified, the alarm 744 NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM will be displayed. Also, when the specified program is not stored, the alarm 744 NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM will be displayed. L: C. Number of repetitions of program execution (1 to 9999). When omitted or L=0, the called program will be executed one time (as if L=1). Detailed description 1. END unit of the MAZATROL program End unit does not have to be specified at the end of MAZATROL machining program. When end unit is specified: Even if WORK No. and CONTI. are specified, they are ignored. This means that program chain cannot be made with MAZATROL program called from EIA/ISO program. MAZATROL EIA/ISO M98 UNIT CONTI. WORK No. âââ END 1 Impossible Ignored MAZATROL Also, REPEAT and SHIFT are ignored even if they are specified. 2. MAZATROL program execution When MAZATROL program is called from EIA/ISO program, the MAZATROL program is executed like automatic operation of MAZATROL. MAZATROL program is executed independently of EIA/ISO program which has made the call. In other words, it performs the same machining as MAZATROL program alone is executed. When calling MAZATROL program, always place a tool outside the safety profile beforehand. Failure to do this may cause interference of a workpiece with the tool. 3. Nesting Within a MAZATROL program called from EIA/ISO program, the subprogram unit (SUB PRO) cannot be used. MAZATROL EIA/ISO EIA/ISO Call M98; SUB PRO Impossible END Refer to the MAZATROL Programming Manual for SUB PRO unit. Note: As is the case with a SUB PRO unit, alarm 742 SUB PROGRAM NESTING OVER will occur if a point-machining unit is present in the MAZATROL program that has been called up as a subprogram from the EIA program. 14-98 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS D. 14 Remarks 1. MDI interruption and macro interruption signal during MAZATROL program execution are ignored. 2. MAZATROL program cannot be restarted halfway. 3. MAZATROL program call in the mode of a fixed cycle results in an alarm. 4. MAZATROL program call in the mode of nose radius compensation results in an alarm. 5. MAZATROL program call is not available in the MDI operation mode (results in an alarm). 6. A MAZATROL program called by M98 cannot be executed but in its entirety (from the head to the end). 7. Commands to addresses other than O, N, P, Q, L and H in a block of M98 for MAZATROL program call will not be processed till completion of the called program. 14-99 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-10 End Processing: M02, M30, M998, M999 If the program contains M02, M30, M998, M999 or EOR (%), the block containing one of these codes will be executed as the end of the program in the NC unit. The program end processing will not be commanded by M98 or M99. In end processing, tool life processing, parts count, and work No. search will be executed. 1. M02, M30 Tool life processing only will be executed. 2. M998, M999 Tool life processing, parts count, and work No. search will be executed. M998(999) Q1; Specification of execution or non-execution of parts count (counting updated on POSITION display) 0: Parts count non-execution 1: Parts count execution Name of the program to be executed next M-code for program chain M998: Continuous execution after parts count and work No. search M999: Ending after parts count and work No. search Alternatively, M998(999) P111 Q1; Specification of execution or non-execution of parts count (counting updated on POSITION display) 0: Parts count non-execution 1: Parts count execution Number of the program to be executed next M-code for program chain M998: Continuous execution after parts count and work No. search M999: Ending after parts count and work No. search - M998 EIA/ISO program M998 â â â â â â MAZATROL program â or â EIA/ISO program â â MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program is called from EIA/ISO program and executed as the next program. - M999 EIA/ISO program M999 â â â â â MAZATROL program or EIA/ISO program MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program is only called from EIA/ISO program and the operation is terminated. 14-100 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Note: 14 The programs to be called up at the end of both the upper and lower turretsâ program sections must be of the same work number; otherwise an alarm will be caused. Moreover, use either M998 or M999 for both turretsâ sections in their respective ending blocks; otherwise an alarm will likewise be caused. Example 1: Correct use Main program (EIA) Subprogram (WNo. 1000) G109L1 G109L1 : : M950 M999 G109L2 G109L2 : : M950 M999 Example 2: Wrong use Main program (EIA) G109L1 Subprogram (WNo. 1000) G109L1 : : M950 M998 G109L2 : : G109L2 M950 M999 14-101 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-11 Chamfering and Corner Rounding at Right Angle Corner 1. Overview Chamfering or corner rounding can be commanded between two blocks specified by linear interpolation (G01). For I, J and K, radial data must be always set. X 70 (b) 30 C3 (c) (X50.0 Z70.0) ......... Starting point R6 G01 Z30.0 R6.0 F â¼;... (a) Ï100 X100.0 K-3.0 ; ........ (b) (a) Z0 Ï50 ................... (c) Z TEP169 2. Detailed description 1. For chamfering or corner rounding, movement commanded by G01 must be displacement in the X- or Z-axis only. In the second block, a command perpendicular to the first axis must be given in the Z- or X-axis. 2. The starting point of the second block is the ending point of the first block. Example: 3. G01 Z270.0 R6; The starting point of this block has Z270.0 as Z coordinate. X860.0 Kâ3; The commands below will cause an alarm. - I, J, K or R is commanded while two axes of X and Z are commanded in G01. - Two of I, J, K or R are commanded in G01. - X and I, Y and J or Z and K are commanded at the same time in G01. - In a block commanding chamfering or corner rounding, movement distance in X- or Z-axis is smaller than chamfering data or corner radius data. - In a block next to the block commanding chamfering or corner rounding, command G01 is not perpendicular to the command in the preceding block. 4. In threading block, chamfering or corner rounding command will be ignored. 5. Execution by single step mode will require two steps to complete the operation. 14-102 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 6. 14 When M, T commands are included in the same block, execution point must be considered. N011 N012 N013 N014 G00 X100.0 Z0; G01 X90.0 F0.5; Z-20. R0.5 M08; X100.; N011 N014 N012 N013 M08 execution point TEP170 14-103 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 7. Chamfering and corner rounding programming format Operation Command Tool movement d Starting point a b G01 Z(W)e Ii; X(U)d; .... Next block Remarks c i e i Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for X-axis in the next block. d ⥠e + 2i aâbâcâd Chamfering ZâX i e G01 Z(W)e Iâi; X(U)d; .... Next block a b Starting point i c d Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for X-axis in the next block. d ⤠e â 2i aâbâcâd a Starting b point G01 X(U)e Kk; Z(W)d; .... Next block k c d e k aâbâcâd Chamfering XâZ a Starting point b k d c e k G01 X(U)e Kâk; Z(W)d; .... Next block Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for Z-axis in the next block. dâ¥e+k Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for Z-axis in the next block. dâ¤eâk aâbâcâd d Starting point G01 Z(W)e Rr; X(U)d; ・・・・・ Next block r c e a b Corner rounding ZâX Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for X-axis in the next block. d ⥠e + 2r aâbâcâd G01 Z(W)e Râr; X(U)d; .... Next block a b e Starting r point c d Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for X-axis in the next block. d ⤠e â 2r aâbâcâd a G01 X(U)e Rr; Z(W)d; .... Next block Starting point Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for Z-axis in the next block. dâ¥e+r r b c d e aâbâcâd Corner rounding XâZ Starting point r G01 X(U)e Râr; Z(W)d; .... Next block d c a b e aâbâcâd TEP171 14-104 Specify the point âeâ. Specify the data only for Z-axis in the next block. dâ¤eâr Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-12 Chamfering and Corner Rounding at Arbitrary Angle Corner Function Chamfering or corner rounding at any angle corner is performed automatically by adding â,C_â or â,R_â to the end of the block to be commanded first among those command blocks which form the corner with lines only. 14-12-1 Chamfering at arbitrary angle corner: , C_ 1. Function The arbitrary corner is chamferred between two points on the two lines which form this corner and displaced by the lengths commanded by â, C_â from their intersection point. 2. Programming format N100 G01 X_ Z_ ,C_; N200 G01 X_ Z_; Chamfering is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect. Length up to chamfering starting point or ending point from virtual corner intersection point 3. Example of program (a) G01 W100.,C10.F100; (b) U280.W100.; X Virtual corner intersection point (b) 140 Chamfering ending point Chamfering starting point (a) 10.0 10.0 Z 100.0 100.0 4. TEP172 Detailed description 1. The starting point of the block following the corner chamfering is the virtual corner intersection point. 2. When the comma in â , C â is not present, it is considered as a C command. 3. When both, C_ and , R_ are commanded in the same block, the latter command is valid. 4. Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner chamfering. 5. Program error occurs when the block following the block with corner chamfering does not contain a linear interpolation command. 6. Program error occurs when the movement amount in the block commanding corner chamfering is less than the chamfering amount. 14-105 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 7. Program error occurs when the movement amount in the block following the block commanding corner chamfering is less than the chamfering amount. 14-12-2 Rounding at arbitrary angle corner: , R_ 1. Funciton The arbitrary corner is rounded with the arc whose radius is commanded by â,R_â and whose center is on the bisecter of this corner angle. 2. Programming format N100 G01 X_ Z_ ,R_; N200 G01 X_ Z_; Rounding is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect. Arc radius of corner rounding 3. Example of program (a) G01 W100.,R10.F100; (b) U280.W100.; X-axis (b) Corner rounding ending point 140 Corner rounding starting point R10.0 Virtual corner intersection point (a) Z-axis 100.0 100.0 4. TEP173 Detailed description 1. The starting point of the block following the corner rounding is the virtual corner intersection point. 2. When the comma in â , Râ is not present, it is considered as an R command. 3. When both , C_ and , R_ are commanded in the same block the latter command is valid. 4. Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding. 5. Program error occurs when the block following the block with corner rounding does not contain a linear command. 6. Program error occurs when the movement amount in the block commanding corner rounding is less than the R value. 7. Program error occurs when the movement amount in the block following the block commanding corner rounding is less than the R value. 14-106 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-13 Linear Angle Commands 1. Function and purpose Programming the linear angle and one of the coordinates of the ending point makes the NC unit automatically calculate the coordinates of that ending point. 2. Programming format N1 G01 Aa1 Zz1 (Xx1) N2 G01 Aâa2 Zz2 Xx2 Designate the angle and the coordinates of the X-axis or the Z-axis. (Setting Aa3 means the same as setting Aâa2.) X (z1, x1) x1 âa2 N2 N1 a3 a1 x2 (z2, x2) Z MEP190 3. Detailed description 1. The angle denotes that relative to the plus (+) direction of the first axis (horizontal axis) on the selected plane. Assign the sign + for a counterclockwise direction (CCW) or the sign â for a clockwise direction (CW). 2. Set the ending point on one of the two axes of the selected plane. 3. Angle data will be ignored if the coordinates of both axes are set together with angles. 4. If angles alone are set, the command will be handled as a geometric command. 5. For the second block, the angle at either the starting point or the ending point can be specified. 6. The linear angle command function does not work if address A is to be used for an axis name or for the No. 2 auxiliary function. 7. This function is valid only for the G01 command; it is not valid for other interpolation or positioning commands. 14-107 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-14 Macro Call Function: G65, G66, G66.1, G67 14-14-1 User macros Macroprogram call, data calculation, data input to/output from a personal computer, data control, judgment, branching, and various other instructions can be used with variables commands to perform measurements and other operations. Main program Macroprogram !!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!! Macro-program call-out command M99 M30 A macroprogram is a subprogram which is created using variables, calculation instructions, control instructions, etc. to have special control features. These special control features (macroprograms) can be used by calling them from the main program as required. These calls use macro call instructions. Detailed description - When command G66 is entered, the designated user macro subprogram willbe called every time after execution of the move commands within a block until G67 (cancellation) is entered. - Command codes G66 and G67 must reside in the same programm in pairs. 14-108 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-14-2 Macro call instructions Two types of macro call instructions are provided: single-call instructions used to call only at the designated block, and modal call instructions used to call at each block within a macro call mode. Modal call instructions are further divided into type A and type B. 1. Single call Subprogram (O 01) Main program O01 to subprogram G65P01Ll1 M99 to main program The designated user macro subprogram ends with M99. Instruction G65 calls the designated user macro subprogram only once. Format: G65 L__ Repeat times Program Name (When omitted, own program will be repeated.) Alternatively, G65 P__ L__ Repeat times Program No. (When P is omitted, own program will be repeated.) When argument is to be delivered to the user macro subprogram as a local variable, designate the required data with the respective addresses. (Argument designation is not available for a user macro subprogram written in MAZATROL language.) In such a case, the argument can have a sign and a decimal point, irrespective of the address. Arguments can be specified using method I or II, as shown below. 14-109 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS A. Argument specification I Format: A_B_C_ !!!!!!! X_Y_Z_ Detailed description - An argument can be specified using all addresses, except G, L, N, O, and P. - Except for I, J, and K, addresses does not need be specified in an alphabetical order. I_J_K_ .. Correct J_I_K_ .. Wrong - Addresses whose specification is not required can be omitted. - The relationship between addresses that can be specified using argument specification I, and variables numbers in a user macro unit, is shown in the following table: Relationship between address and variables number Call commands and usable addresses Address specified using method I Variable in macroprogram G65, G66 G66.1 A #1 $ $ B #2 $ $ C #3 $ $ D #7 $ $ E #8 $ $ F #9 $ $ G #10 à Ã* H #11 $ $ I #4 $ $ $ J #5 $ K #6 $ $ L #12 à Ã* M #13 $ $ N #14 à Ã* O #15 à à P #16 à Ã* Q #17 $ $ R #18 $ $ S #19 $ $ T #20 $ $ U #21 $ $ V #22 $ $ W #23 $ $ X #24 $ $ Y #25 $ $ Z #26 $ $: Usable 14-110 Ã: Unusable $ *: Usable in G66.1 modal Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS B. 14 Argument specification II Format: A_B_C_I_J_K_I_J_K_!!!!! Detailed description - Up to a maximum of 10 sets of arguments that each consist of addresses I, J, and K, as well as A, B, and C, can be specified. - If identical addresses overlap, specify them in the required order. - Addresses whose specification is not required can be omitted. - The relationship between addresses that can be specified using argument specification II, and variables numbers in a user macro unit, is shown in the following table: Argument specification II addresses Variables in macroprograms Argument specification II addresses Variables in macroprograms A #1 K5 #18 B #2 I6 #19 Note: C. C #3 J6 #20 I1 #4 K6 #21 J1 #5 I7 #22 K1 #6 J7 #23 I2 #7 K7 #24 J2 #8 I8 #25 K2 #9 J8 #26 I3 #10 K8 #27 J3 #11 I9 #28 #29 K3 #12 J9 I4 #13 K9 #30 J4 #14 I10 #31 K4 #15 J10 #32 I5 #16 K10 #33 J5 #17 In the table above, the numerals 1 through 10 have been added to addresses I, J, and J just to denote the order of arrangement of the designated sets of arguments: these numerals are not included in actual instructions. Combined use of argument specification I and II When both method I and method II are used to specify arguments, only the latter of two arguments which have an address corresponding to the same variable will become valid. Example: Call command G65 A1.1 Bâ2.2 D3.3 I4.4 I7.7 Variables #1: 1.1 #2: â2.2 #3: #4: 4.4 #5: #6: #7: 7.7 If two arguments (D3.3 and I7.7) are designated for the variable of #7, only the latter argument (I7.7) will be used. 14-111 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. Modal call, type A (Move command call) Subprogram Main program O01 to subprogram G66P01Ll1 M99 to main program G67 to subprogram For a block that has a move command code between G66 and G67, the designated user macro subprogram is executed after that move command has been executed. The subprogram is executed an l1 number of times for the first call, or once for subsequent calls. For modal call of type A, the methods of specifying are the same as used for single call. Format: G66 L__ Repeat times Program name Alternatively, G66 P__ L__ Repeat times Program No. Detailed description - When command G66 is entered, the designated user macro subprogram will be called every time after execution of the move commands within a block until command G67 (cancellation) is entered. - Command codes G66 and G67 must reside in the same program in pairs. Entry of a G67 command without a G66 command results in an alarm 857 INCORRECT USER MACRO G67 PROG. 14-112 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 Drilling cycle Main program N1G90G54G0X0Y0Z0 Subprogram N2G91G00Xâ50.Yâ50.Zâ200. N3G66P9010Râ10.Zâ30.F100 N4Xâ50.Yâ50. N5Xâ50. O9010 To subprogram after execution of axis command N10G00Z#18M03 N20G09G01Z#26F#9 To subprogram after execution of axis command N6G67 N30G00Zâ[#18+#26] M M99 To main program â150. â100. â50. X W N2 N1 N3 N10 â50. N4 Argument R N5 N20 â100. N30 Argument Z Y Argument F To subprogram MEP165 Note 1: The designated subprogram is executed after the axis commands in the main program have been executed. Note 2: No subprograms are executed for the G67 block and its successors. 3. Modal call, type B (Block-to-block call) The designated user macro subprogram is called unconditionally for each of the command blocks present between G66.1 and G67. Execution of the macro program is repeated as specified with L for the first call, and only once for each of subsequent calls. Format: G66.1 L__ Repeat times Program name Alternatively, G66.1 P__ L__ Repeat times Program No. 14-113 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Detailed description - During the G66.1 mode, only the codes O, N, and G in each of the read command blocks are executed. No other codes in those blocks are executed; codes other than O, N, and G are handled as arguments. However, only the last G-code and the N-codes following a code other than O or N become arguments. - All significant blocks in the G66.1 mode are regarded as preceded by the command G65P_. For example, the block of N100G01G90X100. Y200. F400R1000 in the G66.1P1000 mode is handled as equivalent to N100G65P1000G01G90X100. Y200. F400R1000. Note: Call is executed even for the G66.1 command block of the G66.1 mode, with the relationship between the addresses of the arguments and the variables numbers being the same as for G65 (single call). - The data range of the G, L, P, and N commands that you can set as new variables using the G66.1 mode is the same as the data range of usual NC commands. - Sequence number N, modal G-codes, and O are all updated as modal information. 4. G-code macro call The user macro subprograms of the required program number can be called just by setting Gcodes. Format: GÃà G-code which calls macro-subprogram Detailed description - The instruction shown above performs the same function as those of the instructions listed below. Which of these listed instructions will apply is determined by the parameter data to be set for each G-code. M98Pââââ G65Pââââ G66Pââââ G66.1Pââââ - Use parameters to set the relationship between GÃà (macro call G-code) and Pââââ (program number of the macro to be called). - Of G00 through G255, up to a maximum of 10 command codes can be used with this instruction unless the uses of these codes are clearly predefined by EIA Standards, such as G00, G01, G02, etc. - The command code cannot be included in user macro subprograms that have been called using G-codes. 14-114 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 5. 14 Auxiliary command macro call (M-, S-, T-, or B-code macro call) The user macro subprograms of the required program number can be called just by setting M-, S-, T-, or B-codes. Format: Mm (or Ss, Tt and Bb) M (or S, T and B) code which calls macro-subprogram Detailed description (The following description also applies to S-, T-, and B-codes.) - The instruction shown above performs the same function as those of the instructions listed below. Which of these listed instructions will apply is determined by the parameter data to be set for each M-code. M98Pââââ G65PââââMm G66PââââMm G66.1PââââMm - Use parameter to set the relationship between Mm (macro call M-code) and Pââââ (program number of the macro to be called). Up to a maximum of 10 M-codes, ranging from M00 to M95, can be registered. Do not register the M-codes that are fundamentally required for your machine, nor M0, M1, M2, M30, and M96 through M99. - If registered auxiliary command codes are set in the user macro subprograms that have been called using M-codes, macro calls will not occur since those special auxiliary command codes will be handled as usual ones (M-, S-, T-, or B-codes). 6. Differences in usage between commands M98, G65, etc. - Arguments can be designated for G65, but cannot be designated for M98. - Sequence numbers can be designated for M98, but cannot be designated for G65, G66, or G66.1. - Command M98 executes a subprogram after M98 block commands other than M, P, H, and L have been executed, whereas G65 just branches the program into a subprogram without doing anything. - Single-block stop will occur if the block of command M98 has addresses other than O, N, P, H, and L. For G65, however, single-block stop will not occur. - The level of local variables is fixed for M98, but for G65 does change according to the depth of nesting. (For example, #1s, if present before and after M98, always mean the same, but if present before and after G65, they have different meanings.) - Command M98 can have up to a maximum of eight levels of call multiplexity when combined with G65, G66, or G66.1, whereas the maximum available number of levels for command G65 is four when it is combined with G66 or G66.1. 14-115 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 7. Multiplexity of macro call commands The maximum available number of levels of macro subprogram call is four, whether it is single or modal. Arguments in macro call instructions become valid only within the level of the called macro. Since the multiplexity of macro call is of up to a maximum of four levels, arguments can be included in a program as local variables each time a macro call is made. Note 1: When a G65, G66, or G66.1 macro call or an auxiliary command macro call is made, nesting will be regarded as single-level and thus the level of local variables will also increase by 1. Note 2: For modal call of type A, the designated user macro subprogram is called each time a move command is executed. If, however, multiple G66s are present, the next user macro subprogram will be called even for the move commands in the macro each time axis movement is done. Note 3: User macro subprograms are cancelled in a reverse order to that in which they have been arranged. Example: User macroprogram operation Main program Macro p1 G66Pp1 Zz1 (p1 call-out) After z1 execution G66Pp2 G67 w1 x2 M99 w1 x2 M99 Macro p1 (p2 call-out) Zz2 x1 After z2 execution x1 (p2 cancel) Macro p2 Macro p2 Macro p2 Macro p1 (p1 call-out) Zz3 After z3 execution x1 G67 (p1 cancel) Zz4 Zz5 14-116 w1 x2 M99 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 8. 14 User macro call based on interruption Outline Prior creation of special user macros for interrupt processing allows the user macros to be executed during automatic operation when a user macro interrupt signal is input. After the user macro has been executed, the program can also be returned to the interrupted program block and then started from this block. Detailed description - Format for selecting the user macro branching destination M M96L_ (or M96P_L_) M M M97 (Branching mode off) (Branching mode on) When user macroprogram interruption signal is input during this space, the branch into the specified user macroprogram will be applied. M - User macro interrupts can be processed even when the number of levels of macro call multiplexity during the occurrence of an interrupt is four. The local variables' level of the user macros used for interruption is the same as the level of the user macros existing during the occurrence of an interrupt. Interruption branch Interruption return O2000 O2100 O5100 M M96P5100 G1X Interruption G1Y M G65P2100 Interruption M M97 M M99 (Level 3) Local variable M99 (Level 4) Local variable 14-117 M99 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-14-3 Variables Of all types of variables available for the NC unit, only local variables, common variables, and part of system variables are retained even after power-off. 1. Multiplexing of variables Under user macro specifications, variables can have their identifiers (identification numbers) either transformed into variables, which is referred to as multiplexing, or replaced with . For , only one arithmetic expression (for either multiplication, division, addition, or subtraction) can be used. Example 1: Multiplexing variables #1=10 #10=20 #20=30 #5=#[#[#1]] From #1 = 10, #[#[#1]] = #[#10] will result. From #10 = 20, #[#10] = #20 will result. Therefore #5 = #20, i.e. #5 = 30 will result. #1=10 #10=20 #20=30 #5=1000 #[#[#1]]=#5 From #1 = 10, #[#[#1]] = #[#10] will result. From #10 = 20, #[#10] = #20 will result. Therefore #20 = #5, i.e. #20 = 1000 will result. Example 2: Replacing variables identifiers with #10=5 #[#10+1]=1000 #[#10â1]=â1000 #[#10â3]=100 #[#10/2]=100 2. #6 = 1000 will result. #4 = â1000 will result. #15 = 100 will result. #2 = â100 will result. Undefined variables Under user macro specifications, variables remaining unused after power-on or local variables that are not argument-specified by G65, G66, or G66.1 can be used as . Also, variables can be forcibly made into . Variable #0 is always used as one, and this variable cannot be defined on the left side of the expression. A. Arithmetic expression #1=#0......... #1 = #2=#0+1 ...... #2 = 1 #3=1+#0 ...... #3 = 1 #4=#0â10 ..... #4 = 0 #5=#0+#0 ..... #5 = 0 Note: Be careful that is handled the same as 0 during processing of expressions. + = 0 + = constant + = constant 14-118 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS B. 14 Applying variables Application of an undefined variable alone causes even the address to be ignored. If #1 = G0X#1Y1000 G0X[#1+10]Y1000 C. is equivalent to G0Y1000, and is equivalent to G0X10Y1000. Conditional expression Only for EQ and NE, does differ from 0 in meaning. If #101 = If #101 = 0 #101EQ#0 = holds. #101EQ#0 0 = does not hold. #101NE0 â 0 holds. #101NE0 0 â 0 does not hold. #101GE#0 ⥠holds. #101GE#0 0 ⥠holds. #101GT0 > 0 does not hold. #101GT0 0 > 0 does not hold. Hold-conditions and not-hold-conditions list (For conditional expressions including undefined variables) EQ Right side Left side Empty Constant NE GT LT GE LE Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant H H H H H H H H H: Holds (The conditional expression holds.) Blank: The conditional expression does not hold. 14-119 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14-14-4 Types of variables 1. Common variables (#100 to #199, and #500 to #999) Common variables refer to the variables to be used in common at any position. The identifiers of common variables which can be used are from #100 to #199, or from #500 to #999. 2. Local variables (#1 to #33) Local variables refer to variables that can be defined as when calling a macro subprogram, or those which can be used locally within the main program or a subprogram. There is no relationship between macros. Thus, these variables can be overlapped on each other, but up to a maximum of four levels of overlapping. G65Pp1Ll1 where p1 : Program number l1 : Number of repeat times must be: Aa1 Bb1 Cc1 !!! Zz1. The following represents the relationship between the address specified by and the local variables number used in the user macro unit: Call commands G65 G66 G66.1 Argument address $ $ A $ $ $ $ $ Local variable Call commands G65 G66 G66.1 Argument address Local variable #1 $ $ R #18 B #2 $ $ S #19 $ C #3 $ $ T #20 $ D #7 $ $ U #21 $ E #8 $ $ V #22 $ $ F #9 $ $ W #23 à Ã* G #10 $ $ X #24 $ $ H #11 $ $ Y #25 $ $ I #4 $ $ Z #26 $ $ J #5 â #27 $ $ K #6 â #28 à Ã* L #12 â #29 $ $ M #13 â #30 à Ã* N #14 â #31 à à O #15 â #32 à Ã* P #16 â #33 $ $ Q #17 Argument addresses marked as à in the table above cannot be used. Only during the G66.1 mode, however, can argument addresses marked with an asterisk (*) in this table be additionally used. Also, the dash sign (â) indicates that no address is crosskeyed to the local variables number. 14-120 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 1. 14 Local variables for a subprogram can be defined by specifying when calling a macro. Subprogram (O9900) Main program To subprogram G65P9900A60.S100.F800 M02 #5=#4010 G91G01 X[#19âCOS[#1]] Y[#19âSIN[#1]]F#9 M99 Control of move and others after referring to local variables. A (#1)=60.000 Local variable setting by argument F (#9)=800 Local variable data table 2. S (#19)=100.000 Within a subprogram, local variables can be freely used. Subprogram (O1) Main program #30=FUP[#2/#5/2] #5=#2/#30/2 M98H100L#30 X#1 M99 N100G1X#1F#9 Y#5 Xâ#1 X#5 M99 To subprogram G65P1A100.B50.J10.F500 Example of face milling Local variable set by argument Local variables can be changed in the sub-program B J A Local variable data table A B F J (#1) (#2) (#9) (#5) (#30) 100.000 50.000 500 10.000 â 8.333 â 3. In the sample program for face-milling that is shown above, although the argument J has initially been programmed as a machining pitch of 10 mm, it has been changed into 8.333 mm to ensure equal-pitched machining. Also, local variable #30 contains the calculated data about the number of times of reciprocal machining. 14-121 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. Local variables can be used for each of the four levels of macro call separately. For the main program (macro level 0), separate local variables are also provided. The local variables of level 0, however, cannot be designated with arguments. O1 (Macro level 1) O10 (Macro level 2) P65P1A1.B2.C3. G65P10A10.B20.C30. G65P100A100.B200. M02 M99 M99 Main (Level 0) O100 (Macro level 3) #1=0.1#2=0.2#3=0.3 #1 #2 #3 Local variable (0) 0.100 0.200 0.300 #33 M99 Local variable (1) A(#1) 1.000 B(#2) 2.000 C(#3) 3.000 D(#7) Local variable (2) A(#1) 10.000 B(#2) 20.000 C(#3) 30.000 D(#7) Local variable (3) A(#1) 100.000 B(#2) 200.000 C(#3) Z(#26) Z(#26) Z(#26) #33 #33 #33 How the local variables are currently being used is displayed on the screen. For further details, refer to the Operating Manual. 14-122 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 3. 14 Macro interface input system variables (#1000 to #1035) You can check the status of an interface input signal by reading the value of the appropriate variables number (#1000 to #1035). The read value of the variables number is either 1 (contact closed) or 0 (contact open). You can also check the status of all input signals of the variables from #1000 to #1031 by reading the value of variables number 1032. Variables from #1000 to #1035 can only be read; they cannot be placed on the left side of an arithmetic expression. System variable Points Interface input signal System variable Points Interface input signal #1000 1 Register R72, bit 0 #1016 1 Register R73, bit 0 #1001 1 Register R72, bit 1 #1017 1 Register R73, bit 1 #1002 1 Register R72, bit 2 #1018 1 Register R73, bit 2 #1003 1 Register R72, bit 3 #1019 1 Register R73, bit 3 #1004 1 Register R72, bit 4 #1020 1 Register R73, bit 4 #1005 1 Register R72, bit 5 #1021 1 Register R73, bit 5 #1006 1 Register R72, bit 6 #1022 1 Register R73, bit 6 #1007 1 Register R72, bit 7 #1023 1 Register R73, bit 7 #1008 1 Register R72, bit 8 #1024 1 Register R73, bit 8 #1009 1 Register R72, bit 9 #1025 1 Register R73, bit 9 #1010 1 Register R72, bit 10 #1026 1 Register R73, bit 10 #1011 1 Register R72, bit 11 #1027 1 Register R73, bit 11 #1012 1 Register R72, bit 12 #1028 1 Register R73, bit 12 #1013 1 Register R72, bit 13 #1029 1 Register R73, bit 13 #1014 1 Register R72, bit 14 #1030 1 Register R73, bit 14 #1015 1 Register R72, bit 15 #1031 1 Register R73, bit 15 System variable Points Interface input signal #1032 32 Register R72 and R73 #1033 32 Register R74 and R75 #1034 32 Register R76 and R77 #1035 32 Register R78 and R79 Note: The following interface input signals are used exclusively in the NC system operation (cannot be used for other purposes). Interface input signal Description Register R72, bit 0 Touch sensor mounted in the spindle Register R72, bit 4 X- and Y-axis machine lock ON Register R72, bit 5 M-, S-, T-code lock ON Register R72, bit 6 Z-axis machine lock ON 14-123 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. Macro interface output system variables (#1100 to #1135) You can send an interface output signal by assigning a value to the appropriate variables number (#1100 to #1135). All output signals can take either 0 or 1. You can also send all output signals of the variables from #1100 to #1131 at the same time by assigning a value to variables number 1132. In addition to the data writing for offsetting the #1100 to #1135 output signals, the reading of the output signal status can be done. System variable Points Interface output signal System variable Points Interface output signal #1100 1 Register R172, bit 0 #1116 1 Register R173, bit 0 #1101 1 Register R172, bit 1 #1117 1 Register R173, bit 1 #1102 1 Register R172, bit 2 #1118 1 Register R173, bit 2 #1103 1 Register R172, bit 3 #1119 1 Register R173, bit 3 #1104 1 Register R172, bit 4 #1120 1 Register R173, bit 4 #1105 1 Register R172, bit 5 #1121 1 Register R173, bit 5 #1106 1 Register R172, bit 6 #1122 1 Register R173, bit 6 #1107 1 Register R172, bit 7 #1123 1 Register R173, bit 7 #1108 1 Register R172, bit 8 #1124 1 Register R173, bit 8 #1109 1 Register R172, bit 9 #1125 1 Register R173, bit 9 #1110 1 Register R172, bit 10 #1126 1 Register R173, bit 10 #1111 1 Register R172, bit 11 #1127 1 Register R173, bit 11 #1112 1 Register R172, bit 12 #1128 1 Register R173, bit 12 #1113 1 Register R172, bit 13 #1129 1 Register R173, bit 13 #1114 1 Register R172, bit 14 #1130 1 Register R173, bit 14 #1115 1 Register R172, bit 15 #1131 1 Register R173, bit 15 System variable Points Interface output signal #1132 32 Register R172 and R173 #1133 32 Register R174 and R175 #1134 32 Register R176 and R177 #1135 32 Register R178 and R179 Note 1: Data of the system variables from #1100 to #1135 is saved according to the logical level (1 or 0) of the signal that has been lastly sent. The saved data is cleared by power-on/off automatically. Note 2: The following applies if a data other than 1 or 0 is assigned to the variables from #1100 to #1131: is regarded as equal to 0. Data other than 0 and is regarded as equal to 1. Data less than 0.00000001, however, is regarded as undefined. 14-124 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Input signal (R72, R73) #1032 #1132 (R172, R173) #1000 #1100 #1001 #1101 #1002 #1102 #1003 Read and write Read only #1128 #1029 #1129 Macroinstruction #1130 #1131 #1031 32 bit #1003 #1028 #1030 Output signal (R174, R175) (R74, R75) #1133 #1033 (R176, R177) (R76, R77) #1134 #1034 (R178, R179) (R78, R79) #1135 #1035 14-125 32bit 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 5. Tool offset Standard Optional 128 sets 512 sets Range of variable Nos. Type A Type B Type C #10001 - #10000+n #2001 - #2000+n â â Length Geom. offset âãGeom. offset Z #11001 - #11000+n #2201 - #2200+n à â Length Wear comp. âãWear comp. Z #16001 - #16000+n *(#12001 - #12000+n) #2401 - #2400+n à â Dia. Geom. offset âãGeom. offset Nose-R #17001 - #17000+n *(#13001 - #13000+n) #2601 - #2600+n à â Dia. Wear comp. âãWear comp. Nose-R #12001 - #12000+n à à âãGeom. offset X #13001 - #13000+n à à âãWear comp. X #14001 - #14000+n à à âãGeom. offset Y #15001 - #15000+n à à âãWear comp. Y *: The numbers of variables used for tool offset depend upon a parameter: F96 bit 0 = 0: #16001 to #16000+n, and #17001 to #17000+n = 1: #12001 to #12000+n, and #13001 to #13000+n. Note: Set bit 0 of parameter F96 to â0â to use the TOOL OFFSET type C data. Using variables numbers, you can read tool data or assign data. Usable variables numbers are of the order of either #10000 or #2000. For the order of #2000, however, only up to 200 sets of tool offsets can be used. The last three digits of a variables number denote a tool offset number. As with other variables, tool offset data is to contain the decimal point. The decimal point must therefore be included if you want to set data that has decimal digits. Program example #101=1000 #10001=#101 #102=#10001 After execution Common variables Tool offset data #101=1000.0 H1=1000.000 #102=1000.0 14-126 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Example: 14 Tool offset data measuring G28Z0T01 Return to zero point M06 Tool change (Spindle T01) #1=#5003 Starting point memory G00Zâ500. Rapid feed to safe position G31Zâ100.F100 Skip measuring #10001=#5063â#1 Measuring distance calculation and tool offset data setting M #1 G00 H1 #5063 G31 Sensor Note: 6. The example shown above does not allow for any skip sensor signal delay. Also, #5003 denotes the position of the starting point of the Z-axis, and #5063 denotes the skip coordinate of the Z-axis, that is, the position at which a skip signal was input during execution of G31. Workpiece coordinate system offset Using variables numbers from 5201 to 5334, you can read workpiece coordinate system offset data or assign data. Note: The number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications. Axis No. Data name 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 14th axis SHIFT #5201 #5202 #5203 #5214 G54 #5221 #5222 #5223 #5234 G55 #5241 #5242 #5243 #5254 G56 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5274 G57 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5294 G58 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5314 G59 #5321 #5322 #5323 #5334 14-127 Remarks An external data input/output optional spec. is required. A workpiece coordinate system offset feature is required. Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS (Example 1) N1 M â90. N1 G28X0Y0Z0 N2 #5221=â20.#5222=â20. N3 G90G00G54X0Y0 N3 W1 â10. â20. N11 W1 Workpiece coordinate system of G54 specified by N10 N10 #5221=â90.#5222=â10. N11 G90G00G54X0Y0 Workpiece coordinate system of G54 specified by N2 M02 (Example 2) Fundamental machine coordinate system Coordinate shift Coordinate system before change N100 G55 W2 (G55) M G54 W1 (G54) #5221=#5221+#5201 #5222=#5222+#5202 #5241=#5241+#5201 #5242=#5242+#5202 Fundamental machine coordinate system #5201=0 #5202=0 Coordinate system after change G55 W2 (G55) M G54 W1 (G54) MEP166 The example 2 shown above applies only when coordinate shift data is to be added to the offset data of a workpiece coordinate system (G54 or G55) without changing the position of the workpiece coordinate system. [Additional workpiece coordinate system offset] Variables numbered 7001 to 7954 can be used to read or assign additional workpiece coordinate system offsetting dimensions. Note: The total number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications. Axis No. 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 14th axis G54.1P1 #7001 #7002 #7003 #7004 #7014 G54.1P2 #7021 #7022 #7023 #7024 #7034 G54.1P3 #7041 #7042 #7043 #7044 #7054 G54.1P48 #7941 #7942 #7943 #7944 #7954 Data name 14-128 Remarks Only available with the optional function for additional coordinate system offset. Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 7. 14 NC alarm (#3000) The NC unit can be forced into an alarm status using variables number 3000. #3000 = 70 (CALL#PROGRAMMER#TEL#530) Alarm No. Alarm message The setting range for the alarm No. is from 1 to 6999. The maximum available length of the alarm message is 31 characters. Note: The type of alarm message displayed on the screen depends on the designated alarm number, as indicated in the following table. Designated alarm No. Displayed alarm No. Displayed alarm message 1 to 20 [Designated alarm No.] + 979 Message preset for the displayed alarm No. *1 21 to 6999 [Designated alarm No.] + 3000 Designated alarm message as it is *2 *1 Refers to alarm Nos. 980 to 999 whose messages are preset as indicated in Alarm List. *2 Display of a message as it is set in the macro statement. Program ex. 1 (Command for display of â980 MACRO USER ALARM 1â on condition of #1=0) M IF[#1NE0]GOTO100 #3000=1 N100!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation stop by NC alarm 980 MACRO USER ALARM 1 M Program ex. 2 (Command for display of â3021#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1â on condition of #2=0) M IF[#2NE0]GOTO200 #3000=21(#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1) N200!!!!!!!!!! Operation stop by NC alarm 3021#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1 M 8. Integrated time (#3001, #3002) Using variables #3001 and #3002, you can read the integrated time existing during automatic operation or assign data. Type Variable No. Integrated time 1 3001 Integrated time 2 3002 Unit msec Data at power-on Same as at power-off Initialization Data is assigned in variables. Counting Always during power-on During auto-starting The integrated time is cleared to 0 after having reached about 2.44 à 1011 msec (about 7.7 years). 14-129 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS O9010 To subprogram #3001=0 WHILE[#3001LE#20]DO1 G65P9010T (Allowable time msec) END1 M99 Local variable T#20______ Into local variable #20 9. Execution of blocks from DO1 to END1 is repeated until the allowable time has elapsed, and then the control jumps to the end block of M99. Validation/invalidation of single-block stop or auxiliary-function finish signal wait (#3003) Assigning one of the values listed in the table below to variables number 3003 allows singleblock stop to be made invalid at subsequent blocks or the program to be advanced to the next block without ever having to wait for the arrival of an auxiliary-function code (M, S, T, or B) execution finish signal (FIN). #3003 Single block stop Auxiliary-function completion signal 0 Effective Wait 1 Ineffective Wait 2 Effective No wait 3 Ineffective No wait Note: Variable #3003 is cleared to 0 by resetting. 10. Validation/invalidation of feed hold, feed rate override, or G09 (#3004) Feed hold, feed rate override, or G09 can be made valid or invalid for subsequent blocks by assigning one of the values listed in the table below to variables number 3004. Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Feed hold Feed rate override G09 check 0 Effective Effective Effective 1 Ineffective Effective Effective 2 Effective Ineffective Effective 3 Ineffective Ineffective Effective 4 Effective Effective Ineffective 5 Ineffective Effective Ineffective 6 Effective Ineffective Ineffective 7 Ineffective Ineffective Ineffective #3004 Contents (Value) Note 1: Variable #3004 is cleared to 0 by resetting. Note 2: Each of the listed bits makes the function valid if 0, or invalid if 1. 14-130 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 11. Program stop (#3006) Use of variables number 3006 allows the program to be stopped after execution of the immediately preceding block. Format: #3006 = 1 (CHECK OPERAT) Character string to be displayed Additional setting of a character string (in 29 characters at maximum) in parentheses allows the required stop message to be displayed on the monitor. 12. Mirror image (#3007) The mirror image status of each axis at one particular time can be checked by reading variables number 3007. Variable #3007 has its each bit crosskeyed to an axis, and these bits indicate that: If 0, the mirror image is invalid. If 1, the mirror image is valid. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Axis no. 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 13. G-command modal status The G-command modal status in a pre-read block can be checked using variables numbers from 4001 to 4021. For variables numbers from #4201 to #4221, the modal status of the block being executed can be checked in a similar manner to that described above. Variable Nos. Block pre-read Function Block executed #4001 #4201 Interpolation mode G00-G03:0-3, G2.1:2.1, G3.1:3.1, G33:33 #4002 #4202 Plane selection G17:17, G18:18, G19:19 #4003 #4203 Programmed software limit G22:22, G23:23 #4004 #4204 Feed specification G98:98, G99:99 #4005 #4205 Inch/metric G20:20, G21:21 #4006 #4206 Tool radius compensation G40:40, G41:41, G42:42 #4007 #4207 Fixed cycle G80:80, G73/74:73/74, G76:76, G81-G89:81-89 #4008 #4208 Workpiece coordinate system G54-G59:54-59, G54.1:54.1 #4009 #4209 Acceleration/Deceleration G61-G64:61-64 #4010 #4210 Macro modal call G66:66, G66.1: 66.1, G67:67 14-131 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14. Other modal information Modal information about factors other than the G-command modal status in a pre-read block can be checked using variables numbers from 4101 to 4130. For variables numbers from #4301 to #4330, the modal information of the block being executed can be checked in a similar manner to that described above. Variable Nos. Variable Nos. Modal information Modal information Preread Execution Preread Execution #4101 #4301 #4112 #4312 #4102 #4302 #4113 #4313 Miscellaneous function!!!M #4103 #4303 #4314 #4114 Sequence No.!!!N #4104 #4304 #4115 #4315 Program No.!!!O #4105 #4305 #4116 #4316 #4106 #4306 #4117 #4317 #4107 #4307 Tool diameter offset No!!!D #4118 #4318 #4119 #4319 Spindle function!!!S Feed rate!!!F #4120 #4320 Tool function!!!T #4130 #4330 Addt. Workpiece coordinate system G54-G59:0, G54.1P1-P48:1-48 #4108 #4308 #4109 #4309 #4110 #4310 #4111 #4311 No. 2 miscellaneous function!!!B Tool length offset No!!!H 15. Position information Using variables numbers from #5001 to #5114, you can check the ending-point coordinates of the previous block, machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, skip coordinates, tool position offset coordinates, and servo deviations. End point coordinates of previous block Machine coordinate Workpiece coordinate Skip coordinate Tool position offset coordinates Servo deviation amount 1 #5001 #5021 #5041 #5061 #5081 #5101 2 #5002 #5022 #5042 #5062 #5082 #5102 3 #5003 #5023 #5043 #5063 #5083 #5103 14 #5014 #5034 #5054 #5074 #5094 #5114 Remarks (Reading during move) Possible Impossible Impossible Possible Impossible Possible Position information Axis. No. Note: 1. The number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications. The ending-point coordinates and skip coordinates read will be those related to the workpiece coordinate system. 14-132 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 2. 14 Ending-point coordinates, skip coordinates, and servo deviations can be checked even during movement. Machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, and tool position offset coordinates must be checked only after movement has stopped. Fundamental machine coordinate system Workpiece coordinate system M W G00 G01 End point coordinates Read command W Workpiece coordinate system Workpiece coordinates Machine coordinates M Machine coordinate system MEP167 3. Skip coordinates denote the position at which a skip signal has turned on at the block of G31. If the skip signal has not turned on, skip coordinates will denote the corresponding ending-point position. Read command Skip coordinate value Gauge, etc. MEP168 14-133 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. The ending-point position denotes the tool tip position which does not allow for any tool offsets, whereas machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, and skip coordinates denote the tool reference-point position which allows for tool offsets. Skip signal F (Speed) W Workpiece coordinate system Workpiece coordinates Skip signal input coordinates M Machine coordinate system Machine coordinates Mark #: Read after confirmation of stop. Mark $: Can be read during move. MEP169 The input coordinates of a skip signal denote the position within the workpiece coordinate system. The coordinates stored in variables from #5061 to #5066 are those existing when skip signals were input during movement of the machine. These coordinates can therefore be read at any time after that. See the section (Chapter 16) on skip functions for further details. 14-134 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Example 1: Workpiece position measurement: The following shows an example of measuring the distance from a reference measurement point to the workpiece end: Argument (Local variable) F X Y Z (#9) 200 (#24) 100.000 (#25) 100.000 (#26) â10.000 G65P9031X100.Y100.Z-10.F200 To subprogram (Common variable) O9031 N1 #180=#4003 N2 #30=#5001#31=#5002 N3 G91G01Z#26F#9 N4 G31X#24Y#25F#9 N5 G90G00X#30Y#31 N6 #101=#30â#5061#102=#31â#5062 N7 #103=SQR[#101?#101+#102?#102] N8 G91G01Zâ#26 N9 IF[#180EQ91]GOTO11 N10 G90 N11 M99 Skip signal input Start point Z N3 N8 Y X 14 N4 #103 N5 #101 #101 87.245 #102 87.245 #103 123.383 #102 #101 X-axis measuring amount N1 Modal data storage of G90/G91 #102 Y-axis measuring amount N2 X, Y starting point data storage #103 Measuring line linear amount N3 Z-axis entry #5001 X-axis measuring start point N4 X, Y measuring (Stop at skip input) #5002 Y-axis measuring start point N5 Return to X, Y starting point #5061 X-axis skip input point N6 X, Y measuring incremental data calculation #5062 Y-axis skip input point N7 Measuring line linear amount calculation N8 Z-axis escape N9, N10 Modal return of G90/G91 N11 Return from subprogram 14-135 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Example 2: Skip input coordinates reading: â150 âX N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 â75 Y X G91G28X0Y0 G90G00X0Y0 X0Yâ100. G31Xâ150.Yâ50.F80 #111=#5061 #112=#5062 G00Y0 G31X0 #121=#5061 #122=#5062 M02 #111 = â75. + ε #121 = â25. + ε â25 â50 â75 â100 âY Skip signal MEP171 #112 = â75. + ε #122 = â75. + ε where ε denotes an error due to response delay. (See Chapter 16 on skip functions for further details.) Variable #122 denotes the skip signal input coordinate of N4 since N7 does not have a Y-command code. 16. Tool No. (#51999) and data line No. (#3020) of the spindle tool Using variables numbers 51999 and 3020, you can check the tool number and TOOL DATA line number of the tool mounted in the spindle. System variable Note: Description #51999 Tool number of the spindle tool #3020 TOOL DATA line number of the spindle tool These system variables are read-only variables. 17. MAZATROL tool data MAZATROL tool data can be checked (or assigned) using the following variables numbers: Tool quantity (n): 960 (maximum) 1 ⤠n ⤠960 (n = Sequence number of the tool data line) (The maximum applicable tool quantity depends on the machine specifications.) Usable variables numbers MAZATROL tool data #60001 to #60000 + n Tool length (milling)/Length A (turning) #61001 to #61000 + n Tool diameter (milling)/Length B (turning) #62001 to #62000 + n Tool life flag #63001 to #63000 + n Tool damage flag #64001 to #64000 + n Wear compensation X #65001 to #65000 + n Wear compensation Y #66001 to #66000 + n Wear compensation Z #67001 to #67000 + n Group number Note 1: During tool path check, tool data can be checked but cannot be assigned. Note 2: Tool life flags (variables numbers of the order of #62000) and tool damage flags (likewise, the order of #63000) can take either 1 or 0 as their logical states (1 for ON, 0 for OFF). 14-136 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 18. EIA/ISO tool data Using variables numbers tabulated below, EIA/ISO tool data (tool life management data) can be read or updated, as required. Tool quantity (n): 960 (maximum) 1 ⤠n ⤠960 (n = Sequence number of the tool data line) System variables Corresponding data #40001 to #40000 + n Tool length offset numbers or tool length offset amounts #41001 to #41000 + n Tool diameter offset numbers or tool diameter offset amounts #42001 to #42000 + n Tool life flags #43001 to #43000 + n Tool damage flags #44001 to #44000 + n Tool data flags #45001 to #45000 + n Tool operation time (sec) #46001 to #46000 + n Tool life time (sec) Note 1: During tool path check, tool data can be checked but cannot be assigned. Note 2: Tool life flags (variables numbers of the order of #42000) and tool damage flags (likewise, the order of #43000) can take either 1 or 0 as their logical states (1 for ON, 0 for OFF). Note 3: The identification between number and amount of tool length or diameter offset is made by referring to the tool data flag. bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 Length offset No. Tool data flag 0 0 â â Length offset amount 0 1 â â Diam. offset No. â â 0 0 Diam. offset amount â â 0 1 19. Date and time (Year-month-day and hour-minute-second) Variables numbered 3011 and 3012 can be used to read date and time data. Variable Nos. Description #3011 Date (Year-month-day) #3012 Time (Hour-minute-second) Example: If the date is December 15, 1995 and the time is 16:45:10, data is set as follows in the corresponding system variables: #3011 = 951215 #3012 = 164510. 20. Total number of machined parts and the number of parts required Variables numbered 3901 and 3902 can be used to read or assign the total number of machined parts and the number of parts required. Variable Nos. Description #3901 Total number of machined parts #3902 Number of parts required Note 1: These variables must be integers from 0 to 9999. Note 2: Data reading and writing by these variables is surely suppressed during tool path checking. 14-137 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 21. Setting and using variables names Any variables name can be assigned to each of common variables #500 through #519. The variables name, however, must be of seven alphanumerics or less that begin with a letter of the alphabet. Format: SETVNn [NAME1, NAME2, ...] Starting number of the variable to be named Name of #n (Variables name) Name of #n + 1 (Varaibles name) Each variables name must be separated using the comma (,). Detailed description - Once a variables name has been set, it remains valid even after power-off. - Variables in a program can be called using the variables names. The variable to be called must, however, be enclosed in brackets ([ ]). Example: G01X[#POINT1] [#TIMES]=25 - Variables names can be checked on the USER PARAMETER No. 1 display. The names assigned to variables #500 to #519 are displayed at F47 to F66. Example: Program SETVN500[ABC,EFG] On the display F46 0 F47 ABC F48 EFG F49 F50 â â â Variables name assigned to #500 Variables name assigned to #501 Variables name assigned to #502 14-138 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 22. Tool data line number (#3022 and #3023) Variables numbered 3022 and 3023 can be used to read the tool data line number of a particular tool. Variable No. #3022 Description Designation of the required tool (for designation only). As is the case with a T-code, use the integral and decimal parts respectively for specifying the required tool with its number and suffix. #3022=âââï¼â³â³ âââ: Tool number â³â³: Suffix #3023 Data line number of the specified tool (for reading only). Use this variable to read out the data line number of the tool specified by the variable #3022. The reading in #3023 is zero (0) if there is no corresponding tool registered in the memory. Example: TNo. #3022 setting Reading in #3023 1 A 1.01 1 1 B 1.02 2 1 C 1.03 3 2 A 2.61 4 2 B 2.62 5 2 C 2.63 6 3 H 3.08 7 3 V 3.22 8 3 Z 3.26 9 : : : : : : : : Failure â 0 23. Positional information for the powered tailstock Variables numbered 56154 and 56156 can be used to assign the particular positions as required for moving a powered tailstock. Variable Nos. Description #56154 Tailstock position 1 #56156 Tailstock position 2 Note 1: The setting range is from â9999.999 to 0 for metric data input, or from â999.9999 to 0 for inch data input. Note 2: âPosition 1â and âPosition 2â are the respective positions, to which the tailstock can be moved by the miscellaneous functions M841 and M842. 14-139 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 24. Amount of workpiece transfer (#3024) Variable numbered 3024 can be used to set the amount of a workpiece transfer operation which is performed within an EIA/ISO program. The block of setting the variable #3024 does not cause any axis motion on the machine, but informs the NC unit of the workpiece being transferred so that a tool path avoiding collision with the shifted workpiece can be drawn timely for the succeeding process by a MAZATROL program on the side of the turning spindle No. 2. MAZATROL program HEAD 1 selection Machining on the turning spindle No. 1 SUB PRO unit HEAD 2 selection Machining on the turning spindle No. 2 EIA/ISO program M540 (Transfer mode ON) : G90G1W-1200.4 (Transfer) : #3024=1200.4 (Setting transfer amount) M99 END unit Note: For a restart operation, based on a MAZATROL program of the above structure, from a block of machining on the side of the turning spindle No. 2, enter a block of â#3024 = 1200.4â in the MDI mode before starting the operation. 14-140 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 14 14-14-5 Arithmetic operation commands Various operations can be carried out between variables using the following format. #i = where must consist of a constant(s), a variable(s), a function(s), or an operator(s). In the table given below, constants can be used instead of #j and/or #k. [1] Definition/replacement of variables #i=#j Definition/replacement [2] Additional-type operations #i=#j+#k #i=#jâ#k #i=#jOR#k #i=#jXOR#k Addition Subtraction Logical additon (For each of 32 bits) Exclusive OR (For each of 32 bits) [3] Multiplicative-type operations #i=#jâ#k #i=#j/#k #i=#jMOD#k #i=#jAND#k Multiplication Division Surplus Logical product (For each of 32 bits) [4] Functions #i=SIN[#k] #i=COS[#k] #i=TAN[#k] #i=ATAN[#j] #i=ACOS[#j] #i=SQRT[#k] #i=ABS[#k] #i=BIN[#k] #i=BCD[#k] #i=ROUND[#k] Sine Cosine Tangent (tanq is used as sinq/cosq.) Arc-tangent (Either ATAN or ATN can be used.) Arc-cosine Square root (Either SQRT or SQR is available.) Absolute value BINARY conversion from BCD BCD conversion from BINARY Rounding to the nearest whole number (Either ROUND or RND is available.) Cutting away any decimal digits Counting any decimal digits as 1s Natural logarithm Exponent with the base of e (= 2.718 ..) #i=FIX[#k] #i=FUP[#k] #i=LN[#k] #i=EXP[#k] Note 1: In principle, data without a decimal point is handled as data that has a decimal point. (Example: 1 = 1.000) Note 2: Offsets from variable #10001, workpiece coordinate system offsets from variable #5201, and other data become data that has a decimal point. If data without a decimal point is defined using these variables numbers, therefore, a decimal point will also be assigned to the data. Example: Common variable #101=1000 #10001=#101 #102=#10001 Execution #101 #102 1000 1.000 Note 3: The after a function must be enclosed in brackets ([ 14-141 ]). Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 1. Operation priority Higher priority is given to functions, multiplicative operations, and additive operations, in that order. #101=#111+#112âSIN[#113] [1] Function [2] Multiplicative [3] Additional 2. Specifying an operational priority level The part to which the first level of operation priority is to be given can be enclosed in brackets ([ ]). Up to five sets of brackets, including those of functions, can be used for one expression. #101=SQRT[[[#111â#112]âSIN[#113]+#114]â#15] One fold Two fold Three fold 3. Examples of operation instructions [1] Main program and argument specification G65 P100 A10 B20. #101=100.000 #102=200.000 #1 #2 #101 #102 [2] Definition, replacement = #1=1000 #2=1000. #3=#101 #4=#102 #5=#5081 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 1000.000 1000.000 100.000 Data of common variables 200.000 â10.000 Offset amount [3] Addition, subtraction +â #11=#1+1000 #12=#2â50. #13=#101+#1 #14=#5081â3. #15=#5081+#102 #11 #12 #13 #14 #15 2000.000 950.000 1100.000 â13.000 190.000 [4] Logical addition OR #3=100 #4=#3OR14 #3 14 #4 = 01100100 = 00001110 = 01101110 = 110 [5] Exclusive OR XOR #3=100 #4=#3XOR14 #3 14 #4 = 01100100 = 00001110 = 01101010 = 106 [6] Multiplication, Division â/ #21=100â100 #22=100.â100 #23=100â100. #24=100.â100. #25=100/100 #26=100./100 #27=100/100. #28=100./100. #29=#5081â#101 #30=#5081/#102 #21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28 #29 #30 [7] Surplus MOD #31=#19MOD#20 #19 48 = 5 surplus 3 = #20 9 [8] Logical product AND #9=100 #10=#9AND15 #9 15 #10 14-142 10.000 20.000 100.000 200.000 10000.000 10000.000 10000.000 10000.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 â1000.000 â0.050 = 01100100 = 00001111 = 00000100 = 4 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS [9] Sine SIN #501=SIN[60] #502=SIN[60.] #503=1000âSIN[60] #504=1000âSIN[60.] #505=1000.âSIN[60] #506=1000.âSIN[60.] Note: SIN[60] is equal to SIN[60.]. #501 #502 #503 #504 #505 #506 0.866 0.866 866.025 866.025 866.025 866.025 [10] Cosine COS #541=COS[45] #542=COS[45.] #543=1000âCOS[45] #544=1000âCOS[45.] #545=1000.âCOS[45] #546=1000.âCOS[45.] Note: COS[45] is equal to COS[45.]. #541 #542 #543 #544 #545 #546 0.707 0.707 707.107 707.107 707.107 707.107 [11] Tangent TAN #551=TAN[60] #552=TAN[60.] #553=1000âTAN[60] #554=1000âTAN[60.] #555=1000.âTAN[60] #556=1000.âTAN[60.] Note: TAN[60] is equal to TAN[60.]. #551 #552 #553 #554 #555 #556 1.732 1.732 1732.051 1732.051 1732.051 1732.051 [12]Arc-tangent ATAN #561=ATAN[173205/1000000] #562=ATAN[173.205/100.] #563=ATAN[1.732] #561 #562 #563 60.000 60.000 59.999 [13]Arc-cosine ACOS #521=ACOS[100000/141421] #522=ACOS[100./141.421] #523=ACOS[1000/1414.213] #524=ACOS[10./14.142] #525=ACOS[0.707] #521 #522 #523 #524 #525 45.000 45.000 45.000 44.999 45.009 [14]Square root SQRT #571=SQRT[1000] #572=SQRT[1000.] #573=SQRT[10.â10.+20.â20.] #574=SQRT[#14â#14+#15â#15] #571 #572 #573 #574 31.623 31.623 22.361 190.444 #576 #577 â1000.000 1000.000 Note: For enhanced accuracy, perform operations within [ ] as far as possible. [15]Absolute value ABS #576=â1000 #577=ABS[#576] #3=70. #4=â50. #580= ABS[#4â#3] #580 120.000 [16]BIN, BCD #1=100 #11=BIN[#1] #12=BCD[#1] #11 #12 64 256 [17]Rounding into the nearest whole number ROUND #21=ROUND[14/3] #22=ROUND[14./3] #23=ROUND[14/3.] #24=ROUND[14./3.] #25=ROUND[â14/3] #26=ROUND[â14./3] #27=ROUND[â14/3.] #28=ROUND[â14./3.] #21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28 5 5 5 5 â5 â5 â5 â5 [18]Cutting away any decimal digits FIX #21=FIX[14/3] #22=FIX[14./3] #23=FIX[14/3.] #24=FIX[14./3.] #25=FIX[â14/3] #26=FIX[â14./3] #27=FIX[â14/3.] #28=FIX[â14./3.] #21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 â4.000 â4.000 â4.000 â4.000 14-143 14 Return to Library 14 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS [19]Counting any decimal digits as 1s FUP #21=FUP[14/3] #22=FUP[14./3] #23=FUP[14/3.] #24=FUP[14./3.] #25=FUP[â14/3] #26=FUP[â14./3] #27=FUP[â14/3.] #28=FUP[â14./3.] #21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28 [20]Natural logarithm LN #101=LN[5] #102=LN[0.5] #103=LN[â5] #101 1.609 #102 â0.693 Alarm 860 CALCULATION IMPOSSIBLE [21]Exponent EXP #104=EXP[2] #105=EXP[1] #106=EXP[â2] #104 #105 #106 4. 5.000 5.000 5.000 5.000 â5.000 â5.000 â5.000 â5.000 7.389 2.718 0.135 Operation accuracy The errors listed in the table below are generated by one arithmetic operation, and the error rate increases each time an operation is performed. Operation format Mean error Max. error a=b+c a=bâc 2.33 à 10â10 5.32 à 10â10 a=bâ¢c 1.55 à 10â10 4.66 à 10â10 a = b/c 4.66 à 10â10 1.86 à 10â9 1.24 à 10â9 3.73 à 10â9 5.0 à 10â9 1.0 à 10â8 â6 â6 a= b a = sin b a = cos b â1 a = tan b/c Note: 5. 1.8 à 10 Kind of error Min. ε c , ε b Relative error Absolute error ε a ε degree 3.6 à 10 The function TAN (Tangent) is calculated as SIN/COS (Sine/Cosine). Notes on deterioration of accuracy A. Addition/subtraction As for additional-type operations, if an absolute value is subtracted from the other, the relative error cannot be reduced below 10â8. For example, when the true values (such values, by the way, cannot be substitued directly) of #10 and #20 are as follows: #10 = 2345678988888.888 #20 = 2345678901234.567 then #10 â #20 = 87654.321 would not result from calculation of #10 â #20. This is because, since the effective number of digits of the variable is eight (decimal), the approximate values of #10 and #20 are: #10 = 2345679000000.000 #20 = 2345678900000.000 More strictly, internal binary values slightly differ from these values. Actually therefore, a significant error results as follows: #10 â #20 = 100000.000. 14-144 Return to Library PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS B. 14 Logical relationship As for EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE, the processing is executed in a similar manner to addition and substraction, so be careful to errors. For example, to judge whether #10 is equal to #20 of the above example, the conditional expression IF [#10EQ#20] is not appropriate due to the errors. In such a case, therefore, give a macro-instruction as shown below to allow for an acceptable tolerance in the judgement on the equality of two values. IF [ABS[#10 â #20] LT200000] C. Trigonometric functions For trigonometric functions, although the absolute error is guaranteed, the relative error is not below 10â8. Be careful, therefore, when carrying out multiplication, or division after trigonometric function operations. 14-14-6 Control commands The flow of a program can be controlled using IF â¼ GOTO â¼ and WHILE DO â¼ commands. 1. Branching Format: IF [conditional expression] GOTO n where n is a sequence number in the same program. The branching will occur to the block headed by sequence number ânâ if the condition holds, or if the condition does not hold, the next block will be executed. An independent setting of GOTO statement without IF [conditional expression] will perform unconditional branching to the specified block. The [conditional expression] consists of the following six types: #i EQ #j = ( #i is equal to #j.) #I NE #j â (#i is not equal to #j.) #i GT #j > (#i is larger than #j.) #I LT #j X Workpiece origin after rotation Workpiece origin without rotation N6 â300 â200 â100 90° 0 R M X 100 200 300 Machine coordinate system - The block of G92.5 under N5 rotates the workpiece coordinate system through 90 degrees around the origin of the machine coordinate system. For N6 onward, the machine operates according to the rotated workpiece coordinate system. - The above example of the vector setting method for the same 90-deg rotation is based on the following calculation: θ = tanâ1 (J/I) = tanâ1 (1/0) = 90°. 15-24 Return to Library COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 2. 15 Rotation around the workpiece origin. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 % G28X0Y0Z0 G17 G55 G90 G92.5X100.Y100.R45. ........... G81X50.Y50.Zâ25.Râ5.F500 X100. X150. M30 G55 (Work Offset) X100. Y100. Rotation through 45 deg around the point of machine coordinates X=100 and Y=100 (that is, the origin of the G55 workpiece coordinate system). Y 300 Programmed contour after workpiece coordinate system rotation Workpiece coordinates systems Workpiece coordinate system after rotation Hole machining 200 Programmed contour without workpiece coordinate system rotation 45 100 R M W2â Workpiece coordinate system without rotation W2 X 100 200 300 - The block of G92.5 under N5 rotates the workpiece coordinate system around its own origin through 45 degrees. For N6 onward, the machine operates according to the rotated workpiece coordinate system. - Set the rotational center on the workpiece origin, as shown in this example, to rotate the current workpiece coordinate system around its own origin. 15-25 Return to Library 15 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 3. Programmed coordinate rotation (G68) in the mode of G92.5 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 % G28X0Y0 G55 (Work Offset) G17 X100. G55 Y100. G90 G92.5X0Y0R90. ................ [1] G68X50.Y50.R45. .............. [2] G0X0Y0 G1X100.F500 Y100. X0 Y0 M30 Y Programmed contour without both [1] and [2] Programmed contour without [2] 200 N9 G68 rot. ctr. N10 N8 G68 rot. ctr. N11 W2â N7 100 W2 Programmed contour with both [1] and [2] Programmed contour without [1] X â200 â100 R M 100 200 In a combined use with G92.5, the center of programmed coordinate rotation by G68 will be a position which corresponds with the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5 command. It will not affect operation even if the order of the program blocks marked [1] and [2] above is reversed. 15-26 Return to Library COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 4. 15 Figure rotation (M98) in the mode of G92.5 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 % G28X0Y0 G55 (Work Offset) G17 X100. Y100. G55 G90 G92.5X0Y0R90. ............. Rotation through 90 deg around the origin of the machine coordinate system G0X0Y0 M98H10Iâ50.J50.L4 M30 G1X100.Y50.F500 X0Y100. M99 Y 300 Programmed contour without workpiece coordinate system rotation 200 N11(1) Programmed contour after workpiece coordinate system rotation Fig. rot. ctr. N10(1) W2â 100 N11(4) N10(2) Fig. rot. ctr. N11(2) W2 N6 N10(4) X â300 â200 N10(3) â100 R M 100 200 N11(3) Serial number of repetition In a combined use with G92.5, the center of figure rotation by M98 will be a position which corresponds with the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5 command. 15-27 Return to Library 15 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 5. Scaling (G51) in the mode of G92.5 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 % G28X0Y0 G17 G55 G90 G92.5X0Y0R90. .................. G51X0Y0P2. ..................... G0X0Y0 G1X50.F500 Y50. X0 Y0 M30 G55 (Work Offset) X100. Y100. [1] [2] Y Programmed contour with both [1] and [2] Programmed contour without [2] 200 N9 N8 N10 N11 W2â 100 W2 Programmed contour without both [1] and [2] Programmed contour without [2] N7 X â200 â100 R M 100 200 In a combined use with G92.5, the scaling center will be a position which corresponds with the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5 command. 15-28 Return to Library COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 6. 15 Mirror image in the mode of G92.5 a) G-code mirror image N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 % G28X0Y0 G17 G55 G90 G92.5X0Y0R90. ............... G51.1Xâ50. ................... G0X0Y0 G1X100.F500 Y100. X0Y0 M30 Programmed contour without [1] Y G55 (Work Offset) X100. Y100. [1] [2] Mirror axis (Without G92.5) 200 Programmed contour without [2] 100 W2 W2â Programmed contour without both [1] and [2] Mirror axis (Without G92.5) N7 X â200 Programmed contour with both [1] and [2] â100 N10 R M N8 N9 â100 15-29 100 200 Return to Library 15 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS b) M-code mirror image N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 % G28X0Y0 G17 G55 G90 G92.5X0Y0R90. ................. M91. ............................. G0X0Y0 G1X100.F500 Y100. X0Y0 M30 Programmed contour without [2] G55 (Work Offset) X100. Y100. [1] [2] Programmed contour without both [1] and [2] Y 200 Programmed contour without [1] Mirror axis (With G92.5) W2â W2 100 N7 N10 Mirror axis (Without G92.5) N8 N9 X â200 â100 R M 100 200 Programmed contour with both [1] and [2] In a combined use with G92.5, the axis of symmetry for G-code or M-code mirror image will be set in accordance with the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5 command. 15-30 Return to Library COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 7. 15 Coordinate system setting (G92) in the mode of G92.5 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 % G28X0Y0 G55 (Work Offset) G17 X100. G55 Y100. G90 G92.5X0Y0R90. ............... [1] G92Xâ100.Y100. .............. [2] G0X0Y0 G1X100.F500 Y100. X0Y0 M30 Programmed contour with both [1] and [2] Y 200 N9 N10 N8 Programmed contour without [2] W2â 100 W2 Programmed contour without both [1] and [2] N7 200 â200 â100 X M R 100 â100 Programmed contour without [1] Coordinate system setting by a G92 block after G92.5 will be performed in reference to the coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5 command. 15-31 Return to Library 15 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 5. Precautions 1. If, during rotation of the workpiece coordinate system, a rotational angle of zero degrees is designated (by setting G92.5 R0, for example), the coordinate system rotation will be cancelled, irrespective of the data input mode of G90 (absolute) or G91 (incremental). The next move command will then be executed for the ending point in the original (not rotated) workpiece coordinate system. Example 1: N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 % For incremental data input G28X0Y0 G17G92.5X0Y0R20. G91G01Y50.F1000. X100. G92.5R0 .................... Command for 0-deg rotation Yâ50. ...................... Motion to (X100, Y0) Xâ100. M30 Example 2: N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 % For absolute data input G28X0Y0 G17G92.5X0Y0R20. G90G01Y50.F1000. X100. G92.5R0 .................... Command for 0-deg rotation Y0 .......................... Motion to (X100, Y0) X0 M30 Programmed contour for Examples 1 and 2 above Programmed contour with N2 (Workpiece coordinate system rotation) Y N4 50 N6 Programmed contour without N2 N3 N7 X 0 100 15-32 Return to Library COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 2. 15 Use a linear motion command (with G00 or G01) for the first movement to be executed after G92.5 command. Circular interpolation in such a case, as shown below, would have to take place from the current position A, which refers to the original workpiece coordinate system, to the ending point Bâ to which the point B should be shifted in accordance with the rotation. As a result, the radii of the starting and ending points would differ too significantly and the alarm No. 817 INCORRECT ARC DATA would be caused. Example: N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 % G28X0Y0 G91G01X50.F1000. G17G92.5X0Y0R20. G02X40.Y40.I40. M30 Circular interpolation as the first motion after G92.5 B' Alarm for incorrect circular command Programmed contour B without N2 40 Programmed contour without N3 20° 50 0 A Re 90 Rs Center of arc Rs : Arc radius for the starting point Re : Arc radius for the ending point 3. Set a G92.5 command in the mode of G40. 4. The machine will operate on the rotated coordinate system for an MDI interruption during the mode of G92.5. 5. For a manual interruption during the mode of G92.5 using the JOG or handle feed mode, the machine will operate independently of the coordinate system rotation. 15-33 Return to Library 15 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS 6. Differences between workpiece coordinate system rotation and programmed coordinate rotation. Function name System to be rotated Programming format Workpiece coordinate system rotation Programmed coordinate rotation Workpiece coordinate system Local coordinate system (G17) G92.5 Xx Yy Rr (G17) G68 Xx Yy Rr (G18) G92.5 Yy Zz Rr (Angle) (G18) G68 Yy Zz Rr (G19) G68 Zz Xx Rr (G19) G92.5 Zz Xx Rr or (G17) G92.5 Xx Yy Ii Jj (G18) G92.5 Yy Zz Jj Kk (Vector comp.) (G19) G92.5 Zz Xx Kk Ii Operation Workpiece coordinate system r x Local coordinate system r Workpiece coordinate system y r Rotational center coordinates Angle of rotation Information on center and angle of rotation cleared? Note: j i Rotational t Designation at addresses X, Y, Z Designation at R (angle) or at I, J, K (vector components) Machine coordinate system Designation at addresses X, Y, Z Designation at R (angle) Power-off â on Retained Cleared M02/M30 Retained Cleared Reset key Retained Cleared Resumption of readiness after emergency stop Retained Cleared Resetting or M02/M30 cancels the G92.5 mode itself, while the information on the rotational center, etc., at related addresses is retained as indicated above. 15-34 E Return to Library MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 16 16 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Measurement by EIA/ISO is basically the same as that by MAZATROL. Information given by MAZATROL may be executed by preparation function below. G31: Skip function 16-1 Skip Function: G31 16-1-1 Function description 1. Overview During linear interpolation by G31, when an external skip signal is inputted, the feed will stop, all remaining commands will be cancelled and then the program will skip to the next block. 2. Programming format G31 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Yy/Vv Ff ; x, z, y, u, w, v f: 3. : The coordinates of respective axes. These coordinates are designated using absolute or incremental data. Feed rate (mm/min) Detailed description 1. An asynchronous feed rate commanded previously will be used as feed rate. If an asynchronous feed command is not made previously and if Ff is not commanded, the alarm SKIP SPEED ZERO will be caused. F-modal command data will not be updated by the Fcommand given in the G31 block. 2. Automatic acceleration/deceleration is not applied to command block G31. 3. If feed rate is specified per minute, override, dry run and automatic acceleration/deceleration will not be allowed. They will be effective when feed rate is specified per revolution. 4. Command G31 is unmodal, and thus set it each time. 5. The execution of command G31 will immediately terminate if a skip signal is inputted at the beginning. Also, if a skip signal is not inputted until the end of command block G31, execution of this command will terminate on completion of execution of move commands. 6. Setting this command code during tool nose radius compensation results in a program error. 7. Under a machine lock status the skip signals will be valid. 16-1 Return to Library 16 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 4. Execution of G31 Example 1: When the next block is an incremental value command G31 Z1000 F100; G01 U2000 W1000; X Z External signal inputted Movement when external signal is not inputted TEP199 Example 2: When the next block is a one axis move command with absolute value G31 Z1000 F100; G01 X1000; X Z External signal inputted Movement when external signal is not inputted TEP200 Example 3: When the next block is a two axes move command with absolute value G31 Z1000 F100; G01 X1000 Z2000; X Z External signal inputted Movement when external signal is not inputted TEP199 16-2 Return to Library MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 16 16-1-2 Amount of coasting The amount of coasting of the machine from the time a skip signal is inputted during G31 command to the time the machine stops differs according to the G31-defined feed rate or the F command data contained in G31. Accurate machine stop with a minimum amount of coasting is possible because of a short time from the beginning of response to a skip signal to the stop with deceleration. The amount of coasting is calculated as follows: F F F F à Tp + (t1 ± t2) = à (Tp + t1) ± à t2 60 60 60 60 δ0 = δ1 δ0 : F : Tp : t1 : δ2 Amount of coasting (mim) G31 skip rate (mm/min) Position loop time constant (sec) = (Position loop gain)â1 Response delay time (sec) = (The time from skip signal detection until arrival at NC through PC) Response error time = 0.001 (sec) t2 : When using command G31 for measurement purposes, measured data δ1 can be corrected. Such corrections, however, cannot be performed for δ2. Skip signal inputted F The area of the shaded section denotes the amount of coasting δ0. Time (s) t1 ± t2 Tp Stop pattern during skip signal inputted TEP202 The diagram shown below represents the relationship between the feed rate and the amount of coasting that will be established if Tp is set equal to 30 msec and, t1 to 5 msec. Amount of coasting (δ) (mm) Max. value Tp = 0.03 t1 = 0.005 0.050 Mean. value Min. value 0.040 0.030 0.020 0.010 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Feed rate F (mm/min) Relationship between the amount of coasting and the feed rate (Example) 16-3 TEP203 Return to Library 16 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS 16-1-3 Skip coordinate reading error 1. Reading the skip signal input coordinates Skip signal input coordinate data does not include the amounts of coasting defined by position loop time constant Tp and cutting feed time constant Ts. Thus skip signal input coordinates can be checked by reading within the error range shown in the diagram below the workpiece coordinates existing when skip signals were intputted. The amount of coasting that is defined by response delay time t1, however, must be corrected to prevent a measurement error from occurring. ε=± F à t2 60 ε : Reading error (mm) F : Feed rate (mm/min) t2 : Response delay time 0.001(sec) +1 Reading error ε (µ) 0 60 Feed rate ï¼mm/minï¼ â1 The shaded section corresponds to measured data. Skip signal input coordinate reading error The reading error at a feed rate of 60 mm/min 60 à 0.001 ε=± 60 = ± 0.001 (mm) and measured data stays within the reading error range of ± 1µ. TEP204 2. Reading coordinates other than those of skip signal inputs Coordinate data that has been read includes an amount of coasting. If, therefore, you are to check the coordinate data existing when skip signals were inputted, perform corrections as directed above. If, however, the particular amount of coasting defined by response delay time t2 cannot be calculated, then a measurement error will occur. 16-4 E Return to Library PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 17 17 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 17-1 Stored Stroke Limit ON/OFF: G22/G23 1. Function and purpose While stored stroke limit check generates an outside machining prohibit area, before-movement stroke limit check generates an inside machining prohibit area (shaded section in the diagram below). An alarm will result if you set a move command code that brings an axis into contact with (or moves it through) the shaded section. Stored stroke limit Î, upper limit Stored stroke limit ÎÎ, upper limit (x, y, z) Before-movement stroke check, upper limit (i, j, k) â¼ Before-movement stroke check, lower limit Stored stroke limit ÎÎ, lower limit Stored stroke limit Î, lower limit MEP220 2. Programming format G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ (Inside machining prohibitarea specification) Lower limit specification Upper limit specification G23 3. (Cancel) Detailed description 1. Both upper-limit and lower-limit values must be data present on the machine coordinate system. 2. Use X, Y, Z to set the upper limit of the prohibit area, and I, J, K to set the lower limit. If the value of X, Y, Z is smaller than that of I, J, K, then the former will become the lower-limit value and, the latter, the upper-limit value. 17-1 Return to Library 17 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 3. No stroke limit checks will be performed if the upper- and lower-limit values that have been assigned to the axis are identical. G22X200.Y250.Z100.I200.J-200.K0 The X-axis does not undergo the stroke check. 4. The before-movement stroke limit check function will be cancelled if you set G22. 5. If, for example, G23 X_Y_Z_ is set, it will be regarded as G23 X_Y_. After cancellation of before-movement stroke limit check, therefore, X_Y_ will be executed according to the modal move command code last set. Note: Before setting G22, move the machine to a position outside the prohibit area. 17-2 E Return to Library TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION 18 18 TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION 18-1 Two-Process Control by One Program: G109 1. Outline When machining of different processes are performed by respective systems on a machine with two systems of headstock (HD1 and HD2), or turret (TR1 and TR 2), the two systems can be controlled by a single program. The program section from âG109L!;â to â%â or to âG109L*;â is used for controlling the !-system. 2. Programming format G109 L_; L = 1 : HD1 (or TR1) 2 : HD2 (or TR2) The system number is to be specified by a value following the address L. 3. Notes 1. Even if a value following L includes a decimal point or negative sign (â), it is ignored. 2. In the mode of single-block operation, the stop can be performed after execution of G109 block. However, when the number specified by L belongs to the other system such as L2 in HD1 operation, the single-block stop does not occur. 3. G109 can be specified in the same block as G-codes other than of group 0. When specified in the same block as another G-code of group 0, the G-code specified later is effective. 4. The section from the head of a program to the place where G109 is commanded is common to HD1 and HD2, or TR1 and TR2. Example: G28 U W; Common to HD1 and HD2 (or TR1 and TR2) G109 L1; M HD1 (or TR1) G109 L2; M M30; HD2 (or TR2) % Common to HD1 and HD2 (or TR1 and TR2) 5. One block including more than 128 characters causes an alarm (707 ILLEGAL FORMAT). 6. In the remainder of this chapter, âHD1â and âHD2â generally refer to âTR1â and âTR2â, respectively, at once. 7. The peripheral speed (cutting speed) of the respective turning spindles is to be specified, with reference to the G109 condition, as follows: G96S__.........to specify the peripheral speed for the 1st spindle under âG109L1â G96G112S__ ....to specify the peripheral speed for the 2nd spindle under âG109L1â G96G112S__ ....to specify the peripheral speed for the 1st spindle under âG109L2â G96S__.........to specify the peripheral speed for the 2nd spindle under âG109L2â 18-1 Return to Library 18 TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION 18-2 Specifying/Cancelling Cross Machining Control Axis: G110/G111 1. Outline Axis control of HD2 side by HD1 side or that of HD1 side by HD2 side is referred to as cross machining control. Cross machining control axis is specified by G110 and G111. Specify after G110 an axis address and the HD number controlling the axis. 2. Programming format G110 X_ Z_ C_; ............... Cross machining control axis and HD number are specified. 1: Axis controlled by HD1 2: Axis controlled by HD2 G111;....................... Cross machining control axis specified by G110 is returned to normal control (not cross machining). Example: Operation at HD1 side G110 X2; Changed to X-axis of HD2 G00 X10. Z10.; X of HD2 moves to 10, Z of HD1 moves to 10. G110 Z2; Changed to Z-axis of HD2 G00 X20. Z20.; X of HD2 moves to 20, Z of HD2 moves to 20. G110 X1 Z1; Changed to X-axis and Z-axis of HD1 G00 X30. Z30.; X of HD1 moves to 30, Z of HD1 moves to 30. G110 Z3; Changed to B-axis of HD2 G00 Z40.; B of HD2 moves to 40. Use the incremental data input method for the W-axis on the 2. headstock side (INTEGREX-IV) as follows: Example: G110 Z[B]2; G00 Zâ100.; G00 Wâ10.; M G111; Selection of the 2nd headstockâs W-axis The command with address Z is given for the W-axis movement to an absolute position of â100 on the 2nd headstock side. The command with address W is given for an incremental W-axis movement by â10 on the 2nd headstock side. Cancellation of G110 Specify the Z-axis for the lower turret as follows: Example: G110 Z2; G00 Z100.; M G111; Selection of the lower turretâs Z-axis All the Z-axial commands between G110 and G111 are processed as those for the lower turret. Cancellation of G110 Specify the C-axis on the 2nd headstock side as follows: Example: G110 C2; G00 C45.123.; M G111; Selection of the 2nd headstockâs C-axis All the C-axial commands between G110 and G111 are processed as those for the 2nd headstock side. Cancellation of G110 18-2 Return to Library TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION 18 Prepare a program as follows to use the C-axis settings on the WORK OFFSET display for the 2nd spindle: Example: G52.5; M200; G28UWH; T001T000M6; G54; G00 C150.; M202; M902; M300; G110 C2; G00 C150.; G55; G00 C150.; G56; G00 C150.; G111; M302; MAZATROL coordinate system cancellation Milling mode selection for 1st spindle Origin data of the G54 system: C = 30° HD1 C-axis motion to 150° (POSITION) or 180° (MACHINE) Milling mode cancellation for 1st spindle 2nd spindle selection Milling mode selection for 2nd spindle Selection of 2nd spindle C-axis HD2 C-axis motion to 150° (POSITION) or 180° (MACHINE) Origin data of the G55 system: C = 50° HD2 C-axis motion to 150° (POSITION) or 200° (MACHINE) Origin data of the G56 system: C = 100° HD2 C-axis motion to 150° (POSITION) or 250° (MACHINE) Cancellation of G110 Milling mode cancellation for 2nd spindle Prepare a program as follows to use a fixed cycle for hole machining on the 2nd spindle side: Example: M902; M300; G110 C2; G00 C0.; G87Zâ5.0X5.0P0.2M310; C45.; C90.; M312; G80; G111; M30; 3. 2nd spindle selection Milling mode selection for 2nd spindle Selection of 2nd spindle C-axis HD2 C-axis positioning Clamping; Deep-hole drilling cycle Unclamping, positioning, clamping; Deep-hole drilling cycle Unclamping, positioning, clamping; Deep-hole drilling cycle Unclamping on the 2nd spindle side Fixed cycle cancellation Cancellation of G110 Program end Sample programs Examples of programming for the machine specifications with the secondary spindle The major sections of a sample program for machines equipped with the secondary spindle are shown below. O1234 G53.5 #101=124.750 (SP1 COF) #102=10.664 (SP2 COFï¼ MAZATROL coordinate system establishment 1st spindle side C-axis offset 2nd spindle side C-axis offset 18-3 Return to Library 18 TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION ï¼MAIN SPINDLE SIDE) M901 G50S3000 M202 G110Z2 G00Z0. G111 G00G28U0V0W0 T001T000M6 N101(EDG-R) G96S200 G00X110.0Z0.1 G99G01X22.0F0.3 G00Z0.8 N102(OUT-R) 1st spindle side machining program 1st spindle select mode (enter for machining at the 1st spindle side) Spindle clamping speed setting 1st spindle turning mode 2nd spindle side Z-axis selection 2nd spindle side Z-axis positioning 2nd spindle side Z-axis selection revoking 1st spindle return to zero point (X, Y, Z) Tool selection Edge machining with 1st spindle Peripheral speed setting Positioning Cutting feed Positioning O.D. machining with 1st spindle (Machining program omitted for convenienceâs sake.) (TRS CHK) G28U0V0W0 M902 M302 M200 (MAIN C-ON) G00C#101 M300(SUB C-ON) G110C2 G00C#102 G111 M306 M540 G110Z2 G00Z-686. M508 G31W-1.1F50 M202 M509 G111 M541 M307 M206 M302 G110Z2 G00Z-80. G111 Transfer program 1st spindle return to zero point (X, Y, Z) 2nd spindle selection 2nd spindle turning mode 1st spindle mill-point machining mode 1st spindle C-axis positioning (angle indexing) 2nd spindle mill-point machining mode 2nd spindle C-axis selection 2nd spindle C-axis positioning (angle indexing) 2nd spindle C-axis selection revoking (G110 cancellation) 2nd spindle chuck open TRS-CHK mode 2nd spindle side Z-axis selection 2nd spindle side Z-axis positioning Start of pressing action on the 2nd spindle side 2nd spindle side Z-axis positioning for pressing 1st spindle turning mode 2nd spindle M508 cancellation 2nd spindle side Z-axis selection revoking TRS-CHK mode cancellation 2nd spindle chuck close 1st spindle chuck open 2nd spindle turning mode 2nd spindle side Z-axis selection 2nd spindle side Z-axis positioning 2nd spindle side Z-axis selection revoking (SUB SPINDLE SIDE) N301(SP2 DRL) M902 T003T000M6 G98G97 M300 M203S3184 G110C2 G0C#102 M310 G00X25.Z-5. G87Z-5.X5.Q5000P0.2F200 M312 G80 G00C[#102+180.] M310 G87Z-5.X5.Q5000P0.2F200 M312 G80 G111 G28U0V0W0 M30 2nd spindle machining program 2nd spindle selection (enter for machining at the 2nd spindle side) Tool selection Feed per minute and cancellation of constant peripheral speed control 2nd spindle mill-point machining mode Milling speed selection and milling spindle normal rotation 2nd spindle C-axis selection 2nd spindle C-axis positioning (angle indexing) 2nd spindle C-axis clamping Positioning Longitudinal deep-hole drilling cycle 2nd spindle C-axis unclamping Cancellation of fixed hole-drilling cycle 2nd spindle C-axis positioning (angle indexing) 2nd spindle C-axis clamping Longitudinal deep-hole drilling cycle 2nd spindle C-axis unclamping Cancellation of fixed hole-drilling cycle 2nd spindle C-axis selection revoking Return to zero point (X, Y, Z) End of program 18-4 Return to Library TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION 4. 18 Notes 1. After the axis is changed by G110 or G111, always specify the coordinate system by G50. 2. G110 and G111 must always be given in a single-command block. 3. When axis address is commanded by G110 in increment, (for example, U and W are used) it causes an alarm. And when a value following the axis address includes a decimal point or negative sign, it is ignored. 4. In the single-block operation mode, the stop is performed after execution of G110 and G111 blocks. 5. The tool information to be used in tool offsetting does not automatically change for the other system on the occasion of designating for cross machining control an axis which is in direct relation to tool movement. Use, therefore, a G53 command (for positioning in the machine coordinate system) as required. 6. As long as an axis in direct relation to tool movement is controlled for cross machining, do not change tools (by M6). 7. When the axis is changed by G110, the counterpart system must be in a state of automatic starting and standby. State of standby M-codes from M950 to M997 are used for waiting. When both HD1 and HD2 are operated and when machining is performed with HD1 and HD2 synchronized, M950 to M997 is used. A state of standby refers to the time before the same waiting M-code is outputted from the counterpart. For example, when M950 is outputted from HD1, HD1 is in a state of standby until M950 is outputted from HD2. (HD1 does not execute blocks subsequent to M950.) When M950 is outputted from HD2, HD1 executes the block following M950. Program example HD2 HD1 M950; M950; G110 X2; M951; X.. Indicates the waiting time for which HD2 is in a state of standby when X...Z.. â X-axis of HD2 is controlled by HD1. M M951; 8. Give a command of G111 as required at the end of machining section in an EIA/ISO program which is to be called from a MAZATROL program as a subprogram for point machining. 9. The axis being under cross machining control in automatic mode of operation cannot be controlled in manual mode. An attempt to do so will only result in the alarm ILLEGAL COMMAND CROSS MACHINING. 10. Barrier is effective also during axis change. In other words, barrier is checked in the region of HD1 side for the axis of HD1 side and in that of HD2 for the axis of HD2 independently of the axis change by G110. 11. Synchronous feed with, or control of feed per, revolution of the milling spindle is not available during cross machining control. 12. The alarm CROSS MACHINING IMPOSSIBLE will be caused when a command for cross machining control is given under one of the following incompatible modal conditions: - Nose R/Tool radius compensation - Polar coordinate interpolation - Cylindrical interpolation 18-5 Return to Library 18 TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION - Fixed cycle 3-D coordinate conversion Mirror image Tool tip point control 13. C-axis commands in the cross machining mode can only be given for the preparatory functions (G-codes) enumerated below. Usable G-codes for C-axis commands in the cross machining mode G-code series T Group Function G00 01 Rapid positioning G01 01 Linear interpolation G02 01 Circular interpolation CW G03 01 Circular interpolation CCW G10 00 Data setting/change G27 00 Reference point return check G28 00 Reference point return G29 00 Return from reference point G30 00 Return to 2nd/3rd/4th reference point G30.1 00 Return to floating reference point 00 Measurement target data setting G50 00 Coordinate system setting/Spindle limit speed setting G53 00 MAZATROL coordinate system selection G65 00 Macro call G66 14 Macro modal call G83 09 Face drilling cycle G84 09 Face tapping cycle G84.2 09 Face synchronous tapping cycle G85 09 Face boring cycle G87 09 Outside drilling cycle G88 09 Outside tapping cycle G88.2 09 Outside synchronous tapping cycle G89 09 Outside boring cycle G110 00 Cross machining control axis selection G111 00 Cross machining control axis cancellation G112 00 M-, S-, T-, and B-code output to counterpart G36 (G36.5) 14. Even in the mode of âG110B2â, commands with address Z can only cause a linear motion of the W-axis when they are given under G0 or G1. Z-values given in the G2 or G3 mode will always be processed for an circular interpolation with the control of HD1âs Z-axis. 15. When the axis (normally the X-axis) relevant to the constant peripheral speed control is designated for cross machining control, the speed of the turning spindle may change steeply in accordance with the change in positional information to be used in the calculation of spindle speed for a particular peripheral speed. 16. The inclined Y-axis cannot be controlled for cross machining. 18-6 Return to Library TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION 18 18-3 M, S, T, B Output Function to Counterpart: G112 1. Outline The function outputs M-, S-, T- and B-codes (second miscellaneous function) commanded after G112 to the counterpart system. 2. Programming format G112 L_ M_ M_ M_ M_ S_ T_ T_ B_; 3. Example 1: With an argument L specified. G109L2; : G112 L1M203S1000;....Normal rotation of the upper turretâs milling spindle. Example 2: With an argument L omitted. G109L1; : G112 M203S1000; ......Normal rotation of the lower turretâs milling spindle. Notes 1. Do not give any other G-code in one block with a G112 command; otherwise the alarm ILLEGAL FORMAT wil be caused. 2. Do not enter any codes concerned (M, S, T or second miscellaneous function) before G112L_ within a block; otherwise the alarm ILLEGAL FORMAT wil be caused. 3. Entering values with any other address than N, M, S, T, and that for second miscellaneous function in one block with a G112 command will lead to the alarm ILLEGAL ADDRESS. 4. The alarm ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be caused if any of the following commands is given in one block with a G112 command: M0, M1, M2, M30, M99, M-codes for waiting, and M-, S-, T- or second miscellaneous function code for macroprogram call. 5. Entering a number for the self-system or non-existent system with address L as well as in parameter BA71 will lead to the alarm ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT. 6. An attempt to specify an offset number in the T-code format for turning machines will lead to the alarm ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT. 7. The T-code in a G112 block will only cause the corresponding code for tool designation to be outputted (without information of tool offsetting). 8. The number of the codes concerned to be entered in a G112 block is limited as follows: 4 for M, 1 for S, 2 for T, and 1 for the second miscellaneous function. Entering codes in excess will only result in the last ones within the limit being outputted. 9. The single-block stop can occur after the execution of a G112 block. 10. Use waiting M-codes so as to output the codes concerned (M, S, T or second miscellaneous function) to one and the same system at one time from multiple systems. 18-7 Return to Library 18 TWO-SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTION - NOTE - 18-8 E Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS 19 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the functions proper to the machines equipped with two turrets (upper and lower) which can be operated independently from each other. 19-1 Programming for Compound Machining 1. Outline The movement of the upper and lower turrets is to be controlled in a single program as follows: G109 L1;.................. Selection of the upper turret Commands for the upper turret M30; G109 L2;.................. Selection of the lower turret Commands for the lower turret M30; 2. Remarks 1. If an argument L includes a decimal point or negative sign (â), a programming error will result. 2. In the mode of single-block operation, the stop can be performed after execution of G109 block. However, when the number specified by L belongs to another system, the singleblock stop does not occur. 3. G109 must be given in an independent block. If any other command is given in the same block, a programming error will result. 4. Note that the program section under no specification by the G109 command is used for all the systems without distinction. 5. The restart position for the [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function must be set within a program section which is prepared commonly for all the systems. 6. The control for a constant peripheral speed (by G96) is always conducted with reference to that tool tipâs position of either turret which is nearer to the axis of turning. 7. The call command for a MAZATROL program must be given in program sections of both turrets for one and the same program. If it is given for either turret only, the flow of the called MAZATROL program will enter in a waiting state which cannot be cleared and, as a result, stop the machine operation. 19-1 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS 19-2 Waiting Command: M950 to M997, P1 to P99999999 1. Outline Waiting commands are used to time the operation of the upper and lower turrets as required. Two types of waiting command are provided: M-code and P-code, which can be used freely and even mixedly. 2. Detailed description A. M-codes for waiting The execution of the commands for turret A will be stopped at the position of a waiting M-code with some number until the program flow for turret B reaches a waiting M-code with the same number. Programming format Mâââ; (âââ denotes a number from 950 to 997.) Program structure Commands for the lower turret G109L2; Commands for the upper turret G109L1; A M950; M951; M950; B M951; M997; M997; C M30; M30; Operation M950; M951; â Upper turret A â â B C Lower turret â M950; Note: M997; â M951; â M997; A waiting M-code must be given in a single-command block. It may not function as waiting command if it is entered in the same block together with other instructions. 19-2 Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS B. 19 P-codes for waiting The execution of the commands for turret A will be stopped at the position of a waiting P-code with some number until the program flow for turret B reaches a waiting P-code with the same or a larger number. Programming format Pââââââââ; (ââââââââ denotes a number from 1 to 99999999.) Program structure Commands for the upper turret G109L1; Commands for the lower turret G109L2; A P10; P100; P10; B P200; P3000; P3000; C M30; M30; Operation P200; P10; â Upper turret A P3000 ; â â B C Lower turret â â P10; P100; â P3000; Note 1: A waiting P-code must be given in a single-command block. It may not function as waiting command if it is entered in the same block together with other instructions. Note 2: Use the waiting P-codes in the ascending order of their number, since one turret cannot be released from the wait state until the program flow for the other turret reaches a waiting P-code with the same or a larger number. 19-3 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS 19-3 Balanced Cutting 1. Outline Balanced cutting is achieved through the symmetrical movement of the upper and lower turrets. It helps the reduction in the vibration of a long workpiece and permits the cutting speed to be doubled for the saving of the machining time. During the balanced cutting one turret acts as the main turret (master turret) and the other as the subordinate turret (servant turret). Enter the movement commands for the balanced cutting in a program section for the main turret. 2. Programming method The balanced cutting can be achieved by combining the following three commands: - Waiting command (M950 to M997 or P1 to P99999999) - M562;.....Coupling command for the two turrets - M563;.....Coupling cancellation command The main points of programming the balanced cutting are the following: 3. 1) Enter the waiting command just before the balanced cutting in order to synchronize the movement of both turrets. 2) Enter the command M562 for the main turret in order to couple both turrets. The subordinate turret must have been set in wait state. 3) Enter the movement commands for the main turret. The subordinate turret will be moved symmetrically during the balanced cutting. 4) Enter the command M563 after the movement commands for the master turret to cancel the coupling. 5) Enter the waiting command for the main turret to release the subordinate turret from the wait state. Program structure Given below is an example of program structure with the upper turret as the master. Commands for the upper turret Commands for the lower turret G109L2; G109L1; Waiting for the start of balanced cutting P1000; M562; P1000; P2000; Start of coupling Commands for balanced cutting M563; P2000; Cancellation of coupling Waiting for the end of balanced cutting M30; M30; 19-4 Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS 4. Sample program N000 G109 L1; M901; N001 G00 X800.Z70.; P10; M03 S250; T001T000M06D001; N002 X132.Z60.M08; M950; M562; N003 G01 X78.F0.35; N004 G00 X156.Z63.; N005 Z29.; N006 G01 X150.; N007 X148.Z30.; N008 X128.; N009 G00 X800.Z70.; N010 X112.Z63.T0202; N011 G01 X120.Z59.F0.4; N012 Z30.; N013 X130.; N014 G00 X800.Z70.; M563; P20; N015 M09 M05; N100 G109 L2; M901; N101 G00 X800.Z200.; P10; M03 S250; T001001; N102 X92.Z65.M08; M950; P20; G109 L1: Upper turret selection P10: Single command for waiting M950 for waiting for the start of cutting Movement commands for balanced cutting G109 L2: Lower turret selection P20: Single command for waiting. Required for both turrets 19-5 19 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS 19-4 Milling with the Lower Turret 1. Programming format The basic format of programming for milling with the lower turret is an application of the preparatory function G109 (Two processes in one program; see Section 19-1). G109 L_; L = 1: HD1 (TR1) 2: HD2 (TR2) Example: G28 U W; .... G109 L1; : .... : G109 L2; .... M200; M203; : : M210; M30 % ....... Common to both spindles (both turrets) Commands for Upper turret Selection of 2nd spindle (Lower turret) Commands for Lower turret Fixed cycle for hole machining Common to both spindles (both turrets) As shown in the table below, not only for turning can the lower turret be used, but also for milling. Table 19-1 Machining patterns 1st spindle Turning 2nd spindle Milling Turning Milling Lower turret 2. G-codes for milling The G-codes of fixed cycle for hole machining are available for milling with the lower turret. (See Section 14-3 for more information on the above G-codes.) 19-6 Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS 3. Sample program N000 N001 N100 N101 N102 N103 N104 N105 N106 N107 N108 N109 N200 N201 N202 N203 N204 N205 N206 N207 N208 N209 G00 G97 G98; G28 U W; Upper turret selection G109 L1; T001T000M6D001; 1st spindle selection M901; Point milling mode M200; M203 S800; Normal rotation of the milling spindle X102.Z-50.C0.; Fixed cycle for hole machinG87 Z-50.H30.X70.R5.Q5000 P.2 F200 M210; ing with Upper turret G80; M950; M950 for waiting M30; G109 L2; Lower turret selection T102022; 2nd spindle selection M902; M300; M203 S800; X-102.Z-30.C180.; Fixed cycle for hole machinG87 Z-30.H30.X70.R5.Q5000 P.2 F200 M210; ing with Lower turret G80; M950; M30; D737P0025 19-7 19 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS 19-5 Compound Machining Patterns 1. Overview G109L1 M901 (*1) M200 (*3) M203 (*4) (*5) C__ [1] G109L1 M902 (*2) M300 (*3) M203S___ G110C2 (*5) C__ G111 [2] For EIA: give one of the command sets [1] to [4] separately, or the combination of [1] and [3] for simultaneous execution. G109L2 M901 M200 M203S___ G110C1 (*5) C__ G111 2. [4] G109L2 M902 M300 M203 (*5) C__ [3] *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 M901 for the 1st spindle selection. M902 for the 2nd spindle selection. M200/M300 for milling mode selection for 1st/2nd spindle. M203 for milling spindleâs normal rotation. Machining data D737P0026 Machining pattern list - Separate machining (with either turret) !: Possible 1st spindle EIA 2nd spindle Turning Milling Turning Milling Upper turret ! ! ! ! Lower turret ! ! ! ! - Parallel machining (on either spindle side with both turrets) !: Possible â: Inapplicable Upper turret EIA 1st spindle Turning Milling Turning Milling ! â â â Milling â ! (Note) â â Turning â â ! â Milling â â â ! (Note) Turning 1st spindle Lower turret 2nd spindle Note: 2nd spindle Simultaneous milling is possible in the EIA programming format, indeed, but take care of a phase difference occurring for machine structural reasons. 19-8 Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS Parallel machining (on both spindle sides with each turret) !: Possible â: Inapplicable Upper turret EIA Lower turret 1st spindle 2nd spindle Turning Milling Turning Milling 1st spindle Turning â â ! ! Milling â â ! ! 2nd spindle Turning ! ! â â Milling ! ! â â 19-9 19 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS No. 1 Machining pattern Programming example Upper turret â 1st spindle; Turning, Separate G109L1 M901 M202 M3 S!!! : Machining data M5 M950 M30 G109L2 M950 M30 2 Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Turning, Separate G109L1 M950 M30 G109L2 M902 M302 M303 S!!! : Machining data M305 M950 M30 3 Upper turret â 1st spindle; Milling, Separate G109L1 M901 M200 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M202 M950 M30 G109L2 M950 M30 4 Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Milling, Separate G109L1 M902 M300 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M302 M950 M30 G109L2 M950 M30 19-10 Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS No. 5 Machining pattern Programming example Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Turning, Separate G109L1 M902 M302 M303 S!!! : Machining data M305 M950 M30 G109L2 M950 M30 6 Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Milling, Separate G109L1 M950 M30 G109L2 M902 M300 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M302 M950 M30 7 Lower turret â 1st spindle; Milling, Separate G109L1 M950 M30 G109L2 M901 M200 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M202 M950 M30 8 Lower turret â 1st spindle; Turning, Separate G109L1 M950 M30 G109L2 M901 M202 M3 S!!! : Machining data M5 M950 M30 19-11 19 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS No. Machining pattern Programming example 9 Upper turret â 1st spindle; Turning, Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Turning. G109L1 M901 M202 M3 S!!! : Machining data M5 M950 M30 G109L2 M902 M302 M303 S!!! : Machining data M305 M950 M30 10 Upper turret â 1st spindle; Turning, Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Milling. G109L1 M901 M202 M3 S!!! : Machining data M5 M950 M30 G109L2 M902 M300 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M302 M950 M30 11 Upper turret â 1st spindle; Milling, Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Turning. G109L1 M901 M200 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M202 M950 M30 G109L2 M902 M302 M303 S!!! : Machining data M305 M950 M30 19-12 Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS No. Machining pattern Programming example 12 Upper turret â 1st spindle; Milling, Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Milling. G109L1 M901 M200 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M202 M950 M30 G109L2 M902 M300 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M302 M950 M30 13 Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Turning, Lower turret â 1st spindle; Turning. G109L1 M902 M302 M303 S!!! : Machining data M305 M950 M30 G109L2 M901 M202 M3 S!!! : Machining data M5 M950 M30 14 Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Milling, Lower turret â 1st spindle; Turning. G109L1 M902 M300 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M302 M950 M30 G109L2 M901 M202 M3 S!!! : Machining data M5 M950 M30 19-13 19 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS No. Machining pattern Programming example 15 Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Turning, Lower turret â 1st spindle; Milling. G109L1 M902 M302 M303 S!!! : Machining data M305 M950 M30 G109L2 M901 M200 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M202 M950 M30 16 Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Milling, Lower turret â 1st spindle; Milling. G109L1 M902 G28UW T014000T0 M6 M300 M203 S!!! M950 G110C2M951 (Note) M952 G00C90. G111 G109L2 M901 T003000 G00X100.Z0. G01Z-50.F100 G00X120. (*) Z0. : G00X100.Z-10. G01X50.F100 G00Z10. X100. : M205 M202 M953 M30 M205 M202 M953 M30 M200 M203 S!!! M950 M951 G110C1M952 G00C0. G111 (Note) (*) (*) Machining data Note: Give commands of cross machining control (G110) successively for the 1st and 2nd spindles. 19-14 Return to Library COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS No. 17 18 Machining pattern Programming example Upper turret â 1st spindle; Turning, Lower turret â 1st spindle; Turning. G109L1 M901 M202 M3 S!!! M950 : Machining data M951 M5 M952 M30 Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Turning, Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Turning. G109L1 M902 M950 : Machining data M951 M952 M30 19 Upper turret â 1st spindle; Milling, Lower turret â 1st spindle; Milling. G109L1 M901 M950 M200 M951 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M202 M952 M30 19-15 G109L2 M901 M950 : Machining data M951 M952 M30 G109L2 M902 M302 M303 S!!! M950 : Machining data M951 M305 M952 M30 G109L2 M901 M950 M951 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M952 M30 19 Return to Library 19 COMPOUND MACHINING FUNCTIONS No. 20 Machining pattern Programming example Upper turret â 2nd spindle; Milling, Lower turret â 2nd spindle; Milling. G109L1 M902 M950 M300 M951 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M302 M952 M30 19-16 E G109L2 M902 M950 M951 M203 S!!! : Machining data M205 M952 M30 Return to Library POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) 20 20 POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) 20-1 Polygonal Machining ON/OFF: G51.2/G50.2 1. Function and purpose A workpiece is machined in a polygonal shape by turning the rotary tool at a constant rate to the workpiece at a given rotating speed. The shape to be machined depends on the following conditions: - The number of the edges of a rotary tool - The ratio of the rotating speed of a workpiece to that of a rotary tool Workpiece Rotary tool axis Polygonal machining has an advantage of machining polygonal workpieces in shorter time than polar coordinate interpolation. However, it has a disadvantage of not giving an accurate polygon. As a result, polygonal machining is usually used to machine bolt heads and nuts not requiring an accurate polygon. Octagon Quadrangle Machining shape by polygonal machining (hatched section) D732S0036 20-1 Return to Library 20 POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) 2. Programming format Starting polygonal machining G51.2 P_ Q_ ; - Give a command so that addresses P and Q provide the following: (Address P): (Address Q) = (Workpiece rotational speed) : (Rotary tool speed) - Command the rotational direction of rotary tool with the sign of address Q as follows. When the sign of Q is â+â, positive direction is selected. When the sign of Q is âââ, negative direction is selected. - The command range of addresses P and Q is as follows: Command addresses P and Q with integers. They cannot be commanded with a value including decimal fraction. Address Command range P 1 to 9 Q â9 to â1, 1 to 9 - When commanding G51.2 When the signal per revolution of position coder mounted on the spindle is sent, the rotary tool starts turning, synchronizing with the spindle used for the workpiece. Move command cannot be given to the rotary tool axis except the command of reference point return. The above two facts prove that the tool and the workpiece are always placed at the same position when the rotary tool starts turning. This reveals that intermittent polygonal machining does not impair the shape of a workpiece. Canceling polygonal machining G50.2; 3. Sample program G28 U0 W0; T11T00 M06; G98; M260; M3 S250; G51.2 P1 Q-2; G0 X100.Z30.; G0 X46.6 Z3.; G1 Z-20.F50; G1 X60.F100; G0 Z3.; G0 X46.0; G1 Z-20.F30; G1 X60.F100; G0 X100.Z30.; G50.2; M261; M205; M5; M30; Selection of tool No. 11 for polygonal machining Mode of feed per minute Polygonal machining mode selection Normal rotation of spindle at 250 rpm Reversed rotation of milling spindle at 500 rpm Machining Polygonal machining mode cancellation Polygonal machining mode cancellation Milling spindle stop Spindle stop End 20-2 Return to Library POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) 4. 20 Notes 1. G50.2 and G51.2 must be commanded independently. 2. Command a proper workpiece rotating speed and ratio of such workpiece rotating speed to the rotary tool speed so that the maximum rotating speed of rotary tool cannot be exceeded. 3. Move command such as one for general control axis cannot be given to the rotary tool axis except the command of reference point return. 4. A mahine coordinate value of rotary tool axis is displayed within a range from 0 to âmovement distance per rotationâ. Relative coordinates and absolute coordinates are not renewed. 5. An absolute position detector cannot be mounted on the rotary tool axis. 6. Jogging feed and handle feed for the rotary tool axis are ineffective during polygonal machining. 7. Peforming thread cutting during polygonal maching makes the start point of thread cutting be shifted. Therefore, cancel the polygonal machining before thread cutting. 8. Rotary tool axis during polygonal machining is not counted as a synchronous control axis. 9. During polygonal machining, it is possible, indeed, but not advisable at all to apply feed hold or to change the override value for fear of deformation of the workpiece. 10. The milling spindle speed is not indicated on the POSITION display during polygonal machining. 11. The gear for rotary tool, if provided, must be taken into account in setting the ratio of milling spindle speed to spindle speed (Q : P). 12. Polygonal machining with the milling spindle can only be executed in combination with the first or main spindle (not possible, therefore, with the second or sub-spindle). 20-2 Selection/Cancellation of Hob Milling Mode: G114.3/G113 1. Outline A synchronization control of the milling spindle and the C-axis allows them to be used as the hob spindle and the workpiece spindle, respectively, and thus enables the turning machine to generate spur and helical gears on a level with a hob milling machine. The hob milling function, however, is only available to machines equipped with the control functions of the C-, B- and Y-axis. X-axis B-axis Milling spindle (Hob spindle) Workpiece Workpiece Z-axis Y-axis First spindle C-axis (Workpiece spindle) Secondary spindle C-axis (Workpiece spindle) 20-3 Return to Library 20 POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) 2. Programming format G114.3 H_D±_E_L_P_R_; Start of hobbing H ....Selection of hob spindle (1: Selection of the milling spindle as hob spindle) D ....Selection of workpiece spindle and its rotational direction ±1: C-axis of the first spindle ±2: C-axis of the secondary spindle â+â for a rotation of the workpiece spindle in the same direction as the hob spindle. âââ for a rotation of the workpiece spindle in the reverse direction to the hob spindle. E ....Number of threads of the hob L....Number of teeth on the gear P ....Helix angle Specify the desired helix angle for a helical gear. Omit the argument, or specify 0 (degree) for a spur gear. Q ....Module or Diametral pitch Specify the normal module, or diametral pitch, for a helical gear. Set a negative value (with a minus sign) to use a hob cutter with left-hand teeth. Enter the module for metric specification. Enter the diametral pitch for inch specification. R ....Angle of phase shift Specify the angle for phase matching between the hob spindle (milling spindle) and the workpiece spindle (C-axis). The specified angle refers to the initial rotation (angular positioning) of the hob spindle after completion of the zero-point return of the hob and workpiece spindles as a preparation for the synchronization control. G113; Cancellation of the hob milling mode The synchronization control of the hob spindle and the workpiece spindle is canceled. - The setting range and default value for each argument are as follows: Address Setting range Default value H 1 1 D ±1, ±2 +1 E 0 to 20 1 L 1 to 9999 1 P â90.000 to 90.000 [deg] 0 (Spur gear) Q ±100 to ±25000 [0.001 mm or 0.0001 inchâ1] Ommision of Q causes an alarm if a significant argument P is specified in the same block. R 0 to 359.999 [deg] No phase matching - The arguments H and D lead to an alarm if a value outside the setting range is specified. - The workpiece spindle does not rotate wit the argument E (Number of hob threads) set to â0â. Accordingly, the designation of argument R for phase matching is not effective. - The argument Q is ignored if the argument P is not specified in the same block. 20-4 Return to Library POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) 3. 20 Sample program A. Generating a spur gear (without phase matching) M200; Selection of the milling mode. M203S0; Start of milling spindle normal rotation at a speed of zero. M250; Unclamping of the B-axis. G00B92.8; B-axis rotation through the lead angle (92.8°) of the hob cutter. M251; Clamping of the B-axis. G00X40.Z-5.; G114.3H1D+1E1L10; Selection of the hob milling mode. Positive value of D for the same rotational direction (normal in this case) of the workpiece spindle as the hob spindle. Specification of the hob spindle rotation at 50 minâ1. S50; G00X18.; G01Z20.F10; G00X40.; Z-5.; B. G113; Cancellation of the hob milling mode. M205; Milling spindle stop. M202; Cancellation of the milling mode. Generating a helical gear (with phase matching) G98; Selection of asynchronous feed mode. M200; Selection of the milling mode. M203S0; Start of milling spindle normal rotation at a speed of zero. M250; Unclamping of the B-axis. G00B92.8; B-axis rotation through the lead angle (92.8°) of the hob cutter. G00X40.Z-5.; G114.3H1D-1E1L10P45 Q2.5R0; Selection of the hob milling mode (with phase matching for zero shift angle). Helix angle 45° (for B-axis rotation), Module 2.5 (mm). Negative value of D for the reverse rotational direction of the workpiece spindle to the hob spindle. M251; Clamping of the B-axis. S50; Specification of the hob spindle rotation at 50 minâ1. G00X18.; G01Z20.F10; G00X40.; Z-5.; G113; Cancellation of the hob milling mode. M205; Milling spindle stop. M202; Cancellation of the milling mode. 20-5 Return to Library 20 POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) C. Gear cutting on the secondary spindle M902; Selection of the the 2nd spindle side. M300; Selection of the milling mode for the 2nd spindle. M203S0; Start of milling spindle normal rotation at a speed of zero. M250; Unclamping of the B-axis. G00B92.8; B-axis rotation through the lead angle (92.8°) of the hob cutter. M251; Clamping of the B-axis. G00X40.Z-5.; G114.3H1D+2E1L10; Selection of the hob milling mode. Positive value of D for the same rotational direction (normal in this case) of the workpiece spindle as the hob spindle. Specification of the hob spindle rotation at 50 minâ1. S50; G00X18.; G01Z20.F10; G00X40.; Z-5.; 4. G113; Cancellation of the hob milling mode. M205; Milling spindle stop for the 2nd spindle. M302; Cancellation of the milling mode for the 2nd spindle. Detailed description 1. The selection of the milling mode (M200) includes a zero-point return of the workpiece spindle (C-axis). 2. Give an S-code and M-code, respectively, to specify the rotational speed and direction of the spindle selected as the hob spindle. 3. The block of G114.3 must be preceded by a command of â0â speed and a selection of the rotational direction of the hob spindle. The synchronization cannot be established if a command of G114.3 is given with the hob spindle already rotating or without its rotational direction specified. 4. The rotational speed of the workpiece spindle is determined by the number of hob threads and that of gear teeth, both specified in the block of G114.3. Sw = Sh â E/L where Sh: Sw: E: L: Rotational speed of the hob spindle Rotational speed of the workpiece spindle Rotational ratio of the hob spindle (Number of hob threads) Rotational ratio of the workpiece spindle (Number of gear teeth) 5. Once determined by the hob milling command (G114.3), the rotational relationship between the workpiece spindle and the hob spindle is maintained in all operation modes until a hob milling cancel command (G113) or spindle synchronization cancel command is given. 6. The synchronization of the workpiece spindle with the hob spindle is started by the hob milling command (G114.3) at a speed of 0 revolutions per minute. 7. In the mode of hob milling the C-axis counter on the POSITION display does not work as the indicator of actual motion. 8. Do not fail to give a milling mode cancel command (M202) after cancellation of the hob milling mode by G113. 9. Use the preparatory function for asynchronous feed (G98) to cut a helical gear. 20-6 Return to Library POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) 5. 20 Remarks 1. Gear cutting accuracy cannot be guaranteed if the milling spindle speed is changed by operating the override keys during execution of a feed block in the hob milling mode. 2. If a motion command for the C-axis (workpiece spindle) is given in the middle of the hob milling mode by a manual or MDI interruption, or even in the program, such a shifting motion will be superimposed on the synchronized C-axis movement. In this case, however, the synchronization between the C-axis and the milling spindle cannot be guaranteed. 3. The selection of the hob milling mode (G114.3) in the mode of polygonal machining (G52.1) will result in an alarm. The polygonal machining cannot be selected in the hob milling mode, either. 4. The designation of the secondary spindle by D±2 does not have any effect if it is not provided with the optional C-axis control function. 5. A faulty machining could occur if the axis movement should come to a stop in the hob milling mode by the activation of the single-block operation mode or the feed hold function. 6. A phase mismatching or an excessive error could occur if the milling spindle should be stopped in the hob milling mode by a command of M205, M00, or M01. 7. The C-axis offset settings are ignored appropriately in the hob milling mode. 8. If the specified speed of the milling spindle is in excess of its upper limit, the milling spindle speed will be set to that limit and the C-axis will rotate in accordance with the milling spindle limit sped and the rotational ratio. 9. If the calculated speed of the C-axis rotation exceeds its upper limit, the C-axis speed will be set to that limit and the milling spindle will rotate in accordance with the C-axis speed limit and the rotational ratio. 10. The hob milling function is not compatible with the geometry compensation function (G61.1). Cancel the geometry compensation mode as required to use the hob milling function. 20-7 Return to Library 20 POLYGONAL MACHINING AND HOBBING (OPTION) - NOTE - 20-8 E Return to Library TORNADO TAPPING (G130) 21 21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130) 1. Function and purpose Tornado tapping cycle is provided to machine a tapped hole by one axial cutting motion with the aid of a special tool. While usual tapping cycles require multiple tools to be used in sequence, use of this cycle function spares tool change time as well as repetitive cutting motion in order to enhance the machining efficiency. This cycle function is only available on machines equipped with the Y-axis control facility. Note: Tornado tapping function requires the following parameter settings for macro-call Gcodes: J37 = 100009401 (Fixed value for the number of the macroprogram to be called for tornado tapping) J38 = 130 (Fixed value for the number of the G-code to be used for macro call) J39 = 2 (Fixed value for the type of macro call) 2. Programming format The following format refers to hole machining on the face [or O. D. surface]. G17 [or G19]; G130 R_Z_D_T_V_F_H_I_J_K_Q_E_M1 [or M0]; X [or Z] _Y_; (Setting of hole position) G67; Hole machining axis R E Cutting surface 45° I H V J Z D R: Z: D: T: V: F: H: I: J: K: Q: E: M: Position of R-point Position of hole bottom Hole diameter Tool diameter Hole depth Feed rate Chamfering amount Pitch 1 Pitch 2 Bottom finishing (0: No, 1: Yes, Others: Yes) Machining direction (0: CW, 1: CCW) Position of 2nd R-point Hole machining axis (0: X, 1: Z or oblique) TEP300 - The chamfering angle is fixed at 45°. - Arguments D (hole diameter) and T (tool diameter) must satisfy the following condition: D ⥠T ⥠D/2. - Argument K is used to select whether finishing is to be (K1) or not to be (K0) executed on the bottom of the hole. - Set the hole position separately from the macro-call G-code (G130). - As is the case with usual fixed cycles, actual machining with axial movement can only be executed for a block containing the hole position data. - Do not fail to set the code G67 as required to cancel the modal call. - Set the code G122.1 (Radius data input for the X-axis) as required beforehand to use the tornado tapping function. 21-1 Return to Library 21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130) 3. Description of movement A. Hole machining 1. With chamfering After moving from the current position to the R-point on the hole axis and then approaching to a point on the 2nd R-point level, chamfering is performed by a spiral-helical interpolation first, and then cylindrical machining is carried out to the bottom by a circular-helical interpolation. Cutting feed Rapid traverse Initial point R-point R Approach point 2nd R-point E Cutting surface Pitch 1 Chamfer Hole depth Pitch 2 TEP301 Hole diameter 2. Without chamfering After moving from the current position to the R-point on the hole axis and then approaching through the hole radius and to a point on the 2nd R-point level, cylindrical machining is carried out from the top to the bottom by a circular-helical interpolation. R Initial point R-point Approach point 2nd R-point E Cutting feed Rapid traverse Cutting surface Hole depth Pitch 2 Hole diameter TEP302 21-2 Return to Library TORNADO TAPPING (G130) B. 21 Movement on the bottom 1. With bottom finishing After cutting down to the bottom of the hole by helical interpolation, the tool performs a circular interpolation for full circle, and then escapes radially to the axis of the hole before returning in the axial direction to the initial point or R-point at the rapid traverse. Escape point TEP303 2. Without bottom finishing After cutting down to the bottom of the hole by helical interpolation, the tool escapes radially to the axis of the hole while axially returning through quarter the pitch, and then returns in the axial direction to the initial point or R-point at the rapid traverse. Escape point 1/4 pitch TEP304 21-3 Return to Library 21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130) - NOTE - 21-4 E Return to Library HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) 22 22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) 1. Function and purpose The high-speed machining mode feature allows high-speed execution of programs used for the machining of free-curved surfaces that have been approximated using very small lines. In high-speed machining mode, microsegment machining capabilities improve by several times, compared with conventional capabilities. This allows the same machining program to be executed at several times the original feed rate, and thus the machining time to be reduced significantly. Conversely, a machining program that has been approximated using lines of several fractions of the original segment length, can also be executed at the same feed rate, so more accurate machining is possible. Combined use of the high-speed machining mode and the shape correction function allows more accurate machining to be implemented. If, moreover, a protruding section exists in the microsegment machining program, smooth interpolation can be conducted automatically by removing this illegal path. Z X Y 73129977 High-speed machining is available in the automatic operation modes: Memory, HD (Hard Disk), IC card and Ethernet. Even in the high-speed machining mode can be applied various operational functions: override functions, cutting feed rate limit function, single-block operation function, dry run function, graphic trace function and high-precision control function. The microsegment machining capability in the high-speed machining mode is as follows: Operation mode Max. speed Conditions required Memory operation 135 m/min (5315 IPM) None HD operation 67 m/min (2638 IPM) With the POSITION display selected on the screen (see Note 2) Ethernet operation 135 m/min (5315 IPM) Avoid unusual key operations (see Note 3) IC card operation 135 m/min (5315 IPM) None 22-1 Return to Library 22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) The microsegment machining capability is restricted further by the functions used in, or applied to, the program as shown below: Fairing function Preparatory functions G01 Linear interpolation only Not applied Applied 135 m/min (5315 IPM) 84 m/min (3307 IPM) G02/G03 Circular interpolation included 33 m/min (1299 IPM) G6.1 Fine-spline interpolation included 101 m/min (3976 IPM) 50 m/min (1969 IPM) Note 1: The microsegment machining capabilities shown above refer to the case where threeaxis simultaneous motion commands consist of 32 characters per block for a segment length of 1 mm. Note 2: If the POSITION display should be changed to any other display during operation, program reading from the hard disk may be aborted to damage the surface to be machined. Note 3: If unusual operations, such as holding down any cursor/page key or a mouse button, are performed, program reading from the network may be aborted to damage the surface to be machined. Note 4: Before executing a microsegment machining program for hard disk operation or Ethernet operation, terminate the commercially available software if it is being used. Note 5: Since optimum corner deceleration occurs during the shape correction mode, the machining time may be longer than in other modes. 2. Programming format G5 P2 G5 P0 Note: 3. High-speed machining mode ON High-speed machining mode OFF Both commands must be given in a single-command block. Commands available in the high-speed machining mode Only axis motion commands with the corresponding preparatory functions (G-codes) and feed functions (F-codes), and designation of sequence number are available in the high-speed machining mode. Setting data of any other type will result in an alarm (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT). 1. G-codes The available preparatory functions are G00, G01, G02 and G03. The circular interpolation can be programmed with R (radius designation) as well as with I and J (center designation). If the machining program includes circular commands, however, make bit 2 of the F96 parameter valid. F96 bit 2: Type of control for circular commands in the high-speed machining mode: 0: Control for the specified speed (with acceleration/deceleration) 1: Control for a uniform feed 2. Axis motion commands The three linear axes (X, Y, Z) can be specified. Absolute data input as well as incremental data input is applicable, indeed, but the former input mode requires the validation of bit 5 of the F84 parameter. F84 bit 5: Type of position data input in the high-speed machining mode: 0: Always incremental data input 1: According to the input mode before selection of the high-speed machining mode 22-2 Return to Library HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) 3. 22 Feed functions Feed rate can be specified with address F. 4. Sequence number Sequence number can be specified with address N. This number, however, is skipped as a meaningless code during reading. 5. Sample program G28 X0 Y0 Z0 G90 G0X-100.Y-100. G43 Z-5.H03 G01 F3000 G05 P2 X0.1 X0.1 Y0.001 X0.1 Y0.002 M X0.1 F200 G05 P0 G49 Z0 M02 High-speed machining mode ON When F84 bit 5 = 0: Incremental motion under G01 When F84 bit 5 = 1: Absolute motion under G01 High-speed machining mode OFF Note 1: Either 0 or 2 is to be set with address P (P0 or P2). Setting any other value will result in an alarm (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT). Note 2: No other addresses than P and N must be set in the same block with G05. Note 3: A decimal point must not be appended to address P. Note 4: The maximum permissible length of one block is 30 characters. 4. Additional functions in the high-speed machining mode A. Fairing function If, in a series of linear paths, a protruding section exists in the CAM-created microsegment machining program, this protruding path can be removed and the preceding and following paths connected smoothly by setting parameter F96 bit 1 to â1â. F96 bit 1: Fairing function for the microsegment machining program 0: No fairing 1: Fairing for a protruding path F103: Maximum length of a block to be removed for fairing After fairing Before fairing 22-3 Return to Library 22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) Fairing is also valid for a succession of protruding paths as shown below: In the middle of fairing Before fairing B. After fairing Cutting feed limiting speed In shape correction mode, the minimum of the cutting feed limiting speeds of the movable axes is set as the cutting feed limiting speed in the high-speed machining mode. Setting parameter F96 bit 5 to â1â, however, allows the curvature of every curved section to be judged for limiting the speed so as not to exceed the maximum available acceleration. F96 bit 5: Type of cutting feed limiting speed for the high-speed machining mode 0: Minimum of the cutting feed limiting speeds of the movable axes 1: Limiting speed based on the radius of curvature R C. If axial movement at the section of a large curvature should be conducted without deceleration, excessive acceleration will be developed to cause a path error due to inner cornering. Deceleration at corners in the high-speed machining mode In shape correction mode, automatic deceleration at corners of significantly large angle is provided in general to ensure that the acceleration developed during cornering shall fall within the predetermined tolerance. A micro-length block between relatively longer blocks intersecting each other in a large angle in CAM-created microsegment machining programs, in particular, may cause the cornering speed to mismatch the surroundings and thus affect surface quality. Setting parameter F96 bit 4 to â1â will now allow corner judgment and deceleration without suffering any effects of such a microblock. To use this function, however, the high-accuracy control option is required in addition to the optional high-speed machining function. 22-4 Return to Library HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) 22 F96 bit 4: Type of corner judgment in the high-speed machining mode 0: Always judging from the angle between adjacent blocks 1: Judging after removing any microblock (if present between large-angle blocks) F107: Reference length for microblock judgement An adequate deceleration can be performed without suffering any effects of this microblock. 5. Restrictions 1. The modal functions other than that of G-code group 01 will be saved during, and restored upon cancellation of, the high-speed machining mode, indeed; but the modal functions for tool diameter offset, mirror image, scaling, coordinate system rotation, virtual axis interpolation and three-dimensional diameter offset should have been cancelled beforehand to give a G05 P2 command. Otherwise, an alarm may be caused or the modal function unexpectedly cancelled. Example: Main program G28 G90 G00 G43 M98 G49 G28 M02 X0 Y0 Z0 G92 X0 Y0 Z100. X-100.Y-100. Z-10.H001 Movement under the conditions of G90, G00 and G43 H001 Z0 Movement under the conditions of G90 and G01 X0 Y0 Z0 Subprogram (O001) N001 F3000 G05 P2 High-speed machining mode ON G01 X0.1 When F84 bit 5 = 0: X-0.1 Y-0.001 Incremental motion under G01 X-0.1 Y-0.002 When F84 bit 5 = 1: M Absolute motion under G01 X0.1 G05 P0 High-speed machining mode OFF M99 2. In the high-speed machining mode there may occur a delay in display response since priority is always given to the processing for the automatic operation. 22-5 Return to Library 22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) 3. The high-speed machining mode should be selected and cancelled by using commands of G05 P2 and G05 P0, respectively, with the tool sufficiently cleared from the workpiece since the selection and cancellation always cause a deceleration of feed motions as shown below: Command !!!!G05P2 X-577 Y-577 Z-577 !!!! G05P0 !!!!!! Speed 4. Restrictions on programming and machine operation are listed in the following table: ': Valid, Specification High-speed mode (Designation in the mode) Maximum controllable axis quantity 14 14 Effective controllable axis quantity 14 7 Simultaneously controllable axis quantity 5 5 Axis name ' ' (') CT axis ' ' (') Subclassification Unit of input Units of control Input formats Buffers Position commands err: Error Standard Mode Classification Control axes â: Invalid, ABC ABC Unit of programming ' ' Unit-of-programming à 10 ' ' Tape code ISO/EIA Label skip ' â (â) ISO/EIA automatic identification ' ' (') Parity H ' ' (') Parity V ' ' (') Tape format ' Program number ' ' Sequence number ' ' (') Control IN/OUT ' ' (err) Optimal block skip ' ' (err) Tape input buffer ' ' (') Pre-read buffer ' ' (') Absolute/inrcemental data input ' ' (err) Inch/metric selection ' ' (err) Decimal point input ' ' (') 22-6 ISO/EIA Refer to the programming format. (err) Return to Library HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) ': Valid, Specification Classification Interpolation functions Standard Mode Subclassification Dwell Miscellaneous function Spindle functions Tool functions Tool offset functions err: Error High-speed mode (Designation in the mode) Positioning ' ' (') One-way positioning ' â (err) Linear interpolation ' ' (') Circular interpolation ' ' (') Helical cutting ' â (err) Spiral interpolation ' â (err) Virtual-axis interpolation ' â (err) Threading ' â (err) Plane selection ' ' (err) Fine-Spline interpolation ' ' (err) NURBS interpolation ' â (err) Rapid feed rate ' ' (') Cutting feed rate ' ' (') Synchronous feed ' ' (err) Automatic acceleration/deceleration ' ' (') Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting interpolation ' ' (err) Limitation in cutting direction Cutting feed rate limitation Feed functions â: Invalid, Minimum limiting speed of feed axes/ According to curvature Rapid feed override ' ' (') No. 1 cutting feed override ' ' (') No. 2 cutting feed override ' ' (') Exact-stop mode ' â (err) Cutting mode ' ' (err) Tapping mode ' â (err) Automatic corner override ' â Error detection ' ' Override cancellation ' ' Dwell in time ' â (err) Dwell in number of revolutions ' â (err) M-command ' ' (err) M independent output command ' â (err) Optional stop ' â (err) No. 2 miscellaneous functions ' ' (err) S-command ' ' (err) T-command ' ' (err) Tool operation time integration ' ' (') Spare-tool selection ' ' (â) Tool-length offset ' ' (err) Tool-position offset ' â (err) Tool-diameter offset ' â (err) 3D-tool-diameter offset ' â (err) Tool-offset memory ' ' (') Number of tool offset data sets ' ' (') Programmed tool-offset input ' â (err) Tool-offset number auto selection ' ' (err) 22-7 22 (') Return to Library 22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) ': Valid, Specification Classification Program auxiliary functions Coordinate system setting Machine error correction Protection functions Standard Mode Subclassification â: Invalid, err: Error High-speed mode (Designation in the mode) Fixed cycle for drilling ' â (err) Pattern cycle â â (â) Subprogram control ' ' (err) Variable command ' â (err) Figure rotation ' â (err) Coordinate rotation ' â (err) User macro ' ' (err) User macro interruption ' ' (err) Scaling ' â (err) Mirror image ' â (err) Geometric function ' â (err) Geometric function ' â (err) Programmed parameter setting ' err (err) Watchdog-based reference-point return ' ' (â) Memory-based reference-point return ' ' (â) Automatic reference-point return ' â (err) #2/#3/#4 reference-point return ' â (err) Reference-point check ' â (err) Machine corrdinate system offset ' â (err) Workpiece coordinate system offset ' â (err) Local coordinate system offset ' â (err) Coordinate system setting ' â (err) Corrdinate system rotation setting ' â (err) Program restart ' ' (err) Absolute data detection ' ' (') Backlash correction ' ' (') Lost-motion correction ' ' (') Memory-based pitch error correction ' ' (') Memory-based relative position correction ' ' (') Machine coordinate system correction ' ' (') Emergency stop ' ' (') Stroke end ' ' (') Software limit ' ' (') Programmed software limit ' â (err) Interlock ' ' (') External deceleration ' ' (') Data protection ' ' (') 22-8 Return to Library HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) ': Valid, Specification Classification Operation modes External control signals Status output signals Standard Mode Subclassification Axis control functions err: Error High-speed mode (Designation in the mode) Tape operation ' ' (â) Memory operation ' ' (â) MDI operation ' ' (') Jog feed ' â (') Incremental feed ' â (') Handle feed ' â (') Manual rapid feed ' â (') Handle interruption ' ' (') Auto/manual simultaneous ' ' (') HD operation ' ' (â) IC card operation ' ' (â) Ethernet operation ' ' (â) Automatic-operation start ' ' (') Automatic-operation halt ' ' (') Single-block stop ' ' (') NC reset ' â (') External reset ' â (') All-axis machine lock ' ' (') Axis-by-axis machine lock ' ' (') Dry run ' ' (') Miscellaneous-function lock ' ' (') Manual-absolute selection ' ' (â) Control-unit ready ' ' (') Servo-unit ready ' ' (') Auto-run mode ' ' (') Auto-run in progress ' ' (') Auto-run halted ' ' (') Cutting feed in progress ' ' (') Tapping in progress ' â (â) Threading in progress ' â (â) Axis selected ' ' (') Axis-movement direction ' ' (') Rapid feed in progress ' ' (') ' (') Rewind Measurement aid functions â: Invalid, 22 NC alarm ' ' (') Reset ' ' (') Movement-command completed ' ' (') Manual tool-length measurement ' â (â) Automatic tool-length measurement ' â (err) Skip ' â (err) Multi-step skip ' â (err) Manual skip ' â (err) Servo off ' ' (') Follow-up ' ' (') Control-axis removal ' ' (') 22-9 Return to Library 22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE (OPTION) ': Valid, Specification Classification Data input/output Setting/display functions Program creation Self-diagnostics Standard Mode Subclassification â: Invalid, err: Error High-speed mode (Designation in the mode) External data input I/F ' ' (') External data output I/F ' ' (') External data input/output ' ' (') Setting/Display unit ' ' (') Settings display ' ' (') Search ' ' (err) Check-and-stop ' â (â) MDI ' ' (') Program restart ' ' (err) Machining-time calculation ' ' (') PC opening ' ' (') Program-status display ' ' (') Integrated-time display ' ' (') Graphics display ' ' (') Multi-step skip ' â (err) Graphics check ' ' (') Program-error display ' ' (') Operation-error display ' ' (') Servo-error display ' ' (') Operation-stop-cause display ' ' (') Servo monitor display ' ' (') NC-PC I/O signal display ' ' (') DIO display ' ' (') Keyboard-operation record ' ' (') 22-10 E Return to Library AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 23 23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 1. Function and purpose When the tool for which command data has been assigned moves to a programmed measurement position, the NC system will measure and calculate any differential data between the coordinates at that time and those of the programmed measurement position. Data thus obtained will become offset data for that tool. Also, if offsetting has already been performed for the tool, the current offset data will be further offset, provided that after movement of that tool under an offset status to the required measurement position, the measurements and calculations of any differential coordinates show some data to be further offset. At this time, further offsetting will occur for the tool offset data if only one type of offset data exists, or for the tool wear offset data if two types of offset data exist (tool length offsets and tool wear offsets). 2. Programming format G37 Z_ (X_, Y_) R_ D_ F_ X, Y, Z: Address of the measurement axis and the coordinate of the measurement position R: Distance from the starting point of movement at a measurement feed rate, to the measurement position D: The area where the tool is to stop moving F: Measurement feed rate If R, D, or F is omitted, respective parameter values will become valid. 3. Description of parameters Parameter Description F42 R-code command. Deceleration area F43 D-code command. Measurement area F44 F-code command. Measurement feed rate f F72 Conditions for skipping based on EIA G37 See the Parameter List for further details. 23-1 Return to Library 23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 4. Example of execution If H01 = 0 T01T00M06 G90G00G43Z0H01 G37Z-600.R200.D150.F300 0 â100 Coordinate to reach the measurement position = â500.01 â500.01 â (â600) = 99.99 0 + 99.99 = 99.99 Thus, H01 = 99.99 â400 F R â500 D â600 Measuring instrument D âZ MEP229 If H01 = 100 T01T00M06 G90G00G43Z-200.H01 G37Z-600.F300 â200 Coordinate to reach the measurement position = â600.01 â600.01 â (â600) = â0.01 100 + (â0.01) = 99.99 Thus, H01 = 99.99 â300 â400 When the program shown above is executed, â500 parameter F42 and F43 are set as follows: F42 (R-code command) : 25000 (25 mm) F43 (D-code command) : 2000 (2 mm) F42 â600 âZ F43 F43 F Measuring instrument MEP230 23-2 Return to Library AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 5. 23 Detailed description 1. Machine action based on command G37 Machine zero point G28X0Y0Z0 G90G0G43Zz1Hh0 .................. [1] [1] G37Zz0Rr0Dd0Ff0 ................... [2], [3] [5] G0G90Zz1 ........................ [4] (zi) [2] G28X0Y0Z0...................... [5] [4] h0 : Offset number z0 : Coordinate of the measurement point [3] (f0) (measurement position) r0 : Starting point of movement at measurement feed rate d0 : The area where the tool is to stop moving f0 : Measurement feed rate R (r0) Measurement point (Z0) Rapid feed Measurement feed rate MEP231 2. Sensor signals (Measurement Position Reached) also act as skip signals. 3. If the F-code value is 0, the feed rate becomes 1 mm/min. 4. Update offset data becomes valid from the Z-axis (measurement axis) command codes that succeed the block of G37. 5. The delay and dispersion in processing of sensor signals, except for the PLC side, is from 0 to 0.2 msec for the NC side alone. Accordingly, the following measurement error may occur: Maximum measurement error [mm] 1 = Measurement feed rate [mm/min] à 60 6. à 0.2 [ms] 1000 When a sensor signal is detected, although the coordinates of the machine position at that time will be read, the machine will stop only after overruning through the distance equivalent to a servo droop. Maximum amount of overrun [mm] = Measurement feed rate [mm/min] à 30.3 [msec] if the position loop gain is 33. 23-3 1 60 à 30.3 [ms] 1000 Return to Library 23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 7. If command G37 is executed in the single-block operation mode, the machine will come to a single block stop after execution of the block that immediately succeeds the G37-containing block. Example: [1] [2] [3] G0G90G43Z-200.H01 G37Z-600.R25.D2.F10 G0G90Z-200. Machine in its single-block stop status at block [1] Start button on Block [2] executed Block [3] executed Machine replaced in its single-block stop status 6. Precautions 1. Alarm 889 G37 OPTION NOT FOUND will result if G37 is set for a machine that does not have a mounted option for automatic tool length measurement. 2. Alarm 923 ILLEGAL COMMAND G37 AXIS will result if the block of G37 does not contain axis data or contains data of two or more axes. 3. Alarm 924 G37, H COMMANDS SAME BLOCK will result if an H code exists in the block of G37. 4. Alarm 925 H CODE REQUIRED will result if G43 H_ does not exist before the block of G37. 5. Alarm 926 ILLEGAL G37 SIGNAL will result if input sensor signals occur outside a predetermined allowable measurement range or if a sensor signal is not detected on arrival of the tool at the ending point of movement. 6. If a manual interruption operation has been carried out during movement of the tool at a measurement feed rate, the program must be restarted only after returning that tool to the position existing when the interruption operation was carried out. 7. Set G37 data or parameter data so that the following condition is satisfied: Measurement point â Staring point > R-code value or parameter r > D-code value or parameter d 8. If the R-code value, the D-code value and parameter d, mentioned in Item G above, are all 0s, the program will come to a normal end only when the designated measurement point and the sensor signal detection point agree. Alarm 926 ILLEGAL G37 SIGNAL will result in all other cases. 9. If the R-code value, the D-code value, parameter r, and parameter d, mentioned in Item G above, are all 0s, alarm 926 ILLEGAL G37 SIGNAL will result after the tool has been positioned at the designated measurement point, irrespective of whether a sensor signal is detected. 10. Set G37 (automatic tool length measurement code) together with G43 H_ (offset number assignment code). G43 H_ G37 Z_R_D_F_ 23-4 Return to Library AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 23 11. If the offset data is tool offsets of type A, then automatic correction of tool data occurs, or if the offset data is tool offsets of type B, then automatic correction of tool wear offsetting data occurs. Example: The TOOL OFFSET displays in both cases after offsetting of H1 = 100 TOOL OFFSET (Type A) TOOL OFFSET (Type B) TOOL LENGTH Before measurement No. OFFSET No. OFFSET No. GEOMETRY WEAR 1 100 17 0 1 100 0 2 0 18 0 2 0 0 3 0 19 0 3 0 0 No. OFFSET No. OFFSET No. GEOMETRY WEAR 1 110 17 0 1 100 10 2 0 18 0 2 0 0 3 0 19 0 3 0 0 TOOL LENGTH After measurement 12. The distance from the machine zero point to the measurement point (skip sensor) is preset in register R2392 or R2393. Use this value as reference to set a coordinate using Z-, X-, or Y-code command. 13. When this function is used for tool offsets of type B, the correct data will not be displayed if the wear offset value exceeds 100. 14. When executing this function in the presence of offset data, set the value of a D code to 2mm or less to prevent damaging the measuring instrument. 15. When executing this function in the absence of offset data (offset data = 0), set the values of an R code and a D code to those larger than the tool length of the tool to be measured. Also, in that case, before executing this function, make sure that the skip sensor in the measuring instrument correctly operates. 23-5 Return to Library 23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) - NOTE - 23-6 E Return to Library DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 24 24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 1. Function and purpose When a workpiece fixed on the turntable is to be machined with the rotation of the table, mismatching between the workpiece reference position (program origin) and the origin of workpiece coordinates (center of rotation of the table) leads to an error in machining contour. Provided that the vector of a particular deviation from the center of rotation to the workpiece reference position is given as a âreferenceâ, the âDynamic Offsetting ÎÎâ function will calculate for each command of rotation the deviation vector for the designated angular motion in order to control the linear axes for an adequate movement to the ending point as programmed with respect to the ideal workpiece origin, and thus to prevent the above-mentioned faulty machining from occurring. 2. Programming format G54.2 Pn; n: Dynamic offset number (1 to 8) Give a âG54.2 P0â command (n = 0) to cancel the dynamic offsetting function. Cancellation is the initial state of the function (upon turning-on). 3. Definitions of terms A. Deviation vector The vector of a deviation from the center of rotation of the table (Wo: presupposed position of the workpiece origin) to the actual origin of coordinates of the workpiece mounted on the table. B. Dynamic offset The offsetting vector (= deviation vector; whose direction depends upon the angular position of the table) for the ending point of each block containing a command of rotation. C. Reference dynamic offset A particular deviation vector entered as the reference for the calculation of dynamic offsets. Consists of the vector proper (measured and entered in three-axis component vectors) and the positions (in machine coordinates) of the rotational and tilting axis for the measurement. 24-1 Return to Library 24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 4. Operation description A. Operation by a command of rotation in the G54.2 mode In the G54.2 mode (modal group 23), which is selected by a âG54.2Pnâ command, deviation vector (to be used in a vector addition for offsetting) is re-calculated for each command of table rotation beforehand in order to create an adequate tool path for the blockâs ending point as programmed with respect to the ideal workpiece origin. Mounted here. Work offset (e.g. G54) Machine zero point D735S1101 [Legend] W1: W1â: W2â: W2: Wo: Gs: G: a (a1, a1â): b (b1, b2â): The ideal workpiece mounting position (the workpiece origin set on to the center of rotation of the table) The actual workpiece mounting position (vector Gs denotes the deviation from the ideal position) The position of the actual workpiece W1â after a table rotation by θ The position of the ideally mounted workpiece W1 after a table rotation by θ The origin of workpiece coordinates (given by a corresponding preparatory function, such as G54) The reference deviation vector (to be registered in the NC unit as a reference dynamic offset.) The deviation vector for the rotation of the rotational axis by θ The starting point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command The ending point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command With the measurement results of the reference dynamic offset (Gs) registered for workpiece W fixed on the turntable, the selection (activation) of the G54.2 mode causes the tool to be shifted by the deviation vector Gs from the current position, point a1 for example, to point a1â (if bit 0 of the F87 parameter described later is set to â0â). A succeeding command of âG1b1â (b1 = designation of a point with X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates) feeds the tool from a1â to b1â in the G1 mode (linearly). If, however, simultaneous motion of the rotational axis is designated in the same block, âG1b1Cθâ for example, the tool is also fed linearly from the current position a1â to the offset position b2â which is obtained by adding the deviation vector G internally calculated for the θ rotation to point b2, the ending point on the ideally mounted workpiece. 24-2 Return to Library DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) B. 24 On-reset operation When the system is reset, the dynamic offsetting mode is normally canceled. It depends, however, on the setting of parameter F95 bit 7 whether or not dynamic offsetting is canceled on system reset operations. F95 bit 7 = 0: The dynamic offset is cleared and the G54.2 mode is also canceled. = 1: The existing dynamic offset is held along with the G54.2 mode. When the automatic operation is started again after resetting, the dynamic offsetting mode is active from the beginning of the program. Note: C. When the dynamic offset is cleared by resetting, the tool will not move on the path corresponding to the cleared vector (even if bit 0 of the F87 parameter described later is set to â0â). Operation by the selection and cancellation of the G54.2 mode When a G54.2Pn command is given, the deviation vector for the current position of the rotational axis is calculated and an offsetting movement is carried out on the linear axes by their respective components of the computed vector (dynamic offset). If an axis motion command is given in the same block, the deviation vector for the ending point of that block is calculated and the corresponding motion is performed from the current point to the dynamically offset ending point. The cancellation command (G54.2P0) moves the tool by a vector reverse to the current dynamic offset. If an axis motion command is given in the same block, the corresponding motion is performed from the current point to the ending point as designated with workpiece coordinates (a movement including the cancellation of the dynamic offsetting). The axis motion occurs according to the current modal function concerned (of G-code group 1). D. Manual interruption in the G54.2 mode The deviation vector does not change if automatic operation is stopped in the G54.2 mode (by single-block stop, etc.) and then a movement on the rotational axis carried out in manual mode. The re-calculation of the deviation vector for dynamic offsetting will not occur until a rotational axis motion command or another G54.2 command is given after setting the MDI or automatic operation mode. 5. Input and output of the reference dynamic offset A. Setting the reference dynamic offset by G10 G10 L21 Pn Xx Yy ・・・・・・αα ; Use this format of programmed parameter input. Argument P (n) denotes a dynamic offset number (1 to 8). According to the data input mode, absolute (G90) or incremental (G91), the designated axis value overwrites, or is added to, the current one. B. Reading/writing the reference dynamic offset with system variables System variable number = 5500 + 20 à n + m n: Dynamic offset number (1 to 8) m: Axis number (1 to 6) Use system variable #5510 to read the selected dynamic offset number (1 to 8). 24-3 Return to Library 24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) C. Reading the machine coordinates of the center of table rotation with system variables #5141: X-coordinate of the center of table rotation (Machine parameter S5 X) #5142: Y-coordinate of the center of table rotation (Machine parameter S5 Y) #5143: Z-coordinate of the center of table rotation (Machine parameter S5 Z) 6. Other detailed precautions 1. When the related parameters and reference dynamic offset are modified in the G54.2 mode, the modifications will become valid for the next G54.2Pn command onward. 2. The following describes how some specific commands are executed in the G54.2 mode. (a) Machine coordinate system selection (G53) A G53 command temporarily suppresses the dynamic offset and the axis motion is performed to the ending point as designated in machine coordinates. The deviation vector is not re-calculated even when a value for the rotational axis is specified. The dynamic offsetting function will not be recovered until a motion command is given with workpiece coordinates. (b) Workpiece coordinate system change (G54 to G59, G54.1, G92, G52) Even when the workpiece coordinate system is changed in the G54.2 mode, the reference dynamic offset is not re-calculated and dynamic offsets are calculated according to the existing reference dynamic offset. The axis motion is carried out to the position obtained by adding the deviation vector to the ending point specified in the new workpiece coordinate system. (c) Commands related to zero point return (G27, G28, G29, G30, G30.n) The dynamic offsetting function is temporarily canceled for the path from the intermediate point to the reference point and recovered for the movement from there to a position specified in the workpiece coordinate system. (Similar to the processing of the commands related to zero point return in the tool length offset mode) 3. When the work offset data (workpiece origin) being used is modified by a G10 command in the G54.2 mode, the new work offset data will be valid for the next block onward. 4. As for the tool motion caused by a change only in the deviation vector, it is executed in the current mode of G-code group 1 and at the current rate of feed. If, however, the mode concerned is other than that of G0 or G1, e.g. a mode of circular interpolation (G2, G3, etc.), the tool is temporarily moved in the mode of linear interpolation (G1). 5. The type of the control axis for the turntable must be specified as ârotationalâ. The dynamic offsetting function ÎÎ cannot be used for the C-axis specified as âlinear typeâ. 6. The polar coordinate interpolation with the rotational axis cannot be executed properly in the G54.2 mode. 7. The following function commands cannot be executed in the G54.2 mode: - Restarting the program Mirror image (by G51.1 or control signal) Scaling (G51) Figure rotation (M98) Coordinates rotation (G68) G61.1, G61.2, G5P0, G5P2 8. The workpiece coordinates read with system variables include dynamic offsets. 9. The component vectors of the current dynamic offset can be read using system variables #5121 (X-axis), #5122 (Y-axis) and #5123 (Z-axis). 24-4 Return to Library DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 7. 24 Related alarms 936 OPTION NOT FOUND The dynamic offset ÎÎ option is not installed. 959 WORKPIECE COORDINATE ERROR The origin of workpiece coordinates does not match the center of rotation of the turntable. 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT Argument P is missing in the block of G54.2. An incompatible G-code is used in the G54.2 mode or G54.2 is given in the mode of an incompatible G-code. 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT The value of P in the block of G54.2 is not proper. 8. Related parameters A. Rotational axis configuration Specify the type of rotational axis configuration of the machine to be operated. L81 = 0: = 1: = 2: = 3: = 4: Makes the dynamic offsetting function invalid. Two rotational axes (C-axis on A-axis) One rotational axis (A-axis) One rotational axis (C-axis) One rotational axis (B-axis) Specify â1â for the VARIAXIS series, and â4â for the FH/PFH series with an NC rotary table. B. Dynamic offset type Specify whether or not the tool is to be offset by each change only in the deviation vector. F87 bit 0 = 0: Offset (the indication of both workpiece and machine coordinates changes.) = 1: Not offset (no change in the position indication at all) Normally set this parameter to â0â. C. Center of table rotation Specify the center of rotation of the table in machine coordinates. These parameters are also used in the VARIAXIS control for MAZATROL programs. The preset values refer to the factory adjustment at Mazak. S5 X, Y S12 Y, Z S11 Z Note: D. Center of rotation of the turntable (Machine coordinates) Axis of rotation of the tilting table (Machine coordinates) Distance (length) from the tilting axis to the turntable surface (The turntable center must be in the direction of âZ from the tilting axis.) When L81 = 2, 3, or 4, the S11 and S12 settings are not required. Workpiece origin mismatch check The origin of the selected workpiece coordinate system must correspond to the center of table rotation in order that the dynamic offsetting may effectively function. The following parameter is provided to check the condition in question for each G54.2 command. F87 bit 1 = 0: The mismatch check is conducted. = 1: The mismatch check is not conducted. Normally set this parameter to â0â. 24-5 Return to Library 24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) 9. Mechanical requirements The dynamic offsetting function requires the following conditions to be satisfied: 1. The machine is equipped with a table of either two-axis rotational control (construction of a turntable on the tilting axis) or of a single rotational axis control (turntable or tilting table). The tilting and rotational axis must refer to rotating around the X- and Z-axis, respectively. Moreover, the construction must not be of the tilting axis mounted on the turntable. 2. The workpiece coordinate origin corresponds to the center of table rotation, and the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of workpiece coordinates are in parallel with, and the same direction as, the corresponding axes of machine coordinates. 3. The requirements for machining with table rotation: The machining contour is described using a workpiece coordinate system fixed in parallel with the machine coordinate system (not rotated with the table rotation) and microsegment command blocks of G1. 10. Operation description using a sample program The following describes the operation using a sample program (created for explanation only). A. Settings on the related displays WORK OFFSET (G54) X = â315.0, Y = â315.0, Z = 0.0, A = 0.0, C = 0.0 DYNAMIC OFFSET (P1) X = â1.0, Parameters B. Z = 0.0, A = 0.0, C = 90.0 L81 = 1 (Rotational axis configuration: Two rotational axes; C-axis on A-axis) F87 bit 0 = 0 (Dynamic offset type: Offset) S5 X = â315000 S5 Y = â315000 Sample program (for explanation of operation) N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 C. Y=0.0, G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 C0 G54 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 C0 G54.2P1 G01 C180.0 F1000 G01 X10.0 G03 X0 Y10.0 R10.0 G01 C240.0 Position indication and dynamic offset for each line of the program N-No. POSITION (workpiece coordinates) X N1 N2 Z A Z A Dynamic offset C X Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 315.000 315.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 â315.000 â315.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Y MACHINE (machine coordinates) C X Y Z N3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 N4 0.000 â1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 â316.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 â1.000 0.000 N5 0.000 1.000 0.000 0.000 180.000 0.000 â314.000 0.000 0.000 180.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 N6 10.000 1.000 0.000 0.000 180.000 â305.000 â314.000 0.000 0.000 180.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 N7 0.000 11.000 0.000 0.000 180.000 â315.000 â304.000 0.000 0.000 180.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 N8 0.866 10.500 0.000 0.000 240.000 â314.134 â325.500 0.000 0.000 240.000 0.866 0.500 0.000 24-6 Return to Library DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) D. 24 Illustration of the sample program Measurement of the reference dynamic offset Let the position where the ! mark on the table is aligned with the fixed position marked with ' be the zero point of the C-axis. The reference dynamic offset (arrow) = (â1, 0, 0) was measured with the table positioned at C = 90.0, as shown on the left. Workpiece Turntable (C-axis) N-No. N3 1 N4 2 N5 3 Illustration N-No. N6, N7 4 N8 N5 5 Illustration 1. N3 turns the table on the C-axis to ! (C = 0) and positions the tool tip to the à point (X, Y, Z = 0, 0, 0). 2. N4 causes the tool tip to be shifted by the dynamic offset (arrow) for an angular position of C = 0 to the à point (X, Y, Z = 0, â1, 0). 3. N5 turns the table on the C-axis to ! (C = 180) and causes the tool tip to be shifted by linear interpolation to the à point (X, Y, Z = 0, 1, 0) determined by the dynamic offset (arrow) for an angular position of C = 180. 4. N6 and N7 interpolate the linear and circular paths to the à point. 5. N8 turns the table on the C-axis to ! and causes the tool tip to be shifted by linear interpolation to the à point. 24-7 Return to Library 24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING ÎÎ: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION FOR SERIES M) - NOTE - 24-8 E Return to Library EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 25 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY This chapter describes general procedures for and notes on constructing an EIA/ISO program newly, and then editing functions. 25-1 Procedures for Constructing an EIA/ISO Program (1) Press the display selector key. (2) Press the [PROGRAM] menu key. ! The PROGRAM display will be selected. (3) Press the [WORK No.] menu key. ! WORK No. is displayed in reverse to show the window of work number list. Remark: Refer to the Operating Manual for the window of work number list. (4) Enter the new work number of a program to be constructed. - Specifying a work number of a program registered already in NC unit allows the program to be displayed on the screen. Therefore, constructing a new program requires specifying a work number which has not been used. The conditions how work numbers are used are displayed on the window of work number list. (5) Press the [EIA/ISO PROGRAM] menu key. - Press the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu key instead of [EIA/ISO PROGRAM] if a work number of the program already registered has been set in Step (4). Cursor (6) Enter the required programming data. Set data using alphabetic keys, numeric keys and INPUT key INPUT . - When INPUT key is pressed, the cursor is moved to the top of the next line, and then the data of the next block can be entered. INPUT (7) Press the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key to end the editing. 25-1 Return to Library 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 25-2 Editing Function of EIA/ISO PROGRAM Display 25-2-1 General Establishing a constructing mode on the PROGRAM (EIA/ISO) display allows the following menu to be displayed as an initial one. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Terms [1] to [6] represent functions related to the program editing. Use of the functions permits the following operations: - Inserting and altering data at any position Data can be inserted and altered at any position on the display. - Erasing the data Data displayed on the display can be erased. - Searching for the data Data can be searched in the following four ways. 1) 2) 3) 4) Searching for the top line of the program Searching for the bottom line of the program Searching for any required line of the program Searching for any character string - Copying the data Other EIA/ISO programs registered in the NC unit can be copied into the selected program, or any data character string in the selected program can be copied into a given position of the selecting program or a new EIA/ISO program. - Moving the data Any data character string can be moved to a given position of the selecting program or a new EIA/ISO program. - Replacing the data Any data character string can be replaced by another character string. 25-2-2 Operation procedure The procedure for each operation is described below. (Given that EIA/ISO program, in which several lines of data are already provided, is selected, and editing mode is established, and also that ALTER menu item is not displayed in the reverse status in the operations 3 and onward.) 1. Inserting the data (1) Press the [ALTER] menu key as required to obtain the display status ALTER. - When ALTER is displayed, press the menu key to cancel the reverse-display status. (2) Move the cursor to the position where data must be inserted. - The cursor can be moved to any direction (vertically and horizontally). (3) Enter the required data. ! Data is inserted in sequence into the position where the cursor is placed. ! Data previously set behind the cursor position are moved behind the inserted data. 25-2 Return to Library EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 2. 25 Altering the data (1) Press [ALTER] menu key to display ALTER. - When ALTER is displayed, press the menu key to reverse the display status. (2) Move the cursor to the position where data must be altered. - The cursor can be moved to any direction (vertically and horizontally). (3) Enter the required data. 3. ! Data is altered in sequence from the position where the cursor is placed. ! The character previously set at the cursor position is replaced in sequence by the new data. Erasing the data (1) Move the cursor to the head of the character string to be erased. (2) Press the [ERASE] menu key. ! The character at the cursor position is displayed in reverse and the [ERASE] menu item is also displayed in reverse. (3) Move the cursor to the position next to the end of the character string to be erased. ! The portion from the head of the character string specified in (1) to the position before the cursor is displayed in reverse, which indicates that the reversed portion provides the object of erasure. Example: N001 G00 X10. IZ10.; G00 X100. G00 Z20.I Cursor position N002 M08 M03 in (1) Cursor (4) Press the input key. ! The character string displayed in reverse in (3) is erased. Example: N001 G00 X10. N002 M08 M03 4. Searching for the data A. Searching for the top line of the program (1) Press the [SEARCH] menu key. (2) Press the [PROG HEAD] menu key. ! B. The cursor moves to the top line. Searching for the bottom line of the program (1) Press the [SEARCH] menu key. (2) Press the [PROG END] menu key. ! The cursor moves to the bottom line. 25-3 Return to Library 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY C. Searching for any required line of the program (1) Press the [SEARCH] menu key. (2) Press the [SEARCH LINE No.] menu key. ! SEARCH LINE No. is displayed in reverse. (3) Set the line No. of the line to be searched for. - Enter the line No. with numeric keys, and press the input key. ! D. The cursor moves to the specified line. Searching for any character string (1) Press the [SEARCH] menu key. (2) Press the [SEARCH FORWARD] menu key or [SEARCH BACKWARD] menu key. ! SEARCH FORWARD or SEARCH BACKWARD is displayed in reverse. - To search for a character string in the area before the cursor position, press the [SEARCH FORWARD] menu key, and for the area after the cursor position, press [SEARCH BACKWARD] menu key. (3) Set the character string to be searched for and press the input key. ! The cursor moves to the head of the character string which has been found first. - Press the data cancellation key (CANCEL) to stop halfway the searching operation, whose running state is indicated by the message CNC BUSY on the display. Remark: Pressing the input key in sequence allows the cursor to move to the character string which has been found next. 5. Copying the data A. Copying a program (1) Move the cursor to the position where the program is to be copied. (2) Press the [COPY] menu key. (3) Press the [PROGRAM COPY] menu key. ! The window of work number list is displayed and the [PROGRAM COPY] menu item is displayed in reverse. (4) Set the work number of the program to be copied and press the input key. ! The program is inserted into the cursor position. Note: B. MAZATROL programs cannot be copied. Copying any character string into the selected program (1) Move the cursor to the head of the character string to be copied. (2) Press the [COPY] menu key. 25-4 Return to Library EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 25 (3) Press the [LINE(S) COPY] menu key. ! The character at the cursor position is displayed in reverse and the [LINE(S) COPY] menu item is also displayed in reverse. (4) Move the cursor to the position next to the end of the character string to be copied. ! The portion from the head of the character string specified in (1) to the position before the cursor is displayed in reverse, which indicates that the reversed portion provides the object of copying. Example: G00 X10. IZ10. G00 X100. G00 Z20. N001 IN002 Cursor position in (1) M08 M03 Cursor (5) Press the input key. ! The area displayed in reverse is established as the object to be copied. (6) Move the cursor to the position where the character string is to be copied. ! The cursor only moves, and the area displayed in reverse does not change. Example: N001 N002 G00 X10. Z10. G00 X100. G00 Z20. M08 IM03 Cursor (7) Press the input key. ! The character string displayed in reverse is copied at the cursor position. Example: (Continued) N001 N002 Z10. G00 X10.Z10. G00 X100. G00 Z20. M08 G00 X100. G00 Z20. M03 C. Copying any character string into a new program (6) First, carry out Steps (1) to (5) of B. Set the workpiece number of a new program where the character string is to be copied and press the input key. ! The character string is copied in the new program, and the area displayed in reverse is returned to normal display. Remark: Pressing the [PROGRAM FILE] menu key allows the window of program list to be displayed. 25-5 Return to Library 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 6. Moving the data A. Moving the selected program to any position (1) Move the cursor to the head of the character string to be moved. (2) Press the [MOVE] menu key. ! The character at the cursor position and the [MOVE] menu item is also displayed in reverse. (3) Move the cursor to the position next to the end of the character string to be moved. ! The portion from the head of the character string specified in (1) to the position before the cursor is displayed in reverse, which indicates that the reversed portion provides the object of moving. N001 G00 X10. IZ10. G00 X100. G00 Z20.I N002 M08 M03 Cursor position in (1) Cursor (4) Press the input key. ! The area displayed in reverse is established as the object to be moved. (5) Move the cursor to the position where the character string is to be moved. - The cursor only moves, and the area displayed in reverse does not change. Example: (Continued) N001 N002 G00 X10. Z10. G00 X100. G00 Z20. M08 IM03 Cursor (6) Press the input key. ! The character string displayed in reverse is moved to the cursor position. Example: (Continued) N001 N002 Z10. G00 X10. M08 G00 X100. G00 Z20. M03 B. Movement to a new program (5) First, carry out Steps (1) to (4) of A. Set the work number of a new program where the character string is to be moved and press the input key. ! The character string is moved to the new program. Remark: Pressing the [PROGRAM FILE] menu key allows the window of program list to be displayed. 25-6 Return to Library EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 7. 25 Replacing the data (1) Move the cursor to the starting position of data replacement. - Replacement is made downward from the cursor position. To make replacement throughout the program, therefore, move the cursor to the first character of the top line. (2) Press the [FIND & REPLACE] menu key. ! FIND & REPLACE is displayed in reverse. (3) Set the character string before replacement. - Enter the character string to be replaced using alphanumeric keys, and press the tab key . (4) Set the new character string after replacement using alphanumeric keys, and press the input key. ! The cursor moves to the head of the character string before replacement that has been found first after the cursor position specified in (1). (5) Press the [REPLACE] menu key. ! The character string before replacement at the cursor position is replaced by the character string after replacement, and the cursor moves to the head of the next character string before replacement. Pressing the [REPLACE] menu key in sequence allows the character string before replacement to be replaced in order of being found. When replacing the special character string at the cursor position is not required, press the [NO REPLACE] menu key in place of [REPLACE] menu key. Remark 1: To stop the replacement, press the [END] menu key. Remark 2: To replace all the character strings in the program, press the [NEXT] menu key. Remark 3: Press the data cancellation key (CANCEL) to stop halfway the total replacement by the NEXT menu function, whose running state is indicated by the message CNC BUSY on the display. 25-7 Return to Library 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 25-3 Macro-Instruction Input This function permits entering the macro-instruction word by word for editing the EIA/ISO program efficiently. (1) Press the [MACRO INPUT] menu key. ! The MACRO INPUT window will be opened. - The character string selected with the cursor is usable. (2) Move the cursor to the characters corresponding to the required macro-instruction and press the input key. ! The macro-instruction is entered in the editing zone of the program. (3) Press the menu selector key to display the menu for normal data input, and continue program editing. 25-8 Return to Library EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 25 25-4 Division of Display (Split Screen) 1. Dividing the screen (vertically) (1) Temporarily cancel the editing mode, if selected, by pressing the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key. (2) Press the [DISPLAY 2 PROGRAM] menu key. ! The display of the menu item will be highlighted and the work number listing window will appear. (3) Select the work number of the program to be displayed. ! The screen will be divided into the left and right part. One and the same section of the program is initially displayed in both parts. D740PB002E - The editing operation can only be carried out in the part the title (WNo.) of which is highlighted. - The display contents in the other part will remain unchanged even after the editing in the active part. Press the [CHANGE PROGRAM] menu key to change the display in the other part according to the editing operation. 25-9 Return to Library 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 2. Cancelling the division (1) Temporarily cancel the editing mode, if selected, by pressing the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key. (2) Press anew the [DISPLAY 2 PROGRAM] menu key. ! The highlighted display of the menu item will be released and the division of the screen cancelled. D740PB003E 3. Changing the active part The editing is only possible for the part whose title (WNo.) is currently highlighted. The method to change the active part is indicated below. The data after the editing will not be displayed in the other part (of the same WNo.) unless this changing operation is carried out. 25-10 Return to Library EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 25 In the example below, the left-hand part is currently active. D740PB002E (1) Press the [CHANGE PROGRAM] menu key. ! The highlighting of the title will be transferred from the left-hand to the right-hand part to indicate that the latter has been made active. - The contents in the right-hand part will have been modified at the same time according to the editing operation performed for the left-hand part (of the same WNo.). D740PB004E 25-11 Return to Library 25 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DISPLAY 25-5 Editing Programs Stored in External Memory Areas Follow the procedure below to edit machining programs (to be used for Hard Disk, IC Memory Card, and Ethernet operation) which are created in the EIA/ISO format and stored in external memory areas. The functions for IC Memory Card and Ethernet operation, however, are optional. (1) Select [DIR. CHANGE] from the initial menu of the PROGRAM display for EIA/ISO programs. ! The menu item is highlighted and the DIRECTORY CHANGE window appears on the screen. - The options IC CARD PROGRAMS and ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM will only be presented for machines equipped with the corresponding optional functions. (2) Use the mouse, or the cursor keys, to select the desired storage area. (3) Click the [OK] button, or press the INPUT key. ! With a memory area other than that of STANDARD PROGRAM being selected, the color of the background of the PROGRAM display changes to yellow. Follow the same creating and editing procedure, however, as for programs in the STANDARD PROGRAM area to prepare a new program, or edit an existing one, for the selected memory area. - The area selection made from this window will be maintained till turning off the NC power. - The title bar displays the current selection of the memory area. 25-12 E Mazak Mazatrol Programming Manual PdfComments are closed.
|
AuthorWrite something about yourself. No need to be fancy, just an overview. ArchivesCategories |